CadnaA ManualV3 5 PDF

Manual
Version 3.5
The specifications and data given in this documentation are subject to modification without prior
notice. Unless otherwise stated, any names and data used in the examples are completely fictitious. No
part of this documentation may be reproduced or transmitted for whatever purpose, in any form or by
any means (electronic or mechanical), without the express permission in writing from DataKustik
GmbH.
© DataKustik GmbH. All rights reserved.
Greifenberg 2005
CadnaA is a registered trademark of Datakustik GmbH, Greifenberg, Germany.
Manual CadnaA
Chapter 1 Contents
Chapter 1 Contents 1
Chapter 2 Register 2
Chapter 3 Introduction 3
Chapter 4 The First Steps 4
Chapter 5 Basics 5
Chapter 6 Import 6
Chapter 7 Digitalize 7
Chapter 8 Sources 8
Chapter 9 Obstacles 9
Chapter 10 Topography 10
Chapter 11 Immissions 11
Chapter 12 Configuration of Calculation 12
Chapter 13 Graphics 13
Chapter 14 Pictures 14
Chapter 15 Tables 15
Chapter 16 Libraries 16
Chapter 17 Output 17
Chapter 18 Project Organisation 18
Chapter 19 Air Pollution 19
Examples Tutorial
Manual
2 Chapter 1 Inhalt
Manual
Manual CadnaA
Brief Overview
Chapter 5 Basics 5
Chapter 6 Import 6
Chapter 8 Sources 8
Chapter 13 Graphic 13
Examples Tutorial
Manual
2 Chapter 1 Contents
Manual
Manual CadnaA
Chapter 2 Register
Chapter 5 Basics 5
Chapter 6 Import 6
Chapter 8 Sources 8
Examples Tutorial
Manual
2 Chapter 2 Register
Manual
Chapter 2 Register
Contents 2.1 1
Chapter 2 Register
2
2.1 Contents
2.2 Licence Agreement
2.3 Conventions Used in this Manual
2.4 Attribute Abbreviation
2.5 Operators and Functions
2.6 Literature
2.7 Strings and Operators
2.7.1 Replacing a String
Manual
2
2.1 Chapter 2 Register
Contents
Manual
Chapter 2 Register
Licence Agreement 2.2 1
2.2 Licence Agreement

IMPORTANT NOTICE TO USER: THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND 2
CONDITIONS APPLY TO THE TRANSFER OF THE CadnaA
SOFTWARE. YOU HAVE THE RIGHT TO RETURN THE SOFT-
WARE PACKAGE UNOPENED AND SEALED - IF IT WAS
SEALED - WITHIN ONE WEEK IF YOU DO NOT ACCEPT THE
TERMS AND CONDITIONS STATED IN THIS LICENCE AGREE-
MENT. IN THIS CASE, ANY PAYMENTS WILL BE REIMBURSED.
LICENCE AGREEMENT
1. SUBJECT MATTER OF THE AGREEMENT: DataKustik GmbH
grants the customer a non-exclusive licence for the CadnaA soft-
ware. The property right and the copyright in the software do not
pass to the customer. The licence is issued for use on one single
computer workstation. For any further computer workstation, a
separate licence agreement will be required. The customer is
responsible for the selection of the licensed software and its use.
2. HARDLOCK PROTECTION: The CadnaA software is hardlock-
protected. This hardlock represents the value of the program. It
cannot be replaced free of charge, if lost.
3. PROHIBITON OF COPYING: Neither the licensed software, nor
the documentation, in whole or in parts, may be copied. The only
exception to this rule is the generation of a machine-readable
copy of the software for backup or archiving purposes. Any copy
made by the customer for these purposes shall be clearly
labelled like the original software, including the same complete
notices regarding confidentiality, property right and copyright of
DataKustik GmbH.
4. ASSIGNMENT AND TRANSFER: The assignment to third par-
ties of rights and obligations arising out of this licence agree-
ment, and the transfer of the software for use is subject to prior
written consent by DataKustik GmbH, Munich, Germany.
5. USE OF TRADEMARKS: The customer is permitted to use the
Manual
2
Licence Agreement
trademarks and commercial names used by DataKustik GmbH

to identify printouts, provided that (a) these printouts were pro-
2 duced by the licensed software using an electronic printing
medium, (b) these trademarks and commercial names are iden-
tified in the same way as done by DataKustik GmbH, and (c) the
customer stops using these trademarks and commercial names
upon termination of this licence agreement.
6. PROHIBITION OF MODIFICATION: The customer may not
modify the licensed software in any way, or have it modified by
third parties.
7. UNAUTHORISED USE: The customer undertakes to ensure
that his employees and any other person subject to the cus-
tomer's instructions, having access to the licensed software,
comply with all obligations of safeguarding and the duty of care
and diligence arising out of this agreement. The customer fur-
thermore undertakes to ensure that no person gains access to
the licensed software with the aim of deriving the source code. If
the customer becomes aware of any such persons as indicated
in the first sentence of this clause, using the software in violation
of the obligations of safeguarding and the duty of care and dili-
gence mentioned, he shall immediately take any possible action
to prevent such use contrary to agreement. He shall inform
DataKustik GmbH in writing of any such use contrary to agree-
ment, should it continue nonetheless.
8. INDEMNITY: DataKustik GmbH is entitled to the protection
rights and the copyright in the licensed software. The customer
can be held liable by DataKustik GmbH for any violation of such
protection rights which he is answerable for.
9. WARRANTY: The customer recognises that errors in the pro-
grams and the pertinent documentation cannot be excluded
given the state of the art. If, within 30 days from delivery to the
customer, the customer asserts any deviation of the programs
from the program specifications/description, he has the right to
return the defective software including the hardlock key to his
Manual
Chapter 2 Register
Licence Agreement 2.2 3
supplier, and to demand delivery of a new software version. If

remedial measures cannot be taken, or fail, the customer has
the right to demand cancellation of the agreement. In this case, 2
the customer shall destroy any and all copies that he may have
generated. In states where national legislation requires a term of
notice of defect of more than 30 days, that legally provided term
shall be taken to apply, if the software is purchased and used
there.
ANY FURTHER WARRANTY CLAIMS ARE EXPRESSLY
EXCLUDED. DataKustik GmbH NEITHER WARRANTS THAT THE
PROGRAM FEATURES SATISFY THE CUSTOMER'S REQUIRE-
MENTS NOR THAT THEY ARE COMPATIBLE IN THE SELEC-
TION MADE BY THE CUSTOMER. ANY LIABILITY FOR LOST
PROFIT, FOR DAMAGE TO OR LOSS OF SAVED DATA, AND
FOR ANY OTHER INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
IS ALSO EXCLUDED, UNLESS RESULTING FROM GROSSLY
NEGLIGENT OR WILFUL ACTION BY DataKustik GmbH. ANY
WARRANTY, LIABILITY OR INDEMNITY, ETC. PROMISED BY A
THIRD PARTY (E. G. A DEALER) TO BE GRANTED BY DataKus-
tik GmbH IS NOT BINDING FOR DataKustik GmbH.
9. PROTECTION RIGHTS OF THIRD PARTIES: If the customer is
held liable by a third party because of an alleged violation of a
patent right, copyright, or any other protection right that said third
party may have in the licensed software, DataKustik GmbH shall
immediately be informed in writing of the alleged violation of pro-
tection rights, and DataKustik GmbH shall be supported suffi-
ciently in any lawsuit. If the customer is held liable by a third
party in this way, DataKustik GmbH has the right to choose, at its
own discretion, to either provide the customer with the appropri-
ate licence by the third party in question, to modify the licensed
software, to supply the customer with an equivalent different
software, or to take back the licensed software, in which case
the licence fees shall be fully reimbursed to the customer.
DataKustik GmbH is not liable for violations of protection rights
Manual
4
Licence Agreement
which are due to the fact that the customer altered or modified
the licensed software to suit his needs, or that the licensed soft-
2 ware is used or sold in combination with other software, hard-
ware or consumables not supplied by DataKustik GmbH. This
material liability is the total of any liability assumed by DataKus-
tik GmbH for violations of any patent right, trademark right, copy-
right or other intangible property rights.
10. SOFTWARE UPDATES: DataKustik GmbH reserves the right to
supply to the customer the most recent version of the licensed
software. DataKustik GmbH reserves the right to charge the cus-
tomer with additional licence fees for such updated versions,
and the customer has the right to decline acceptance of such
deliveries.
11. LEGAL INVALIDITY OF CONTRACTUAL PROVISIONS:
Should single or several provisions of this agreement be or
become invalid, this shall not affect the effectiveness of the
remaining provisions of the agreement. The invalid provision(s)
will then have to be re-interpreted or supplemented in such a
way that the originally intended commercial purpose is lawfully
achieved.
CadnaA is a registered trademark of DataKustik GmbH, Munich,
Germany.
Manual
Chapter 2 Register
Index 2.3 1
2.3 Index Ascii-Raster 17.3.1-1

Atlas GIS 6.4.4-1
Numerics Attenuation 8.6.6-1
Auralisation 8.14-4 2
Auto save 18.9-1
3D-Camera 13.15.0-5
AutoCad 17.3.3-1
3D-Reflector 9.10-1
AutoCad-DXF 6.4.2-1
A Automatic Saving of Files 18.9-1
absolute coordinates 5.5.2-1

B
absolute Height 10.4-3
Absolute Height at Every Point 10.4-3 Barrier 9.5-1
automatically optimize noise barriers
Absolute Height/Ground at every point 10.4-4
Absorption 9.7.1-1
Alfa 9.2-1 the floating 9.5.1-1
with Cantilever 9.5.2-1
Spectra 16.3.5-1
Barrier Coefficient 12.4.9-6
Acoustic Transparency 9.3.1-1
Bastian, connection with CadnaA 17.5-1
Action
activation 5.7.16-1 Batch Operation 18.7-1
Bitmap 6.4.11-1, 14.2-1, 17.3.1-1, 17.4.1-1
Activation 5.7.16-1
calibrate 14.2.1-1
Additional Width of Road G-3
fix 14.2.1-4
Adjusting column width 15.2.6-1
show bitmap 14.2.1-4
Affine Transformation 6.3.4-5
Web-Bitmaps 14.4-1
Aircraft Tab 12.4.12-1
BMP 17.3.1-1
Appearance of Grid 11.5.2-1
BNA,BNX 17.3.1-2
ArcView 6.4.3-1, 17.3.4-1
BPL option G-1
Area (m²) 8.6.5-1
Break
Area Source 8.5-1
Areas 5.7.9-1
Area source
horizontal 8.5-1 into pieces (line-like objects) 5.7.15-1
Bridge 9.6-1
vertical 8.5-1
Example of a street bridge elevated by
Areas With Specified Ground Absorption 9.8-
two embankments 9.6.2-1
1
Example of How to Enter a Bridge 9.6.1-1
Arithmetic 9.3.6-4
how to enter a 9.6.1-1
Arithmetik 11.5.5-1
Building 9.3-1
Ascii-file 10.7-2
acustic transparency 9.3.1-1
Ascii-Poly 6.4.14-1
Manual
2
Index
Deactivate Point Objects in Buildings Clipboard

9.3.0-1 copy to 5.4.5-2
Generate Building 9.3.4-1 Closing Buildings 11.6.5-1
2 Height Points 6.4.13-1 Cluster of Height Points 10.7.0-1
Level-Difference-Map 9.3.8-1 Combo box
Level-Difference-Map for 9.3.8-1 Combo box \gScale 1: 13.3-1
Noise Maps of 9.3.6-1 Compact Protocol 12.7-1
Residential and Outbuilding 9.3.2-1 Compatibility mode for Industry 12.4.6-4
Result Table for the Building Noise 9.3.7- Condition 5.7.2-2
1 Configuration 12.4-1
Snap Point to Building Facade 9.3.3-1 Conflict Maps 11.6.2-1
Building Evaluation 9.3.5-1 Connect Lines
Building Height Points 6.4.13-1 Snap Radius 1-2
Built-Up Areas 9.9-1 Context Menu
Button Bar 15.2.1-1 Deleting Objects 5.4.7-1
Force Rectangle 5.7.5-1
C Parallel Object 5.7.13-1
Context menu
Cadna.dat 16.2-2 break areas 5.7.9-1
Calc Width of Roads 8.9.8-2 break into pieces (line-like objects)
Calculate 5.7.15-1
Limits 13.2.0-4 convert to 5.7.14-1
Calculation Duplicating Objects 5.7.1-1
Batch Operation 18.7-1 modify objects 5.7.2-1
Compact Protocol 12.7-1 Spline 5.7.12-1
Grid 11.5.4-1 Contour Lines 10.5-1
Limits 13.2.0-4 Control Elements 4.11-1
Protocol 12.6-1 Check Box 4.11.0-1
Selecting Data for 12.5-1 List Box 4.11.0-1
Calculation Methods implemented 12.4.2-1 Option Button 4.11.0-1
Calculation Protocol 12.6-1 Convert to 5.7.14-1
Calculator •-3 Coordinate Grid 13.4-1
Change Color 5.7-2 Coordinate Transformation 6.3.4-1
Change Dimensions 5.4.3-1 Coordinates
Check Box 4.11.0-1 Affine Transformation 6.3.4-5
Check Consistency 11.2.3-1 General Transformation 6.3.4-6
Check ID 1-2 Copy 15.2.1-1
Manual
Chapter 2 Register
Index 2.3 3
Copy Data Records 15.2.7-1 Initial string 7.2-4

Copying Option 7.2-4
Copying Objects 5.4.5-1 Tablet Menu 7.3-3
Copying within the Graphic 5.4.5-1 Terminal 7.2-5 2
Copying Objects 5.4.5-1 Text 7.2-2
Correction Type 7.2-1
for multiple Reflections 8.9.8-1 Digitizing
Country Tab 12.4.1-1 Digitizing a Map 7.3-1
Criteria for the Calculation of Reflections Digitizing a Road 7.4-1
Min. Distance Source to Reflecting Ob- Directivity 8.7-1
ject 12.4.8-5 Directional Sound Radiation 8.7-1
Crossings with Traffic Lights 8.10-1 frequency dependent 8.7.3-1
Cylinder 9.4-1 Sound Radiation from Building Elements
and Openings According to
D ÖAL 8.7.2-1
Sound Radiation from Chimney Outlets
Database 8.7.1-1
ODBC interface 6.5-1 Display Ground Height 10.8-1
Deactivate Point Objects in Buildings 9.3.0-1 Display Ground height 10.8-1
Decimal separator 5.5.4-1 Display real Width of Roads 8.9.1-1
Delete 10.7-2 Displaying Sound Rays 12.3-1
and interpolate height of polygon points •- Distance of the outer lanes 8.9.1-1
7 Distance Source to Reflecting object 12.4.8-5
delete Diural Patter 8.9.4-1
Data record 15.2.0-2 Dongle 4.3-1
Delete Grid Points 11.5.1-4 Drefl dB(A) 8.9.8-1
Deleting Objects 5.4.7-1 Druck_Gr.TXT •-3
Designation of Land Use 11.3-1 DTM
Deviation G-2 fit objects to 10.3-1
Diagram 8.6.3-3 DTM Digital Terrain Model Tab 12.4.7-1
Dialog boxes Duplicating Objects 5.7.1-1
ID 5.5.3-1 Action Duplicate 5.7.1-2
Info 5.5.3-1 DXF 17.3.3-1
Name 5.5.3-1
Digitizer 7.2-1 E
Calibrate Digitizer 7.3-2
Info 7.2-4 EDBS 6.4.6-1
Manual
4
Index
Edit Hierachy of Groups and their Partial Sum

Result Table 15.3.1-1 Level 18.2.1-2
Search 5.6-1 Noise Map in Levels differences for Buil-
2 Source dialog 8.6-1 dings 9.3.8-1
table cells 15.2.3-1 of a Street bridge elevated by two em-
edit bankments 9.6.2-1
object’s edit dialog 5.5.1-1 of How to Enter a Bridge 9.6.1-1
Edit dialog Examples
of a source 8.6-1 Formulas and Operators 2.6-2
edit dialog Managing Files Using Folders G-4
ID 5.5.3-1 Template File for Graphics User-defined
Edit mode F-3, 5.4-1 Printout 17.2.8-1
Editing Export 17.3-1
Template Files 17.2.2-1 ArcView 17.3.4-1
Editing a Template File 17.2.2-1 ArcView Shape 17.3.4-1
Editing Objects 5.5-1 BMP 17.3.1-1
Editing Table Cells 15.2.3-1 BNA,BNX 17.3.1-2
Einzug 17.4.3-3 DXF 17.3.3-1
Embankment 9.7-1 Formats 17.3.1-1
Emission Immis Luft files dbf 17.3.1-2
attenuation 8.6.6-1 RTF 17.3.2-1
A-weighted Emission Value 8.6.1-1 Text file TXT, RTF 17.3.2-1
Emission Spectrum 8.6.3-1 TXT 17.3.2-1
Ko without ground 8.6.8-1 Export Limadateien 17.3.1-2
Lm,E in dB(A) for roads 8.9.3-1 Export.RTF •-3
normalised A 8.6.2-4 Exporting
operating time 8.6.7-1 Export.RTF •-3
Railway 8.12.1-1 Template Files 17.2.1-1
Sound Reduction 8.6.4-1
sound-radiatin area 8.6.5-1 F
Ergebnistabelle
Textvariable für GLK 9.3.7-4 Fault Lines 10.6-1
Evaluation 11.6.3-1 File 17.4.4-4
Evaluation Parameter Tab 12.4.6-1 Database 6.5-1
Example New 5.2-1
Defining a group 18.2.1-2 Save as 5.2-1
Digitizing a Road 7.4-1 FileDatum 17.4.5-5
Manual
Chapter 2 Register
Index 2.3 5
FileExpIn 17.4.6-6 10.4-3

FileExpOut 17.4.7-7 Geometry Tables 17.4.32-37
FilePrint 17.4.8-8 Gradient (%) for road 8.9.7-1
FileZeit 17.4.9-9 Graphic 2
Fit Objects to DTM 10.3-1 Marker size G-1
fix Graphics
Bitmap 14.2.1-4 Bitmap 14.2-1
Floors 11.2.6-1 Coordinate Grid 13.4-1
Foliage 9.9-1 Druck_Gr.Txt •-3
Font 17.4.10-10 print 17.2.3-1
Force Rectangle 5.7.5-1 Settings for Objects with Frames 13.11-1
Formats synchronize graphics with table 15.2.1-1
Export 17.3.1-1 Template Files 17.2.1-1
Formulas 2.6-1 update during drag 13.2.0-3
Frahme Vector graphics 14.2-1
Symbol 13.11.3-1 Grid
Frame Appearance of Grid 11.5.2-1
Station Mark 13.11.4-1 Arithmetik 11.5.5-1
Frames 13.11-1 Calculating a grid 11.5.4-1
Functions 2.6-1 Conflict Maps 11.6.2-1
creating a grid of receiver points from Iso-
G dB-lines 11.5.6-1
Evaluation 11.6.3-1
Gebäudelärmkarte vertical
Textvariable 9.3.7-4 Vertical Grid 11.5.3-1
General and Special Sources 8.2-1 Grid of Receiver Points 11.5-1
General Sources Grid specification 11.5.1-1
area source horizontal 8.5-1 Ground Absorption
area source vertical 8.5-1 Areas with Specified Ground Absorption
Line Source 8.4-1 9.8-1
General Tab 12.4.3-1 Use Map of 12.4.9-3
General Transformation 6.3.4-6 Groups
Generate Building 9.3.4-1 Hierachy of Groups 18.2.1-2
Geometry 10.4-1 Partial Sound level 18.2.1-2
according to RLS90 8.9-3 Partion Sound Level 18.2.2-1
Edit dialog 10.4-1
Enter Absolute Height at Every Point
Manual
6
Index
H Import / Export of Tables listing number of

Trains 6.4.10-1
Hardlock-Key (Dongle) 4.3-1 Import formats
2
Hardlock-Server 4.4-1
Height NTF 6.4.11-1
Display Ground Height 10.8-1 ArcView 6.4.3-1
enter height at every point 10.4-3 Ascii-Poly 6.4.14-1
Height Points 10.7-1, 10.7-2 Atlas Gis 6.4.4-1
delete 10.7-2 AtlasGIS 6.4.4-1
Generate Contour Lines from 10.7.1-1 AutoCad-DXF 6.4.2-1
Import Ascii-file 10.7-2 Bitmap 6.4.11-1
Hold Value 13.11.2-1 Building Height points 6.4.13-1
CadnaA 6.4.1-2
I EDBS 6.4.6-1
MapInfo 6.4.9-1
icon Niedersachsen 6.4.11-1
icon bar 4.7-1 Sicad 6.4.5-1
icon bar 4.7-1 Slip 6.4.11-1
Icons 4.6-2 SOSI 6.4.11-1
ID 5.5.3-1 special formats 6.4.11-1
If, Tag 17.4.11-11 Stratis 6.4.8-1
Immis Luft files dbf 17.3.1-2 third-party programs 6.4.12-1
Implemented Calculation Methods 12.4.2-1 WINPUT 6.4.7-1
Import 6.2-1, 10.7-2 Import Options
Allocate Object type to layer 6.3.1-1 Affine Transformation 6.3.4-5
Format 6.4-1 Allocate object type to layer 6.3.1-1
formats 6.4-1 General Transformation 6.3.4-6
Height Points 6.4.7-1 Importing in Section only 6.3.2-1
Importing in Section only 6.3.2-1 Importing selected Object Types 6.3.3-1
Importing selected Object Types 6.3.3-1 Industry Tab 12.4.9-1
Layer 6.2-1 Infringement 11.2.1-1
MITHRA 6.4.11-1 Inhabitants
Number of Trains 6.4.10-1 Inhabitants/km² 11.6.4-2
ODBC 6.5-1 Initial strings 7.2-4
Options 6.2-1, 6.3-1 Insert a Row 15.2.2-1
QSI 6.4.11-1 Insert Bitmaps 14.2-1
T-Mobil 6.4.11-1 Installation
Manual
Chapter 2 Register
Index 2.3 7
CadnaA 4.2-1 FlugstreckeGeo 17.4.32-37

Hint for Windows95 F-2 Font 17.4.10-10
FQ 17.4.32-35
K FQ_Geo 17.4.32-37 2
FV 17.4.32-35
Keyboard 4.9.0-1 FV_Geo 17.4.32-37
Keyword Geometry Tables 17.4.32-37
GruppeNacht 17.4.32-36
Aircraft 17.4.32-37 GruppeTag 17.4.32-36
Ampel 17.4.32-35 Haus 17.4.32-35
Gruppe 17.4.32-36 Haus_Geo 17.4.32-37
Hline_Geo 17.4.32-37 Hausbeurt 17.4.32-35
ImmSpek 17.4.32-36 If, Tag 17.4.11-11
AircraftZvh 17.4.32-37 Imm 17.4.32-36
Bebauung 17.4.32-35 ImmSpekN 17.4.32-36
Bebauung_Geo 17.4.32-37 ImmSpekT 17.4.32-36
Bewuchs 17.4.32-35 Kraftwerk 17.4.32-35
Bewuchs_Geo 17.4.32-37 Legende 17.4.12-12
Bitmap 17.4.1-1 LegendeNutz 17.4.13-13
Bodenabs 17.4.32-35 LibAlf 17.4.32-37
Bodenabs_Geo 17.4.32-37 LibL 17.4.32-37
Bplan 17.4.32-35 LibR 17.4.32-37
Bruch_Geo 17.4.32-37 Libraries (local) 17.4.32-37
Bruecke 17.4.32-35 LineAbs 17.4.15-15
Bruecke_Geo 17.4.32-37 LineRel 17.4.16-16
CalcConf 17.4.32-34 LQ 17.4.32-35
Einzug 17.4.3-3 LQ_Geo 17.4.32-37
File 17.4.4-4 Metafile 17.4.17-17
FileDatum 17.4.5-5 MoveAbs 17.4.18-19
FileExpln 17.4.6-6 MoveRel 17.4.19-20
FileExpOut 17.4.7-7 NeueSeite 17.4.20-21
FilePrint 17.4.8-8 Nutz 17.4.32-36
FileZeit 17.4.9-9 Nutz_Geo 17.4.32-37
Flugplatz 17.4.32-37 Object Tables 17.4.32-34
FlugplatzRwy 17.4.32-37 PanAttr 17.4.22-24
Flugstrecke 17.4.32-37 Plan 17.4.21-22
FlugstreckeAnz 17.4.32-37 PosPop 17.4.23-25
Manual
8
Index
PosPush 17.4.24-26 Zeit 17.4.39-46

PPL 17.4.32-35 Zugzahlen 17.4.32-35
PPL_Geo 17.4.32-38 Zylinder 17.4.32-36
2 PPLRLS 17.4.32-35 Zylinder_Geo 17.4.32-38
PQ 17.4.32-35 Ko without Ground 8.6.8-1
RasterBewertung 17.4.26-28
RectAbs 17.4.27-29 L
RectRel 17.4.28-30
Richtw 17.4.32-35 Labelling of Printing Ranges 17.2.1-3
Scale 17.4.29-31 Land Use 11.3-1, 11.4-1
Schiene 17.4.32-35 Lateral Diffraction 12.4.9-1
Schiene Zkl 17.4.32-35 Layer 6.2-1
Schiene_Geo 17.4.32-38 Left Mouse Button G-1
Schirm 17.4.32-35 Legende 17.4.12-12
Schirm_Geo 17.4.32-38 LegendeNutz 17.4.13-13
Seite 17.4.30-32 LegendeObj
Strasse 17.4.32-35 Keyword
Strasse_Geo 17.4.32-38 LegendeObj 17.4.14-14
Tab 17.4.31-33 Level Box 13.11.2-1
Table 17.4.32-34 Level-Difference-Map for Building Noise
Tables Air-traffic noise 17.4.32-37 9.3.8-1
Tables Immissions 17.4.32-36 LfU-Studie 1993 8.13-2
Tables Miscellaneous 17.4.32-36 LfU-Study 2003 8.13-3
Tables Obstacles 17.4.32-35 Li 16.3.2-2
Tabs 17.4.33-39 Libraries
Teilpegel 17.4.32-36 Absorption Spectra 16.3.5-1
TeilpegelNacht 17.4.32-36 Cadna.dat user-defined entry for global li-
TeilpegelNachtS 17.4.32-36 brary 16.2-2
TeilpegelTag 17.4.32-36 global placed on server 16.2-2
TeilpegelTagS 17.4.32-36 Libraries Manager 16.4-1
Tennis 17.4.32-35 Limadateien 17.3.1-2
Text 17.4.34-41 Limits
VarianteM 17.4.36-43 Background 13.2.0-2
Variants 17.4.35-42 calc 13.2.0-4
Version 17.4.37-44 Calculate 13.2.0-4
Wall 17.4.32-36 Line Source 8.4-1
Zabst 17.4.38-45 LineAbs 17.4.15-15
Manual
Chapter 2 Register
Index 2.3 9
Line-like Objects 10.3.2-1 Moving a Polygon Point 5.4.1-1

LineRel 17.4.16-16 Moving Objects 5.4.4-1
List Box 4.11.0-1 Multiple Selections G-1
Long Straight Road 8.11-1 2
Lw 16.3.2-4 N
M NeueSeite 17.4.20-21
New 5.2-1
MapInfo 6.4.9-1 Noise Map
Marker size G-1 PCSP 18.6-1
Match Points 6.3.4-3 Noise Maps and their Evaluation with CadnaA
max. Error (dB) 12.4.3-1 11.6.1-1
Metafile 17.4.17-17 Noise Maps of Buildings 9.3.6-1
Meterology correction C0 (dB) 12.4.9-7 Noise Source
Min. Distance Source to Reflecting Object Area Source 8.5-1
12.4.8-5 general and special sources 8.2-1
Miscellaneous Line source 8.4-1
Decimal separator 5.5.4-1 optimized area source 8.15-1
MITHRA 6.4.11-1 point source 8.3-1
Modify objects 5.7.2-1 normalised A 8.6.2-4
activated or deactivated objects 5.7.2-2 NTF 6.4.11-1
activation 5.7.16-1 Number of Trains 6.4.10-1
all 5.7.2-2
condition 5.7.2-2 O
group of objects 5.7.2-2
inside, outside, on the borderline of the Object Tables 17.4.32-34
polygon 5.7.2-2 Object’s edit dialog 5.5.1-1
Parallele Object 5.7.13-3 Objects 5.3-1
Monetary Evaluation of Noise according to edit objects (edit mode) 5.4-1
BUWAL 11.6.7-1 insert objects 5.3-1
Mouse Buttons 4.10-1 modify objects 5.7.2-1
Click with Left Mouse Button G-1 Tables 15.2-1
Click with Right Mouse Button G-1 with frames 13.11-1
Double-click with Left Mouse Button G- Objects’s Geometry 10.4-1
1 Object-Scan 11.6.6-1
MoveAbs 17.4.18-19 Obstacles
MoveRel 17.4.19-20 3D-Reflector 9.10-1
Manual
10
Index
areas with specified ground absorption Land Use 11.4-1

9.8-1 Options menu
Barrier 9.5-1 Decimal separator 5.5.4-1
2 Bridge 9.6-1 Marker size G-1
Built-Up Areas 9.9-1
Bulding 9.3-1 P
Cylinder 9.4-1
Embankment 9.7-1 Parallel Object 5.7.13-1
Foliage 9.9-1 Parallele Object
reflection properties 9.2-1 between defined station marks 5.7.3-4
Obstacles within Area Source do not Shield Parking Lot
12.4.9-4 Emission L*m,E in dB(A) 8.13.0-4
ODBC interface 6.5-1 LfU-Studie 1993 8.13-2
Operating Time 8.6.7-1 RLS90 8.13-2
Operators 2.8-1 Parking Place 8.13-1
Functions •-1 LfU-Study 2003 8.13-3
Replacing a String 2.8.1-2 Partial Levels 11.2.5-1
Operators and Functions 2.6-1 Partial Sound Level 18.2.1-2, 18.2.2-1
Optimisable Area Source Partition Tab 12.4.4-1
Noise Allotment •-2 Pass-by
Usability •-3 Video 8.14-8
Optimisable Source Tab 12.1-2, 12.4.13-1 Pass-by levels for line sources 8.14-1
Optimized Area Sources 8.15-1 Pass-by Levels for Line Sources with the Noi-
optimized area sources 8.15-1 se Level’s Time History 8.14-1
Option paste 15.2.7-1
XL(formaly SIP) 11.6-1 PCSP - Program Controlled Segmented Pro-
Option Button 4.11.0-1 cessing 18.6-1
Option XL 11.6-1 Plan 17.4.21-22
closing buildings 11.6.5-1 PlanAttr 17.4.22-24
Evaluation 11.6.3-1 Point Source 8.3-1
Monetary Evaluation of Noise according Point-like Objects 10.3.1-1
to BUWAL 11.6.7-1 Polar 5.5.2-1
Object-Scan 11.6.6-1 Polygon Point Mode 5.4.1-1
Population Density 11.6.4-1 Population Density 11.6.4-1
Options Positioning Method 1: Insertion of Points
Coordinate Grid 13.4-1 5.3.1-1
icon bar 4.7-1 Positioning Method 2: Polygons and Lines
Manual
Chapter 2 Register
Index 2.3 11
5.3.1-1 traffic-count calculator 8.12.4-1

Positioning Method 3: Text Boxes and Zoom Train Class local 8.12.2-1
+ 5.3.1-2 train classes 8.12.2-1
PosPop 17.4.23-25 train classes user-defined 8.12.3-1 2
PosPush 17.4.24-26 Raster factor 12.4.4-1
Preview 17.2.9-1 RasterBewertung 17.4.26-28
Zoom 17.2.9-1 RBLärm 92, Method 1 12.4.4-1
Print Receiver Point
Druck_Gr.Txt (Graphics) •-3 Calculation and Presentation of Results
Preview 17.2.9-1 11.2.2-1
Print Graphics 17.2.3-1 Check Consistency 11.2.3-1
Reports 17.2.2-1 Floors 11.2.6-1
Template Files 17.2.1-1 Grid 11.5-1
Printing Grid specification 11.5.1-1
Druck.TXT •-3 Receiver Points 11.2-1
Editing a Template File 17.2.2-1 RectAbs 17.4.27-29
Example Graphics Printout 17.2.8-1 RectRel 17.4.28-30
Reports 17.2.2-1 Reference Point 10.4.0-4
Template Files 17.2.1-1 Reference Time Tab 12.4.5-1
Printing Reports 17.2.2-1 Reflection 12.2.4-1
Projection Method for extended Sound Absorption coefficient alpha 9.2-1
Sources 12.2.3-1 Reflection of the 1st Order 12.2.5-1
Protocol 12.6-1 Reflection Properties of Obstacles 9.2-1
Purge List of Numbers-of-Trains 8.12.5-1 Reflection Tab 12.4.8-1
Purge Tables 18.11-1 Reflections of Higher Order 12.2.6-1
relative coordinates 5.5.2-1
Q Replacing a String 2.8.1-2
Residential and Outbuilding 9.3.2-1
QSI 6.4.11-1 Result Table 15.3.1-1
Result Table for the Building Noise 9.3.7-1
R Rich Text Format (RTF) 17.3.2-1
Road 8.9-1
Railroad Tab 12.4.11-1 Additional Width G-3
Railway 8.12-1 Calc Width of Roads 8.9.8-2
Emission Level Lm,E 8.12.1-1 Correction for Multiple Reflections 8.9.8-
purge list of numbers-of-trains 8.12.5-1 1
Speed (km/h) 8.12.2-2 correction for multiple reflections 8.9.8-1
Manual
12
Index
Display real Width of Roads 8.9.1-1 Save Settings 4.12-1

Distance of the outer lanes 8.9.1-1 Saving 18.9-1
Diural Patter 8.9.4-1 Scale 17.4.29-31
2 Drefl dB(A) 8.9.8-1 Combo box 13.3-1
Emission 8.9.3-1 Zoom - 13.3-2
Emission Lm,E in dB(A) 8.9.3-1 Zoom + 13.3-2
Geometry 8.9-3 Scale Dimension 13.11.1-3
Gradient 8.9.7-1 Screen (Road) G-3
Gradient (%) 8.9.7-1 Search 5.6-1
lateral slope 8.9.2-1 Search Radius (m) 12.4.3-1
long straight 8.11-1 Search Radius for Reflecting Objects 12.4.8-2
multi lane road 8.9.1-4 Seite 17.4.30-32
Screen G-3 Selecting a Template File 17.2.2-1
Self-Screening G-3 Selecting Data for the Calculation 12.5-1
Specification of Road Widths 8.9.1-1 Selecting one row G-1
Speed 8.9.5-1 Selecting several consecutive rows G-1
Speed Limit (km/h) 8.9.5-1 self-screening of buildings 12.4.11-2
Standard Cross Section (SCS)/Distance Self-Screening of Road G-3
(m) 8.9.1-3 SET
Station Mark 13.11.4-1 Option SET 8.16-1
Surface 8.9.6-1 Shape 17.3.4-1
Total width of road from curb to curb Sicad 6.4.5-1
8.9.1-1 sigma G-2
Traffic Density 8.9.4-1 SIP 11.6-1
Traffic Lights 8.10-1 SIP see XL
Widening of a Road from 1 to 2 Lanes Slip 6.4.11-1
8.9.1-4 Snap Point to Building Facade 9.3.3-1
Road Surface 8.9.6-1 Sorting columns 15.2.4-1
Road Tab 12.4.10-1 Sosi 6.4.11-1
Roof 10.4-3 Sound Pressure Level 11.2.4-1
Rotation and Displacement •-1 Sound Rays 12.3-1
Rounding up by the last digit 15.3.2-2 Sound Rays and Reflection 12.2-1
RTF 17.3.2-1 Sound Rays from extended Sources 12.2.2-1
Sound Rays from Point Sources 12.2.1-1
S Sound Reduction
Sound Radiation from Building Facades
Save as 5.2-1 8.6.4-1
Manual
Chapter 2 Register
Index 2.3 13
Sound-radiatin Area (m²) 8.6.5-1 15.2.7-1

Special Formats 6.4.11-1 delete Data Record 15.2.0-2
Spectra editing table cells 15.2.3-1
Absorption-Spectra 16.3.5-1 Geometry 17.4.32-37 2
ID 16.3.1-2 Inserting a Row 15.2.2-1
Li 16.3.2-2 purge tables 18.11-1
Lw 16.3.2-4 Result Table 15.3.1-1
Spectra Diagram 8.6.3-3 Result Table for the Building Noise 9.3.7-
Speed Limit (km/h) 8.9.5-1 1
Spline 5.7.12-1 sort column 15.2.4-1
Split Tab Tables 15.2-1
RBLärm 92, Method 1 12.4.4-1 Air-traffic noise 17.4.32-37
Splitting Acc. to RB-Lärm 92, Method 1 Immissions 17.4.32-36
12.4.4-1 Libraries (local) 17.4.32-37
Standard Cross Section (SCS)/Distance (m) Miscellaneous 17.4.32-36
8.9.1-3 Object Tables 17.4.32-34
Standard Deviation G-2 Obstacles 17.4.32-35
Standard Level 11.2.1-1 Tabs 17.4.33-39
Station Mark 13.11.4-1 Template Files 17.2.1-1
Status Bar 4.6-2 Druck.Txt •-3
Status bar Editing 17.2.2-1
Information 13.2.0-3 Export.RTF •-3
Stratis 6.4.8-1 Labelling of Printing Ranges 17.2.1-3
Strings 2.8-1 Tennis 8.8-1
Symbol 13.11.3-1 Terrain, uneven 10.2-1
Synchronize Graphics with table 15.2.1-1 Text 17.4.34-41
System Requirements Text block
minimum requirements 3.5-1 how to enter a 16.6.0-2
Text Box 13.11.1-1
T The Foliage and Built-Up Areas 9.9-1
Third-Party Programs 6.4.12-1
Tab 17.4.31-33 Tile Project 18.6-1
Table 17.4.32-34 T-Mobil 6.4.11-1
adjusting the column width 15.2.6-1 Toolbox
Button Bar 15.2.1-1 Areas With Specified Ground Absorption
Copy 15.2.1-1 9.8-1
Copying and Pasting Data Records Topography
Manual
14
Index
Building Height Points 6.4.13-1 Wildcards 2.8-1

Contour Lines 10.5-1 WINPUT-DGM 6.4.7-1
display ground height 10.8-1
2 Fault Lines 10.6-1 X
Height Points 10.7-1
Total width of road from curb to curb 8.9.1-1 XL 11.6-1
Traffic Density 8.9.4-1
Traffic Lights 8.10-1 Z
Traffic-Count Calculator 8.12.4-1
Train Class local 8.12.2-1 Zabst 17.4.38-45
Train classes 8.12.2-1 Zeit 17.4.39-46
Train Classes User-defined 8.12.3-1 Zoom - 13.3-2
Transformation 6.3.4-1 Zoom + 13.3-2
Match Point 6.3.4-10
TXT 17.3.2-1
U
Uncertainty 12.4.3-2
uneven Terrain 10.2-1
Update automatically/ Hold Value 13.11.2-1
Update during Drag 13.2.0-3
Updates F-3
Use Map of Ground Absorption 12.4.9-3
Utilization 11.2.1-1
V
VarianteM 17.4.36-43
Variants 17.4.35-42
Vector graphics 14.2-1
Version 17.4.37-44
Video 8.14-8
W
Web-Bitmaps 14.4-1
Manual
Chapter 2 Register
Conventions Used in this Manual 2.4 1
2.4 Conventions Used in this Manual

The following list comprises all conventions used in this manual.
2
setup Words or characters that you are supposed to type
appear in font type Curier.
ENTER/RETURN Names of keyboard keys and hotkeys are in small
capital letters, for example ENTER and CTRL+C.
CTRL+V A plus sign (+) between two key names means
that you must press those keys at the same time
(hotkey). For example, CTRL+V instructs you to
hold down the CTRL key while typing the letter V.
DOWN KEY The arrow keys are named by the direction each
arrow indicates. (LEFT ARROW KEY, RIGHT
ARROW KEY, UP KEY). The term "arrow keys" is a
collective term referring to all of these four keys
together.
Grid|Appearance of This style instructs you to first click the Grid
Grid|Options menu, and then, from the submenu that opens, the
menu item Appearance of Grid. As a rule, this
will open a dialog where you are supposed to
click, for example, the Options button.
Press the RIGHT This instruction tells you to position the mouse
mouse button pointer on the border of an object, or on the cen-
treline of a line object, and then press the right
mouse button. In these cases, a context menu
opens, offering further commands relating to the
object in question.
Select or Confirm You are instructed to click the respective feature,
command, or button, using the LEFT MOUSE BUT-
TON.
Double-click Instructs you to rapidly press and release the left
mouse button twice.
) instructs you to do something.
Manual
2
Conventions Used in this Manual
With the key A Step-by-Step instruction, which can be omitted

INS insert by existing basic knowledge.
two new rows
2
* alerts you to essential information.
Industry.cna For the stated example you will find a file on the
CadnaA-CD-Rom. Open the file to follow the
example.
BuildingNoise- For the stated example you will find a file on the
Map.cna CadnaA-CD-Rom with the example already
completed.
Datakustik-Infos| The mentioned literature is saved on your pro-
950_22.pdf gram CD as PDF file in the folder Datakustik-
Infos
Manual
Chapter 2 Register
Attributes and Abbreviations 2.5 1
2.5 Attributes and Abbreviations

Abbreviation Meaning 2
ABSNR Buildings reflecting=0/absorbent=1/highly absorbent=2
ABST Mean distance between buildings (m)
ALFAL Absorption coefficient alpha left
ALFAR Absorption coefficient alpha right
ANZMAXT Option FLG: Number of exceedings (T) day or (N) night at the
ANZMAXTN receivers
APBEZX x coordinate, right (AzB module)
APBEZY y coordinate, top (AzB module)
AREA area (in square meters)
area_i see Chapter 11.6.6 "Object-Scan"
area_p see Chapter 11.6.6 "Object-Scan"
area_w see Chapter 11.6.6 "Object-Scan"
ART short name of land use
ARTI land use integer (0 = without use; 1 = first typ of land use in
numerical ascending order according to the dialog etc.)
ARTL long name of land use
ART_AUTO determine designated land use
AUTO intern - not relevant
B density of the buildings (%)
BABS ground absorption G
BASISQ basic source (Power Plant Option!)
BELN Parking lots occupied (%) night-time
BELT Parking lots occupied (%) daytime
Manual
2
Attributes and Abbreviations
BEWERT Frequency weighting (linear; A-weighted (A); B-weighted (B);C-

weighted (C); D-weighted (D))
2 BEWN Parking lot events per hour, night-time
BEWT Parking lot events per hour, daytime
BEZ Object’s Name
BEZRAW - (only for program-internal use)
BOXL / R / T / B Bitmap reference of coordinates of the left lower and the right
upper corner
BTYPNR Type of building
CANTI_HORZ Horizontal Overhang by Cantilevers
CANTI_VERT Vertikal Length of the Overhang by Cantilevers
D1 . . . . D10 Attenuations 1 through 10 (power plant module)
DAEMPF Attenuation by buildings
DAT_VON/DAT_BIS Date interval
DBEB; DBEW Attenuation from Foliage and Building developement (RLS90)
DBEB_L; DBEB_R Distance of building development (left/right)
DBR bridge penalty
DBUE Correction for railway crossing Dbü (dB)
DEN_NUM Number of target value LP1 till LP4
DFB Correction for type of railway track Dfb (dB)
DIFFK Diffusion correction (power plant module)
DIR for Result Table output of Degree No. 0-360 with 0 symbolized
North direction
DIR_AUTO 1 = automatic; 0 = manuel (then vector x, y, z of directivity)
DIR_TAUS Exhaust Gas Temperatur in °C
DIR_TYP Name of the saved directivity
Manual
Chapter 2 Register
DIR_VAUS Windspeed in m/s
DIR_VX (_VY, _VZ) directivity factor x, y, z

2
DMP Attenuation point, line or area source
DP Correction for type of parking lot
DRA Correction for railway radius of curvature
DREFL Correction for multiple reflections (dB(A))
DSTRO Correction for road surface (dB(A))
DTV Mean daily traffic density
DURCH Diameter (m)
EGHOCH/STHOCH Height of resp. distance between storeys, height of ground floor
EINFB Start of interweaving section (AzB module)
EINFE End of interweaving section (AzB module)
EINW Inhabitants / Population
EXCL exclude bevor calculation (x = actual)
FBABST standard cross section (SCS/distance (m)
F_COLOR color code decimal
F_COLORX color code hexadecimal
FLAECHE radiating surface aerea (qm)
FLAECHK Area correction (power plant module)
FONTCOLOR Text color
FREQ Dominant frequency (Hz)
GRENZT/GRENZN Limiting value daytime/nighttime
GRENZ1...GRENZ4 Limiting value of the corresponding target value LP1 till LP4
GWT / GWN (could be the maximum value of land use or the maximum level
at the receiver point depending on which parameter is used)
Manual
4
H object height (m)
h Height of each point

2
HA Object initial height (m)
HA_ATT Object initial height attribut:

r = relativ
a = absolut
g = above building roof
h = height on each point
hb or hg = height/ground on each point
hb Ground height of each point
HBEB_L; HBEB_R average height (m) of building development (left/right)
HB_LPT Building Evaluation Day- and Nighttime
HB_GWT Building Evaluation Maximum Value Day
HB_GWN Building Evaluation Maximum Value Night
HBEB Mean height of buildings (m)
HB_LPMINT / Building Attributt by Building Evaluation - Minimum-Level Day-

HB_LPMINN and Nighttime
HE Object final height (m)
HE_ATT Object final height attribut:

r = relativ
a = absolut
g = above building roof
h = height on each point
hb or hg = height/ground on each point
HIRI in Result Table output of Direction with one letter (N-North, O-

East, S-South, W-West)
HIRI2 in Result Table output of Direction with two letters if necessary

(e.g. NW-North-West, SO-South-East)
HO Height of air route (AzB module)
HREL Relative height above the ground (m)
Manual
Chapter 2 Register
ID Identification
KANK Duct correction (power plant module)

2
KILO the first station point (e.g. 510) m
KILO_DESC Station ascending = 0, descending = 1
KN Night-time correction
KO Directivity index K0
KRBREITE Crest width (m)
KT Daytime correction
LAT Degree of latitude (AzB module)
Lden Noise Level (d=day, e=evening, n=night
LAERMART Noise type (road/railway/industry/aircraft/total)
LEN Length (m)
len_i see Chapter 11.6.6 "Object-Scan"
len_p see Chapter 11.6.6 "Object-Scan"
LIN / LIT Indoor level Li (dBA) night-time / day-time
LIBZZ Table listing the number and type of trains
LKNICKT/LKNICKN Salient point of usability function power level daytime/nighttime
LMEN Emission level (dB) night-time
LMET Emission level (dB) daytime
LMINT/LMINN/ Minimum level daytime/nighttime

LMAXT/LMAXN Maximum level daytime/nighttime
LON Degree of longitude (AzB module)
LPMINT / LPMINN Attribut of the Building Evaluation Symbol for the minimum level
day and night-time
LP1 - LP4 Alias for the four target values in Caluclation|Configura-

tion|Target Values
Manual
6
LPT Calculated sound Level at the receiver point day-time

LPN Calculated sound Level at the receiver point night-time
2 LPT or LPN without No. refers to the current displayed variant
LPT<n> Calculated sound Level at the receiver point day-time

LPN<n> Calculated sound Level at the receiver point night-time
refers to the variant stated by the number <n> (LPT03 or LPN03

refers to the sound level of the variant 3.)
LPT_<n> Just as above with regard to a corresponding band of a spectrum

with the number after the underscore (see chapter 15.3.3)
LUECK_L; LUECK_R gaps’ proportion (left/right) of building development
LW_LI Indoor level, sound power level, or sound power level per unit
length or unit area
LWA Presently not supported
LWLIN Presently not supported
LWN Sound power level (dB(A)) night-time
LWSN Sound power level per unit length or unit area (dB(A)) night-time
LWST Sound power level per unit length or unit area (dB(A)) daytime
LWT Sound power level (dB(A)) daytime
LWTYP Sound power, type: LI=indoor level; LW=sound power level, or

otherwise sound power level per unit length or unit area
M Mean reciprocal length of edge (m) (1/m)
MARK State of activation (indifferent/activated +/deactivated -)
MEMO Info box
MKN Model correction (Switzerland) night-time
MKT Model correction (Switzerland) daytime
MN Hourly traffic density M night-time
MT Hourly traffic density M daytime
Manual
Chapter 2 Register
N_31-8000 Frequency spectrum nighttime
NACHT Traffic light active during night-time

2
NAIND Limiting value of industry for a type of land-use
NASTR Limiting value of roads for a type of land-use
NASCH Limiting value of railways for a type of land-use
NAFLG Limiting value of aircraft noise for a type of land-use
NEIG Inclination of wall (1:value)
NO_K1 K1 correction (blank = correction)
NORM_A Figure = normalized A-weighted level; blank or empty means not

normalized
PLAN Proportion of low-noise trucks (Austria) night-time
PLAT Proportion of low-noise trucks (Austria) daytime
PLN Proportion of lightweight trucks (Austria) night-time
PLT Proportion of lightweight trucks (Austria) daytime
PN Proportion of trucks % night-time
PO_AREA area (m²) of a closed Polygon
PO_HABSMIN minimum height of all polygonpoints

( absolute height at every Point)
PO_HABSMAX maximum height of all polygonpoints

( absolute height at every Point)
PO_HREL_P1 relative height of the 1. point by a Polygon
PO_HGND_P1 ground height of the 1. point by a Polygon
PO_LEN length (m) of a Polygon
PO_LENAREA length (m) of a open Polygon or area (m²) by a closed Polygone
PO_PKTANZ Number of polygon points
PPLTYP Type of parking lot acc. to RLS or VDI
Manual
8
PPLTYPI 0=RLS; 1=VDI
prop see Chapter 11.6.6 "Object-Scan"

2
prop_l see Chapter 11.6.6 "Object-Scan"
PT Proportion of trucks % daytime
QTYP Source type Spherical source=KU; line source=LI; area

source=FH; vertical area source=FV (power plant module)
QUELLE Source of data (libraries)
R_31-8000 Sound reduction index R (dB) in the range from 31.5 to 8000 Hz
ROUND Rounding value
RQ Standard cross section of road
RVL Reflection loss, left side
RVR Reflection loss, right side
RW Sound reduction index R (dB)
S_31. . . .8000 Level spectrum in the range from 31.5 to 8000 Hz
SIGMAD;SIGMAE The resulting uncertainty sigma dB for Day, Evening and Night.
SIGMAN
SIN_31. . . .8000 Internal - do not assign anything!
SP<n> SP - Column of the result table

<n> consecutive number of the column, e.g.,
SP4 (is the 4. column). To count the column number use either
the dialog Edit Result Column or the dialog Table column and
not the Result table itself because the invisible columns are
counted as well.
SSCR_ADDWID Road’s selfscreening - additional road width
SSCR_H_R Road’s selfscreening - wall’s height Left (L) and Right (R)
SSCR_H_L
STEIG Slope of road %
STELL Number of parking spaces on parking lot
Manual
Chapter 2 Register
STHOCH Heigth or distance between floors
STRGATT Type of road

2
STRGATTNR Type of road (internal numbering)
STRO Identification of road surface (currently for output purposes only)
STRONR Road surface number
STW in Result Table output of Floor Identifier
STYPI Spectrum type (0 = Li; 1 = Li from interiour sources; 2 = Lw; 3 =

Lw calculated from Lp + area + nearfield correction; 4 = Lw calcu-
lated from Lp + area + nearfield correction)
T_31-8000 Frequency spectrum daytime
TAG Traffic light active during daytime
TAKTMAX Correction for maximum level during specified intervals

(blank=no correction)
TEINWN Time of operation during night-time (min)
TEINWR Recreation time (min)
TEINWT Time of operation during daytime (min)
TOTD, TOTN Total Noise Level day- and nighttime (total day, total night)
TRANSP acoustical Transparency (%)
VtLKW Truck speed
VPKW Passenger car speed
W Angle of approach (AzB module)
WG x = residential building / blank = outbuilding
WG_NUM 1 = residential building / 0 = outbuilding
WKNICKT/WKNICKN Salient point of usability function daytime/nighttime
X x coordinate
X1 Coordinates of power plant source
Manual
10
X2 Coordinates of power plant source
y y coordinate
2
Y1 Coordinates of power plant source
Y2 Coordinates of power plant source
Z1 Coordinates of power plant source
Z2 Coordinates of power plant source
ZAUSD Dimension along z direction
ZKLST_ASC ASCII Table of Trainclass
ZYL_MX x coordinate of centre of cylinder
ZYL_MY y coordinate of centre of cylinder
ZYL_R Cylinder radius
Manual
Chapter 2 Register
Operators and Functions 2.6 1
2.6 Operators and Functions

The following operators and functions can be used in formula boxes. Ex-
2
amples are:
• Calculation|Configuration|General tab|Total Level
• the common edit dialogs for sources, in the PWL, Sound Reduction,
and Attenuation boxes.
== equals
!= is not equal
>= greater or equal
> greater than
<= less or equal
< less than
++ level addition
-- level subtraction
+ addition
- subtraction
* multiplication
/ division
( open bracket
) close bracket
max maximum max(1,2) = 2
min mimimum min(1,2) = 1
pow power: pow(a, b) = a^b
abs absolute value or magnitude
log10 logarithm to the base 10
log logarithm to the base e
exp10 xth power of 10 (10 to the x)
exp xth power of e (e to the x)
sqrt square root
sin sine (argument to be expressed in radians)
cos cosine
tan tangent
ctg cotangent
Manual
2
Operators and Functions
deg2rad conversion from degrees to radians

rad2deg conversion from radians in degrees
2 arcsin arc sine
arccos arc cosine
arctan arc tangent
iif iif(x, a, b) returns a, if x!=0, and b if x==0
rand(x,y) generated a random number in interval between
x and y
Examples of Formulas Example entry for Attenuation - LWA - Sound Reduction on an edit
and Operators: 2.6 source dialog.
Expression
((8+4+3.5+2)++17.5)-19)
SP_002++SP_005 where SP_002 and SP_005 refer to spectra
stored in the local library
SP_002 - 3 3 dB are subtracted from the current level in
each frequency band of the spectrum
x - 55 reduces the current number by 55
x+2 increases the current number by 2
x ++ 50 adds 50 dB to the current level respecting rules
for the addition of levels
x -- 50 subtracts 50 dB from the current level respec-
ting rules for the subtraction of levels
Operators:
++ energetic addition (level addition) (40 ++ 40 = 43)
-- energetic difference (level subtraction) (43--40 = 40)
+ arithmetic addition (40 + 40 = 80)
- arithmetic difference (80 - 40 =40)
max(a,b)maximum level of the levels calculated separately for the two
source groups a and b.
min(a,b) minimum level of the levels calculated separately for the two
source groups a and b.
Manual
Chapter 2 Register
Operators and Functions 2.6 3
You can use all arithmetic terms or combinations thereof.
In CadnaA you can integrate user-defined functions by using DLL-files User-defind

(dynamic loadable library). Function 2.6.0 2
On your CadnaA program CD in Support\CNA_FUNC you will find a

CadnaA example (CNA_FUNC) and a README file, which describes the
interface CadnaA and DLL.
As precondition you will have to make an entry in the Cadnaa.ini file for
each function and the function name must be entered in a formula field,
e.g. in the PWL field of a point source in its edit dialog.
Manual
4
Operators and Functions
Manual
Chapter 2 Register
Literature 2.7 1
2.7 Literature
/1/ 18th regulation for the execution of the Federal Immission Protec-
2
tion Act (Regulation concerning the protection from noise from
sports facilities - 18. BImSchV) dated 1991-07-18, Bundesgesetz-
blatt, annual set 1991, part 1, p. 1588
/2/ DIN 52210-1 Tests in building acoustics; airborne and impact
sound insulation; measuring methods
/3/ DIN EN ISO 3744 "Acoustics - Determination of sound power
levels of noise sources using sound pressure - Engineering method
in an essential free field over a reflecting plane (ISO 3744:1994);
German version EN ISO 3744:1995"
/4/ Parking Lot Study 1995 - Precise
Wolfgang Hendlmeier: "Noise control at parking lots and under-
ground car parks", Clause 12.2: Precise calculation method (for
parking lots, where the distribution of traffic between the parking
spaces can be estimated with sufficient precision), Bavarian Mini-
stry for Environmental Protection (LfU), Depts. 2/4 and 2/5,
November 1994
/5/ Parking Lot Study 1995 - Approximate
Wolfgang Hendlmeier: „Noise control at parking lots and under-
ground car parks, Clause 12.3: Approximate calculation method
(for parking lots, where the distribution of traffic between the par-
king spaces cannot be estimated with sufficient precision) , Bava-
rian Ministry for Environmental Protection (LfU), Depts. 2/4 and 2/
5, November 1994
/6/ Parking Lot Study of Bavarian Ministry for Environmental Protec-
tion
Study concerning sound emission from parking lots, scrap yards
and bus terminals, 1993 Edition, Issue 89, Collection of publicati-
ons of the Bavarian Ministry for Environmental Protection (LfU),
Munich
Manual
2
Literature
/7/ Parking Lot Study of Bavarian Ministry for Environmental Protec-

tion 2003
The new revised 4. study concerning sound emission from parking
2
lots, bus terminals, mulit-storey car park and subterranean garage
of housing estates, August 2003 Edition, Issue 89. Collection of
publications of the Bavarian Ministry for Environmental Protecton
(LfU), Augsburg; Kessler Verlagsdruckerei, 86399 Bobingen,
ISBN 3-936385-26-2, ISSN 0723-0028; http://www.bayern.de/lfu
/8/ Schall03 Guidelines for the Calculation of Sound Immission from
Railways Schall 03, Akustik 03, Ed. 1990, DB (German Railways),
Central Administration, Munich
/9/ RLS90 Guidelines for Noise Control at Roads (RLS-90) Published
by the German Federal Ministry of Transport, Dept. for Road Con-
struction, Ed. 1990, Traffic Gazette 44 (1990)
/10/ 16th regulation for the execution of the Federal Immission Protec-
tion Act (Regulation concerning the protection from traffic noise -
16. BImSchV) dated 1990-06-12, Bundesgesetzblatt I, p. 1036
/11/ TA-Lärm Sixth general administrative regulation concerning the
Federal Immission Control Act (Technical instruction for noise
protection – TA-Lärm) dated 1998-08-26, published in Gemeinsa-
mes Ministerialblatt dated 1998-08-28
/12/ VDI 3760" Computation and measurement of sound propagation in
workrooms ", February 1996, Beuth-Verlag, Berlin, Köln
/13/ VDI 2720 Sheet 1, " Noise control by barriers outdoors", March
1997, Beuth-Verlag, Berlin, Köln
/14/ VDI 2058 Sheet 1, " Assessment of working noise in the vicinity",
September 1985, Beuth-Verlag, Berlin, Köln
/15/ VDI 2571 " Sound radiation from industrial buildings", August
1976, Beuth-Verlag, Berlin, Köln
/16/ VDI 2714 " Outdoor sound propagation", January 1988, Beuth-
Manual
Chapter 2 Register
Literature 2.7 3
Verlag, Berlin, Köln

/17/ Updated information of the German Railways central administra-
tion, Munich - Acoustics - Effects of Wheel Absorbers), 016, 2
103.10313, 962/6302, dated 1991-04-19
/18/ Updated information of the German Railways central administra-
ton, Munich - Acoustics - "Schall 03, Aerodynamic Effects", 021,
103.10313, 962/6302, dated 1991-08-17
/19/ Probst, Wolfgang: „Noise emissions from sports facilities and their
quantitative consideration for the purpose of immission control
prognosis", Federal Institute for Sports Sciences, Cologne, 1994 -
Collection of publications on sports facilities and sports equipment;
B94,2, ISBN 3-921896-84-3
/20/ Probst, Wolfgang: „Computer Aided Noise Allotment", talk given
at a conference on quality management of software programs in
Munich
/21/ ISO 9613
Acoustics - Attenuation of sound during propagation outdoors -
Part 1: Calculation of the absorption of sound by the atmosphere,
1993
Part 2: General method of calculation (ISO 9613-2:1996)
ISO International Organization for Standardization, Switzerland
Beuth Verlag, Berlin
/22/ DIN 18005-1 : 1987-05
Noise abatement in town planning; calculation methods, Beuth Ver-
lag Berlin
/23/ VDI 3770 Characteristic noise emission values of technical sound
sources; Sports and recreational facilities; First working draft as of
February 1996
/24/ ÖAL Guideline #28, Sound Radiation and Sound Propagation,
December 1987, Austrian Association for Noise Abatement
Manual
4
Literature
/25/ ÖNORM S 5011 : 1995-04 Determination of noise immission

caused by rail traffic - Railway traffic, shunting and cargo handling
operations
2
/26/ DIN EN ISO 717-1 : 1997-01 Acoustics - Rating of sound insula-
tion in buildings and of building elements - Part 1: Airborne sound
insulation (ISO 717-1:1996); German version EN ISO 717-1:1996,
/27/ ISO 11654 : 1997 Acoustics - Sound absorbers for use in buildings
- Rating of sound absorption, Beuth Verlag, Berlin
/28/ RVS 3.02 Protection from Noise, December 1997, Austrian Rese-
arch Association for Road and Traffic, Echenbachgasse 9, A-1010
Wien, Austria
/29/ RAS-Q 82 Guidelines for the construction of roads RAS, Part:
Cross sections, Research Association for Traffic and Transport,
Working Group on Road Design
/30/ RAS-Q 96 Guidelines for the construction of roads RAS, Part:
Cross sections, Research Association for Traffic and Transport,
Working Group on Road Design
/31/ Calculation Examples concerning the Guidelines for Noise Control
at Roads RBLärm-92, German Federal Ministry of Transport, Dept.
for Road Construction, Ed. 1992, Office of the Research Associa-
tion for Traffic and Transport, Konrad-Adenauer-Str. 13, D-50996
Köln, Germany
/32/ Kutruff, H.:“Über Nachhall in Medien mit unregelmäßig verteilten
Streuzentren, insbesondere in Hallräumen mit aufgehängten Streu-
körpern“,Acustica 18 , 1967
/33/ Probst, W.:“Schallabstrahlung und Schallausbreitung - Berech-
nungsmodelle und Schalleistungsbestimmung“, Forschungsbericht
Fb. 556 der Bundesanstalt für Arbeitsschutz, Dortmund 1988
/34/ Probst, W., Neugebauer G., Kurze U., Jovicic S. und Stephenson
Manual
Chapter 2 Register
Literature 2.7 5
U.: „Schallausbreitung in Arbeitsräumen“, Forschungsbericht Fb

621 der Bundesanstalt für Arbeitsschutz, Dortmund 1990
/35/ Probst, W.; Huber, B.: „The Calculation of Noise Emission by 950_03_Car_Park.pdf 2
Multi-Storey Car Parks“, Zeitschrift für Lärmbekämpfung 5/2000,
47. Issue, Page 175 (published in German)
/36/ Probst, Wolfgang: Calculation of Noise Levels in an Environment EURONOISE98.pdf
with highly reflecting Objects and Surfaces, Euronoise 1998,
Munich
/37/ Vierundzwanzigste Verordnung zur Durchführung des Bundes-
Immissionsschutzgesetzes (Verkehrswege-Schallschutzmaßnah-
menverordnung - 24.BImSchV, Bundesgesetzblatt Jahrgang 1997
Teil I Nr. 8, ausgegeben zu Bonn am 12.2.1997
/38/ VDI-Richtlinie 2719 „Schalldämmung von Fenstern und deren
Zusatzeinrichtungen“, August 1987, Beuth-Verlag, Berlin und Köln
/39/ Magnetschwebebahn-Lärmschutzverordnung vom 23.9.1997
(BGBl. 2329, 2338)
/40/ Probst, W. : „ Geräuschentwicklung von Sportanlagen und deren
Quantifizierung für immissionsschutztechnische Prognosen“,
Bericht B2/94 aus der Schriftenreihe „Sportanlagen und Sportge-
räte“ des Bundesinstituts für Sportwissenschaften, sb67 Verlagsge-
sellschaft, Bleriotstr. 6, 50827 Köln, 1994, ISBN 3-921896-84-3
/41/ DIN ISO 3746 Akustik, Bestimmung der Schalleistungspegel von
Geräuschquellen, Hüllflächenverfahren der Genauigkeitsklasse 3
über einer reflektierenden Ebene, Beuth-Verlag, Berlin
/42/ TAL98 - Zur Bestimmung der meteorologischen Dämpfung - Eine
Anleitung mit Beispielen - Landesumweltamt NRW, Postfach
102363, D-45023 Essen
/43/ Environmental noise from industrial plants - General prediction
method. Danish Acoustical Laboratory, The Danish Academy of
Technical Sciences, Report no. 32, 1982
Manual
6
Literature
/44/ Railway Traffic Noise - The Nordic Prediction Method, TemaNord

1996:524, Nordic Council of Ministers, Store Strandstraede 18,
DK-1255 Copenhagen K, ISBN 92 9120837 X, ISSN 0908-6692
2
/45/ Road Traffic Noise - Nordic Prediction Method, TemaNord
1996:525, Nordic Council of Ministers, Store Strandstraede 18,
DK-1255 Copenhagen K, ISBN 92 91208361, ISSN 0908-6692
/46/ MLus 92, Ausgabe 96, Merkblatt über Luftverunreinigungen an
Straßen - Teil: Straßen ohne oder mit lockerer Randbebauung, Aus-
gabe 1991, Geänderte Fassung 1996, Forschungsgesellschaft für
Straßen- und Verkehrswesen e.V., Köln, Arbeitsgruppe Verkehrs-
führung und Verkehrssicherheit.
/47/ 23. BImSchV - Dreiundzwanzigste Verordnung zur Durchführung
des Bundes-Immissionsschutzgesetzes (Verordnung über die Fest-
legung von Konzentrationswerten) vom 16. Dezember 1996
(BGBl. 1 S. 1962
/48/ DIN 45687 „Akustik - Software-Erzeugnisse zur Berechnung der
Geräuschimmission im Freien - Qualitätsanforderung und Prüfbe-
stimmungen“ - diese Norm ist zur Zeit der Drucklegung im Verab-
schiedungsverfahren.
/49/ Literature reference in VDI 3733 „Noise at Pipes“, Juli 1996,
Bibliography [80] by Reinicke and Danner, UBA-Fb 81-33, 1981
/50/ NMPB-Routes 96 - Méthode de calcul incluant les effets météoro-
logiques, version expérimentale, Bruit des infrastructures routières,
Janvier 1997 - Centre d’études sur les réseaux, les transports,
l’urbanisme et les constructions publiques
Service d’études techniques des routes et autoroutes - Laboratoire
central des ponts et chaussées - Centre scientifique et technique du
bâtiment
/51/ Concawe - the oil companies international study group for conser-
vation of clean air and water - europe (established in 1963), report
no. 4/81, „the propagation of noise from petroleum and petroche-
Manual
Chapter 2 Register
Literature 2.7 7
mical complexes to neighbouring communities“, Prepared by C.J.

Manning, M.Sc., M.I.O.A. Acoustic Technology Limited (Ref.AT
931), CONCAWE, Den Haag May 1981
2
/52/ Probst, Wolfgang; Donner, Ulrich: „The Uncertainty of Sound
Pressure Levels calculated with Noise Prediction Programs“, 950_22_Uncertainty.pdf
published in German in ZfL 3/2002 Mai 49. Jg., Springer Verlag,
Düsseldorf, http://www.technikwissen.de and translated in English
by Wolfgang Probst
/53/ EN 12354: Building acoustics - Estimation of acoustic performance
of buildings from the performance of products -
Part 1: Airborne sound insulation between rooms; German version
prEN 12354-1:1996
Part 2: Impact sound insulation between rooms; German version
prEN 12354-2:1996
Part 3: Airborne sound insulation against outdoor sound; German
version prEN 12354-3:1997
/54/ ISO 717: Acoustics - Rating of sound insulation in buildings and of
building elements -
Part 1: Airborne sound insulation (ISO 717-1:1996); German ver-
sion EN ISO 717-1:1996
Part 2: Impact sound insulation (ISO 717-2:1996); German version
EN ISO 717-2:1996
/55/ Schriftenreihe Umwelt Nr. 301, Lärm: Wirtschaftliche Tragbarkeit
und Verhältnismässigkeit von Lärmschutzmassnahmen; Bundesamt
für Umwelt, Wald und Landschaft (BUWAL) Bern, 1998. Bezugs-
quelle: BUWAL Dokumentation, Ch-3003 Bern,
http://www.admin.ch/buwal/publikat/d/
/56/ ZTV-Lsw88: Zusätzliche Technische Vorschriften und Richtlinien
für die Ausführung von Lärmschutzwänden an Straßen, Verkehrs-
blatt - Dokument Nr. B 6508 - Vers. 88.2, Der Bundesminister für
Verkehr, Abteilung Straßenbau, Verkehrsblatt-Verlag Borgmann
GmbH & Co KG, Hohe Straße 39, P.O. Box 100555, 46000 Dort-
Manual
8
Literature
mund, Germany
(Additional Technical Regulation and Guideline for the Construc-
tion of Noise Barriers at Roads)
2
/57/ Wolfgang Probst, Bernd Huber: „Modelling of Chimneys and
acoustically transparent plants“, Zeitschrift für Lärmbekämpfung
published in German
/58/ Directive 2002/49/EC of the European Parliament and of the
Council of 25th June 2002 relating to the assessment and manage-
ment of environmental noise, Official Journal of the European
Communities, L189/12, EN, 18.7.2002
/59/ AzB - Bekanntmachung der Datenerfassungssysteme für die
Ermittlung von Lärmschutzbereichen an zivilen (DES) und militä-
rischen Flugplätzen (DES-MIL) sowie einer Anleitung zur Berech-
nung, Der Bundesminister des Innern, GMBl 1975, Nr. 8, Seite 126
/60/ Railway Noise: The Netherlands national computation method
"Standaard-Rekenmethode II" published in "Reken- en Meetvoor-
schrift Railverkeerslawaai '96, Ministerie Volkshuisvesting, Ruim-
telijke Ordening en Milieubeheer, 20. November 1996".
/61/ TA-Luft 2002: Erste Allgemeine Verwaltungsvorschrift zum Bun-
des-Immissionsschutzgesetz (Technische Anleitung zur Reinhal-
tung der Luft - TA Luft) Vom 24. Juli 2002 (GMBl. 2002, Heft 25
- 29, S. 511 - 605)
/62/ 22. BImSchV: 22. Verordnung zur Durchführung des Bundesim-
missionsschutzgesetzes, 11.September 2002 BGBlI2002, 3626
/63/ ECAC DOC 29: European Civil Aviation Conference Document
29, „Report on Standard Method of Computing Noise Contours
around Civil Airports“, 2nd edition, 1997
/64/ DIN 45684-1 „Ermittlung von Fluggeräuschimmissionen an Lan-
deplätzen, Teil 1: Berechnung“ (Entwurf 2004-03)
/65/ VDI 3945 part 3 (Environmental meteorology - Atmospheric dis-
Manual
Chapter 2 Register
Literature 2.7 9
persion models - Particle model), Düsseldorf, September 2000

/66/ Harmonoise - Harmonised Accurate and Reliable Methods for the
EU Directive on the Assessment and Management of Environmen- 2
tal Noise: WP3: Engineering Models. Programming The Point-To-
Point Propagation Model. Type of Document: Technical report;
Document reference: HAR34TR-041124-CSTB01; Level of confi-
dentiality: Public, Date: 24/11/2004; Author: Dir Van Maercke
/67/ Kozak, J., Liberko, M.: Updated Method for Calculation of Road
Traffic Noise (in Czech), Annex of the Newsletter of the Ministry
of the Environment of the Czech Republic. 1996, No. 3, p.1-16
/68/ TNM - FHWA Federal Highway Administration Model (http://
www.trafficnoisemodel.org) TNM Version 2.5, McTrans Center
University of Florida, 2088 Northeast Waldo Road, Gainesville, Fl
32609, http://mctrans.ce.ufl.edu
Manual
10
Literature
Manual
Chapter 2 Register
Strings and Operators 2.8 1
2.8 Strings and Operators

On some dialogs, complex search criteria can be specified, which serve to
2
narrow down search results or selections of records. Examples are:
• Edit|Search: Name: and ID boxes (see chapter 5.5.3)
• File|Import|Option Layer selection (see chapter 6.3.1)
• Tables|Groups: Expression box (see chapter 18.2.1)
• Tables, when applying the Change Column command from the con-
text menu (see chapter 15.2.5)
Examples:
Element searched for Operator Example finds
single character ? m?t mat, met
character string * l*t lot, loot, latent, lost, last

* all characters
one of the characters mentioned [] b[au]ll ball, bull
a single character in an alpha- [-] [m-k]straße Nstreet, Ostreet, but not

betical sequence ((o)) Bstreet. The alphabetical
sequence must be given in
ascending order.
a single character except those [^] [^g]ut but, but not gut
mentioned in the brackets
Logical relations | 100|200 100 or 200
ab(c|de)f abcf or abdef
Manual
2
2.8.1 Chapter 2 Register
Replacing a String
2.8.1 Replacing a String
2 To replace character strings in table columns, use the Edit Column com-
mand from the context menu.
\1 denotes the entire character string as is
\2 denotes the first section in brackets
\n denotes the nth section in brackets
# denotes automatic numbering
Examples:
Current value: FBxyz_01 enclose characters to be retained in brackets
Search for: (*)xyz_(*) (FB) is the first section in brackets,
(01) is the second section in brackets
Replace by: results in
\1 FBxyz_01
\2uvw_\3 FBuvw_01
\3u\2 01uFB
## automatic numbering with two digits, i. e. 01

to 99; from 100 on, the numbering will start
over with 00, 101 will become 01, etc.
This flexible logic allows you to perform practically any operation re-
quired to convert strings.
Manual
Manual CadnaA
Chapter 3 Introduction
Chapter 5 Basics 5
Chapter 6 Import 6
Chapter 8 Sources 8
Examples Tutorial
Manual
2 Chapter 3 Introduction
Manual
Contents 3.1 1
3
3.1 Contents
3.2 CadnaA - the Software Program for Noise Prediction
3.3 CadnaA’s additional options
3.4 Selecting Standards for Calculation
3.5 System Requirements
3.6 How to learn CadnaA
Manual
2
3.1 Chapter 3 Introduction
Contents
Manual
CadnaA - the Software Program for Noise Prediction 3.2 1
3.2 CadnaA - the Software Program for

Noise Prediction
CadnaA for Windows is a program for noise and air pollution prediction
and efficent for expert purposes. 3
The program calculates and predicts noise immission in the neighborhood
of
• trade enterprises and industrial plants
• sports and leisure facilities
traffic systems like
• road and railways
• airports and landing strip or
• any other noisy facilities
according to national and international standards and regulations.
The air pollution is calculated and evaluated according the German guide-
lines TA-Luft /61/ and 22. BImSchV /62/.
CadnaA is suitable for noise protection as well as for detailed analyses for
mapping noise in large cities (additional XL option).
Extensive features like screen display, treatment and output of graphical
grids enable the usage of scanned plans (additional BMP option).
CadnaA automatically or semi-automatically promotes optimization and
allocation of the permissible area-related level of sound power for partial
areas of projected industry regions (addional BPL option).
The aircraft noise in the vicinity of airports according to the German regu-
lations AzB (Instruction for calculation of aircraft noise zone) and general
landing strips and other aeronautics facilities is calculated with the additio-
nal option AzB.
A high priority is made of the import and export of existing data from
third-party programs like ArcView, MapInfo, DXF etc. or the import of
data from databases via the ODBC-interface.
Manual
2
CadnaA - the Software Program for Noise Prediction
The sound level during by-pass with time history and auralisation of mo-
ving sources, the different project-views like 3D-special as a photorealistic
secenario which you may move through, the PCSP (Program Controlled
Segmented Processing) to accelerate calculation of big projects, the groups
3 and project variants and result tables are only some highlights of CadnaA
- in your daily work with the program you will find much more and enjoy
it.
For quick access to CadnaA you will find a practical introduction in chap-
ter „4.14 Quick start“ which gives you an overview for some important
features.
Manual
CadnaA’s additional options 3.3 1
3.3 CadnaA’s additional options

CadnaA is a modular program system. This structure interlinks all possib-
le program performances. The calculated, evaluated level in the vicinity
of an airport can be added and depicted to the evaluated level of a railway 3
and/or roads (prerequisites are the corresponding program options)
The basic program includes all features and types of calculation except the
following mentioned options. The basic program is a prerequisite for all
options.
Options only in connection with the basic program! Options 3.3
The option BMP imports bitmaps (e.g. BMP, PCX, TIF etc) with scanned BMP (Bitmap)
maps (ground plans, cadastral plans) or digital photos. Such bitmaps, when
loaded as background images in CadnaA, serve as templates for the defi-
nition of sources, receiver points, buildings and other objects. CadnaA is
capable of processing serveral bitmaps at a time (see Chapter 14 Pictures).
The option BPL is for the optimisation of the area-related levels of sound BPL
power for industrial areas. (see Chapter 8.15 Optimized Area Sources)
This option is an expert system to find the sound power spectra for many SET
noise sources like motors, gears, vans, ventilation systems, cooling towers
on the basis of given technical parameters. With CadnaA-SET you can
create modules with up to 10 input and 10 output channels for sound po-
wer spectra. You may define the creation of a sound power spectrum with
your own algorithms. If such a module is defined, it can be refered to all
sources in CadnaA. More than 100 predifined modules based on many
years experience and on many coupled output-inputs, so that even com-
plex plants are simulated correctly in your project. (see Chapter 8.16 Cad-
naA-SET Option).
Option XL allows you to both calculate the noise by taking into account XL
about 16 million buildings in one run, and to perform calculations with
Manual
2
CadnaA’s additional options
complete noise maps, and to evaluate a situation on the basis of given

noise levels and the number of persons living under the impact of these
levels. (see Chapter 11.6 CadnaA Option XL).
AzB Option AzB for the calculation of areas affected by air-traffic noise.
3
FLG The option CadnaA-FLG calculates the noise emitted from civil and mili-
(formerly AzB) 3.3.0 tary airports based on the following calculation methods:
• AzB - „Guidance for the calculation of noise protection areas at civil
and military airports according to the German act on aircraft noise
(Fluglärmgesetz, dated 30 March 1971)
• European Civil Aviation Conference Document 29 (ECAC Doc. 29),
„Report on Standard Method of Computing Noise Contours around
Civil Airports“, 2nd edition, 1997 (adopted to the requirements of the
EC-directive according to AR-INTERIM-CM „Adaptation and Revi-
sion of the Interim Noise Computation Methods for the Purpose of
Strategic Noise Mapping“, March 2003)
• DIN 45684-1 „Determination of aircraft noise exposure at airfields,
Part 1: Calculation method“ (in German, draft 2004-03)
With these calculation methods CadnaA-FLG covers all procedures for
aircraft noise assessment relevant on the European level.
APL 3.3.0 The option CadnaA-APL marks a step by extending the features of
CadnaA to the calculation, assessment and presentation of exposure to air
pollutants. Using the CadnaA-PCSP-technique (Program Controlled Seg-
mented Processing) for full-automatic tiling, project distribution and pro-
cessing on a network exposure maps for various air pollutants are
calculated for arbitrary project limits.
CadnaA-APL combines the well-known user-friendly user interface of
CadnaA with the calculation model AUSTAL2000 developed by the Ger-
man Environmental Protection Agency (UBA - Umweltbundesamt Ber-
lin). The implemented Lagrange particle model follows the specifications
of the German guideline VDI 3945 part 3 ((Environmental meteorology -
Manual
CadnaA’s additional options 3.3 3
Atmospheric dispersion models - Particle model), Düsseldorf, September

2000.
Manual
4
CadnaA’s additional options
Manual
Selecting Standards for Calculation 3.4 1
3.4 Selecting Standards for Calculation

By selecting a desired country from the menu Calculation|Configurati-
on|Tab Country the system will be adapted to the corresponding stan-
dards for calculation of industry, road and railways if the standards have 3
been implemented and purchased.
However, standards do not describe all possible situations or scenarios, so
that a logical interpretation of scopes has been made in many cases.
* We must point out that the program user is responsible for the pro-
fessional use. We cannot take the liability for false calculation and its
consequences which are caused by inputs and system configuration.
The licence agreement, which is accessible also in the online help
with the same-named keyword, will be accepted with program use.
* Please also pay attention that not all data or values can be adapted
afterwards automatically according to the subsequently selected
standards if you switch the standards after the parameters of sources
have been entered. If necessary you must check and adapt the data
yourself.
If you e.g. choose first the German standards, input the train classes
to evaluate the emission level and afterwards switch e.g. to the
French standards you would produce a false emission level for the
French standard because in France you may not have the same train
classes and penalties.
The correct calculation will be proved with the „official“ available test Certificate 3.4.0
task. The „official test task“ is unambiguously defined test cases from au-
thorized institutions.
For the time being the following proofs have been made:
• the „Test Tasks for the checking of calculation programs according to
the guidelines for Noise Abatement on Roads - Test 94“ by the Federal
Ministry for Traffic, Germany.
Manual
2
Selecting Standards for Calculation
• the Draft of „Test Tasks for the checking of calculation programs

according to the guidelines for Calculation of sound immission of rail-
ways - Test-Schall 03 - 95“ by Deutsche Bahn AG, Akustik 03.1, Sta-
tus Feb. 1996
3 • the „Test Tasks for the checking of calculation programs according to
the appendix to the Magnet Hoover Train-Noise Abatement enactment
- Test-Transrapid - Akustik 03.2“ Status Januar 1997
• Comparative Calculation and Certification correspondig with a test air-
port of the German Federal Environmental Office Berlin
• the test examples, in the appendix of the RVS 3.02 „Lärmschutz“, per
letter of the Federal Minister for Economic Affairs on August 13th
1998 (Austria).
The future published test task according to DIN 45687 /48/ is also taken
into account to ensure the correct calculation of CadnaA. If necessary ple-
ase ask for the current status.
Manual
System Requirements 3.5 1
3.5 System Requirements
• IBM-compatible PC 486 with VGA-Bildschirm Minimum

• Windows 95 (Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corp., USA) requirements 3.5
3
• minimum RAM 16 MB
• at least 5 MB of free disc space for the program CadnaA
• CD-Rom drive
• Microsoft-compatible mouse and printer
• IBM-compatible PC Pentium Recommend

• Windows2000 or higher
• Screen with OpenGL graphic card and 3D-accelerator (recommended
for the 3D-special view)
• 1 GB RAM
• CD-Rom drive
• Microsoft-compatible Wheel mouse (comfortabel for zooming) and
printer
The drive space depends on the size of the projects you want to treat. The
experience shows that the drive space cannot be big enough.
CadnaA is a 32-bit-version.
Manual
2
System Requirements
Manual
How to learn CadnaA 3.6 1
3.6 How to learn CadnaA

In this manual you will also find information on all features in CadnaA
and how to work with CadnaA with examples and practical hints.
The documentation assumed that you are familiar with the MS Windows 3
operating system, mouse operation and handling of a computer. Should
that not be the case refer to the according Microsoft manuals.
To get to know CadnaA we suggest you read at least the following chap-
ters:
• Chapter 2.4 Conventions Used in this Manual
• Chapter 4.6 The Main Window of CadnaA
• Chapter 4.8 The Toolbox
• Chapter 4.9 CadnaA Menues
• Chapter 4.14 Quick start
Afterwards you will have an overview of the technical terms and tools
used in CadnaA like icons and control elements and how to insert, edit and
delete objects and how to check your project with the different kinds of
views.
Explanations to the terms used in the CadnaA dialogs are located in the
online help or in the index of the manual with the same-named keyword.
Should that ever not be the case we would be glad to hear from you.
Read the chapter 4.14 Quick start and work with the examples. That would
take about one hour. Afterwards you will know CadnaA already quite well
so you may start with a real project.
In chapter TUTORIAL you will find practical hints and examples as PDF
files on your CD-Rom which are supposed to ease your project work. This
chapter will be continued by user request. If you have problems to solve
with CadnaA do not hestitate to contact us.
Manual
2
How to learn CadnaA
Manual
Manual CadnaA
Chapter 4 The First Steps
Chapter 5 Basics 5
Chapter 6 Import 6
Chapter 8 Sources 8
Examples Tutorial
Manual
2 Chapter 4 The First Steps
Manual
Contents 4.1 1
4.1 Contents 4
4.2 Installation
4.3 The Hardlock-Key (Dongle)
4.4 The Server Hardlock-Key
4.5 Language
4.6 The Main Window of CadnaA
4.7 Icon Bar
4.8 The Toolbox
4.9 CadnaA Menues
4.10 Mouse Buttons
4.11 Control Elements
4.12 Save Settings
4.13 Help
Manual
2
4.1 Chapter 4 The First Steps
Contents
4.14 Quick start

4.14.1 3D-Special-View
4.14.2 Insert a Road
4.14.3 Receiver Point Calculation
4.14.4 Insert a Barrier
4 4.14.5 Insert a Building
4.14.6 Duplicate Objects
4.14.7 Import Objects
4.14.8 Edit Objects
4.14.9 Grid Calculation
4.14.10 dB-Level and Text Boxes
4.14.11 Generate Floors
4.14.12 Copy to the clipboard
4.14.13 Summary
4.15 Create Groups
Manual
Installation 4.2 1
4.2 Installation
Use the following procedure to install CadnaA from the CD-Rom. Note
that you cannot run the CadnaA components from the CD; you must in-
stall the program onto your hard disc.
Before you start your Computer
4
) The program is copy-protected with a hardlock key. Connect the
hardlock plug on the corresponding interface - parallel/seriel or USB.
By a parallel hardlock you should connect the plug to the parallel
interface before you switch on your computer to prevent a damage of
the plug because of electrostatic discharge.
) Start your Computer and the Windows operating system.
) Before you install the program finish and close all other programs
) Insert the CadnaA-CD in your drive (for e.g. drive D).
) In the start menu of your operating system choose the appropriate

command to install the SETUP. EXE from the CD-Rom-Drive
) The installation program is started - just follow the instruction
) Execute the standard installation
Manual
2
Installation
Hint for * If, during the starting of CadnaA under Windows 95, the message
Windows 95
„OpenGL file not found“ should appear, this file has not yet been
installed with Windows 95 on your system. This file is essential to
the 3-D special view.
In this case, you can subsequently install this application by repeating
the Windows 95 SETUP, or copy it from the CadnaA CD-ROM. (We
4 supply the necessary data by way of precaution.) To copy the
OpenGL files from the CadnaA CD-ROM, use the following steps:
) Change to the drive where you inserted the CadnaA CD-ROM (e. g.,
D), and select its Support\OpenGL95 folder.
) Copy the two DLL files from that folder to the c:\Windows\System
folder on your hard disk.
The problem should be eliminated.
Hints for When Windows NT, 2000, XP or higher is used, you must additionally
Windows NT, Windows install the Hardlock driver once as follows:
2000 and XP or higher
) Log in as administrator.
) Select the corresponding Start menu|Run
) Change to the drive where you inserted the CadnaA CD-ROM (e. g.,
D), and select its Support\Hardlock folder
) Corresponding to your operating system run

either the HLDRV32.EXE (for Windows NT; 2000, XP)
or the HASPUserSetup.exe (for Windows XP with SP2)
files available in that folder. The Hardlock driver is being installed.
) Afterwards, you can log off as administrator.
CadnaA has now been completely installed.
Manual
Installation 4.2 3
You will find more information about how to install hardlock drivers in
the next chapter.
If you want to know how to best customise your desktop in order to conve-
niently start the desired programs, please refer to your Windows manual.
If you get CadnaA updates you may overwrite the older version or you Hints to Updates 4
may install it in a different folder. The updates are always full versions
therefore the older version is not required.
* Please pay attention to the fact that with an older version you may not
be able to correctly open files saved with a newer version. We guar-
antee the compatibility of the files to the newest but not to the older
versions.
Manual
4
Installation
Manual
The parallel Hardlock-Key (Dongle) 4.3 1
4.3 The parallel Hardlock-Key (Dongle)

The CadnaA-dongle can be either put on the parallele or on the serial port. Hardlock plug
The plug sides are indicated correspondingly. (Dongle) parallel/
seriel 4.3.0
* Please pay attention - do not plug on the dongle if your computer
is switched on! 4
Usually the dongle is plugged in the parallel port without any problemes.
Should that not be, you may use the serial port - Com1 or Com 2. But in
this case you have to make some additional settings in the AUTO-
EXEC.BAT as follows:
) open start menu|settings|control panel|system or the analogous

menus
) in Device manager double-click on ports (Com and Lpt).
Device manager in the system menu
Manual
2
The parallel Hardlock-Key (Dongle)
) Choose the desired port on which you want to plug the dongle e.g.
Com1 and afterwards the bottom Options.
) In register Ressources look up the entry for the I/O adress e.g. 03f8
- afterwards quit the system control with Cancel.
4 .
Enter the I/O adress in the AUTOEXEC.BAT as follows:
) The AUTOEXEC.BAT is usually on the hard disc-drive \C. In Win-

dows-Explorer click on the file with the RIGHT mouse button and
choose Edit - the file opens.
) The input for the above example Com1 should be

SET HL_SEARCH=3f8s
Between SET and HL is a blank.
An eventual leading zero of the I/O entry has to be deleted and in any
case you have to attach an s behind the input.
Manual
The parallel Hardlock-Key (Dongle) 4.3 3
) Save the AUTOEXEC.BAT and restart your computer.

For Windows NT or Windows 2000 or higher set the environment variable Hint for Windows NT/
HL_SEARCH via Controll Panel|System|Environment. Windows 2000
Manual
4
The parallel Hardlock-Key (Dongle)
Manual
The Server Hardlock-Key 4.4 1
4.4 The Server Hardlock-Key

You may use a server license either on a computer which is only a server
but not a computer working place or on a computer working place which
is also simultaneously a server. The type of use has to be declared if you
purchase a server license so that the hardlock-key can be configured cor-
rectly. 4
1. Plug the server hardlock-key on the parallele interface or an USB key Windows
on the USB interface of the server. 95/98/NT/2000/XP 4.4
2. On the server log in as administrator (WinNT/2000 or higher) if

necessary.
3. Insert the CadnaA-CD in the CD drive of your server and change to
the folder SUPPORT\HARDLOCK\HLSERVER.
4. Double-click on the file HLSW32.EXE.
5. The installation of the server hardlock starts - during the installation,
state the folder in which the server hardlock should be installed.
6. Confirm the further installation questions.
7. If the installation has been finished you have to install the monitor
program, too. Double-click on the AKSMON32.EXE which is loca-
ted in the stated folder. If you execute the monitor program the follo-
wing dialog appears:
Manual
2
The Server Hardlock-Key
Start dialog of the HL-Server administrator
The program is now searching in the net for the hardlock-key. The server
should be found and displayed e.g. servername_local. Mark the server
name and insert one of the following applicable numbers
Server is not working place: 1908
Server is working place: 1907
CadnaA-Calc-Hardlock1 1912
) Confirm with Add and quit the program.
The hardlock monitor program must not run to use CadnaA’s server licen-
ses. After configuration it only shows a history of how many computer are
loged in and how many licenses are used.
After all this you may log out as administrator.
1. With CadnaA-Calc you cannot insert or edit objects - its only a multiuser calculation
licence.
Manual
Language 4.5 1
4.5 Language
CadnaA is multi lingual. For the time being you may operate the program
in either German, English, Italian or French. Please asked for the current
languages. You can see the languages in the menu Option|Language.
The language option depends also on the level you have purchased.
4
But at the moment manuals and online help are only available in German
or English. Asked about the current state.
When CadnaA is started, it automatically selects the language correspon-
ding to the country setting in the Windows system. This setting is also the
default setting for CadnaA. If a language not available in CadnaA is re-
quired, the program will be started in English.
In Options|Language, click the language in which you wish to run Change Language
CadnaA. Then terminate the program and start CadnaA again. The selec-
tion of language is active now.
Manual
2
Language
Manual
The Main Window of CadnaA 4.6 1
4.6 The Main Window of CadnaA

Double-clicking the program icon on the Windows Program Manager or a Starting
single click on the Cadna_A entry on the Start menu of the Windows ope-
rating system starts CadnaA and opens the main window.
Main Window
4
On the main window, all objects can be entered and edited using mouse, Parallel working with
keyboard, and digitizer in parallel. Inserting an object at the same time cre- mouse, keyboard or
digitizer
ates a new data record in the pertinent object list (Tables menu).
Dialogs, edit dialogs, and also the toolbox can be re-arranged on the desk-
top by positioning the mouse pointer on the upper edge of the box while
pressing the right mouse button. Now drag the box to the desired position
with the mouse button held down.
Manual
2
The Main Window of CadnaA
Icons CadnaA features icons, so-called shortcuts, which, when being clicked,
immediately trigger the function they represent.
For most icons, the pertinent function is indicated on the status bar in the
lower-left corner of the CadnaA main window as long as the mouse poin-
ter is positioned on that icon with the left mouse button held down (see
also Help text under Show Icon Bar).
4
For users yet unfamiliar with handling menus, dialogs, scroll bars, or sys-
tem menus, it is recommended you go through the respective chapters in
the Windows manual.
Status Bar The status bar runs horizontally along the bottom of the CadnaA main
window.
If, with the left mouse button held down, the mouse pointer is positioned
on an icon from the icon bar or from the toolbox, information about the
pertinent function will appear on the left side of the status bar.
As the mouse pointer is moved across the screen, the right site on the sta-
tus bar will show the coordinates and, after a calculation, also the levels
(L) calculated and, if applicable, also the ground hight (G), for that point
which the mouse pointer is currently positioned on.
The status bar can be turned on and off via the Options menu by clicking
the menu item Show Status Bar.
Manual
Icon Bar 4.7 1
4.7 Icon Bar

The icon bar can be turned on and off by clicking Options|Show Icon
Bar. Following icons are available:
Scale list box to set the desired scale by selection
from the list or by entering a user-defined value.
4
To select a scale, click the arrow.
Listbox to choose and to display an existing variant
Listbox to choose an evaluation parameter which has

been defined before in menu Calculation|Configura-
tion
Opens an existing file
Save file
Print graphic
Exports result log according to settings in the

template file
Copies contents, Section or selected object from the CadnaA

main window to the clipboard
Triggers calculation according to specified configuration for

specified receiver points (for calculation of the receiver point
grid, click Grid|Calculate Grid)
n/a: see listbox for output parameter further above
Manual
2
Icon Bar
Menu calibrated digitizer

4
Fix objects
Display Bitmap
Help-Cursor for topic related help
Opens online help menu
Manual
The Toolbox 4.8 1
4.8 The Toolbox

Generating and inserting various sources and objects is a piece of cake
thanks to the toolbox feature.
The toolbox is part of the CadnaA main window and contains the icons re-
presenting the different object types. It can be re-arranged on the desktop
4
as you like. To this end, click its upper border with the LEFT mouse button
and hold the button depressed while moving the mouse to a different posi-
tion on the window. When you have reached the desired position, release
the mouse button.
An object type is activated by clicking the desired icon, or, if available, by
pressing the pertinent hotkey, i. e. the CTRL KEY plus the respective letter
key at the same time.
Toolbox
Manual
2
The Toolbox
Toolbox Icons Instead of activating a feature by clicking the pertinent icon, some icons
can also be accessed via hotkeys. In this case, you have to press the CONT-
ROL KEY, designated Ctrl or Strg depending on the keyboard used, plus the
respective letter key at the same time. If such a hotkey exists, it is indica-
ted below the icon it belongs to.
4
3) 1) 1)
Edit Mode Zoom + Zoom - Zoom all

(CTRL+e)
1) 2) 2) 2)
Point Source General Line Source Horizontal Area Vertical Area

(CTRL+q) (CTRL+l) Source Source
(CTRL+f)
2) 1) 2) 2)
Road (CTRL+s) Crossing with Traffic Parking Lot Railway

Lights (CTRL+a) (CTRL+p) (CTRL+b)
2)
1) 2) 1) + 2)
Tennis Point of Optimisable Area Power Plant 3D-Reflector

Service Source Source
2) 2) 2) 2)
Building Barrier (CTRL+w) Bridge Ground

(CTRL+h) Absorption
2) 2) 2) 2)
Built-up Area Foliage Contour Line Fault Line
Manual
The Toolbox 4.8 3
4) 2)
Cylinder embankment vertical Grid
1) 1) 2) 2)
4
Receiver Point Building Evaluation Calculation Area Designated
(CTRL+i) Land Use
3) 1) 3) 3)
Insert Bitmap Level Box Text Box Section
2) 3) 1)
Auxiliary Polygon Symbol Station Mark
* Note: The numbers in brackets indicate which method of positioning

the object is used (see Online help keyword: Inserting objects).
Manual
4
The Toolbox
Manual
CadnaA Menues 4.9 1
4.9 CADNAA Menues

In CadnaA, selecting some menu items causes functions to be executed
immediately while selecting other menu items opens a dialog. When you
choose an item followed by ellipses (...), a dialog appears. A hotkey is of-
ten indicated next to a menu item. Using this hotkey allows you to access
the pertinent command without having to open the menu first. 4
By means of the identification letters (underlined letters), you can call Keyboard 4.9.0
CadnaA menu items from the keyboard as follows: Hold ALT KEY down,
type identification letter of the menu in question, release ALT KEY, and
then type only the identification letter of the desired command. If, for ex-
ample, you wish to select the Save command, press ALT+F at the same
time (File menu opens), release both keys, and then type s for Save (docu-
ment is saved).
But it is not only menu items that can be accessed from the keyboard. The-
re are also some frequently used icons in the toolbox which can be activa-
ted by using a hotkey. To this end, hold down the Control (CTRL) key and
type the respective letter.
Manual
2
CadnaA Menues
Manual
Mouse Buttons 4.10 1
4.10 Mouse Buttons

* "Click" means to press and release a mouse button once.
"Double-click" means to rapidly press and release the LEFT mouse
button twice.
4
To select an option, execute a command, select an object, or activate an Click with Left Mouse
object icon, place the mouse pointer on that option, icon, command, or, in Button
the graphic representation, on the border or the centreline of an object or

line object and click the mouse button.
Unless you are instructed otherwise, mouse actions always refer to the left
button. If you are left-handed, or the mouse was configured differently, use
the appropriate button instead.
CadnaA features dialogs with lists where you can highlight and select se- Multiple Selections
veral rows at the same time.
Click the desired row using the LEFT mouse button. Clicking a different Selecting one row:
row deselects the one selected before.
Click the first row using the left mouse button, press and hold down SHIFT Selecting several consecu-
while clicking the last row to be selected. All rows lying in between are tive rows:
highlighted and selected as well.

Press and hold down the CTRL key while clicking the desired rows. Selecting several rows in
an arbitrary sequence:
Double-clicking an existing object or a data record in a table opens the Double-click with Left
pertinent Edit Object dialog where you can enter the relevant parameters. Mouse Button
Clicking with the right mouse button means to rapidly press and release Click with Right Mouse
the right mouse button. Depending on which mode you are working in, Button
using the right mouse button has two different effects.
Manual
2
Mouse Buttons
* When using the mouse to insert an object in the CadnaA main win-
dow, clicking with the right mouse button
- terminates the insertion mode for the object presently entered and
- again with a subsequent click with the Right mouse key on the
object the edit dialog opens.
4
Edit mode * In the edit mode when the right mouse button is used to click on an
existing object or a data record in a table, a context menu appears (for
more information see online help keyword: context menu).
Wheelmouse If you are owner of a wheel mouse (a mouse with two keys and a wheel in
the middle of them) you may use the wheel to zoom in and out of your
graphic display very quickly.
Manual
Control Elements 4.11 1
4.11 Control Elements
Option Button 4.11.0
Option buttons are control elements indicating whether a condition is true

or false. If true = yes, a black dot appears in the option button. The mouse
pointer is used for activation/deactivation. Within one set of options, only 4
one option can be active at one time.
Check Box 4.11.0
Check boxes are control elements indicating whether a condition is true or

false. When the check box is activated, an X or ü appears in the square, in-
dicating that the condition is true (active). Otherwise, the condition is false
(inactive).
List Box/
Combobox 4.11.0
A list box contains a list of data of which only one value can apply. The
value selected will be displayed in the list box, and the selected option is
thus activated. In combobox, you can either select a value or enter a user-
defined one.
To make the list drop down, click the arrow to the right of the box.
In some cases, like in the example above, you will find an option button
next to the list box. Click this first to activate the list box.
Manual
2
Control Elements
Manual
Save Settings 4.12 1
4.12 Save Settings

If Options|Save Settings is clicked in the current version, the following
settings will be saved for later sessions of CadnaA:
• options for the exporting of DXF files;
• printing options as well as header/footer entries for the printed reports;
• showing or hiding of icon and status bar. 4
If you prefer non-standard settings for your work which may not be pos-
sible to save - like e. g. a different palette for the legend of color-level, se-
veral calculation configurations etc. - these settings can still be retained
for easy access by a prototyp file .
Manual
2
Save Settings
Manual
Help 4.13 1
4.13 Help
While you are working with CadnaA, Help is always just one click away. Online Help System
To call Help
) Press F1 (or click the Help icon on the icon bar), or 4
) Click the Help cursor on the icon bar: The mouse pointer turns into
the Help pointer icon. Now click any menu item, or
) On any dialog box, click the command button “Help”.
1. In the help menu, select the Search command (or click the “Search” Finding a Topic in the
register in the online help). CadnaA opens the Search dialog box. Online Help System
2. Enter the first letter of the topic to be found. During the entry, new
index items are displayed in the list box.
3. Double-click that index item which corresponds to the desired topic
(or select the index item and press the ENTER key). The online help
displays further topics, if any, referring to this index item.
Users who are not yet familiar with Help, please refer to the Windows ma-
nual for further information, or in CadnaA, select the Use Help option on
the HELP menu.
* The Help texts may not yet be up to date! We trust in your kind
understanding - CadnaA is subject to constant progress.
Manual
2
Help
Manual
Quick start 4.14 1
4.14 Quick start

To get familiar with the main basic function of CadnaA, we recommend
you work with the examples offered in this chapter. By doing so you will
insert your first objects by mouse, change their data and dimensions in the
graphic presentation, execute calculations and create noise maps among
other things. 4
Of course you have more possibilities to insert objects in CadnaA than
only by mouse, like
• digitizing from a plan with a usual digitizer with MS Windows inter-
face
• input of the object coordinates via keyboard
• importing digital data using different formats e.g. for graphic files like
DXF, different GIS formats like AtlasGis, ArcView, Sicad, Windput
DGM and of course each CadnaA-file. You may also import data via
ODBC-database interfaces like MS-Access, MS-Excel, FoxPro etc. If
necessary ask for the actual interfaces.
Particularly for big projects these input possibilities minimize the expen-
diture considerably.
* You will find the example files on your CD-Rom in the directory
MANUAL|SAMPLES|04_Quickstart. For comfortable working,
copy them onto your hard disc.
) Now start CadnaA by double-clicking the program icon on your

desktop or by clicking the corresponding start menu buttom|pro-
gram|cadnaa if necessary. The CadnaA main window opens.
Manual
2
Quick start
Manual
Chapter 4.14 Quick start
3D-Special-View 4.14.1 1
4.14.1 3D-Special-View
At first - test your computer to see if all components are installed correctly
and completely to work properly with CadnaA.
Therefore open the file Racingcourse.cna by double-clicking its name in Racingcourse.cna
File|Open.. 4
The open file Racingcours.cna
The file Racingcourse.cna contains some objects which are accessible in

CadnaA like roads, bridges, contour lines and points, embankments,
screens etc. We come back to it later. Now, see what performance your
computer has.
) With the RIGHT Mouse key click once on the middle axis of the road
or on the auxiliary polygon which is drawn over the road axis. As
shown in the following picture a context menu opens with a function
Manual
2
4.14.1 Chapter 4.14 Quick start
3D-Special-View
refering to this object „Road“.
In the edit mode if an object is marked with a Right mouse click a context menu opens with a
different function suitable to the marked object.
) Choose the function 3D (Special) by clicking the same-named com-

mand once.
Now it could be that you have to wait for some seconds till the 3D-special
window opens. How long it needs depends among other things on the di-
mension of the project file, on your RAM or on the quality of your gra-
phic card. Your graphic card should have a 3D accelerator in any case.
Now you will find out exactly how it works.
Manual
You should not wait longer than about 3 seconds till your 3D-special win-
dow opens. If is takes longer then we recommend purchasing a new gra-
phic card with a 3D accelerator. The newer cards will have it any way.
The file Racingcourse.cna with opened 3D-special win-

dow default placed in the upper left corner.
If necessary maximize the 3D-special window by clicking on the equiva- Maximize

lent icon in the upper right corner. Then the window expands to the size of
your screen. You may also enlarge or reduce the window using the mouse.
) Press the RETURN-key - now you are driving through this szenario
with a speed of 100 km/h and a camera position 1 m above the road.
Is this not the case - you should „arm“ your computer so that you can take
advantage of the CadnaA’s powerful performance.
Incidentally - you do not need to wait until your trip stops. You may force Esc stops
that by pressing the RETURN-key. From the stopped position you may now
Manual
4
3D-Special-View
go further by using the arrow keys from your numeric keyboard. With the-
se keys you can navigate through the szenario independently.
Numeric keyboard:
- Key 8 and 2 ahead or back
- Key 4 and 6 left or right turn
4 - Key 9 and 3 upward or downward
- Key 5 back to the starting position
- Key 7 vertical upward
- Key 1 vertical downward
For more information see manual chapter 13.14 "3D-Special View".
With this view you are able to check the correctness of your project model-
ling and see all objects with acoustic relevance which are taken into ac-
count for a calculation.
In the 3D-Special view you may also double-click on an object to open the
edit dialog for this object and if necessary to change its data.
Try and change a parameter in the edit dialog in the 3D-Special view like
the following example:
) Drive through the 3D-Special view - start with the RETURN-key and
stop pressing the ESC-key after passing the first bridge close to both
noise protection walls (barriers). If necessary use the arrow keys to
attain the right position.
As you may recognize the center of the left barrier seems to hang in
the air - there is no connection to the ground. Obviously this is an
error and has to be corrected.
Manual
) For that double-click on the left barrier - the edit dialog of the barrier
should open.
The edit dialog Barrier - the barrier is activated as a floa-

ting screen with a z-extent of 3 m.
) Inadvertently the barrier was defined as a floating screen. Correct

this by clicking on the same-named checkbox to deactivate this
option (no hook).
Manual
6
3D-Special-View
) Afterwards confirm by clicking on the OK button. The edit dialog

closes.
Now, the noise protection wall stands correct on the ground.
Try another point of view:
4 3D-CENTER ) If necessary activate the auxiliary polygon named „3D-CENTER“

(its the doted gray line) by double-clicking it. In the edit dialog click
on the IDs checkbox. The ID must turn black. Close the Window
with OK.
) With the mouse cursor point on the pink circle and press the RIGHT
mouse button and select 3D-Special from the context menu.
If you press return you will „fligh“ around on the circle always with
the gaze on the bridge.
* If you enter the expression „3D-CENTER“ in an auxiliary polygons

ID field you will always look in the direction of its first polygon
point without any matter on which object you have started the com-
mand 3D-Special View.
If you start the 3D-Special command on the road again while the „3D-
CENTER“ polygon is still activated you will then suddenly „drive“ for-
ward, backwards and sidewards on the road because your view is always
in direction of the bridge. Just try it.
Close Window ) Close the 3D-Special window by clicking on the closing-icon and the
program by clicking File|Exit.
Hereby you have made your first excursion with CadnaA. We hope you
enjoyed it.
Do not be discouraged if your trip was not as exciting as it should have
been because your hardware was not fast enough - you may change that.
It would be best if you went on now with the next exercise.
Manual
Insert a Road 4.14.2 1
4.14.2 Insert a Road
Start CadnaA or - in case it is still open - click File|New.

Now you enter your first object on your own - a road.
) For that point to the car icon in the toolbox and click. 4
After clicking you are in the Insert mode. The mouse pointer is dragging
the Car icon.
) Position the mouse pointer on that point where your road is supposed
to begin and use the LEFT mouse button to click. A line suspended
from the mouse pointer like a rubber band then allows you to define a
road as you wish. For each change of direction, insert a new point by
pressing the LEFT mouse button again. After the last point has been
defined, the insertion is completed by pressing the Right mouse but-
ton.
* The inserted points of the road define only the road course - the
acoustical subdivision occurs separately during calculation.
Manual
2
Insert a Road
An inserted marked in the Edit mode
* An inserted graphic object is also inserted in the object table as a data

record automatically (menu Tables|Sources).
Manual
If an object is inserted a hook appears on the corresponding table descripti-

on (see the above picture).
When the road has been inserted correctly,
) click the Edit Mode icon (or CTRL+E). This mode allows you to edit Edit Mode
any inserted object.
) In the Edit mode, double-click the polygon line or the centreline of

the inserted road. The edit dialog appears.
* In the Edit mode if you make a double click on an object in CadnaA

the corresponding edit dialog of this object opens. It contains all data
for an object.
Another alternative is to click on the object with the RIGHT mouse
key once directly after entering the object (Insert mode) to open the
edit dialog. In that case, after closing the edit dialog, you are still in
the Insert mode. Therefore you do not need to change in the Edit
Manual
4
Insert a Road
mode if you only want to edit object parameters.

In the edit dialog in some text boxes you may enter data by choosing
them in the list boxes, by others you enter them from the keyboard by
typing the desired value.
Road edit dialog according to the German standard RLS90
* The appearance of the edit dialogs and the possible entries are
adjusted to the chosen country’s respective standards. You may spec-
ify this in Calculation|Configuration|Tab Country. The descrip-
tion of the chosen standard appears in the dialog header. If necessary
complete the textboxes accordingly.
Card Index ) Click the Card Index icon to the right of the SCS/Dist. (m) text box.
Another dialog box opens, allowing you to select either the width of
the road by clicking the relevant standard cross section or to enter eit-
her the distance of the centerlines of the outer lanes or the total width
of road from curb to curb.
Manual
* The line source of a road is always the centerlines of the outer lanes.
In the menu Options|Appearance you can choose if e.g. an additio-

nal width for the curbs should be displayed or not.
) Choose the value b2 by clicking on it. Now it is marked.

4
If the desired value is not visible use the scroll bar or the arrow keys on
your keyboard. While using the arrow keys (UP, DOWN) of your keyboard
to select an SCS value, holding the DOWN key or UP key depressed will
cause the display to show the eligible road cross sections continuously as
in a movie.
) Confirm your choice with OK.
The dialog Cross Section closes and the chosen value is entered in the edit
dialog of the road. Alternatively you may also enter an arbitrary value in
the SCS/Dist. (m) text box of the edit dialog Road.
) To get training just enter all data as showed in the edit dialog. You
may enter the emission values Lm,E either directly or by activating
the „Counts“ values of the MDTD (mean daily traffic density).
* Please watch how the emission values are continuously adapted as

individual parameters are modified. This edit dialog is a “highly con-
Manual
6
Insert a Road
densed” version of the national guideline for the calculation of traffic

noise.
L01.cna ) Having entered all data, click OK to close this dialog box.
Road after entering a distance
CadnaA contains additional objects, with the object road you can use:
• Bridge (see chapter 9.6) and

• Barrier (see chapter 9.5) for a noise protection wall on roads or rail-
ways or
• the Floating Screen (see chapter 9.5.1) as noise protection wall on a
bridge and
• the Mound/Embankment (see chapter 9.7).
You will find further information in the online help or in the manual see
chapter 9.6.1 Entering a Bridge.
Also pay attention to the mentioned objects in the file Racingcourse.cna in
the 3D-special view.
Manual
Model of a bridge in CadnaA in Options|3D-View without hidden edges
Manual
8
Insert a Road
Manual
Receiver Point Calculation 4.14.3 1
4.14.3 Receiver Point Calculation
After you have inserted a road insert an receiver point at a distance of L02.cna
about 20 m.
* Different from the receiver points in a grid for the individual receiver
4
points you may save all interim results from a calculation in a file.
To define a certain distance you may use a polygon and give it the desired
length. Auxiliary polygon
) Therefore draw a vertical line (a line with only two points) from the
middle axis of the road using the Auxiliary polygon.
) Change to the Edit mode and click on the Auxiliary polygon with
the RIGHT mouse key. Edit Mode
) From the opening context menu choose Set Length and enter the
value 20. Close the dialog by confirming with OK.
) At the end of the line now insert the receiver point. Therefore at first
click on the corresponding icon in the toolbox and then on the end of Receiver point
the Auxiliary polygon.
Manual
2
Receiver Point Calculation
) Subsequently click with the RIGHT mouse key on the border of the
receiver point - the edit dialog opens.
) Enter a Name and a Standard Level. Therefore activate the same-

named option.
4 * If you have entered a Standard Level then, after a calculation, you

will see at once whether the level has been exceeded or not. In case
the level has been exceeded in the graphics view the receiver point
changes its color to red. The excess value will be indicated in the
corresponding field.
You also have the possibility to select standard levels from a list
which are pre-defined by the user in the menu Options|Land Use
(e.g. different types of land use, like residential area, industry area,
spa or health resort etc.) Furthermore you may determine if the stan-
dard or maximum level regards only, e.g., road or railway traffic, or
industry, or if it concerns all noise types together.
) You reach the coordinates of the receiver point after clicking on the
Geometry button.
Point Geometry dialog
Manual
Receiver Point Calculation 4.14.3 3
For all objects you may determine if the height refers to

• relative to the height ground
• absolute
• roof
the object is situated e.g. 2 m above another object in whose layout it is
located (e.g. a ventilator on a building).
4
) Now start the calculation via the Calculator icon on the icon bar Calculator
) Afterwards open the edit dialog for the receiver point by double-cli- Edit mode
cking its contour. In the dialog you will see the results and eventually
an exceeded value.
* If the noise emission of a source is entered spectrally then the sound

pressure level at the receiver point is also calculated, evaluated and
indicated spectrally.
* The sound pressure level of a receiver point caused by an individual

source is called Partial level.
The Partial level button in the dialog of the receiver point shows all
sound levels from all sources at the concerned receiver point. The list
of Partial Levels in the menu Tables|Partial Level also shows all
Manual
4
Receiver Point Calculation
sound levels from all sources but for each reciever point. The list of
partial levels results, e.g., in an efficient ranking of noise protection
measures.
Manual
Insert a Barrier 4.14.4 1
4.14.4 Insert a Barrier
After inserting a road and an receiver point you should now do something L03.cna
against the noise from the road. Build a noise protection wall. Therefore
) with the RIGHT mouse key click once on the middle axis of the road. Edit Mode
4
Remember, for that you have to be in the Edit mode. The context
menu opens. Click on the Paralell Object command. The same-
named dialog opens.
* In the Edit mode one click with the RIGHT mouse key on an object
opens a context menu with different functions suitable to the marked
object.
Manual
2
Insert a Barrier
) With a click select Barrier from the list. To open the list click on the
arrow on the right hand side of the Object box.
Left or Right of the object refer to the viewing direction from the
starting to the end point. The distance screen - road axis and height
can be entered.
) Enter the data as above and confirm with OK. The dialog closes and
you can see the result on the screen.
A road section with a parallel screen
Manual
With the Zoom icons + or - from the toolbox you can easily modify the Zoom
scale of the representation on the screen.
) Select an option by clicking the respective icon and use the left
mouse button to click the position which is supposed to remain
unchanged while the scale is modified. The scale changes by a factor
of 2 with each click. When you use the right mouse button, the scale 4
changes in the opposite direction.
) You may also blow up an arbitrary detail of your representation on

the screen by clicking the Zoom + icon and pulling a rectangle over
the area in question.
This is usually done by pressing the left mouse button with the mouse
pointer positioned on the first corner of the area and sliding the
mouse to the opposite corner with the mouse button held down. Use
the right mouse button to undo these steps.
Enlarged detail
After clicking the tool zomm limits the whole limits will be shown in your Zoom
CadnaA window. By pressing the SHIFT-key simultaneously the scale will
be adapted so that you see all objects in the CadnaA window but not obli-
gatorily the complete limits. In this way you can navigate very quickly th-
rough your object.
) Just try it.
) Afterwards switch to the Edit mode and double-click the screen. The Edit Mode
object edit dialog opens.
Manual
4
Insert a Barrier
Screen edit dialog
Card Intex ) You may enter either the reflection loss in decibels or the absorption
coefficient separately for each side. Again, left and right refer to the
viewing direction from the starting point to the end point. Pre-set
values for different surfaces are available via the Card Index icon.
* You may also enter the name of an existing frequency spectrum in the
project database.
For more information see online help, keyword: Libraries.
The co-ordinates are always reached via the Geometry button. Double
click one set of coordinates - all edit features are now available. Even if
you want to change the height of each coordinate point you can do so. For
that you just activate the option absolute Height at every Point. If the ab-
solute heights of some coordinates are unknown, just clear the edit field by
deleting the values (it must be empty). After closing the dialog CadnaA
now interpolates the value between the known heights. Modify any value
and, after closing the dialog by clicking OK, watch how the result is dis-
played on the screen
Manual
Object geometry dialog
* In CadnaA all tables are synchronized with graphics - e.g. if you are
editing a coordinate point in the dialog Geometry the corresponding
point in the graphics is flashing simultaneously. In this way you
always know where you are.
If necessary close the Geometry dialog and move the edit dialog so
that you can see the polygon points of the screen after opening the
dialog. Watch these while you scroll through the coordinate table by
using the arrow keys. Each point flasches as soon as the data record is
marked.
Manual
6
Insert a Barrier
The flashing polygon point and the marked data record
You may, of course, also edit the barrier graphically:
) Select the barrier, then move or delete any polygon point with the
mouse button held down, or insert a new polygon point (press the
CTRL key and click the desired new point) until you get the desired
course..
Deleting a polygon Press CTRL+SHIFT key (a minus icon is dragged onto the mouse pointer)
point: and click on the desired point.
Inserting a polygon Press CTRL key (a plus icon is dragged on the mouse pointer) and click on
point: the desired point.
For more information see either online help, keyword: Polygon Point or
manual Chapter 5.4 "Editing graphic Objects"
Manual
To insert a barrier in an arbitrary location, first click the Screen icon, then
click the desired points of the screen polygon line.
Update the calculation with a click on the Calculator icon in the icon bar.
If you followed the example your standard level should not be exceeded
anymore and the colour of your receiver point should be black again.
4
By default CadnaA always calculates the day- and night-time levels si-
multaneously and displays the results for the day-time in the graphic pre- Day- and Night-
sentation. If you switch to the night-levels by clicking on the time Levels
corresponding icon in the icon bar or vice-versa, the colour of the noise
map or the colour of the receiver point changes normally because e.g. you
may have defined a different pre-set standard level for the night-time.
) Try it - switch to the night-time presentation by clicking on the corre-

sponding icon.
As you may see, the receiver point discoloured to red again and
shows that the pre-set standard level has been exceeded for the night-
time.
) In menu Calculation|Protocol turn on the protocol by activating the

corresponding checkbox. In that case all interim results will be recor-
ded if you execute the calculation again.
Manual
8
Insert a Barrier
) Afterwards look at the protocol by clicking on Calculation|Proto-

col|Print|Preview.
For more information see online help, keyword: Protocol.
) Try also again the 3D-special view as described in the first chapter.
4 Use the road to execute the function.
Right mouse click on the middle axis of the road and

choose 3D-special view from the context menu.
Manual
Insert a Building 4.14.5 1
4.14.5 Insert a Building
Buildings are inserted in the same manner as the objects mentioned before.
) Click on the Building icon in the toolbox.
Click the corner points to have the building contour drawn. Contrary 4
to „Road“ and „Screen“, buildings are closed polygon lines: When
you finish the insertion by pressing the right mouse button or the
RETURN key, the line is closed automatically by connecting the end
point to the starting point. As you are still in the “Insert Building
mode”, you may now insert further buildings.
Buildings may be shaped arbitrarily. To insert rectangular buildings, also
hold the SHIFT key down while sliding the mouse. After each click, you
may then continue the polygon at right angles only.
* To generate a rectangular building, you should always start with one

of the longer sides and hold down the SHIFT key while inserting it.
) As customary, insert the first, second and third point with the SHIFT
key held down by pointing to the respective positions and clicking.
Now position the mouse pointer, not on the fourth corner to be inser-
ted, but on the first one already inserted while still holding the SHIFT
key down. The fourth point is thus inserted at the right position, and
you may close the polygon line to form a rectangle by pressing the
RIGHT mouse button.
Manual
2
Insert a Building
4
Four polygon points which have to be inserted for a
closed rectangle polygon. A right mouse click matches
the last point with the first one automatically.
) Just try it.
Even if you insert nothing but right angles by constantly holding the
SHIFT key down, you will be able to generate any complex/complicated
ground plan for a building with as many projections, oriels, and courtyards
as you like.
ground plan for a building 3D-View

with multiple edges (menu Options)
) Having inserted the building, switch to the edit mode and double-
click on the edge of the building. The Building’s edit dialog opens.
Manual
Insert a Building 4.14.5 3
The building edit dialog
Behind the button Geometry you will find the coordinates of your buil-
ding. Here you may also enter the building height.
) Click the Geometry button and enter the building Height e.g.
11,50 m. After you have entered all parameters of your first building,
close the dialog by clicking OK. The building should still be selec-
ted.
* In CadnaA you can „build“ houses and define them as sources by

drawing the plan ground, entering a building height and, in closing,
you just assign emission levels for the facades, caused by indoor lev-
els with the possibility to assign a sound reduction loss. This is a par-
ticularly helpful tool for trade enterprises and industrial plants.
For more information see online help, keyword: Generate Building or
in manual chapter 9.3.4 "Generate a Building".
Moreover you have another object - the Cylinder. With this object
you can create tanks, cauldrons and other cylindrical buildings. You
just enter their radius and height. They also have a shielding and
reflecting effect.
For more information see online help, keyword: Cylinder or manual
chapter 9.4 "The Cylinder".
Manual
4
Insert a Building
Manual
Duplicate Objects 4.14.6 1
4.14.6 Duplicate Objects
Next you generate from one building a whole housing estate.

) Open the file L04.cna. L04.cna
) Mark the building by clicking it in the Edit mode. 4
) Point with the mouse pointer on the border of the building and press
the RIGHT mouse button. Again, the context menu appears. Now
select Duplicate.
The Building context menu
A dialog box opens where you may define the number of objects in the
vertical and horizontal direction and the spacings between them.
Manual
2
Duplicate Objects
) Enter the parameter from the above dialog box and confirm with OK.
L05.cna The selected object has been multiplied according to the numbers you en-
tered. The parameters you entered for the first building - e.g. building
height 11,50 m - also apply to the other buildings. You are now able to
quickly realise your urban development ideas.
Just select any buildings and move or delete them (using the DEL key) as
you please.
Manual
Duplicate Objects 4.14.6 3
* Instead of duplicating objects you can copy them separately. For this
you will find more information in the online help, keyword: Copy
Objects.
Delete a selected object by pressing the DEL key or selecting the Delete
option on the context menu.
4
In CadnaA you have the command Undo. With this feature you may undo
what has been deleted up to 32 times.
Manual
4
Duplicate Objects
Manual
Import Objects 4.14.7 1
4.14.7 Import Objects
Maybe you have noticed that the receiver point is missing in the file L05.cna
L04.cna. After duplicating the buildings, we have saved this project in file
L05.cna. We now use this one for the following example. Please open the
file and proceed analogously if necessary.
4
Among other formats you can also import complete CadnaA files or only
parts of it or just one specific object type.
Now you will import only the receiver point from the file L03.cna into the
file L05.cna. Therefore
) open the file L05.cna and the menu File|Import.
) Choose the format type CadnaA and afterwards the filename

L03.cna and finally click on the Optionen button.
) Activate the option as shown in the above figure and confirm with
OK. The reciever point will then be imported.
Manual
2
Import Objects
If you like, try the other formats as well. Use the example files for that.
The option dialog for the import changes depending on the file format you
choose.
Manual
Edit Objects 4.14.8 1
4.14.8 Edit Objects
To stretch or squeeze an object, or to scale it, the Edit mode must be acti- Edit mode
vated. Depending on the object in question the edit mode will be activated
as Polygon Point Mode (for line sources, area sources, barriers, buildings)
or as Stretching Mode (level boxes and text boxes). 4
If the polygon mode is activated, switch to the stretching mode using the
TAB key and select the object by clicking its edge. Then position the
mouse pointer on one of the small black markers on the lines or corners
around the selected object, press down and hold the mouse button.
The mouse pointer turns into a two-headed arrow. The entire object is
stretched or squeezed by moving the mouse in the desired direction. The
object size can be chosen arbitrarily.
Dragging a corner marker will scale the object (i. e. both dimensions are
multiplied by the same factor).
If you wish to modify the size of an object in discrete steps and/or symme-
trically, depress and hold the SHIFT key (symmetrical change) while drag-
ging the marker, or the CTRL key (change in discrete steps) or both of
these keys (symmetrical change in discrete steps).
In the polygon point mode, the object may be resized by moving any of the
polygon points.
Just try it:
) Mark a building by clicking and watch the edges. Press the TAB-key.
Keep pressing the mouse button and „pull“ a marker. Press again the
TAB-key and „pull“ once more a marker.
Manual
2
Edit Objects
* By the way - in the menu Options|Appearance you may change

colors, line widths and type and filling of the objects. Also the
appearance of deactivated objects may be decided.
For more information see online help „Change dimensions“ or manual Ka-
pitel 5.4 "Editing graphic Objects"
4
Manual
Grid Calculation 4.14.9 1
4.14.9 Grid Calculation
To get a representation of a colored noise map with line or areas of equal

sound level you have to calculate a grid of receiver points.
Under the menu item Options|Limits, you may enter the x- and y-coordi-
nates for the area to be represented graphically. 4
Limits dialog
When the grid calculation is started, CadnaA calculates the levels for each
receiver point in the relevant limits unless a calculation area was defined.
Thus, a calculation area is always smaller than the limits.
) Please watch the x- and y-co-ordinates in the dialog Limits and click
on the button Calc. After starting this command, the Limits is chan-
ged so that all objects are within this area.
* If you have started a calculation and some objects are outsite of the
limits CadnaA warns you and gives you the possibility to alter it.
To avoid calculation for a limits of 1 km² with the 2.600 receiver points of
the default setting we restrict the grid calculation to the area where you
have inserted your objects.
Manual
2
Grid Calculation
L06.cna ) Open the file L06.cna.
Calculation area ) Click on the Calculation Area icon. Then, in the usual “Cadna way”,
click the first corner of your calculation area and pull a borderline
around the area to be calculated by clicking each corner. The last cor-
ner need not be clicked, but you close this polygon by pressing the
4 Right mouse button.
CadnaA carries out a calculation for each receiver point within this area,
and displays the results either by lines or by areas of equal sound level.
The calculation area encloses the receiver points. Sound sources are taken
into account even if they lie outside the calculation area.
* You may also define several calculation areas and have them calcu-
lated simultaneously. You even can exclude areas inside calculation
areas from the calculation. This is maybe useful if on the factory site
Manual
itself the sound levels do not interest you but the vicinity to the
neighborhood. That saves calculation time.
) Choose Grid|Properties.
Here you may define the size and the height of the receiver grid.
Dialog Receiver Grid
The finer the grid, the more receiver points are defined, and the more time
is needed for the calculation.
* A bisection of the receiver point spacing quadrupled the calculation

time.
Check how fast your computer is by first having it calculate the 20-m grid
in the default setting. Then you may calculate with a denser grid.
) Close the dialog box by clicking OK, and trigger the calculation by
clicking the menu Grid|Calc grid.
Manual
4
Grid Calculation
* In menu Option|Misellaneous you may define if you want to see the

progress of calculation by clicking the corresponding option.
* The calculation may be aborted at any time by pressing the Stop but-
ton.
If you interruped the calculation in CadnaA you may continue at that
break point by pressing the SHIFT-key while you start the calculation
again.
On completion of the calculation, the graphic representation appears, sho-
wing either lines or areas of equal sound level, depending on the settings
Manual
you chose. As you move the mouse pointer across the calculated area, the
respective levels are displayed on the right side of the status bar.
You can select the settings for the layout of the noise map in the menu
Grid|Appearance.
Dialog Grid Appearence
) Just try out some settings: Switch from Lines of equal sound level to
Areas of equal sound level by selecting the relevant option. Change
the Class Width (dB) from 1 to 5 for Areas of equal sound level,
select Progressive Colours, etc.
* In CadnaA you can integrate the color-level-scale like a legend in the

graphic representation on the screen and for your prints.
The option Width of all ... allows you to provide the lines of equal
sound level with different line widths. You could have, e.g. all lines
of x5 dB (like 85 dB), or simply all lines, printed thicker. Change the
colours of the level classes by clicking the Colour button and
modifying the colours in the window which then opens, or by
modifying the level classes themselves (they can be edited).
Manual
6
Grid Calculation
Any change made on the Grid Appearance dialog will not become
effective until the dialog has been closed again.
Manual
dB-Level and Text Boxes 4.14.10 1
4.14.10 dB-Level and Text Boxes
At any time you may also display the sound level at a certain point by in- L06.cna
serting a Level-Box. That could be useful if you have defined lines of
equal sound levels for your presentation. But of course before you can in-
dicate sound levels you must have calculated a receiver grid. If you have
4
not yet done that, open the file L06.cna again, if necessary, and calculate a
grid as described in the above chapter.
) In menu Grid|Appearance activate the option lines of equal sound

levels. Confirm with OK.
) Now, in the toolbox click on the Level-Box icon and then on the Level-Box
desired point in your graphics - CadnaA indicates the sound level
value on this point in a box.
) Before you go on inserting more Level-Boxes switch to the Edit Edit mode
mode, click on the Level-Box contour and adopt the size and the lay-
out of it by pulling on the black marker with the mouse. Try also pul-
ling while pressing the SHIFT key.
Make a double-click on the border of the Level-Box - the edit dialog
opens - and change the font or the size of it, or just try some options.
* CadnaA transfers the parameter of the last inserted object to the next
inserted one of the same type. So you should modify the objects after
inserting the first one and then insert all others - that saves a lot of
time.
Manual
2
dB-Level and Text Boxes
Dialog Level box
Text Box The same applies to the text box but you have to enter the text on your
own. Try for yourself.
) However, you have to “draw” the text box first. Therefore you have
to click on that place where you want to have the upper left-hand cor-
ner of the text box, press the mouse button while you pull the mouse
to the lower right-hand corner and let the mouse button go.
) Change to the edit mode and double-click the edge of the Text Box.
The edit Text Box dialog opens. Now you may enter your text. If
done, confirm by clicking OK.
* All other inserted Text Boxes get the same outlook and size if you
just make one click - do not draw - on the desired position.
In CadnaA you may choose additional options for Level, Text and Sym-
bol Boxes as follows:
Manual
dB-Level and Text Boxes 4.14.10 3
• Angle (°) -Inserting a value in d e g r e e s causes the box/frame to be Symbol

rotated accordingly about its centre with respect to the x-axis. You may
enter positive and negative values.
• You may select the font and size for the labeling of objects.
• Box with or without a frame - if the Frame option is activated, the rec-
tangle will be framed and, at the same time, its area hides any objects
that may be lying underneath. If this option is deactivated, the rectan- 4
gle has no frame and is transparent. Any object underneath shows
through.
• Scale Dimensions - the dimensions of the box, the fonts or the symbol
will be scaled with the rest of the graphic representation on the screen.
• Up to 33.000 characters may be entered in a Text Box.
Manual
4
dB-Level and Text Boxes
Manual
Generate Floors 4.14.11 1
4.14.11 Generate Floors
If you want to look at the receiver points more particular you may calcula-
tate them in addition to the receiver grid.
) Open the file L06.cna. L06.cna
4
Now you may determine the noise level on several floors of a building.
Therefore you have to place receiver points at the building facade - we as-
sume a building height of 11,5 m.
) Click on the function Options|Object Snap and enter a Snap

Radius of 8 pixel.
With that you ensure that receiver points or sources at building faca-
des are not inadvertently placed inside the buildings.
* Point sources, vertical area sources and receiver points which are
positioned closer to a facade of a building than the specified snap
radius will be assigned to this facade and will be placed in front of it
at a distance defined in the edit box Distance Points Facade.
With that function other objects like roads or railways etc. can also be
seamlessly joined.
Manual
2
Generate Floors
For more information see online help, keyword: Object Snap or

manual chapter 13.5 "Object Snap".
) To close the dialog confirm with OK and activate the icon receiver
point from the toolbox. Position a receiver point on a building facade
by clicking.
4
) Change in the Edit mode and double-click the contour of the receiver
point - the edit dialog opens.
) Open the Geometry dialog by clicking on the same-named button

and enter a relative height of 2,20 m.
) To close the dialog confirm with OK again and enter a name for the
receiver point in the box Name, e.g. Im1 and a Standard Level of 50
dB for day-time and 40 dB for the night-time. Close the dialog by cli-
cking OK.
Dialog Receiver Point
Now generate the floors.
) Therefore click with the RIGHT instead of with the LEFT mouse but-
ton on the existing receiver point Im1. The context menu opens
Manual
again. Choose the option Generate Floors.
) Enter the values shown in the dialog box Generate Floors.
Generate Floors dialog from the context menu
) When the dialog box is left by clicking OK, CadnaA automatically L07.cna
generates three further floors, starting from the first receiver point,
with a spacing of 2,80 m each. It also appends the respective floor
number to the existing receiver point name, and enters the relevant
height.
) You may check this by selecting the receiver points table on the
Tables menu or just by clicking the key: i.
) Close the table and select the 3D-View on the Options menu. It
allows you to have receiver points represented graphically according
Manual
4
Generate Floors
to floors. When selecting this option, the horizontal projection is the

default setting.
) On the list box of the 3-D View dialog, select Isometric, and blow up
the relevant detail using the magnifier tool. Also try out other types
of representation.
4 You may also copy this representation to the clipboard and paste it in
another Windows application.
The views Isometric, Cavalier and Cabinet are projections at pre-

set angles - just check them out.
Under the general Parallel Projection you may specify arbitrary
angles under which you can look at the model. In this view you are
able to turn your project by means of the arrow keys on the numeric
keyboard. With the keys 9 and 3 you can modify angle Theta, the
keys 4 and 6 will modify angle Phi.
In 3D-view you can also reach the edit dialog by double-clicking on
the relevant object. To do this you have to be in the edit mode (click
on arrow icon).
Manual
* Also try the 3D-special view again from the context menu of the
road. (If necessary see chapter 13.14)
* Should the receiver points be too big either in the normal presenta-
tion or in one of the 3D views, you may change that.
Select Options|Appearance|receiver point and change the Symbol
Size from (mm) to (m). The symbol size is then adapted to the scale. 4
For more information see online help, keyword: Options Appea-
rance.
If you have generated the floors, execute a new calculation. Therefore
) if necessary, close all dialogs and click on the Calculator icon in the
icon bar.
Again, the noise levels calculated for each floor are listed on the menu Ta-
bles|Receiver points.
* The menu Tables|Partial Level shows a total list of all partial levels
at the receiver points of all sources. (In this example it is only a road).
Table of Partial Level from the menu Table
But of course you may also create user-defined result tables. For that see
chapter 15.3.
Manual
6
Generate Floors
Manual
Copy to the clipboard 4.14.12 1
4.14.12 Copy to the clipboard
All lists available on the Tables menu may be copied to the Windows clip-
board by clicking the Copy button. They may also be used in a different
Windows application (such as WORD, EXCEL etc.) e.g. for the preparati-
on of reports. (Direct printout from CadnaA is not implemented in the
4
demo version.)
* In CadnaA you may also duplicate just a single data record from the
table.
But copying to the clipboard by just one click and pasting in another Win-
dows application is also possible forSection
• the entire limits of the graphics (make sure no object is selcted),
• a section of the graphics - use the Section icon on the toolbox to draw
a box, switch to the edit mode and select the box - or
• an individual object: Just select the desired object.
Manual
2
Copy to the clipboard
Manual
Summary 4.14.13 1
4.14.13 Summary
Now you know how CadnaA works. You may apply it to all other objects:
1. Click on the desired icon in the toolbox.
2. Place the object accordingly on the screen using the LEFT mouse but-
4
ton.
3. The RIGHT mouse button finished the input.
4. You may also now click once with the Right mouse key or, as an
alternative, switch into the Edit mode and double-click the object.
In both cases the edit dialog opens but in the first case you remain in
the insertion mode and after closing the edit dialog you may insert
further objects of the same type without clicking the object icon
again.
Our little introduction for CadnaA is nearly finished. It would be good if
you could just play a little bit with the other sources and object types from
the toolbox, like point source, line source, area source, parking places and
contour lines.
* On the status line appears the name of the icon if you keep pressing
the LEFT mouse button while you point at the icon.
* In CadnaA you may calculate either with A-weighted-levels or in

frequency bands. Even a mixture is possible - if only for a few
sources the emission is a known frequency, the contribution to the
immission level will be defined in frequency bands.
Also try out the options on the context menu for the various inserted object
types.
1. For this purpose, in the Edit Mode use the RIGHT mouse button
instead of the LEFT one to select the existing object.
2. Choose then by clicking with the LEFT mouse button the desired
option.
Manual
2
Summary
Further information for the single features you will find in the online help
under their items or in the manual.
Manual
Create Groups 4.15 1
4.15 Create Groups

In the menu Tables|Groups you may find an extremely versatile and po-
werful tool. A named group is a desired choice of objects. Their member-
ship is defined by characters contained in their ID-box in the edit dialog
box.
4
With this feature you may carry out varying actions of these groups, e.g.:
• deleting groups of objects
• converting to another object like line sources in roads or railways or
the other way round
• coordinate transformations
• activate or deactivate objects for calculation
• representations of results etc.
The earlier mentioned Partial Levels e.g. - you may also define them for
groups of sound sources called Partial Sum Levels.
) Open the file L07.cna again and deactivate the grid appearance L07.cna
(Grid|Appearance|No Grid) if necessary.
) Insert some extra sources - e.g. another Road and two Point
Sources.
) Change into the Edit Mode and open the corresponding edit dialog by
double-click on the object.
) Enter at least a Name for the object and a Sound Power Level
) Enter q for the Point Source in the box ID.
* In CadnaA you may easily enter and change text boxes by editing
them in the object tables. With the command Change Column you
may change several columns for different objects with a single com-
mand simultaneously.
Manual
2
4.15 Chapter 4.14 Quick start
Create Groups
L08.cna The source Road already has characters in the ID-box D_1. You will find
a complete example in file L08.cna.
If you are finished with the editing,
Calculator ) start calculation again with the icon Calculator on the icon bar.
4 ) choose Tables|Group on the menu.
The Group list opens containing only the heading of the group list,
showing the column with the names of receiver points. It isn’t a defi-
ned group yet.
Now insert a group.
) Just click on the INS-key to insert new rows, for each group one row.
) Double-click the new row. The Group edit dialog opens.
) Enter in the box Name industry and in Expression q*.
The group is now defined. All objects containing q as the first charac-
ter in the box ID are members of this group. The star (*) is a joker for
further characters.
) In the dialog Group click on the button Part.Level. You get a list
with each source belonging to the group „Industry“ with their partial
levels caused on each receiver point during day- and night-time.
Manual
Create Groups 4.15 3
) Close this list and also the dialog Group by clicking OK.
Now you get the list of Partial Sum levels. Those are the combined levels
caused by the group „Industry“ at each receiver point.
) Create another group for roads. If you followed this example the cha-
racters D_1 or D* should be entered in the box Expression.
With this list you may determine the priority for noise protection measu-
res. For more information see online help keyword Groups
If you click the botton Copy you may insert this list for your report in your
word processing system by clicking the corresponding command, e.g.,
CTRL+V.
Manual
4
4.15 Chapter 4.14 Quick start
Create Groups
Also test again the 3D-special view - remember:
In Edit mode - with RIGHT mouse, click e.g. on the road axis
and choose the function from the context menu.
If the groups have already offered an extremly flexible logic to switch bet-
ween different project versions, the inclusion of this group structure in the
4 management of integrated variants (Tables|Variant) results to increased
efficiency.
For more information see online help, keyword: „Variant“ or manual chap-
ter 18.3 "Variants".
With it our exercises are finished and we hope we could ease your lead-in.
The training to operate CadnaA is minimal and you managed it already.
Although CadnaA is intended to be an easy-to-use program it nevertheless
is a precise and professional tool for noise abatement.
Whether you only need to give a brief acoustical expert opinion now and
then, or intend to check the noise propagation caused by your plant, or to
prepare colored noise maps for entire cities - you are already familiar with
many of the necessary steps of operation.
Manual
Manual CadnaA
Chapter 5 Basics
Chapter 5 Basics 5
Chapter 6 Import 6
Chapter 8 Sources 8
Examples Tutorial
Manual
2 Chapter 5 Basics
Manual
Chapter 5 Basics
Contents 5.1 1
Chapter 5 Basics
5.1 Contents
5.2 Files 5
5.3 Insert Objects

5.3.1 Inserting Objects Using the Mouse
5.4 Editing graphic Objects

5.4.1 Polygon Point Mode
5.4.2 Streching Mode
5.4.3 Change Dimensions
5.4.4 Moving Objects
5.4.5 Copying Objects
5.4.6 Inserting from the Clipboard
5.4.7 Deleting Objects
5.5 Editing Objects

5.5.1 Edit Object Dialog
5.5.2 Inserting Objects from the Keyboard
5.5.3 The Dialog Boxes Name, ID, INFO
5.5.4 Decimals in Edit Boxes
5.6 Search for Objects
Manual
2
5.1 Chapter 5 Basics
Contents
5.7 Context Menu

5.7.1 Duplicating Objects
5.7.2 Modify Objects
5.7.3 Generate Station
5.7.4 Generate Label
5.7.5 Force Rectangle
5.7.6 Force Right Angles
5
5.7.7 Breake Lines
5.7.8 Connect Lines
5.7.9 Break Areas
5.7.10 Specify Length
5.7.11 Simplify Geometry
5.7.12 Spline
5.7.13 Parallel Object
5.7.14 Convert to
5.7.15 Break into pieces
5.7.16 Activation
5.7.17 Modify Attribute
5.7.1 Swap Name/ID
5.7.2 Delete Duplicates
Manual
Chapter 5 Basics
Files 5.2 1
5.2 Files
In CadnaA all files have the extension CNA, which need not be entered
when saving a file, but is appended to the file name automatically. The im-
port feature (see there) allows you to also insert your own Cadna-CNA
files.
Activating the New command on the File menu opens a new, "blank" file File|New 5.2
5
where you can enter objects. If a file has already been opened and edited,
but the modifications have not yet been saved, a safety check dialog ap-
pears which allows you to save the active file.
see also chapter 18.8 Prototype File
When this command on the FILE menu is clicked, the currently active file
is saved (including any modifications) under its existing name. If the file Save 5.2
in question is new and has not been saved before, the "Save As" dialog
opens.
With the File|Save As command, the file in process can be assigned a Save As 5.2
name and then be saved under that name. If the new file name already ex-
ists, a safety check dialog appears allowing you to cancel the Save proce-
dure.
Clicking Yes will overwrite the existing file. Clicking No cancels the Save
procedure in which case the active file must be saved under a different
name that does not yet exist.
Select the FILE|Exit command to exit CadnaA. If the active file has been Exit 5.2
edited but not yet been saved, a dialog appears allowing you to save this
file prior to exiting the program.
Manual
2
Files
Lock Files 5.2 An opened file in CadnaA can be locked. In this case you cannot saving it
with the same name. To do this you just have to select Lock in the menu
File.
Each time you intend to save this file with the same name, a dialog with
refering to the locking of the file will open. In this case you can reverse the
lock by clicking Yes, or cancel by clicking No. A locked file can only be
saved with a different name.
5 If you have activated Auto-Save in the menu File|Auto-Save the dialog
would open if you have entered the name of the locked file as an auto-
save-file. Enter a different file name to auto-save your file, if necessary.
Manual
Chapter 5 Basics
Insert Objects 5.3 1
5.3 Insert Objects

All graphical elements available on the CADNA A main window are called
objects. They can be inserted in different ways:
• using the mouse (see Chapter 5.3.1)
• from the keyboard (see Chapter 5.5.2
• via tables (see Chapter 15.2)
• by digitizing (see Chapter 7.2) 5
• by importing (see Chapter 6.2) and
• single objects also via the Windows clipboard (see Chapter 5.4.6).
When inserting objects, you can always use mouse, keyboard, and digitiz-
er (if configured) simultaneously. You do not need to switch between those
modi.
To position an object, first activate the desired object icon on the toolbox
either by clicking it with the mouse or by pressing the respective hotkey
(see Chapter 4.8). Under the insertion mode, the icon just clicked then
sticks to the mouse cursor.
Now you can insert the object selected in the CadnaA main window either
by pressing the mouse button and/or pulling the mouse or via keyboard
when entering the coordinates. At the same time, this will generate a data
record on the pertinent object table (Tables menu).
An insertion procedure is terminated by either Terminate

Insertion 5.3
• pressing the RIGHT mouse button, or
• pressing RETURN, or
• changing to a different object type by clicking the respective icon on
the toolbox or by pressing the pertinent hotkey, or
• changing to the Edit mode by clicking the respective icon or pressing
CTRL+E.
Manual
2
Insert Objects
Manual
Chapter 5.3 Insert Objects
Inserting Objects Using the Mouse 5.3.1 1
5.3.1 Inserting Objects Using the Mouse
There are 4 different ways of positioning or inserting objects using the

mouse, depending on which object or toolbox icon was selected. (see
Chapter 4.8).
(e. g. point source, receiver point, level box) Positioning Method 1:

Insertion of Points 5.3.1 5
Position the object at the desired location on the CadnaA main window by
clicking with the left mouse button. Each click will insert one object in the
window, and generate the pertinent data record on the respective object ta-
ble.
(e. g. line sources, roads, railways, barriers, buildings, areas) Positioning Method 2:
Polygons and Lines 5.3.1
To insert lines or polygon lines and polygons, activate the respective icon,
then point to the desired starting point of the line or the desired first corner
of the polygon, and click. By this click, the first polygon point has been in-
serted. The mouse pointer now pulls a "rubber band" line from that point
to any location the mouse is moved to. Pressing the mouse button again
defines the second polygon point. Press the left mouse button at every
point where the polygon line changes its direction. Each of these clicks
will insert a further polygon point which can be edited or deleted after-
wards.
As soon as the line or the polygon has the desired length or dimensions,
terminate the insertion procedure. In the case of polygons, the last point in-
serted is then connected to the starting point to give a closed polygon line.
Open or closed polygons may have arbitrary shapes. If you want to force a Right Angle
right angle press the SHIFT key while moving the mouse. In this case you
can only move rectangularly after a click.
* If you want to produce a closed rectangular polygon with a mouse

you should always start with the longer side and press the SHIFT key
during input.
Manual
2
5.3.1 Chapter 5.3 Insert Objects
Inserting Objects Using the Mouse
With SHIFT key pressed down enter the first, second , third and if nec-
essary further points in the usual manner by clicking the position
with the mouse cursor.
However do not click the last point on the final edge-point but on the
already entered first point. Therefore is the last point entered on the
right position and you may close the open polygon by clicking with
the RIGHT mouse button.
5 To produce rectangular layouts afterwards see chapter 5.7.5 Force Rectan-
gle and chapter 5.7.6 Force Right Angles.
Positioning Method 3: After activation of the respective icon, move the mouse pointer to that lo-
Text Boxe cation where one corner of the box or rectangle is to be positioned. Press
and Zoom + 5.3.1
the left mouse button and hold it depressed while moving the mouse in the
direction of the desired opposite corner. Release the mouse button when
the desired location has been reached.
Positioning Method 4: The cylinder is defined by clicking two points. The first point defines the
Cylinder radius centre, the second the radius length.
Manual
Chapter 5 Basics
Editing graphic Objects 5.4 1
5.4 Editing graphic Objects

In the edit mode, you modify existing objects in the graphic representation
by editing their characteristic parameters, thus defining their properties,
positions, and shapes.
To this end, click the Edit Mode icon on the toolbox, or press CTRL+E.
Then select the object by clicking it with the mouse. The object is then
marked. All further commands will apply to the selected object only. 5
* In the menu Options|Miscellaneous you may choose the size of the

marker displayed by a marked object by selecting the pertinent value.
For all line-like objects entered as a series of points and objects limited by
lines, such as area sources, line sources, buildings, and barriers, you can
choose between two different edit modes: stretching mode (see Chapter
5.4.2) and polygon point mode (see Chapter 5.4.1). Clicking the Edit
Mode icon automatically activates the polygon point mode. Press the TAB
key to switch between the two modes under the edit mode.
To select an object, click its border, or, in the case of roads and railways, Selecting
its centreline, using the LEFT or RIGHT mouse button. Clicking with the an object 5.4
RIGHT mouse button at the same time opens a context menu offering you
further commands applicable to this object (see Chapter 5.7).
Double-clicking with the LEFT mouse button opens the pertinent object
dialog (see Chapter 5.5.1).
Manual
2
Editing graphic Objects
Manual
Chapter 5.4 Editing graphic Objects
Polygon Point Mode 5.4.1 1
5.4.1 Polygon Point Mode
selected polygon line selected polygon
In the insertion mode (see Chapter 5.3) each click with the mouse defines a
polygon point.
In the polygon point mode, these polygon points bear markers. You can
move, insert, delete, or allocate a height to individual polygon points.
To move a polygon point, click it, and, with the mouse button held down Moving a
(the mouse pointer turns into a black arrow), drag it to the desired location. Polygon Point 5.4.1
Manual
2
5.4.1 Chapter 5.4 Editing graphic Objects
Polygon Point Mode
Adding or Deleting a To add a polygon point, select the object as described above. Now, if you
Polygon Point 5.4.1 press CTRL, the mouse pointer turns into a black arrow carrying along a
box with a plus sign in it. If you click the border of the object using this ar-
row, a new polygon point will be added.
To delete a polygon point, press both CTRL and SHIFT at the same time.
Again, a black arrow appears, this time carrying along a box with a minus
sign. Any polygon point now clicked will be deleted.
Manual
Polygon Point Mode 5.4.1 3
Manual
4
Polygon Point Mode
Manual
Streching Mode 5.4.2 1
5.4.2 Streching Mode
Selected polygon under the stretching mode. The object is

marked by an invisible rectangle. By dragging the mark-
ers of this rectangle with the mouse button held down, the
size of the object as a whole is modified.
The stretching mode (accessed via the TAB key) does not allow you to in-
sert, delete, or move polygon points, but you can modify the size of the en-
tire object by stretching or squeezing it (see Change Dimensions further
below in this chapter).
Manual
2
Streching Mode
Manual
Change Dimensions 5.4.3 1
5.4.3 Change Dimensions
If the polygon point mode (see above) is activated, switch to the stretching
mode by pressing TAB, and select the object by clicking its border.
Click one of the markers, and hold the mouse button

down in order to enlarge or reduce the object.
Then position the mouse pointer on one of the black markers at the sides or
corners of the rectangle around the selected object, and hold the mouse
button down. The mouse pointer turns into a two-headed arrow. Now you
can enlarge or reduce the entire object by moving the mouse in the appro-
priate direction.
Dragging the corner markers enlarges or reduces the object while main-
taining its proportions.
You can also adapt the size of an object by pressing SHIFT and/or CTRL.
SHIFT symmetrical change of dimensions
CTRL change of dimensions in discrete steps
SHIFT+CTRL symmetrical change of dimensions in discrete steps
Manual
2
Change Dimensions
Manual
Moving Objects 5.4.4 1
5.4.4 Moving Objects
To move a selected object, position the mouse pointer on the border, not on
a polygon point, of the object, or, in the case of roads and railways, on the
centreline. Then hold down the mouse button and move the object to the
desired location. The object is moved, and the co-ordinates are updated in
the pertinent object list.
To move an object horizontally or vertically along the x or y axes, press 5
SHIFT while you move it.
Manual
2
Moving Objects
Manual
Copying Objects 5.4.5 1
5.4.5 Copying Objects
In CadnaA, you can copy objects within the graphics and into the Win-
dows clipboard. Copying within the graphics refers to a selected object,
whereas to the clipboard, you may not only copy individual objects, but
also the entire graphics or limits, or Section thereof, all at once.
Select the object to be copied. Then hold the mouse button down while Copying within
the Graphics 5.4.5 5
moving the object to the location where you wish to position the copy. Be-
fore releasing the mouse button, press CTRL. This generates a copy of the
selected object at the desired location.
At the same time, a further data record, with the transformed coordinates,
but otherwise unchanged data of the copied object, is inserted in the perti-
nent object list.
To generate a copy of an object and at the same time rotate it by 90° about
the vertical or horizontal axis, press and hold the CTRL+SHIFT keys dur-
ing copying. This generates an object of the same size and parameters as
the existing object, with its centre at the same x or y coordinate as the cop-
ied object.
Manual
2
Copying Objects
To copy objects to the clipboard, you can either

Copying to the • click the pertinent icon on the icon bar, or
Clipboard 5.4.5
• select the Edit|Copy command, or
• press CTRL+C.
If objects have been copied to the Windows clipboard, you can paste them
in a different Windows application for further editing by selecting the Ed-
it|Paste command, or, alternatively, by pressing CTRL+V.
5
Copying a Select the desired object and execute one of the Copy commands.
single Object 5.4.5
Copying Use the Section icon (rectangle with broken lines) on the toolbox to define
Sections 5.4.5 a Section.
To this end, position the mouse pointer on the upper-left corner of the de-
sired Section. Then, with the mouse button held down, drag the mouse to
the lower-right corner of the desired Section where you release the mouse
button. The area is marked by a rectangle.
Now switch to the Edit mode, select the rectangle and press, e. g.,
CTRL+C. The selected Section is thus copied to tSectionhe clipboard.
The rectangle marking the Section is neither copied nor printed, but only
the objects lying within the Section.
Copying Limits 5.4.5 To copy the entire graphics with the defined limits, execute one of the
Copy commands. During this procedure, none of the objects must be se-
lected.
Manual
Inserting from the Clipboard 5.4.6 1
5.4.6 Inserting from the Clipboard
You may insert the contents of the Windows clipboard with Ctrl+V or with
the function from the menu Edit|Paste into the CadnaA graphics provided
it is a meta file.
The inserted clipboard contents will then be a Symbol object in CadnaA
(see Chapter 13.11.3) and also gets therefore its object options.
5
With it you are able to insert directly in your CadnaA graphics cross-sec-
tion figures, 3D-special views or CadnaA tables quickly and easyly.
The inserted meta file from the clipboard may not be bigger then 1024 pix-
el. If that were so a frame with a cross inside appears. In that case you have
to use the CadnaA option BMP (see Chapter 14.2).
Manual
2
Inserting from the Clipboard
Manual
Deleting Objects 5.4.7 1
5.4.7 Deleting Objects
Press DEL to delete a selected object. The object will thus be deleted from
the CADNA A main window and also from the object table. If another ob-
ject of the same type exists, this will be automatically selected after dele-
tion of the previous one so that you could delete this one as well by
pressing the DEL key once again.
This method is particularly convenient for the deletion of a small number 5
of objects. The Delete command from the context menu (see Chapter 5.7)
has the same effect. Using this command also deletes the selected object
only.
If you wish to delete a large number of and/or different objects at once,
you can follow another convenient and quick procedure: the context menu
command Modify Objects Action Delete. (see Chapter 5.7.2)
The Edit|Undo command or the hotkey CTRL+Z allows you to retrieve the Undo 5.4.7
last 32 objects deleted. Just click the Undo (CTRL+Z) command as many
times as needed until the desired deleted object re-appears on your screen.
If you wish to retrieve a data record that was deleted from a row of a table,
first close the table before using the Undo command.
* Objects that were deleted via the context menu using the command
Modify Objects|Action Delete, cannot be retrieved using the Undo
command.
Manual
2
Deleting Objects
Manual
Chapter 5 Basics
Editing Objects 5.5 1
5.5 Editing Objects

If an object is inserted graphically with its coordinates you must still enter
the necessary object data like, e.g., number of cars per day or hour on a
road, the speed, road surface or just the sound emission value for the
acoustical calculation. This is usualy done in the edit-dialog via the key-
board. But of cause you may also import this data from an external data-
base via the ODBC interface (see Chapter 6.5).
5
To this end, to edit or to delete a object, first switch to the Edit Mode by
either clicking the pertinent icon or pressing the hotkey CTRL+E. Then in
the graphic representation, you can choose among three different methods
to open the edit dialog:
1. Insertion Mode (see Chapter 5.3):
) with the RIGHT mouse button click once on the object either on
the border (e.g. area source, buildings etc.) or on the centreline
(e.g. of a road, railway etc.)
2. Edit Mode (STRG+E):
) Double-click the borderline of the desired object (or the cen-

treline, if the object is a road or railway), or
) position the mouse pointer on the border of the object in ques-

tion. Clicking with the RIGHT mouse button opens a context
menu. Use the LEFT mouse button to click Edit.
) If an object has been selected, press RETURN

Editing Data Records in Tables see Chapter 15.2.3
Manual
2
Editing Objects
Manual
Chapter 5.5 Editing Objects
Edit Object Dialog 5.5.1 1
5.5.1 Edit Object Dialog
An edit dialog of an object serves to enter all parameters characterising an

object.
Example of an Object Dialog
The desired values are entered in the boxes either from the keyboard or au-
tomatically by selecting the relevant options.
Depending on the object type selected, different boxes and options are
available. The individual boxes are accessed by pressing the TAB key or by
clicking.
Some boxes are equation boxes in which the equation will be calculated
promptly and the result displayed in the box Result.PWL for Day | Eve-
ning | Night.
Manual
2
5.5.1 Chapter 5.5 Editing Objects
Edit Object Dialog
Manual
Inserting Objects via Keyboard 5.5.2 1
5.5.2 Inserting Objects via Keyboard
First activate the desired object icon on the toolbox. You can now enter the
desired coordinates from the keyboard. As you enter the first number, the
dialog Input of Point opens.
Orthogonal Cartesian coordinates may be entered as x-and-y pairs, and po-

lar coordinates as a pair of radius and angle. In the first case, which is the
default setting, the check box Polar is deactivated, in the latter it is activat-
ed.
The coordinates are entered either as absolute coordinates with respect to
the origin x/y = 0/0 (this being the default setting), or as relative coordi-
nates with respect to the last point. In the first case, the check box is deac-
tivated, in the latter it is activated.
When entering several points in a series, you can arbitrarily switch be-
tween the insertion modes using the mouse button, keyboard, and digitizer
on the one hand, and between orthogonal and polar, or absolute and rela-
tive coordinates on the other hand. The result of an entry can be seen up-
to-date at any time in the graphic representation.
Insertion of a building of 30 m x 10 m, where the left corner of the 30-m Example
facade is positioned at a specific location in the map and the front is in-
clined towards the x-axis by an angle of 40°.
Manual
2
Inserting Objects via Keyboard
Procedure:
) Activate the Building icon by clicking the same on the toolbox or by

pressing the hotkey CTRL+h
) Click the desired position of the building corner to be positioned

(using the mouse pointer in the graphical representation of the map
on the screen, or the digitizer magnifier on the paper map)
5
) Enter the value 40, press TAB, enter the value 30, activate the check
boxes Relative and Polar, and confirm by pressing RETURN (the first
side of the building is drawn)
) Enter the values 90 and 10 with the same settings and confirm (the
second side of the building is drawn)
Manual
Inserting Objects via Keyboard 5.5.2 3
) Enter the values 90 and 30 (third side of the building) and press
RIGHT mouse button (the rectangle is closed)
Manual
4
Inserting Objects via Keyboard
Manual
The Dialog Boxes Name, ID, INFO 5.5.3 1
5.5.3 The Dialog Boxes Name, ID, INFO
The boxes Name, ID, and the Info button are described below since they
appear on almost every edit dialog of an object. The other features will be
dealt with in the relevant chapters.
The Name box contains an object name which appears in the first column Name 5.5.3
of the object table. It may comprise several thousand characters. However, 5
since the column width is adapted to accommodate the longest character
string among the names, it is recommended you use short terms. One of
the possibilities for finding an object is to search for its name (see Chapter
5.6).
A character string of up to 15 characters entered in the ID box allows you ID 5.5.3

to group, identify, sort, activate or deactivate for a calculation or search for
objects according to different criteria.
Objects belonging to groups (see Chapter 18.2) can be activated and deac-
tivated via these groups. Activated objects will be considered in the calcu-
lation. Deactivated objects will not be taken into account. The latter will
appear with dashed lines in the graphical representation (default setting).
(De)activation, ID, and grouping are powerful tools for the controlling of
projects and the handling of various project alternatives while using the
same data stock.
For each defined group you can present the proportionate sound pressure
level on the receiver points as partial sum level.
The check box next to ID allows you to specify 3 different activation
states for an object by clicking:
Manual
2
The Dialog Boxes Name, ID, INFO
If the check box is grey (default), the object is activated. This is the case
shown in the figure ("ID" written in black). The state can be manipulated
by grouping.
If "ID" is written in red, the object has been deactivated via a group and
will not be taken into account in the calculation.
If the box is checked (an x appears in the square), the object will always be
active no matter what group it may belong to and whether or not that
5 group, if any, is active. Therefore, "ID" will always be written in black.
If the check box is white, the object will always be inactive no matter what
group it may belong to and whether or not that group, if any, is active.
Therefore, "ID" will always be written in red. In the graphical representa-
tion, these objects will be drawn with dashed lines (default setting).
Info-button 5.5.3 The Info button is available on every edit dialog of an object. When you
click it, a box opens where you can enter specific object information and/
or string variables. The contents of the info box is not printed but you can
get out the information contained in a string variable. The box may contain
up to 30,000 characters.
If the box contains any information, the button appears blue, otherwise
grey.
Define String Variable You define a string variable by writting a name for it in the Info-box follo-
wed by a equals sign (without any space) and after that - directly behind
without any space again - the desired information or value. Now you can
revert to the contens of a variable just by writting the string variable’s
name on another location.
Example String Variable GRN0=08/15
GRNO is in our example the string variable and embodies the number of
the building yard. The number 08/15 can be displayed e.g. in the Result
Table as a contents of a column for a receiver point just by entering the
variable’s name GRNO as expression.
Manual
The Dialog Boxes Name, ID, INFO 5.5.3 3
With the string variables you can also revert to information stored in data-
bases, which have an ODBC-interface (see Chapter 6.5) like MS Excel or
MS Access, to save them by your CadnaA objects in the Info-box.
For that the string variable has to be stored together with the equals sign
and the information in a field of the database.
see also
chapter 15.3.3 String Variable
chapter 8.9.8 Calc Width of Roads 5
chapter 18.4 Date of Objects in Info box
Standard Deviation Sigma dB: Enter the standard deviation in dB if you Standard
want to calculate the source related uncertainty (see Chapter 12.4.3) of the Deviation 5.5.3
emission determination.
Manual
4
The Dialog Boxes Name, ID, INFO
Manual
Decimals in Edit Boxes 5.5.4 1
5.5.4 Decimals in Edit Boxes
You may choose the decimal separator comma or point in the menu Op-
tions|Miscellaneous. The default is the point.
For all numbers with decimals entered in CadnaA, you will have to use the
active separating character. In many cases, the program is able to cope
with a comma or point, mistakenly entered as a separator by interpreting it
as the active separating character. However, this is not possible in all of the
boxes.
For example, in the edit polygon point dialog, but not in the table, you may
separate the decimals of the x, y and z coordinates of a polygon point, of
track centreline distance and slope by either a comma or point. In this case,
CadnaA is able to correct the separator point or the comma by taking it as
the chosen decimal separator.
In other boxes, however, which are used for performing calculation opera-
tions, decimals must be separated by a point. Otherwise, the value will be
misinterpreted or its acceptance refused.
If, for example, you enter 98,5 dB as value for LwA in the edit box of a
general source, this value will appear in red which means it is not accepta-
ble. This box is a formula box where you can perform calculation opera-
tions such as arithmetic and energetic level additions, or even more
complex equations. In this box, the comma is a special character (max(1,2)
= 2). So here, you must use the point to separate decimals.
Manual
2
Decimals in Edit Boxes
Use the active decimal separator if you are editing in the object tables di-
rectly. Otherwise it could be that the values are not correctly interpreted.
* The correct interpretation of the decimal separator of CadnaA in

other Windows programs also depends, among other things, on the
country settings of the operating system.
It could happen, e.g., in MS Excel that values inserted from a
5 CadnaA table via the clipboard are interpreted as a date and not with
the correct number format. In this case you may have chosen the
comma as decimal separator in the system settings. To rectify the
false interpretation adjust the setting with a point for the decimal sep-
arator.
Manual
Chapter 5 Basics
Search for Objects 5.6 1
5.6 Search for Objects

Use this command to search within the entire data stock, to identify and re-
trieve objects for editing. When an object is found, it will be selected and
displayed in the window. Pressing the RETURN key will open the relevant
edit dialog box. The Search dialog must remain opened.
The Search Again button serves to start or continue the search procedure.
Either one or an arbitrary combination of the attributes Object Type, Na- 5
me and ID (see Chapter 5.5.3) can be used to specify either all objects or
each of the objects to be retrieved. If more than one criterion is given, all
criteria have to be fulfilled (logical and (see Chapter 2.8).
Use the List box to select the type of object. If you select the option: ?(All)
then all kinds of objects are compared to the search criteria. Otherwise,
only objects of the type specified are examined.
Wildcards can be used as customary, e.g., the asterix (*).
This input would search for a point source named either „a“ or „c“
Manual
2
Search for Objects
Manual
Chapter 5 Basics
Context Menu 5.7 1
5.7 Context Menu

By selecting an object on the main window while in the edit mode, or by
selecting a data record in a table, using the RIGHT instead of the LEFT
mouse button, a context menu is opened offering a number of commands
relating to the object in question.
Selecting an object by clicking it with the

right instead of the left mouse button
opens a context menu.
The following commands may appear in a context menu depending on Commands

which object the function has started:
Graphical 3-D view with hidden lines, taking into account the visibility of 3D-Special-View
the individual surfaces. You can also edit the objects in this view directly
and you may move through this scenario either by pressing the Return key
or by using the arrow keys on the keyboard (see Chapter 13.14).
Manual
2
Context Menu
Break Areas A closed polygon can be divided into several smaller areas with identical
parameters (see Chapter 5.7.9).
Break Lines A line-like object is divided into at least two objects with identical para-
meters (see Chapter 5.7.7).
Duplicate Several objects of identical properties and the same size are inserted in ho-
5 rizontal and/or vertical rows (see Chapter 5.7.1).
Edit Opens an edit object dialog (alternatively: double-click an object with the
left mouse button (see Chapter 5.5).
Insert before/after A new row is inserted in a table before or after the selected row. Another
alternative is to press INS-key (see Chapter 15.2.2).
Generate Lable This option generates the issue of object parameters to be defined within
an automatically generated Text box located at the object. You can do that
for only one object, for all objects of the same object type or for all object
types (see Chapter 5.7.4).
Generate Inserts station marks at a desired spacing along a line-like object, with in-
Station dication of distances, e. g. marking of roads by kilometres (see Chapter
5.7.3).
Force An arbitrary polygon with different angles can be transformed into a poly-
Right Angles gon with right angles by specifying a snap angle (see Chapter 5.7.5).
Force Rectangle An arbitrary quadrangle can be transformed into a rectangle (see Chapter
5.7.5).
Manual
Chapter 5 Basics
Context Menu 5.7 3
This command enables you to snap point shaped objects (e.g. point source Snap Point to facade
or receiver point) onto a building facade after the point has been inserted
or imported. The points are then attached to the facade at the distance de-
finded (see Chapter 9.3.3).
Generates a building with sound-radiating facades and roof (see Chapter Generate building
9.3.4).
5
The length of any line-like object can be specified (see Chapter 5.7.10). Specify Length
Calculation according to the Germany guideline RLS90 for Long Straight Long Straight Road
Road (see Chapter 8.11)
Deletes the selected object - another alternative: press DEL KEY (see Chap- Delete
ter 5.4.7).
Different actions can be executed simultaneously on several objects and Modify Objects
also on different object-types or groups of objects. Some actions can also
be enforced on individual objects alone. These are then directly obvious in
the context-menu (see Chapter 5.7.2).
Generation of objects parallel to the object selected (see Chapter 5.7.13). Parallel Object
Deletes grid-points inside or outside of a calculation area (see Chapter Delete Grid-Points
11.5.1)
CadnaA enables you to calculate air pollution caused by road traffic ac- Air Pollution
cording to the MLuS 92, Issue 96 /46/ (see Chapter 19.2).
Sectional view along a line (see Chapter 13.12) Cross Section
Manual
4
Context Menu
Sort Sorting of table columns in ascending or descending order, numerical or

alphanumerical (see Chapter 15.2.4).
Edit Column Conversion of numerical values or substitution of character strings in table

columns (see Chapter 15.2.5).
Spline A selected polygon line is replaced by the segmented curve of a cubic po-
5 lynomial (see Chapter 5.7.12)
Simplify Geometry Geometrical objects are simplified for calculation purposes by reducing
the degree to which details are taken into account (see Chapter 5.7.11)
Floors Automatic generation of a vertical row of receiver points with correspon-

ding heights for the different floors (see Chapter 11.2.6)
Break into pieces Line shape objects are split into definable parts with identical parameters
(see Chapter 5.7.15).
Convert to An object type can be converted to another one (see Chapter 5.7.14).
Connect Lines Individual parts of line-like objects of the same object type can be con-
nected to a single object (see Chapter 5.7.8).
Pass-By-Level For roads, railways, and other line-like sources, you can also calculate the
time characteristic of the sound pressure level that would result if a single
vehicle with a specified emission were to travel along a certain path (see
Chapter 8.14).
Manual
Chapter 5.7 Context Menu
Duplicating Objects 5.7.1 1
5.7.1 Duplicating Objects
This command can be executed as well from the context menu (see Chap-
ter 5.7) directly at the object or via the context menu Modify objects:Ac-
tion: Duplicate. In the second case you can enter additional settings. It is
applicable to all graphical objects.
To insert several objects of identical properties and the same size in hori- Duplicate 5.7.1
5
zontal and/or vertical rows in the CadnaA main window, you first insert
one object of the desired size and then select it by clicking it with the
RIGHT mouse button - the context menu opens.
Before an object is duplicated, it should be allocated the desired parame-
ters by editing. These parameters will be adopted for all duplicates.
From the context menu, select the Duplicate command. In the dialog that
opens, specify the number of duplicates and the distances between either
the borders or the centres of the objects.
The building context menu
Manual
2
5.7.1 Chapter 5.7 Context Menu
Duplicating Objects
„Duplicate“ dialog. Specify the number of copies - define

what the distances refer to - enter the distances in meters
Horizontal: positive number placed the duplicates to the right of the exist-
ing object, a negative number to the left of it.
Vertical: positive number placed the duplicates above the existing object,
a negative number below.
Action Duplicate 5.7.1 With the command Modify Objects|Action: Duplicate you can enter ad-
ditional settings:
Move Center Point 5.7.1 The center point of objects being selected can be moved. Upon activation
of the check box enter values accordingly.
Manual
Duplicating Objects 5.7.1 3
Duplicated objects can be enlarged or minimized in horizontal and vertical Scaling Factor 5.7.1
direction. Upon activation of the check box enter values accordingly.
Duplicated objects can be rotated around their center point. Upon activa- Rotation around Center
tion of the check box enter values accordingly. Point 5.7.1
See also chapter 5.4.5 Copying Objects and chapter 6.3.4 Coordinate
Transformation, paragraph Duplication by Transformation.
5
Manual
4
Duplicating Objects
Manual
Modify Objects 5.7.2 1
5.7.2 Modify Objects
This command on the context menu allows you to simultaneously apply Aktionen
various actions to several objects and also to different object types or
groups of objects. These actions are also available for individual objects
only, in which case they are directly listed on the context menu.
The following actions can also be performed for several objects or groups
of objects: 5
• Delete (see chapter 5.4.7)

• Modify Attribute (see chapter 5.7.17)
• Duplicate (see chapter 5.7.1)
• Force Rectangle (see chapter 5.7.5)
• Force Right Angles - Orthogonalize (see chapter 5.7.6)
• Snap point to facade (see chapter 9.3.3)
• Spline (see chapter 5.7.12)
• Simplify Geo (see chapter 5.7.11)
• Break into pieces (see chapter 5.7.15)
• Connect Lines (see chapter 5.7.8)
• Transformation (see chapter 6.3.4)
• Convert to (see chapter 5.7.14)
• Generate Station (see chapter 5.7.3)
• Generate Building Evaluation (see chapter 9.3.5)
• Generate Label (see chapter 5.7.4)
• Generate floors (see chapter 11.2.6)
• Parallel Object (see chapter 5.7.13)
• Activation (see chapter 5.7.16)
• Swap Name / ID (see chapter 5.7.1)
• Delete Duplicates (see chapter 5.7.2)
• Fit DTM to Object or Object to DTM (see chapter 10.3)
Manual
2
Modify Objects
Modify all If you want to cover all objects in your project file with this function you
Objekts 5.7.2 must execute the command Modify Objects from the context menu by
clicking with a RIGHT mouse button onto a free space in your plan. You
may not mark an object. If you call the command by marking a object
then it will be excluded from the following action.
Modify a group of If you do not want all objects to be affected by the chosen action you can
objects 5.7.2 provisionally draw a closed polygon around the object to be or not to be
5 modified collectively (e.g. a Aux. polygon).
Another alternative is to use an existing polygon, e. g. a building, that is
not to be modified. Click the closed polygon under the Edit Mode using
the RIGHT mouse button, then select the Modify Objects command on the
context menu.
Objects inside, outside, In the dialog that opens, an Actions list is available for selection. Choose
on the borderline of the the action you want to apply to the objects to be defined. By activating the
polygon 5.7.2
pertinent check boxes, you specify the position of the object types to be
modified, i. e. inside, outside, or on the borderline of the auxiliary poly-
gon. All these options can apply simultaneously.
* If objects are placed on the borderline of the polygon or if they jut

inside or outside the polygon you may enforce the functions Break
Lines (see chapter 5.7.7) or Break Areas (see chapter 5.7.9) from the
polygon context menu to break the lines or areas on the intersection
of the borderline if desired before you excute the Modify
Objects|Action command.
Activated or deactivated Moreever, you can choose whether the action is only to apply to activated
objects 5.7.2 or deactivated objects. If the option indifferent is checked, it does not
matter whether an object is activated or not.
Condition 5.7.2 Futhermore, a condition can be specified for numerical expressions to re-
strict the selection of objects. For the specification of a condition all at-
tributes of the object type selected are available. From the pop-up menu
list an attribute for the highlighted object type can be selected. This allows
Manual
to define even complex conditional expressions (see chapter 2.6). The op-
eration will be executed only if the condition is fulfilled (expression <> 0).
These three types of restrictions (range/activation/condition) can be ap-
plied separately or in combination of each other.
Now select the object types to which the specified action is to apply (Mul- Choose Object
tiple Selection see chapter 4.10). type 5.7.2
If you wish to cover all object types, click the All button. 5
When the dialog box is closed via the OK button, another dialog may ap-
pear depending on the action chosen. Enter the appropriate parameters
there. As soon as you have confirmed by clicking OK, the selected action
is applied to the objects as defined. It is possible to cancel the action in
process.
Example: Deleting a
group of
objects 5.7.2
Manual
4
Modify Objects
Industry.cna The industrial enterprise in the above example, consisting of one building,
point and line sources, is deleted using the context menu command Modi-
fy Objects.
) Draw a closed auxiliary polygon around the industrial enterprise.
) Select the auxiliary polygon using the RIGHT mouse button.
) From the context menu, select Modify Objects - the following dia-
log appears:
Manual
) On the Actions list box, select Delete.
) Activate the checked boxes Inside Polygon and On Polygon Bor-

derline and
) choose the object type Point Source, Line Source, Building and
Aux.Polygon by clicking while pressing the Ctrl key (in this
example you may also choose all objects by clicking the All button)
) confirm with OK
In the dialog appearing next, you can either confirm or cancel the selected
action.
Manual
6
Modify Objects
) Click the All button again and see how fast an industrial area can turn
into a residential area!
In this example, the trade enterprise inside the polygon has been deleted.
If the All button is clicked, a selected action will be applied to all objects
without the need for further confirmation, whereas the Yes button requires
explicit confirmation for each object.
Manual
The object on which the Action command is executed is excluded from

this action - in this example is it the auxiliary polygon. If desired delete
this object separately with the DEL key.
Manual
8
Modify Objects
Manual
Generate Station 5.7.3 1
5.7.3 Generate Station
The Station feature allows you to generate marks at distances to be de-

fined alongside line-like objects, indicating the distances from station to Station
station. The stations are generated either automatically, if you select
• the command Station from the context menu (see Chapter 5.7) , or
• with the command Modify Object|Action: Generate Station (see Chap-
ter 5.7.2) 5
• or semi-automatically via the toolbox icon Station, in which case you
insert the stations individually.
This feature is convenient, e. g. for providing roads with kilometre marks.
) To do so, click the road with the RIGHT mouse button, and select
Station from the context menu.
) In the dialog that opens, specify the distance between the individual
stations.
Upon closing the dialog by clicking OK, CadnaA generates stations

along the road with the specified distance between each pair of stations.
Manual
2
Generate Station
250
20
0
150
5
100
50
The distance indicated at each station is the total of preceding distances

summed up from station to station.
If you prefer the realistic value of the distance, you can specify this by en-
tering in kilometers in the dialog Road the actual position of the road.
) Open the Road dialog by double-clicking the road axis.
) Click the Geometry button.
) At the bottom of the dialog, enter the kilometres in metres, and
Manual
In this example the measure starts by 10 km
) if required, select Ascending or Descending counting order from the

list box.
Upon closing the dialog by clicking OK, you have to update the dimen- Update Station 5.7.3
sioning in kilometers via the menu command Tables|Miscellaneous|Up-
date Station.
The station mark then displays the kilometres and metres separated by a
plus sign.
10
+2
00
If you wish to insert only single stations, use the pertinent toolbox icon,
and click at the desired locations.
Manual
4
Generate Station
Parallel Object For every line source you can define a scale related to its axis in the menu
between defined Geometry|Station. The default setting for the initial point is 0 - but you
station marks 5.7.3
can also define it arbitrarily.
With the Parallel Object command from the context menu you can define
a starting and an end point related to the Station Range.
Example: ) Insert an abitrary road and input in the Geometry dialog a Station
start point of 12.000 m ascending. The base point of the road is now
12 km.
) Close the dialog with OK.
) For clarification generate the station marks on your road (mark the
road with the RIGHT mouse button and from the context menu choose
Generate Station.
) Define a distance of 10 m and confirm with OK. The station marks

are generated.
Manual
10
+0
12
0 2
+0
12
30
+0
12
0 4
+0
12
0
5
5
+0
12
0 6
+0
12
0 7
+0
12
1
) Choose Parallel Object from the context menu and input the values
from the above Parallel Object dialog.
After confirming with OK a screen will be generated with a distance of
10 m from the road, with a height of 4 m and a length of 30 m between sta-
tion mark 12.020 and 12050.
Manual
6
Generate Station
Manual
Generate Label 5.7.4 1
5.7.4 Generate Label
This option generates the issue of object parameters to be defined within

an automatically generated Text box located at the object. You can do that
for only one object, for all objects of the same object type or for all object
types.
Mark the object and execute the command in the Context Menu (see
Chapter 5.7) either 5
1. for one object: Generate Label or

2. for several and/or different objects: Modify Objects |Action: Gene-
rate Label (see Chapter 5.7.2).
Generate Label
Dialog 5.7.4
Placement defines the alignment of the content inside the label. Placement 5.7.4
The font alignment, size and type can be adopted in the dialog by clicking Text box 5.7.4
the same-named button (see Chapter 13.11.1).
Manual
2
Generate Label
Content 5.7.4 Select the relevant Attribute by clicking in the list box. The range of at-
tributes at your disposal in the list box depends on the selected object with
which you have executed the command Generate Label. If you execute
the command in the menu Modify Objects to label several objects at one
time, only a restricted range will be offered.
Example 5.7.4 If you select the attribute ID in the list box, the string entered in the object
dialog in the edit box ID will be placed in the label.
5
User defined 5.7.4 The attribute <user-defined> allows the issue of several object parameters
by entry of the relevant attributes in the code box. If you have selected an
attribute in the list box, you can see the actual notation of this attribute
[#(ObjAtt,%1,Parameter)]. If you want to issue more than one object pa-
rameter in the label, just enter the actual notation of this attribute into the
code box. You can also enter additional text.
Manual
Entry in Code Box Example
#(ObjAtt, %1, GRENZT, 1, 0.500) dB(A) / #(ObjAtt,

%1, LPT, 1, 0.500) dB(A)
will, after calculation at the receiver point, generate a label with e.g. the
content:
"50 dB(A) / 41,9 dB(A)",
because the daytime maximum (standard) value of this receiver point is 5
50 dB(A) and the calculated sound level for daytime is rated at
41,9 dB(A).
The parameters of the attribute GRENZT,1, 0.500 mean:
1 = one digit after the decimal point will be issued
0.500 = round up if the value of the last digit after the decimal point is 5
Further availible terms see Chapter 15.3.3 "(user defined)"
Manual
4
Generate Label
String You may display information from the info-box in the edit dialog of
Variable 5.7.4 the Receiver point. Enter the same string in the Variable-box as you did
in the info-box. But first you must choose String variable from the Attri-
bute listbox.
Example In the info-boxes of the building dialog you may have entered the floor
number of buildings, e.g. f=2, f=3, f=25 etc. In this case f is the string
variable. If you want to display these floor numbers in a label on the build-
5 ing you have to choose the settings as follows.
In this case only numbers would be displayed in the labels. But if you want
to add an expression to the number like floor no. or just fno.: then
you have to choose <user defined> in the attribute list-box and add the
desired expression via the keyboard.
Manual
The output in the label of this entry would be fno.: 2 or fno.: 3 or fno: 25
etc.
Manual
6
Generate Label
Manual
Force Rectangle 5.7.5 1
5.7.5 Force Rectangle
This command can be applied to any closed polygon with four corners.
Using this context menu command allows you to transform an arbitrary
quadrangle into a rectangle.
To this end, click the object with the right mouse button, and, from the
context menu, select the Force Rectangle command. 5
A quadrangle entered in CadnaA The same quadrangle after applying the

command "Force Rectangle"
See also chapter 5.7 Context Menu, chapter 5.7.2 Modify Objects and
chapter 5.3.1 Inserting Objects Using the Mouse
Manual
2
Force Rectangle
Manual
Force Right Angles 5.7.6 1
5.7.6 Force Right Angles
This command can be applied to any closed polygon.

An arbitrary polygon with different angles can be transformed into a poly-
gon with right angles by specifying a snap angle.
After executing „Force Right Angles“
Original polygon with snap angle 20° with snap angle 45°
See also chapter 5.7 Context Menu

chapter 5.7.2 Modify Objects und
chapter 5.7.5 Force Rectangle sowie
chapter 5.3.1 Inserting Objects Using the Mouse
Manual
2
Force Right Angles
Manual
Breake Lines 5.7.7 1
5.7.7 Breake Lines
This command from the context menu (see Chapter 5.7) can be applied to
any open polygon.
Line-shaped objects, such as line sources, roads, railways, contour lines,
etc. can be broken into separate sections. This splits an object into two ob-
jects with identical properties. Breaking down a line object is useful, if,
e. g., the parameters of the sections are supposed to be different. You can 5
achieve this by using this command and editing the properties of the new
section.
The breaking of line-shaped objects is done by drawing a line with only a
start and end point which intersects the line-shaped object at the point
where it is to be broken. Such a line can be generated, e. g., by selecting
the auxiliary polygon, or any other line-like object, from the toolbox.
This railway is divided into 2 sections, for example, to

allocate a different type of track to one railway section.
First click the Auxiliary Polygon tool. Then generate a line by clicking on
both sides of the point you want to breake.
Manual
2
Breake Lines
Now switch to the Edit Mode, and click the line just generated using the
right mouse button. From the context menu, select the Break Lines com-
mand.
The railway now consists of two sections, which can be shown by deleting
one of them.
Manual
Connect Lines 5.7.8 1
5.7.8 Connect Lines
In CadnaA you can connect sections of line-shaped objects of the same Parameter are assigned
object type to form one single object by transferring the relevant parame-
ters of the section, which the other sections are connected to, to the other
sections.
One possible application could be, e.g., connecting imported road sections
or buildings which have been generated in a third-party-program in the 5
form of an open auxiliary polygon and which do not have identical initial
and final points.
You can subject the connection of lines to certain conditions.
Mark the decisive line with the right mouse key and choose Connect Li- Connect1.cna
nes from the context menu.
Activate the relevant options in the dialog box and confirm with OK. The
effected sections are then connected to form one single object.
Manual
2
Connect Lines
Optionen
Snap Radius Enter the radius of the circle within which a connection point is to be
searched. This snap radius is the maximum distance between the final
points to be connected.
Check Height With this option activated, the snap radius will also relate to the 3-D dis-
tance (z-coordinate) instead of only to the 2-D distance (x/y-coordinate).
5 Search at first/last point According to the options chosen, the search will be one-way or two-way.
Search recursively With this option activated, CadnaA will, after having connected two lines,
search from the open point of the next line (etc.) as long as the given re-
quirements are fulfilled.
Check ID With this option activated only lines with identical ID will be connected.
Strategy for You can choose which of several possible lines shall be connected.
Ambiguities
See also chapter 5.7 Context Menu and chapter 5.7.2 Modify Objects.
Manual
Break Areas 5.7.9 1
5.7.9 Break Areas
This command can be applied to any closed polygon.

Just as the Break Lines command (see Chapter 5.7) from the context
menu is used for lines, you can divide areas by means of the Break Areas
command (see Chapter 5.7.7). This is useful, e. g., for dividing an existing
industrial area into several smaller areas.
5
An area is divided by means of a second area protruding into the area to be
broken.
A general area source.
How do you divide the above area?

Insert another area (closed polygon, such as an area source, a parking lot,
or a calculation area). The second area, which is used for breaking, must
not lie completely within the first area.
Manual
2
Break Areas
Area 2
5
Area 1
Area 1 and a parking lot (Area 2)

which is used to break Area 1.
Area 1 is to be divided into three areas.
) Click Area 2 with the RIGHT mouse button
) From the context menu, select Break Areas - Area 1 now consists of
three areas.
To prove this, slightly shift Areas 2, 1a, and 1b.
Manual
Break Areas 5.7.9 3
Area 2
Area 1b
Area 1a
5
Area 1
Area source divided using the Break Areas command
If you had selected Area 1 instead of Area 2 before triggering the com-
mand, Area 2 would have been divided.
Area 2
Area 2b
Area 2a
Area 1
Manual
4
Break Areas
Manual
Specify Length 5.7.10 1
5.7.10 Specify Length
You can specify the exact length of all line-shaped objects, such as roads,
railways, line sources, and also of the vertical area source, etc.
First, enter the line-like object with its approximate length. Then click this
object under the Edit Mode using the RIGHT mouse button, and, from the
context menu (see Chapter 5.7), select the Specify Length command. This
results in the line-like object being extended beyond or cut off before the 5
last entered point.
Manual
2
Specify Length
Manual
Simplify Geometry 5.7.11 1
5.7.11 Simplify Geometry
You can simplify any geometrical object for calculation purposes by re-
ducing the degree to which its details are taken into account. This can sig-
nificantly reduce calculation times - particularly for large projects. Any
object point lying at more than the specified distance from the straight line
connecting the two neighbouring points, will be deleted and neglected in
the calculation. 5
Click the object using the right mouse button and, from the context menu
(see Chapter 5.7), either select the Simplify Geometry command or Mo-
dify Object|Action: Simplify Geometry (see Chapter 5.7.2).
In the dialog that opens, enter, e.g., 10 m for the above road section. This
means that all points (for which the above-mentioned criteria is true will
be deleted.
Upon closing the dialog by clicking OK, the road section is "straight-
ened".
Manual
2
Simplify Geometry
If, also the option Vertical (m) is activated, both conditions - horizontal
and vertical - have to be true to simplify the geometry.
Manual
Spline 5.7.12 1
5.7.12 Spline
This command directly from the context menu (see Chapter 5.7) or via
Modify Object (see Chapter 5.7.2) can be applied to any open or closed
polygon.
A selected polygon line is replaced by the segmented curve of a cubic pol-
ynomial.
5
Fig. A: Before applying the Fig. B: After applying the

Spline command Spline command
If, e. g., the polygon line illustrated in Fig. A is clicked with the right
mouse button, and the Spline command is selected, this results in the
curve shown in Fig. B.
Manual
2
Spline
Manual
Parallel Object 5.7.13 1
5.7.13 Parallel Object
This command can be applied to any open or closed polygon.

Execute the command either directly from the context menu (see Chapter
5.7) of an object or via Modify Object (see Chapter 5.7.2).
An object parallel to the selected one is generated by defining, in the perti-
nent dialog, at which distance, and to which side of the object the parallel 5
object is to be inserted.
The choice "to the left/to the right" is made according to the view along
the open or closed polygon line from its initial point to its final point.
* If you don’t know anymore which one was the starting point, just
have a look at the data record in the geometry table. The graphical
representation and the data record are synchronized. Therefore, open
the Object Dialog by double-clicking the object in the Edit mode.
Shift the dialog so that you can see your object and click to the
Geometry botton. In the polygon table the first data record is marked
and also the pertinent polygon point at the graphical object.
To enter parallel barriers for the road section illustrated above, select the
road using the RIGHT mouse button and, on the context menu which ap-
pears, click the Parallel Object command.
In the following dialog, enter the desired parameters.
Manual
2
Parallel Object
* By road and railway the graphical central axis is the reference line for
the distance of the parallel object.
If you execute the command Parallel Object at an open polygon, e.g., at
the object Road, and if you choose a closed polygon as Object type, e.g.,
the object Designated Land Use, and if you also choose the option Left
and Right from the object, CadnaA places then the closed polygon over
or under the road.
.
Manual
Parallel Object 5.7.13 3
In the above figure three parts of roads (1, 2 and 3) are displayed. With the Example
command Parallel Object the object Designated Land Use has been in-
serted „over“ the road part 2 with the option Object Type: Designated
Land Use, left and right, Distance 30 m.
If you also define a Station Range, the parallel object will only be gener- Station Range
ated in this defined range (see Chapter 5.7.3 "Generate Station").
In this example, the Object Type „Barrier“ is selected from the list box.
5
upon closing the dialog by clicking OK, a 3-metre-high barrier is inserted
on both sides of the road at a distance of 10 m each, as defined by the pa-
rameters specified above.
You may also execute this command with Modify Object|Action: Paral- Parallel Object with the
lel Object. This is interesting, e.g., if beyond several single road sections Modify Object
command 5.7.13
parallel barriers shall be generated and if station ranges are defined.
Manual
4
Parallel Object
Manual
Convert to 5.7.14 1
5.7.14 Convert to
Object types can be converted to other object types. For example, you can
convert a road to a railway, a contour line to a barrier, a building to foliage
or to a built-up area. Existing parameters are retained where this makes
sense.
In order to convert, e. g., the earler-mentioned parallel barriers along the
road to contour lines, select one barrier using the RIGHT mouse button to 5
open the context menu, and click the Convert to command.
A pop-up menu appears, listing all object types available. Click Contour
Line. This converts the barrier to a contour line with the barrier co-ordi-
nates and height being applied to the contour line.
You can now easily re-locate the road to lie on an embankment.
Manual
2
Convert to
Manual
Break into pieces 5.7.15 1
5.7.15 Break into pieces
With the command Break Lines, which you can select after clicking with
the right mouse key on a line-shaped object (e.g. road, linesource) in the
context menu (see Chapter 5.7), you can either
• define the desired length of the new sections - the final section will
then be of a different length - or
5
• the number of new sections, which will then all have the same length or
• you break the line-shaped object on its polygon points.
This command can be applicated, e.g., in connection with Optimize Walls

If you insert one Road it is described then by one data record in the object
table (Tables|Sources|Roads). After executing the command Break Li-
nes you will find several data records in your table describing each divided
road segment.
Manual
2
Break into pieces
Manual
Activation 5.7.16 1
5.7.16 Activation
With the Action:Activation of Modify Objects from the context menu

you may change the activations (see Chapter 5.5.3, ID) of all desired ob-
jects without opening the object dialog.
If you have choosen all options and objects in the Modify Object dialog,
confirm with OK - the Activation dialog will appear.
5
The left check boxes show the possible conditions of activation, the right
one the actual state.
Choose from the listbox the kind of activation you like to have. All corre-
sponding objects are then in that condition, no matter which condition they
have been in before.
Example: If you choose inactive - all the concerned objects are deaktivat- (in)active
ed.
If you choose intermediate the objects are neither activated nor inactivet- intermediate
ed (default setting of the object).
If you choose general, you may decide individually the activation condi- general
tions by clicking in the checked boxes on the right.
Manual
2
Activation
Manual
Modify Attribute 5.7.17 1
5.7.17 Modify Attribute
With the command from the context menu Modify Object|Action:Modify

Attribute you can change the parameters of different and/or groups of ob-
jects simultaneously.
If you, e.g., want to increase existing object heights by 5 m choose this
command and input the parameter displayed in the following figure.
5
Select those object types whose Attributes you wish to modify. Depend-
ing on the object type selected you have the corresponding attributes at
your disposal in the dialog after pressing OK.
With these parameters the object height (HA) is increased

in each case by 5 m after confirming with OK.
For example, you have imported roads whose base-points (polygon points) Example:
have absolute heights. In this case the option absolute Height at every change height
from absolute to relative
Point is activated in CadnaA’s Geometry dialog. and vice- versa 5.7
But you want relative heights for every base point to be able to adjust the
roads new to your digital terrain model (DTM) in your project.
The following steps are necessary:
Manual
2
Modify Attribute
) Click with the Right mouse key on a free place in your file and
choose the function Modify Objects in the context menu.
) In the following dialog choose the Action: Modify Attribute, mark

the object Road and confirm with OK.
) In the dialog Modify Attribut choose the attribute HA (for the

height of the first point), activate the option Arithmetic and enter the
5 value 0 (zero). (You may enter an abitrary value - CadnaA adjusts the
heights to the ground model anyway because the heights are relative
after the action).
) If you confirm all dialogs, the relative heights are then 0 m and the
option Interpolate from first/last point is activated (that means
relative for a line-like object).
CadnaA shows the new heights, which are adapted then from the
ground model after calculation.
Now, if you want define the new heights as absolut, again repeat the above
described action but this time choose the Attribute HA_ATT (attribute for
the height of the first point). Activate the option Replace String|Replace
with and enter a blank. Confirm all dialogs. The heights are now defined
as absolute and the option absolute height at every point is activated
again. They are not changed again in case of a new calculation.
For point-like objects, e.g., point sources, receiver points etc., you can
change the attribute of the height with r for relative and a for absolute in-
stead with a blank.
Example: With the function Modify Objects|Modify Attribute you can also change
Change Color 5.7 the colors of auxiliary polygons. Deaktivate the polygons, which color e.g.
you don’t want to change and act like follows:
) Choose Modify Objects|Modify Attribute|only active object type:

Aux. Polygon and confirm with OK.
Manual
Modify Attribute 5.7.17 3
) In the next dialog Modify Attribute select the Attribute L_COLOR

for the line color from the list. In case you like to change the filling of
a polygon choose F_COLOR.
Manual
4
Modify Attribute
) Activate Arithmetisch and enter
RGB(255,0,0)
in the field new Value.
RGB embodies RED - YELLOW - BLUE, the numbers in brackets
are the corresponding values for the color red, yellow and blue. In
this example the polygons’ color change to red.
5
If your Aux. Polygons not change their colors then could that be that the
option use global properties is still active. Then you have to change this
as follows:
In the dialog Modify Attribute select the Attribut GLOBAL, activate the
option Replace String and enter a space in that field. After confirming
with OK the polygons display their corresponding color.
See also:
Attribute Abreviation (see Chapter 2.5)
Arithmetics and String-Replacement (see Chapter 15.2.5)
Context menu (see Chapter 5.7)
Modify Objects (see Chapter 5.7.2)
Manual
Swap Name/ID 5.7.1 1
5.7.1 Swap Name/ID
With the command Swap Name/ID from the Contextmenu|Modify Ob-

ject you can excange, e.g., the entry of the box Name and ID in the object
dialog.
Depending on the file format this maybe necessary after importing a file
from a GIS-system, a file e.g. like DXF with a Dxf-handle. Such systems
store non geometrical data in a seperate database. In order to merge the da- 5
ta, like the distance of a road or the number of cars, with the real graphical
object, the IDs have to be identical in both files.
see chapter 5.5.3 "The Dialog Boxes Name, ID, INFO"
see chapter 5.7 "Context Menu"
see chapter 5.7.2 "Modify Objects"
see chapter 6.5 "Import via ODBC Interface"
Manual
2
Swap Name/ID
Manual
Delete Duplicates 5.7.2 1
5.7.2 Delete Duplicates
You can delete objects of the same type and with the same parameters si-
multanously with the command from the context menu Modify Ob-
jects|Action: Delete Duplicates.
This function is sometimes necessary after importing from third-party pro-
grams like e.g. ArcView or DXF.
5
You can choose the concerned object type like, e.g. only for roads.
After confirming with OK a further dialog opens in which you can choose
conditions for the deletion if necessary.
Handbuch
2
Delete Duplicates
5
Having chosen several conditions, then all conditions must be true before
the duplicates are deleted (logical AND). Is the condition Geometry acti-
vaed you have the possibility to input a deviation (snap in (m)). In this
case the objects may deviate from the Geometry by the value which is still
to be recognized as a duplicate.
The first objects placed in the table would be the originals the following
identical objects the duplicates.
see Chapter 5.7 "Context Menu"
see Chapter 5.7.2 "Modify Objects"
Handbuch
Manual CadnaA
Chapter 6 Import
Chapter 5 Basics 5
Chapter 6 Import 6
Chapter 8 Sources 8
Examples Tutorial
Manual
2 Chapter 6 Import
Manual
Chapter 6 Import
Contents 6.1 1
Chapter 6 Import
6.1 Contents
6.2 Importing
6.3 Import Options 6
6.3.1 Allocate Object type to Layer

6.3.2 Importing in Section only
6.3.3 Importing selected Object Types
6.3.4 Coordinate Transformation
6.4 Import Formats

6.4.1 CadnaA
6.4.2 AutoCad-DXF
6.4.3 ArcView
6.4.4 Atlas GIS
6.4.5 Sicad Files
6.4.6 EDBS
6.4.7 WINPUT-DGM Files
6.4.8 Stratis
6.4.9 MapInfo
6.4.10 Import / Export of Tables listing number
of Trains
6.4.11 Special Formats
6.4.12 Third-Party Programs
6.4.13 Building Height Points
6.4.14 Ascii-Poly
Manual
2
6.1 Chapter 6 Import
Contents
6.5 Import via ODBC Interface
Manual
Chapter 6 Import
Importing 6.2 1
6.2 Importing
Data from third-party programs can be imported by CadnaA using various
file formats or via the ODBC interface (see chapter 6.5).
Any objects contained in the current Cadna file will not be deleted, but the
external file will be inserted or existing data will be updated. This enables
you to continuously complete a file by importing external and/or internal
data.
Depending on the file format, CadnaA allows you to specify certain im- Import Options 6.2
porting options: 6
• Selection of layers to be assigned to specified object types (see chapter Layer

6.3.1 "Allocate Object type to Layer").
• Coordinate transformation serving to match the data to those of your Coordinate
project file (see chapter 6.3.4). Transformation
• Specification of a target area in your project file by using the Section Importing in a target area
tool, to where the data are to be imported in order to reduce the amount
of data (see chapter 6.3.2 "Importing in Section only").
• Selection of object types - by this you may import only the needed Selection of Object types6.2
object types from a file, e.g., only roads.
Select the Import command from the File menu if you wish to make use File Formats 6.2
of a file format to insert objects from an external file in your project file
(file formats like, e. g., GIS like ArcView, MapInfo, CAD like AutoCad
DXF and other third-party programs).
In the file selection dialog, first select the File Format from the list box,
then select the file to be imported.
The button Options allows you to specify the import options depending on
the selected file format (see further below in this chapter).
The files are imported by clicking the OK button.
Manual
2
Importing
Manual
Chapter 6 Import
Import Options 6.3 1
6.3 Import Options

After clicking the Options button on the Open File dialog, you can spe-
cify a desired coordinate transformation and, for some file formats like At-
lasGis, DXF, and SICAD, enter information concerning layer IDs and the
limits.
CadnaA makes use of the geometrical object types: point, open and closed
lines (see Chapter 10 Topography). If any object to be imported does not
comply with the geometrical object types under CadnaA – like, e. g., an
open polygon being imported as an area source – it will always be inter- 6
preted as an auxiliary polygon, which means it will be irrelevant for the
acoustical calculations. In such a case, you would have to select the Con-
vert to command from the context menu (see chapter 5.7) to convert the
auxiliary polygon to an object of the desired type.
* If you intend to import data from third-party programs, we recom-

mend you ensure that the object types conform to the geometrical
object types under CadnaA.
CadnaA may interpret imported points as, e.g., point sources, height
points, crossing lights or tennis balls or imported lines as line sour-
ces, roads, railways or barriers etc.
Manual
2
Import Options
Manual
Chapter 6.3 Import Options
Allocate Object type to Layer 6.3.1 1
6.3.1 Allocate Object type to Layer
The Import|Options|Layer dialog serves to identify layers of the impor-

ted data with the pertinent object types. You can Save the allocation list to
a file for re-use (Open). CadnaA will interpret all lines belonging to one
layer as objects of the type allocated to that layer in the list.
In order to allocate object types to layers, double-click the pertinent row.

In the Import: Layer dialog, enter the names of the layers containing the
geometry data of the object type in question or select them from a layer
list. A layer list could exist, e.g., in a DXF file if this attribute has been sa-
ved as well. In any case you have to know the layer names.
Manual
2
6.3.1 Chapter 6.3 Import Options
Allocate Object type to Layer
If several layers are to be identified by common character strings, you can

6 also use wildcards, such as *, to substitute arbitrary strings (see chapter
2.8).
Example: 6.3.1 Roads A through F are on layer STR1, roads G through M on layer STR2.
You can import all of the roads A through M at once by entering STR* in
the Import: Layer dialog for the object type Road.
If roads A through F were to lie on layer STR1, and roads G through M on
layer ROAD, roads A through M could also be imported all at once by ente-
ring STR1|ROAD (i. e. STR1 "or" ROAD) in the Import: Layer dialog for
the object type Road.
This "allocation list" can be saved to a file for subsequent re-use by cli-
cking the Save AS button, and can be opened again (Open button) as re-
quired.
The data will be imported after confirming with OK.
Manual
Importing in Section only 6.3.2 1
6.3.2 Importing in Section only
If you activate Import only Section in the Import|Options dialog, you Import only Section
must have defined at least one Section with a unique identifier (see chapter
13.10), which can be selected from the list. In this case you can only im-
port from the file the data which lie within an area which coordinates are
identical with the coordinates of the selected Section.
If you enter a value > 0 in the field plus Border (m) then objects surroun- plus Border 6
ding the sections with the specified distance are imported additionally.
This option is very convenient in that it can save you a lot of memory by
importing only the area you actually need from a file of many megabytes.
Objects lying within the Section, and extending beyond it, will also be im-
ported. If necessary, delete them using the context menu (see chapter 5.7)
Modify Objects|Action: Delete. You may need to use the Break Lines
and/or Break Areas command from the context menu before deleting.
An area imported using the above option.
You have a large project file in which you have to make an expert report Example 6.3.2
about a small area in detail. You only want to import that area in question.
Manual
2
Importing in Section only
ImportArea.cna ) Open the example file. This contains a Section frame named Test
Area (a name is mandatory!). Now, only in this area, shall objects be
imported from another file - Demo1.cna.
The file ImportArea.cna contains only a Section frame -

in the edit dialog you can see the name and the coordi-
nates of the frame.
) Select File|Import|File format: CadnaA and afterwards the file to

be imported from - in our example Demo1.cna in your program fol-
der.
Manual
) Then click on the Option button and set the parameter as in the
following figure.
Import options available with the file format CadnaA
In the list box you can see all the identified Sections. Select one by cli-
cking on its name.
After confirming all dialogs the objects placed in the target area will be
imported in the Section frame. As you may see, all objects which affect
respectively protrude the area will be imported, too. If necessary, these
objects have to be broken on the border of the Section frame and deleted
outside this area as follows:
) Convert the Section frame into another closed polygon as an auxili-

ary area, e.g., in an area source (with the Section frame, lines or areas
cannot be broken). Therefore mark the object with a RIGHT mouse
click and select Convert to from the context menu.
) Afterwards mark the converted object with the RIGHT mouse click
again and select one after the other Break Lines and Break Areas
from the context menu again.
Manual
4
If you now click on the objects outside the auxiliary area they will be
marked independently of the original complete object. Also buildings
are divided, but not Bitmaps. Bitmaps have to be trimmed separately
in a graphic program.
) Once more mark with a RIGHT mouse click the border of the auxili-
ary area and select from the context menu Modify Objects|Action:
Delete.
) Activate the corresponding options as shown in the following figure.

6 After confirming with OK the concernd objects will be deleted.
At the end you may update the limits (Options|Limits|Calc).
Manual
If you define an additional border area to be imported, objects within this Border Aera 6.3.2
area will also be imported. This may be necessary if you want to calculate
a noise map for the section and if you must consider the noise impact from
sources and other objects outside the section.
Manual
6
Manual
Importing selected Object Types 6.3.3 1
6.3.3 Importing selected Object Types
If the function Select Object Type in menu File|Import|Options is avai-

lable you may choose which object type you want to import from the file.
Multiple choice is possible.
Manual
2
Importing selected Object Types
Manual
Coordinate Transformation 6.3.4 1
6.3.4 Coordinate Transformation
The transforming of objects and/or complete projects is a strong aid und

distinguishes CadnaA in a special way.
When files are imported, differences in the coordinate systems may have Import files from third-
to be taken into account. Therefore the possibility of coordinate transfor- party programs 6.3.4
mations exists in all available import formats of CadnaA.

But maybe you want to duplicate and/or displace a group of objects in Duplicate, displace,
your project or just simply rotate a building - this can also be done easily rotate, distort objects6.3.4
6
with the coordinate transformation. In this case use the function from the
context menu (see chapter 5.7) Modify Object|Action: Transformation.
For the coordinate transformation several possibilities are available:
• Rotation and Displacement
• Match Points
• Affine Transformation
• General Transformation
* Calculated grids and bitmap files cannot be transfered with this func-
tion.
Manual
2
Coordinate Transformation
Rotation and Enter the coordinates of the pivot, the angle of rotation and the displace-
Displacement 6.3.4 ments in the x, y and z directions. The rotation about the specified pivot is
performed first, the displacements follow in the three directions. The pivot
is a pair of co-ordinates to be imported from the project.
Example: 122,17/41,61 are the coordinates of one corner of a building belonging to
the project being imported. This is the pivot. With the data in the dialog
below, the imported project is rotated about that point by 45°, and dis-
placed by 100 m to the right and by 100 m upwards.
Manual
The coordinate transformation option Match Points allows an easy reuni- Match Points 6.3.4
ting of project files with different coordinate systems. If you enter the exis-
ting coordinates for all three points and the new coordinates for the
transformation you also can get a correction of the project file.
In the edit boxes x-old/y-old insert the current coordinates of the corres-
ponding points and in the edit boxes x-new/y-new the prospective coordi-
nates of these points, which should be valid after the transforming.
Inserting the coordinates x-old, y-old und x-new, y-new
• for one point - a simple offset occurs 6
• for two points - in general, an offset, a rotation and a scaling occurs
(angle remained)
• for three points - in general, an offset, a rotation, scaling and a bending
(not angle remained) occurs
Enter in the x/y-old boxes the still currently valid coordinates of the corre-
sponding polyon points from the file to be imported and in the x/y-new bo-
xes the coordinates for these points which should be valid after the import.
Manual
4
* Hint for Professionals: After enforced transformation you may see

the displacement vector in the transformation matrix if you open the
transformation dialog again and activate the option Affine Transfor-
mation.
6.3.4 The displacement vector in the transformation matrix after transformation

6.3.4
Example Try this effect with the help of the file Demo1.cna. From three different
Match Point 6.3.4 objects pick out one coordinate pair in each case. For there open the Geo-
metry dialog of the corresponding polygon point and write down the co-
ordinates x and y. For these coordinates you now have to determine the
new coordinates. Point with the mouse cursor on the place in your project
where the polygon point should be after the translation and look up the va-
lues in the status bar.
• Click with the Right mouse button on an empty area in your file and
select Modify Object from the context menu.
• In the dialog which has been opened activate All objects and confirm
with OK.
• In the transformation dialog activate Match Points and enter the old
and new coordinates.
• Activate the option Keep Original to see the difference. In this case a
copy of the entire project will be generated.
Manual
A rotation and/or a scaling is specified by the coefficients of the transfor- Affine

mation matrix. Transformation 6.3.4
If all objects of the imported file are to be rotated by an angle of ϕ about

the coordinate zero of the file, the values of the matrix result from:
x neu ⎛ cosϕ
=⎜
− sin ϕ ⎞ ⎛ x ⎞
⎟⎜ ⎟
y neu
⎝ sin ϕ cosϕ ⎠ ⎝ y⎠
To specify a displacement along an axis, enter the offsets of x and y.

6
The example above results in a 90° counterclockwise

rotation about the coordinate zero, which, after importing,
corresponds to point (10,20).
Manual
6
General When this option is selected, every new value of the three dimensions,
Transformation 6.3.4 xnew, ynew, and znew can be assigned an arbitrary nexus of the values of
the three coordinates of the old system. This allows arbitrary distortions,
reflections, and other modifications.
The following transformation generates a rectangle that is parallel to its
axes and transforms it into a parallelogram which is shifted to smaller va-
lues of the y-coordinate by 500 m.
) Check this out yourself: Draw a rectangle
Then either
• Save the file and afterwards File New, Import|Options|Transforma-
tion or not touching an object
• Modify Objects|Action: Transformation and maybe Keep Original.
(If you don’t see the new object then change your scale!)
Manual
Delete polygon points depending on their height z Delete and interpolate

height of polygon points
With the general transformation dialog you may also delete polygon points
from lines and areas depending on a user-defined height of the polygon
points.
This function may be useful for objects which have some points with a
height of zero while the other ones have heights greater than zero and, mo-
reever, the distances to each other are very small. This may happen with a
file imported from a third party program.
With contour lines for e.g. you would have a very jagged digital terrain 6
model. In this case you may purge these objects by defining a formula in
the z-coordinate field as follows:
iif(z==0,del,z)
(if the height is 0, then delete that point, otherwise do not alter the height).
Of course you may enter a different value for zero. After confirming with
OK the affected points are deleted.
Interpolation of the height z

Instead of deleting the points if their z-heights are not desired, you may in-
terpolate the z-height, depending on the next corresponding z-height and
the distance of these points, with the formula as follows:
iif(z==0,int,z)
Of course you may enter a different value for zero as well. After confir-
ming with OK the affected points are interpolated.
Manual
8
Duplication by If you want to transfer and simultanously duplicate several and/or different
Transformation 6.3.4 objects you may also accomplish this by Transformation. Therefore, choo-
se Modify Object|Action: Transformation from the context menu (see
chapter 5.7.2 "Modify Objects").
Following a simple example with all transformation possibilities in
CadnaA.
The following figure is the starting situation. Six cylinders with point sour-
ces shall be duplicated above the existing cylinders.
The central coordinates of a cylinder will be looked up in the Geometry di-

alog and transcribed - in our example the lower left cylinder with x 179,03
and y 51,09.
The entire construction shall be transfered 60 m going out from the lower
left cylinder up toward the top on the y-axis. The following figure shows
the layout which should emerge after the transformation.
Manual
Layout after transformation with activated option Keep Original.
In this case the transformation is executed on the Section frame from the
context menu with Modify Object|Action: Transformation|inside poly-
gon|Cylinder and Point sources.
When choosing this option enter in the column Translation only for the y- Rotation and
coordinate (middle box) 60. In this way the object will be transfered 60 m Displacement 6.3.4
upward. With a negativ value (- 60) the object will be transfered down-
ward.
Manual
10
Match Point 6.3.4 When choosing this option, you will need in every case the old and the
new coordinates. For our example enter, for a simple shift upward, only
for P1 old x 179,03 / y 51,09 and for new x 179,03 / y 111,09.
Affine When choosing this option activate the checkbox Rotation/Scaling and
Transformation 6.3.4 enter also 60 in this column for the y-coordinate.
General When choosing this option for our example enter the following:
Transformation 6.3.4
6 Xnew = x
Ynew = y + 60
Znew = z
Manual
Chapter 6 Import
Import Formats 6.4 1
6.4 Import Formats

With the extremly efficient interface for many third-party file formats it is
guaranteed that CadnaA users can take advantage of all availible data
sources. Because of continuous developement it cannot be excluded that a
file format has changed and therefore the corresponting data cannot be
correctly imported. It is recommended you check a file format by impor-
ting a little test file before importing big data volume.
If a file format, which is supported by CadnaA, cannot be perferctly im-
ported or you require a file format which has not yet been implemented in 6
CadnaA, please let us know.
The following import formats are currently available:
Manual
2
6.4.1 Chapter 6.4 Import Formats
CadnaA
6.4.1 CadnaA
CadnaA’s internal file format with the extension CNA. Any CadnaA file
can be imported into any other CadnaA file.
Import options:
• Select object type (see chapter 6.3.3)
• Import only in a Section (see chapter 6.3.2)
6
Manual
Chapter 6.4 Import Formats
AutoCad-DXF 6.4.2 1
6.4.2 AutoCad-DXF
Using the DXF format to import geometry data is an option often made Hints for importing data
use of. Many CAD programs are capable of exporting DXF files, which using the DXF
format 6.4.2
means that practically all maps generated using a CAD system can be im-
ported by CadnaA. This feature, however, is limited to geometry data –
other features and parameters are not imported. If necessary, this has to be
done in a second step using the database interface (see chapter 6.5 "Import
via ODBC Interface").
6
CAD systems can be used in a very flexible manner. Designers are free in
their definition of objects. Buildings need not necessarily be drawn as
closed polygon. The simplest representation consists of four individual
walls (lines). Often, heights are not given, as for many maps two-dimensi-
onal representations are sufficient.
To ensure proper interpretation of the DXF data by CadnaA, observe the
following hints:
• Allocate all drawing elements belonging to one acoustical object type
in CadnaA to one layer.
• Prior to saving the DXF file, all those elements should be removed
from the drawing (such as lettering, structural elements etc.), which are
not required for the representation of the object in CadnaA. (A lette-
ring, e. g., is imported as a set of vectors in many small sections. This
results in more memory being used than actually necessary, which, in
turn, slows down work with your file.).
• Points, such as point sources and receiver points, are exported with x,
y, and z coordinates. When CadnaA imports them, the z co-ordinate is
interpreted as absolute height.
• All lines must be saved as polygon lines.
• Any object represented as a closed polygon in CadnaA (buildings, area
sources, built-up areas, foliage etc.) is to be represented by a closed
polygon line. For three-dimensional objects, such as buildings, the z
coordinate of each point means the absolute height of the roof. The
Manual
2
AutoCad-DXF
polygon, therefore, defines the outline of the roof area.

• Save open lines such as roads, railways, line sources etc. as open poly-
gon lines.
• In the case of roads, only the axis (centre line) can be used as a DXF
element. If the axis of several tracks are saved as lines, CadnaA will
accordingly display several parallel roads. In this case, you would have
to assign to each road the width of one of the tracks, and the traffic den-
sity applicable to that track. It is therefore much simpler just to import
the main axis of the road and then specify the road cross section as a
6 parameter.
Our DXF format will intercept some of the individual inputs made by
CAD users. To be able to interpret a polygon as, e. g., a building, CadnaA
requires that the polygon is closed. CadnaA will therefore assume a buil-
ding to be a closed polygon, although its walls, in the CAD system, are re-
presented by individual lines with, however, identical first and last points
(which, a priori, is not a closed polygon). If the pertinent layer name is gi-
ven, the polygon is then imported as a building.
Block saving is also supported by the CadnaA DXF format, and the ob-
jects are processed accordingly.
see also chapter 11.6.5 Closing Buildings
File extension DXF 6.4.2 File names in DXF format have the extension DXF.
Import Options 6.4.2 • Object layer (see chapter 6.3.1)

• Import only in a Section (see chapter 6.3.2)
• Use Object heights for Polylines
• Import Blocks as Points
• Import DXF-Handle as Name
Use Object Heights for With the activated option CadnaA adds the z-height and the object height
Polylines from the DXF file, and defines this height as object height in CadnaA.
Manual
AutoCad-DXF 6.4.2 3
In a CAD program the layer of an object is, e.g., defined by 15 m, the ob- Example
ject height by 20 m. This is in CadnaA an object height of 35 m, absolute.
With the activated option for the DXF-Import only, the "Insertion points" Import Blocks as Points
of the blocks will be imported.
In a CAD program if height points are drawn as crossing lines and defined Example
as block, CadnaA will import crosses instead of intersection points if the
option is deactivated.
6
Sometimes DXF files contain identifiers (ID) so-called „Handle“. Impor- Import DXF-Handle
ting these in CadnaA is only useful if you also want to import intercon- as Name
nected parameters located in a separate database. The ID is the connecting

element between the graphic objects from the DXF file and the parameters
from the database (see chapter 6.5 "Import via ODBC Interface").
So, activate this option if the mentioned condition is to be fulfilled.
After importing the DXF file the Handle is entered automaticly in the Na-
me box in the object dialog. Before you merge the data from a database via
the ODBC interface you have to „hand over“ the Handle from the Name
into the ID box of CadnaA.
For that, use the command from the context menu Modify Object|Swap Swap Name/ID
Name/ID.
Following a DXF import example in which two height references are con- Example
tained in a file.
Following situation: you get a DXF file in which are saved buildings with DXF Import with
two heights - the base point height and the object height. two heights 6.4.2
The base point height shall be imported for the digital terrain modell
(DTM) as contour lines.
The following procedure is started with File|Import|File format|Auto-
Cad DXF:
Manual
4
AutoCad-DXF
The DXF file has to be imported twice with the below mentioned option
settings.
1. Import action Contour line - Layer: e.g. „xyz“ (or more layer names which include buil-
dings, too - e.g. xyz|zyx|micky. . . .)
Aux. Polygon - Layer: *
Option: Use Object height for Polylines - not activated!
Close the dialog with OK - the file will be imported.
2. Import action: 6.4.2 Building - Layer: „ xyz“

Contour lines - No import!
Aux. Polygon - No import!
Option: Use Object height for Polylines now activated
Close the dialog with OK - the file will be imported.
Manual
AutoCad-DXF 6.4.2 5
That’s it.
But there are probably too many contour lines imported with a slight
height difference which is surely not useful. If necessary, thin the contour
line model by deleting them or eliminate polygon points from the contour
lines with the function Modify Objects|Action: Simplify Geometry from
the context menu (see chapter 5.7.11) or generate new contour lines by
calculating a ground model (see chapter 10.8).
Manual
6
AutoCad-DXF
Manual
ArcView 6.4.3 1
6.4.3 ArcView
ArcView files are shape files which were generated as exported files from
the ESRI company's Geographic Information System (GIS) using Arc-
View or ArcInfo software.
Possible import options:
• Object Layer (see chapter 6.3.1)
6
The GIS system is based on layers and themes. These themes are labelled
and contain objects to be specified by the user. The themes "Buil-
dings.shp", e. g., might comprise all buildings in a city, or "Traffic Sys-
tems.shp" might include all roads.
Via the ArcView format, CadnaA is capable of exporting shape files and
importing these files, while at the same time allocating the GIS objects to
the appropriate CadnaA objects by entering the themes in the allocation
list (Options button).
Lines (ISO-dB) and areas with equal sound sources (noise map) and the
calculated receiver grid can also be exported to ArcView or ArcInfo. Data
exchange with the ArcView GIS system is thus guaranteed.
In total you will get three files with the same name but different extensi-
ons:
• the shape file with the extension „shp“ which comprises the geometri-
cal object data;
• the database file with the extension „dBf“ with object attributes like,
e.g., object height, MDTD of a road (Mean Daily Traffic Density),
SCS/Distance of a road (Standard Cross Section) or the sound emission
level etc.;
• and a so-called index file with the extension „shx“.
For the importation, these files have to be placed together in the same di-
rectory.
Manual
2
ArcView
In the dialog Import Options enter the theme/file name without the exten-
sion „shp“ as the layer name for the appropriate object type. The data
being imported is then allocated to that object type under CadnaA.
Clicking OK closes the dialog and imports the data.
Example Import of Example of an import from ArcView into CadnaA:

Objects 6.4.3
You have at least three ArcView files in the Shape format (*.shp, *.shx,
*.dBf) and they are all in the same folder.
6 Within CadnaA import the shp-file with File|Import|File format: Arc

View. This file type comprises the geometrical object references.
After clicking the Option button you may allocate the ArcView files to the
appropriate object types by inputing the file names (themes) in the corres-
ponding layer boxes. You may import several files simultanously.
) Mark, if necessary, by multiple choice (see chapter 4.10 "Mouse But-

tons"), the files you would like to import.
) Afterwards click on the Option button.
Manual
ArcView 6.4.3 3
) Enter the ArcView file name without the extension „shp“ and - very
important - with an asterisk (*) behind the filename in the correspon-
ding object type of the layer boxes. The data will be imported after
confirming and closing all dialogs with OK.
In this example data is being imported which is found in the files named
bahn-lin.shp and str-lin.shp.
During importation a code, a combination from the name of the shape file Automatic ID
(e.g. bahn-lin) and the record number (e.g. 001, 002, 003 etc.), will be assi- definition
gned to the objects automatically and displayed in the ID box in the object
edit dialog in, thus "bahn-lin001", „bahn-lin002“ etc.
If further object parameters are available e.g. SCS/Distance of a road, Parameter importation
MDTD or also the building height, if this attribute has not already been via ODBC interface
imported from the shp-file, they usually will be simultanously exported
into the file with the dBf extension. You may also import this data into
CadnaA via the ODBC interface (see chapter 6.5).
In this case you have to assign, among others, the Attribute ID to (ta- Match ID
ble+recno) from the Table Column list in order to merge the attributes
with corresponding objects with the matching IDs.
Manual
4
ArcView
Swap Name/ID If the ArcView dBf-file contains a different ID which you want to use you
may import this ID temporarily in the object field Name and swap the Na-
me with the ID after importing it with the function from the context menu
Modify Object|Action: Swap Name/ID (see chapter 5.7.1).
Bitmap files If Bitmap files also being delivered by ArcView, and if they are geo refe-
renced, you may import these files with the file format Bitmap without ha-
ving to calibrate them again.
Manual
Atlas GIS 6.4.4 1
6.4.4 Atlas GIS
The extension of the file format AtlasGis is BNA.

Import options:
• Import only in Section (see chapter 6.3.2)
Manual
2
Atlas GIS
Manual
Sicad Files 6.4.5 1
6.4.5 Sicad Files
The allocation of the imported data to the object types is managed by the
layer names in CadnaA (see chapter 6.3.1). The layers in Sicad format are
called levels.
When doing so, please note:
You may enter four different parameters for one layer name. These four
parameters are written in capital letters so as to be separated from each
other for better alignment as follows: 6
Parameter Explanation Example
E Level no. E3
M Line Style M1
S Line width S5
T Element type KR = Circle, LI =

Line
A possible entry in the layer column in CadnaA would be:

E15M1S7TKR
If necessary, references concerning a coordinate transformation may be
entered.
Manual
2
Sicad Files
Manual
EDBS 6.4.6 1
6.4.6 EDBS
The EDBS file format is a standard file format in many surveying-offices.

Importation options:
• Import only in Section (see chapter 6.3.2)
Manual
2
EDBS
Manual
WINPUT-DGM Files 6.4.7 1
6.4.7 WINPUT-DGM Files
The WINPUT-DGM file is a special Ascii file format which either con- Height Points 6.4.7
tains coordinates of height points (one x-y-coordinate pair per row) or con-
tour lines (more then one x-y-coordinate pair per row). The data can be
directly imported as a digital terrain model in CadnaA.
When calculating the sound propagation, ground attenuation and screening
will also be taken into account for height points if Triangulation is choo-
sen for the terrain model in Calculation|Configuration|TGM (see chap-
6
ter 12.4.7).
Manual
2
WINPUT-DGM Files
Manual
Stratis 6.4.8 1
6.4.8 Stratis
Stratis is a program system for road construction and civil engineering by

RIB company .
To export data from STRATIS and import it into CadnaA the following
formats are recommended for the corresponding objects:
in STRATIS in CADNAA
6
Object Export format Import format
Roads Soundplan SCA-file Stratis
Contour lines Soundplan SCA-file Stratis
Dam-/Embankment lines Soundplan SCA-file Stratis
Build up Area DXF DXF
If necessary refer to the STRATIS manual for the mentioned export for-
mats.
* For better understanding open the example file Sca_hl.cna in Sca_hl.cna and S1.sca
CadnaA and import the file S1.sca with File|Import|File format
STRATIS.
After a STRATIS file with road axis and embankment has been imported
within a CadnaA project with an existing terrain model. It had been neces-
sary to delete the existing contour lines between road and embankment
base line „by hand“. This procedure is now automated to some extent.
Manual
2
Stratis
Example: terrain model with imported road and embankment base line from Stratis
When importing in CadnaA a closed auxiliary polygon is automatically

laid over the imported embankment base line of the road. If you open its
edit dialog with a double-click you can look up the identifier „STRAS-
SENRAUM” in the ID box.
Close the edit dialog again and open with the RIGHT mouse key the context
menu of this auxililary polygon.
) click on the command Break Lines and
) again in the context menu Modify Object.
Choose the following in the opening dialog:
) Action: Delete
) the options inside and on the border of the polygon
) and from the object list Contour Lines
Manual
Stratis 6.4.8 3
Modify Object from the context menu of the auxiliary polygon
) After confirming with OK click on the button All in the next dialog.
After deleting the contour lines between road and embankment base line.
Now all contour lines are deleted including the embankment base line.
Manual
4
Stratis
) Afterwards also delete the auxiliary polygon and the road, then
) import the road again.
Manual
MapInfo 6.4.9 1
6.4.9 MapInfo
The import format MapInfo® (MapInfo Corporation, USA) enables the

importing of so-called MIF files (Ascii) which contain the geometrical re-
ferences for objects like, e.g., building coordinates.
The generally supplied Ascii data file with the extension MID contains
further parameters like, e.g., object height, MDTD, or road distances etc.
which you may import via the ODBC database interface (see chapter
6.4.9).
6
If this is a big file, open it in Excel or ACCESS first and save it again as
XLS or mdB format. If possible use an Excel driver or something else but
not a Ascii driver. Ascii-ODBC drivers work very slowly if the data volu-
me is big.
How many columns and which kind of data these files contain can be
looked up in the third supplied file with the extension TAB. The column
headings are usualy missing in the MID file because this reference is in-
cluded in the TAB file.
If necessary adapt the new saved file accordingly: In the first row write the
column headings, delete columns which are not needed etc. Use this adop-
ted file for the import via the ODBC database interface.
Import options:
Manual
2
MapInfo
Manual
Import / Export of Tables listing number of Trains 6.4.10 1
6.4.10 Import / Export of Tables listing number

of Trains
Data on number of trains can be imported from text-files. During import it

has to be specified whether the data imported shall be copied to locally de-
fined railway tracks or to library on number-of-trains.
The parameters have to be separated by TABs. The name of the track or of
the train list are in the first row (NOT=“Number of Trains“):
1. row: 6
name of track or train list
2. row:
Train_Type|NOT_Day|NOT_Evening|NOT_Night|Speed|...
Train_Length|Percentage_Disc_Brakes|Correction_Dfz|Selection_Train
3. row:
(empty line)
* Remark: The last two parameters are just required for the German
calculation model (Schall 03). For all other methods these parameters
shall be zero.
Manual
2
Import / Export of Tables listing number of Trains
Manual
Special Formats 6.4.11 1
6.4.11 Special Formats
The import of Bitmaps only works correctly if the option BITMAP is Bitmap 6.4.11
purchased (see see chapter 14.3.
With this import format (Deutsche Telekom MobilNet GmbH) you can im- T-Mobil 6.4.11
port buildings and ArcView-Terrain-Grid.
The file extension can vary, so that they cannot be used as a file filter in the
import dialog. 6
Transformation (see chapter 6.3.4) Import options: 6.4.11
Special format from the program SLIP by Grolimund & Petermann AG, Slip 6.4.11
Switzerland
Special Scandinavian file format. SOSI 6.4.11
Special format for the environmental protection agency Lower Saxony. Niedersachsen 6.4.11
United Kingdom National Transfer Format NTF 6.4.11
Data interchange between programs for the calculation of sound propaga- QSI 6.4.11
tion according to DIN 45687: Software products for the calculation of the
sound propagation outdoors — Quality requirements and test conditions,
Juni 2004, Beuth-Verlag.
Import of complete project data of the program MITHRA - only possible if MITHRA 6.4.11
the option Cadna-MITHRA is purchased.
Manual
2
Special Formats
Manual
Third-Party Programs 6.4.12 1
6.4.12 Third-Party Programs
With this format, files from the program LIMA by Ingenieurgesellschaft Lima-Files 6.4.12
Stapelfeld are imported.
The files can have different file extensions like, e.g., „ert“, „hge“, „ind“,
„spo“, „nut“ etc. and therefore cannot be used as a file filter for choosing
the files in the import dialog.
You can import all kinds of files simultanously with multiple choice.
6
With this format, files from the program SoundPlan by Braunstein and SoundPlan-Files (for-
Berndt are imported. merly Schallplan) 6.4.12
These files have no consistent extension and therefore cannot be used as a

file filter in the import dialog.
You can import all kind of files simultanously with multiple choice.
The ground heights are also imported from SoundPlan files (Geometry di- Peculiarity 6.4.12
alog|Option absolute Height/Ground at every point)
CadnaA imports SoundPlan receiver points as follows:
If SoundPlan receiver points are assigned to „Reflex files“, the option

Use next building will be activated in CadnaA automatically. This affects
the searching for buildings within 1,5 meters of the receiver point and as-
signs it the ground height of the next building facade. If no building is
found, the terrain model is evaluated.
If the receiver points aren’t assigned to any „Reflex files“, the control line
IHM will be appraised: The base at the receiver point will then be IHM un-
der the Z-height (therefore the option Input of Value will be activated au-
tomatically). In case the IHM is not specified the standard of 2,8 m will be
applied.
Manual
2
Third-Party Programs
Manual
Building Height Points 6.4.13 1
6.4.13 Building Height Points
Use this ASCII format to import building heights previously exported

from CadnaA using the export function of the same name, or obtained as a
separate file from the surveyor's office or the like. It may happen, howe-
ver, that the file received shows the ground plans of the buildings and,
within these ground plans, points which merely provide information on the
height of these buildings. In the latter case, you will wish to allocate the
heights of these points to the respective buildings as easily as possible.
This can be managed by means of the File Import/Export function Buil- 6
ding Height Points.
The ASCII file contains points with x-y-z coordinates which would lie within a building
ground plan. When importing, only the z-coordinates are considered, and the height is alloca-
ted to that building in whose ground plan the respective point lies.
Manual
2
Building Height Points
It may happen that you adopt building ground plans from an automated
real-estate map where no height information is supplied. The heights
would then have to be determined in some way or another (e. g. by means
of local inspection or aerial survey, etc.).
Having determined the heights, possibly at great expense, and allocated
them manually to the buildings in your CadnaA file, you will of course
wish to keep the height information even if the building ground plans are
updated.
So before transcribing your building ground plans, first export the building
6
heights using the export format File|Export|Building Height Points, and
save them to an ASCII file by specifying a name.
Having updated your building ground plans, just re-import the heights pre-
viously exported using the function of the same name.
* At the time of printing the manual, the format still had to be activated
by an entry in the Cadnaa.ini file. So if you do not find the entry
"Building Height Points" in your format list, please add the following
lines to your Cadnaa.ini. The format will then appear on the respec-
tive lists for selection.
[ImpExp]
Import=hhpkt
Export=hhpkt
Manual
Ascii-Poly 6.4.14 1
6.4.14 Ascii-Poly
This Ascii format enables the importation of open or closed polylines with
several x-, y- and z-coordinates.
The format has three columns with or without a heading and separated
with TAB. One or two empty rows mark the begin of a new polygon (two
returns). Use a decimal point instead of comma.
The polygon will be imported as closed or open Auxiliary polygons . If
necessary convert these to the desired CadnaA object (see chapter 6
5.7.14).
The starting position is an Ascii-file with the extension TXT. If you have Example
only a MS-Excel file save it as Ascii file separated with TAB. The polygon Import of Lines
lines shall be contour lines.
Contourlines.txt
In CadnaA choose File|Import|File format: Ascii-Poly, select the corres-

ponding file and confirm the importation.
Manual
2
Ascii-Poly
The open polylines will be imported automatically as Auxiliary polygons.
If you cannot see anything after the importation click on the icon Zoom to
Limits. Now convert the Auxiliary polygons into Contour lines. There-
fore click with the right mouse key on a free spot in your graphics and se-
lect from the context menu Modify Objects|Action: Convert to. Select
the object type Auxiliary polygon and confirm with OK. In the following
dialog Convert Objects to select Contour Lines and confirm with OK
again. With that the polygons are converted into contour lines.
Example Starting position is a Ascii-File with the extension TXT with three co-
Import of Areas lumns separated with TAB and the individual polygons separated with one
or two empty rows each. Pay attention on the decimal digits, they must be
separated with a dot. The column headers will not be utilized. The closed
polygons shall be Foliage.
Manual
Ascii-Poly 6.4.14 3
Areazones.txt
In CadnaA choose File|Import|File format: Ascii-Poly, select the corres-

ponding file and confirm the importation.
The polylines will be imported automatically as closed Auxiliary poly-

gons.
Manual
4
Ascii-Poly
If you cannot see anything after the importation click on the icon Zoom to
Limits. Now convert the Auxiliary polygons into Foliage. Therefore
click with the right mouse key on a free spot in your graphics and select
from the context menu Modify Objects|Action: Convert to. Select the
object type Auxiliary polygon and confirm with OK. In the following dia-
log Convert Objects to select Foliage and confirm with OK again. With
that the polygons are converted.
see also chapter 10.7 Import Ascii-File as Height Points.
Manual
Chapter 6 Import
Import via ODBC Interface 6.5 1
6.5 Import via ODBC Interface

With CadnaA menu File|Database you may import data from different
data sources via ODBC (Open Database Connectivity) in your project file.
Via this interface you may also import coordinates for geometrical object
points in CadnaA like point sources, tennis sources and crossing lights.
For line or area shaped objects in CadnaA you have to import the geomet-
ry from a geografical information system (GIS) like, e.g., AtlasGis, Win-
put DGM (Digitales Terrain Model), MapInfo or as DXF format (6.4
6
Import Formats). In this case you have to link the geometrical objects with
their data to their ID (see chapter 5.5.3) to match the right data.
Which objects, or which object data, you may import via the ODBC inter-
face can be infered from the menu File|Database|Definition|Object typs.
If you wish to access the database interface, make sure the desired ODBC
drivers are installed properly on your system. They are not necessarily in-
stalled during a default Windows software setup. As a rule, however, this
can be done later by means of a setup program. Please refer to your soft-
ware manual to find out whether an ODBC interface is available for your
database program. Such an interface is available for MS Access, dBase,
Excel, Paradox, FoxPro, Oracle, etc., to name only a few.
The Control Panel of your system (Main Group in the Program Mana-
ger) usually tells you if ODBC drivers are installed on your system, or da-
tabase connections have been set up.
If necessary, double-click the pertinent icon and install the desired drivers,
or configure database connections.
Manual
2
Import via ODBC Interface
In other words: It is not sufficient just to have the drivers on your system.
The database with the table from which you wish to adopt the parameters
must also be configured (assign the ODBC driver to the desired database).
Only then will the selected data source appear on the list.
ODBC data source administrator started in the program manager|main group
* The displayed dialogs may deviate from yours. They depend on the
installed ODBC version. In that case proceed analogously or look it
up your Windows manual.
You can then access this list under CadnaA by selecting File|Databa-
se|Definition. But you also may connect your database in CadnaA direct-
ly with that menu function.
Manual
Chapter 6 Import
ODBC data source dialog started in CadnaA File|Database|Definition
First, select the data source in the Database dialog by clicking the card in-
dex icon. Then click the data source corresponding to your database. In
our example, this is an Excel file named EXCEL1 (data source). Then clo-
se the dialog by clicking OK.
In this Excel file, a section named "Road" (database table) was defined,
containing the road parameters to be imported. This table – the pertinent
section of the Excel file – is now accessible.
Next, before selecting a table from the specified database, select the object
type ("Road" in our example) for which the parameters are to be imported.
Then click the Import Object Type check box and select the table from
the Table list box.
Manual
4
Then double-click in the Attribute column in the Assign Column section

that row for which data exists, and click the pertinent column name of the
selected database table to allocate it to the object attribute in CadnaA.
You always have to import the object geometry first before you can link
the pertinent object parameter. The connective element between the geo-
metry and the data is therefore the matching ID. The ID can be seen in the
object edit dialog (see chapter 5.5.1) or in the corresponding tables. If ne-
cessary, allocate the ID with the function Change Column from the con-
text menu in CadnaA or in the database directly.
Upon completion of the column allocation, and after closing the dialog by
clicking OK, the data can be imported using the command File|Databa-
se|Import.
Manual
Chapter 6 Import
For importing, specify whether you want to update existing objects and/or
to insert new objects. Both check boxes may be activated at the same time
but the importation may be faster if only one of the option is activated at 6
one time.
In chapter 2.5 Attributes and Abbreviations the attribute names are listed –
each with a brief description – which CadnaA uses on the Column Assign
table of the Database dialog. Where the same attribute name is used with
several object types, the explanation applies analogously.
For an Ascii import example see chapter "ODBC Import Ascii".
Manual
6
Manual
Manual CadnaA
Chapter 7 Digitalize
Chapter 5 Basics 5
Chapter 6 Import 6
Chapter 8 Sources 8
Examples Tutorial
Manual
2 Chapter 7 Digitalize
Manual
Contents 7.1 1
7.1 Contents
7.2 Digitizer
7.3 Digitizing
7
7.4 Example: Digitizing a Road
7.5 Tablet Menu
Manual
2
7.1 Chapter 7 DigitalizeContents
Manual
Digitizer 7.2 1
7.2 Digitizer
If the digitizer has been connected to the computer and configured, you
can digitize the coordinates of all objects (sound sources, such as roads,
parking lots, railways, receiver points, buildings, etc.) directly from the
map. In doing so, you can change at any time between digitizer magnifier,
mouse, and keyboard without having to expressly switch from one to the
other.
Upon clicking the Digitizer command on the File menu, you can select the
digitizer to be used, and configure it. The digitizer menu on the icon bar is
only available when the digitizer has been connected and configured.
7
Select the appropriate digitizer from the Type list box. The default setting Type 7.2
after installation of CadnaA is "Auto": Most digitizers are automatically
recognised. Try this setting first. Only if the system does not recognise
your digitizer, select its type from the list box.
If the WINTAB driver is installed on your system, CadnaA will recognise
this. In this case, the WINTAB driver will configure the digitizer, and you
must specify the settings there.
You can check the success of the configuration before first using the digi-
tizer (see further below in this chapter).
Manual
2
7.2 Chapter 7 Digitalize
Digitizer
* Note:
Before calling our hotline, devote some attention to your digitizer's
manual, configure the interface or the options, and try out the modi-
fied settings. Please remember that most digitizers also allow settings
to be made at the device itself. The recommended settings are dis-
played when you click the INFO button on the Digitizer dialog. If all
else fails, we will be pleased to help you.
Interface 7.2 Once a digitizer has been selected from the list of types, all settings except
the port that remains to be selected should be correct. You can still modify
7 the settings. To this end, select the appropriate value on the pertinent list
box. You can check the functioning of the digitizer before first using it by
clicking the Test button.
Test 7.2 1. Test correct co-ordinate transfer:

Continuously increasing x and y values should be displayed on the
screen while you move the magnifier in a preferably straight line
from the left to the right, across the tablet, and from the bottom to the
top of the tablet, respectively, without pressing a button.
If this is not so, the settings are not yet correct.
2. Test the magnifier buttons:
The check boxes corresponding to Buttons 1 through 4 should be
checked when you press the respective buttons on the magnifier.
CadnaA uses buttons 1 and 4 only. Button 1 is used to select a toolbar
icon, and to position polygon points. Button 4 serves to terminate the
insertion.
Manual
Digitizer 7.2 3
When you press a magnifier button, the corresponding Button check 7

box in the dialog is activated to show you which button is button 1
and button 4 to CadnaA. The button designation need not be the
same as on the magnifier.
If, e. g., button 0 on the magnifier is pressed, and Button 1 is checked
in the dialog, button 0 on the magnifier is button 1 to CadnaA .
Manual
4
Digitizer
Options 7.2 Clicking the Options button on the Digitizer dialog opens the bottom part
of the dialog.
In case an installed digitizer fails to function properly, enter further device

parameters in the option boxes. These depend on the device used. Guid-
ance is given in the instruction manual of your digitizer.
7 Initial
strings: 7.2
\HexHex represents arbitrary, and also not
printable, Ascii characters like
\1b for Esc character
\xx pause of 0.1 sec (for some devices

necessary)
Resolution 7.2 If the resolution of the digitizer is given in Lines per inch (lpi) or Lines per
millimetre (lpmm), the dialog will display the scale of the map for check-
ing, once the reference points have been digitized. If more than two refer-
ence points are digitized, two values are given for checking.
Info 7.2 Depending on the type of digitizer selected from the list of types, you can
click the Info button on the Digitizer dialog to find out the recommended
hardware settings on the digitizer itself. Many digitizers allow for saving
different configurations for different applications. These configurations
can then be reactivated by pushing a button. (Please refer to the instruction
manual of your digitizer.)
Manual
Digitizer 7.2 5
Upon clicking this button, a terminal program is opened showing you the Terminal 7.2
commands the digitizer sends when it is switched on. This information
may be important if a digitizer that seems to be properly configured does
not work.
Once the digitizer test has been completed successfully, and all settings
have been made, you can start digitizing.
Manual
6
Digitizer
Manual
Digitizing 7.3 1
7.3 Digitizing
Use a map - one with a scale of, e. g., 1:1,000 to digitize the objects
In order to be able to digitize objects from a map, you must know either
the scale or the co-ordinates of at least two reference points on the map.
This allows you to enter or calculate the width and height (limits) of the
map in terms of coordinates.
Manual
2
Digitizing
At least these limits must be defined on the CadnaA Options menu. (see
Chapter 13.2 ).
In the case of the map above, the limits would be defined by the lower-left
corner, 0/0, and the upper-right corner, 308/415. This comprises the entire
map.
If you know only the scale - 1:1,000 for example - you can draw a refer-
ence line of 10 cm on the map, and enter the coordinates of its first and last
points.
With the scale as given above, the reference line is 100 m. If you were to
position this reference line at the lower-left corner of the map, you could
7 enter this point as having x and y coordinates 0/0. The last point of the ref-
erence line would then have the coordinates 100/0. These points would
then be the reference points for this map.
The more reference points are given - the maximum being four - the small-
er the deviations in the position coordinates of the objects to be digitized.
In order to start digitizing, select the icon on the icon bar. In the dialog
which then opens, calibrate the map on the digitizer. To achieve this, you
need the reference points.
Manual
Digitizing 7.3 3
First, enter the co-ordinates of the reference points. Up to four reference

points can be entered. These can be saved in the reference point list to be
re-used when the map is needed again later.
In order to save, click the Save button, enter a name, and close the "Save
Reference Points" dialog by clicking OK.
In order to re-use saved co-ordinates, click the list box arrow and select the
pertinent name. This results in the co-ordinates being written to the edit
boxes.
The option "Enter Tablet Menu" (see further below) allows direct activa-
tion of the toolbox objects in the CadnaA main window by means of the
digitizer. To this end, activate this option. 7
Having entered all required data - the tablet menu and the map to be digi-
tized are lying on the digitizer - close the "Calibrate Digitizer" dialog by
clicking OK.
Cadna now expects you to enter the corresponding reference points by
clicking them on the map using the digitizer magnifier. The reference point
co-ordinates entered are also displayed during this process.
You can use the zoom magnifiers at your convenience. If necessary, first
zoom out in order to facilitate finding the reference point, then zoom in
again on the area, so as to allow precise clicking of the point.
If the option "Enter Tablet Menu" is active, you will be prompted to enter
further reference points defining the position of this menu on the digitizer.
If under File|Digitizer|Options, the resolution of the digitizer has been
specified, CadnaA will display the scale of the map for checking as soon
as all reference points have been digitized.
Now you can start digitizing the individual objects.
Please note: When inserting objects by digitizing, you can choose
• to start by entering all co-ordinate points belonging to one polygon
line, and assign heights to these points afterwards, or
Manual
4
Digitizing
• to enter the height of each polygon point immediately upon clicking it.
In this context, take a look at the following example
Manual
Example: Digitizing a Road 7.4 1
7.4 Example: Digitizing a Road

Having entered an object, switch to the Edit mode, and open the edit dia- First Option
log by double-clicking. Clicking the Geometry button opens the Geome-
try dialog containing a coordinate table in which the heights of the points
are entered.
We want to digitize a road. The common form for documentation of a road Second Option
indicates absolute heights at specific cross sections (see the figure below).
3 4 5 6 10 11 12
2 7 8 9
1 7
356.5 360.4
358.3
In order to properly model the curvature of a polygon, we need to enter

points between these cross sections for which the heights are indicated.
This series of points is numbered on the figure. In the example, absolute
heights are known at points 1, 7, and 12. For all other points, which are
only required to properly model the curvature, heights are interpolated.
This calculation can be performed automatically by CadnaA.
1. After clicking the road icon or pressing CTRL+S, we digitize the first
two points.
2. We switch to the edit mode by pressing CTRL+E.
3. Having double-clicked the polygon line generated on the screen, we
can enter the parameters for this section.
Although you can also do this later, it is recommended we enter all
parameters immediately because CadnaA adopts these values for the
following polygon points until you enter new values. In this example,
the cross section b2 is chosen from the list.
Manual
2
Example: Digitizing a Road
4. We enter all parameters. Then we click the Geometry button and

activate Enter Absolute Height At Each Point.
5. Double-clicking on the first row of the coordinate table opens the

dialog in which we can enter additional coordinates, the center-line/
axis distance of the outermost tracks, if necessary, and the transverse
slope, if any exists.
Manual
Example: Digitizing a Road 7.4 3
6. By either
- skipping from one box to the next using the TAB key, or
- dragging the mouse pointer over the z value with the LEFT
mouse button held down, or
- double-clicking,
the current value is selected (highlighted).
7. Enter the desired z value and, after using the TAB key, the transverse
slope, if any exists.
8. Switch to the next point by pressing the arrow button.
It may be faster using the keyboard. The hotkey ALT+SHIFT+ >
(move forward through list) bring us to the next point where we can
immediately enter the next value in the box already selected. When
using the hotkey, we will always automatically hop to the last edited
box on the preceding record.
* If we do not know the height and wish CadnaA to calculate the

unknown height, we delete the value in the z co-ordinate box using
the DEL or SPACE key. The box must be blank.
CadnaA then provides interpolated values. We can check this by re-
Manual
4
Example: Digitizing a Road
opening the geometry dialog when all points have been entered.
9. We press ALT+N with the coordinate dialog still open (or we click the
New button) to create a new point.
10. Click this third point on the digitizer tablet using the digitizer magni-
fier. The coordinates in the active dialog are updated (when a new
point is created, its x and y coordinates are set to 0/0).
11. Enter the height of the third point from the keyboard, or delete it (the
value on the Height box is already selected).
12. Proceed as from 10. ....ALT+N .... etc. until all points have been digi-
7 tized.
* If a track distance and/or a transverse slope is given in the Geometry

table, the program will adopt these values for all following polygon
points until we insert a new value. All subsequent points are then
assigned the new value. For those points, for which the preceding
value applies, no value is listed on the table.
Consequently, when calculating, the preceeding value is taken into
account for an empty box in the table in the column Distance (m)
and Slope (%).
Manual
Tablet Menu 7.5 1
7.5 Tablet Menu

The tablet menu consists of the toolbox icons which are suitable for digi-
tizing.
7
CadnaA Tablet menu
The file TABMENU.BMP on the CD-ROM contains these icons. You can
open and print this file using an appropriate application (such as PAINT or
PAINTBRUSH from the Windows accessories group). Put this hard copy
on your tablet. This allows you to switch to the desired mode and to select
the appropriate object by means of the digitizer magnifier on the tablet in-
stead of using the mouse pointer on the screen. The reference points P1,
P2, and P3 of the tablet menu must be clicked when the digitizer is cali-
brated (see above in this chapter).
Manual
2
Tablet Menu
Manual
Manual CadnaA
Chapter 8 Sources
Chapter 5 Basics 5
Chapter 6 Import 6
Chapter 8 Sources 8
Examples Tutorial
Manual
2 Chapter 8 Sources
Manual
Chapter 8 Noise Sources
Contents 8.1 1
8.1 Contents
8.2 General and Special Sources
8.3 Point Source
8.4 Line Source
8
8.5 Area Source
8.6 The Edit Dialog of a Source
8.6.1 A-weighted Emission Value
8.6.2 normalised A
8.6.3 Emission Spectrum
8.6.4 Sound Reduction -
8.6.5 Sound-radiating Area (m²)
8.6.6 Attenuation
8.6.7 Operating Time
8.6.8 Ko without Ground
8.7 Directional Sound Radiation

8.7.1 Sound Radiation from Chimney Outlets
or Stacks with directivity
8.7.2 Sound Radiation from Building Elements and Openings According to ÖAL
8.7.3 Frequency-dependent Directivity, General
Manual
2
8.1 Chapter 8 Noise Sources
Contents
8.8 Tennis Point of Serve

8.9 Roads
8.9.1 Specification of Road Widths
8.9.2 Lateral Slope
8.9.3 Emission in dB(A)
8.9.4 Traffic Density
8.9.5 Speed Limit (km/h)
8.9.6 Road Surface
8.9.7 Road Gradient (%)
8.9.8 Correction for Multiple Reflections
8 8.10 Crossings with Traffic Lights

8.11 Long Straight Roads
8.12 Railways
8.12.1 Emission Level dB(A)
8.12.2 Train Classes
8.12.3 Train Classes User-defined
8.12.4 Traffic-Count Calculator
8.12.5 Purge Lists of Numbers-of-Trains
8.13 Parking Places

8.14 Pass-by Levels for Line Sources with
the Noise Level’s Time History
8.15 Optimized Area Sources
8.16 CadnaA-SET Option
Manual
General and Special Sources 8.2 1
8.2 General and Special Sources

In the calculation CadnaA is capable of taking into account the emissions General Sources
of general sources (see there) in combination with single-number or fre-
quency-dependent values. After a frequency-dependent calculation, the
rating level or the respective evaluation parameters (see Chapter 12.4.6) at
the receiver point will also be given in frequency bands.
Spectra are entered in the local or global libraries (see Chapter 16.2), and
are referred to in the edit dialog of the source by entering their ID (see
Chapter 5.5.3). Spectra may have different weightings.
Special sources, such as Special
Sources 8.2
• Roads (see Chapter 8.9)
• Railways (see Chapter 8.12) 8
• Parking Places (see Chapter 8.13)
• Traffic Lights (see Chapter 8.10)
• Tennis Serve Points (see Chapter 8.8)
require either an input of an emission value (Lme) or other parameters
from which the emission value is calculated (parameters, e.g., such as
MDTD, counts, speeds, or train classes). These parameters are usually
necessary according to the selected guideline or standard.
For the insertion of objects, please refer to chapter 5.3 "Insert Objects".
The general sources like
• Point, (see Chapter 8.3)
• Line (see Chapter 8.4) and
• Area Sources (see Chapter 8.5), horizontal and vertical,
can be used to simulate various noise sources, including the sound radia-
tion from buildings. They can also have a directional sound ratiation (see
Chapter 8.7).
By specifying an object snap (see Chapter 13.5), the point and vertical area
sources are placed at a user-defined distance in front of the building fa-
Manual
2
General and Special Sources
cade. This serves to prevent any source from erroneously being placed in-
side a building.
For an explanation of the parameters, see Chapter 8.6 "The Edit Dialog of
a Source"
Manual
Point Source 8.3 1
8.3 Point Source

Position the mouse pointer and click in order to place the point source at
the desired location. The source is represented by a cross.
graphic presentation of the point source
Point sources are noise sources whose dimensions are small in comparison
to the distance from the point sources to the receiver points. Examples are
ventilation inlets and outlets, pumps, motors, and people shouting.
Manual
2
Point Source
Manual
Line Source 8.4 1
8.4 Line Source

Line sources are open polygons.
Line sources are noise sources extending in only one direction, while the
dimensions in the other two orthogonal directions are small as compared
to the distance to the receiver points. Examples are pipelines, conveyor
belts, and traffic routes on a factory site.
When performing a calculation for an receiver point, CadnaA subdivides
the line source in a two-step procedure: First, the line source is subdivided
into sections being shielded and sections not being shielded by any of the
shielding objects lying between the receiver point and the source (see
Chapter 12.2.3 "The Projection Method for extended Sound Sources").
Then, in the second step, the distance between the receiver point and each 8
section is determined and, if the length of a section exceeds the mandatory
distance criterion, a further subdivision is made.
Manual
2
Line Source
Manual
Area Source 8.5 1
8.5 Area Source

Area sources are closed polygons.
Area sources are noise sources extending in two perpendicular directions,
while the dimension in the third perpendicular direction is small in relation
to the distance from the area source to the immission points.
Area sources are plane surfaces surrounded by a closed line which you
may imagine as a fine grid of point sources. This is also what CadnaA
does during the calculation: The area is subdivided into sufficiently small
partial areas, each of which is replaced at the centre by a substitute point
source with the appropriate partial sound power.
8
Horizontal area sources are inserted by entering their horizontal projec-
tion. Area Source
horizontal 8.5
Examples of area sources are parking lots (see Chapter 8.13), sports facili-
ties, and even entire industrial or commercial areas.
Vertical area sources are inserted by entering their horizontal projection as

an open polygon line. Area Source
vertical 8.5
When performing a calculation for an receiver point, CadnaA subdivides
the area source in a two-step procedure: First, the area source is subdivided
into partial areas being shielded and partial areas not being shielded by any
of the shielding objects lying between the receiver point and the source
(see Chapter 12.4.4 "Projection of:"). Then, in the second step, the dis-
tance between the receiver point and each partial area is determined and, if
the largest dimension of a partial area exceeds the mandatory distance cri-
terion, a further subdivision is made.
Manual
2
Area Source
8
Geometric definition of the vertical area source
If, e. g., a window, as illustrated below, is to be considered as a sound-ra-

diating area, enter the window in the horizontal projection by inserting the
vertical area source as a polygon line at a short distance in front of the fa-
cade. For a clear distinction, a distance of approximately 0.05 m is appro-
priate. This distance is automatically obtained by specifying it on the
Object Snap dialog (see Chapter 13.5 Options|Object Snap).
Building
Vertical area source
Vertical area source in front of a facade
Manual
Area Source 8.5 3
In the edit dialog of the vertical area source, specify the position of the top
edge under Geometry|Height. As with any other object, this height may
be given as relative or absolute value, or with respect to the roof of a build-
ing (the latter being particularly convenient when entering vents for a lan-
tern roof). The bottom edge is then specified according to the z dimension
as illustrated.
Complicated outlines of vertical sound-radiating areas are approximated
by several rectangular areas.
For the calculation, the vertical area source is replaced by a series of line
sources with a spacing of 1 m. These are then subdivided into sections as
described above.
Manual
4
Area Source
Manual
The Edit Dialog of a Source 8.6 1
8.6 The Edit Dialog of a Source

The resulting sound power level for the three time periods Day | Evening |
Night is influenced by the following settings on the edit source dialog:
• Type
• Hz
• Correction
• PWL, PWL’, PWL’’
• Sound Reduction
• Attenuation
• Area (m²)
• normalised A:
The noise level is calculated and displayed when you enter the parameters. 8
The edit dialog of a point source is described below by means of an exam-
ple. It is representative for all other general sources.
The only difference between a line source and an area source is that for the
• line source
you may choose to enter the emission value in terms of the total sound
power level, PWL, or the sound power level per unit length (per
meter), PWL’
• area source, horizontal or vertical
you may choose to enter the emission value in terms of the total sound
power level, PWL, or the sound power level per unit area (per square
meter), PWL’'.
If the sound power level per unit length, PWL’, is entered for a line source, Result PWL 8.6
or the sound power level per unit area, PWL’’, is entered for an area
source, the total sound power level resulting from the dimensions of the
source in question is displayed as Result PWL.
As the height of the terrain at the polygon points is not yet known when
the values are entered, this total sound power level will, if relative heights
were used, refer to the horizontal projection of the source. Consequently, it
Manual
2
The Edit Dialog of a Source
is not yet correct for inclined line or area sources. During the calculation,
however, even in this case, the absolute height at the polygon points is cal-
culated, and the correct total sound power level is determined.
* Consequence: If sound power levels per unit length or unit area are
entered for inclined line or area sources whose heights were given as
relative coordinates, the total value displayed under Result PWL is
not yet correct. It will be so, however, after the first calculation.
To be able to follow the example below, you should be familiar with
• the basic techniques (see Chapter 5 Basics) and
• the handling of local and global libraries (see Chapter 16.2).
Manual
The Edit Dialog of a Source 8.6 3
) Insert a point source, and enter the values shown in the figure. Watch Example: Point
Source 8.6
the effect of single parameters being modified on the calculated emis-
sion value Result PWL.
) Enter a Name characterising the type of source. It should be a short

name because it will appear in the first column of the list of point
sources.
) Also enter an ID code. This will be the actual identifier of the data
record to be refered to for different purposes, such as grouping (see
Chapter 18.2).
In the list Type we can switch between Single band and Spectrum Type Single band /
Spectrum 8.6
) Choose Single band (Spectrum see Chapter 8.6.3)
Manual
4
The Edit Dialog of a Source
Manual
Chapter 8.6 The Edit Dialog of a Source
A-weighted Emission Value 8.6.1 1
8.6.1 A-weighted Emission Value
By default the following options are available depending on the source

type:
• with point sources: sound power level PWL,
• with line sources: sound power level PWL, sound power level per unit
length PWL' or sound power level PWL-Pt of a moving point source,
• with area sources: sound power level PWL, sound power level per unit
area PWL" or sound power level PWL-Pt of a moving point source.
This box may contain a single-number value, the reference to a spectrum,
a combination of both, or even a formula.
8
If we select Single Band, the sound power level entered under PWL - 104 Single band 8.6.1
in the example - is interpreted as the total level. All frequency-dependent
calculations are performed for the frequency entered in the Hz box to the
right.
To consider different emissions for day-, evening- and night-time, you can Correction 8.6.1
specify a Correction for each of these periods.
) In the example, the night-time level is set to lie 10 dB(A) below the
day-time level by entering a correction of -10.
The total level resulting from all inputs - except for operating time and
K0 - which is used in the calculation of sound propagation is displayed un-
der Result PWL.
* In the PWL box you may enter a formula up to 15 characters.
If, as in the example, the Sound Reduction box is deactivated, the dialog
deals with the direct radiation of airborne sound from an outdoor source.
(See below for the radiation from buildings, which applies when the
Sound Reduction option is active.)
Manual
2
8.6.1 Chapter 8.6 The Edit Dialog of a Source
A-weighted Emission Value
* In the Sound Reduction box you may enter a formula up to 15 char-

acters.
If a number is entered under Attenuation, this value is interpreted as the
reduction in level occurring during propagation from the point where the
sound is generated to the point of radiation. It is, therefore, reduced from
the sound power level.
In the example, a fan having a daytime sound power level of 104 dB(A)
could be equipped with a downstream silencer reducing the sound power
level by 8 dB(A).
) Enter 8 in the Attenuation box, and watch the change in the Result
PWL.
8
* You may also enter complex formulas or the ID of a spectrum in the
Attenuation box. The maximum characters you may enter are 63.
In the present case, with different attenuations, the airborne sound radiat-
ed into a duct by the fan could be attenuated by, e. g., bends, changes in the
pipe cross section, fittings, and silencers. The remaining effective portion
of sound radiated from the outlet is then described in terms of the resulting
sound power level. To simulate this, enter, for example,
8+4+3.5+2
on the Attenuation line. You could, of course, determine a single-number
value from this sum and enter this directly, but giving the details as shown
above has the advantage that the formula, and thus the individual attenua-
tions, will be recorded in the pertinent column of the source lists.
The line will, however, cope with far more complex formulas.
) Try, e. g.,
((8+4+3.5+2)++23)-19
As described for other input boxes, ++ stands for the energy-equivalent (or
level) addition, and – for the level subtraction.
Manual
A-weighted Emission Value 8.6.1 3
(see also Chapter 2.6 Operators and Functions)
To model a moving point source enter the PWL of the point source, the Sound Power Level of a
number of events per hour Q and the speed (in km/h). Based on these data PointSourcePWL-Pt8.6.1
the resulting sound power level PWL, and - with line sources - the sound
power level per unit length PWL', and - with area sources - the sound pow-
er level per unit area PWL'' is calculated. With area sources the speed is
not required.
Line source
Q l v
PWL = PWLPt + 10 lg −1
+ 10 lg − 10 lg − 30 dB
(h ) ( m) (km / h)
Q v 8
PWL′ = PWLPt + 10 lg −1 − 10 lg − 30 dB
(h ) (km / h)
Area source
Q
PWL = PWLPt + 10 lg
(h −1 )
Q S
PWL″ = PWLPt + 10 lg −1 − 10 lg 2
(h ) (m )
Manual
4
normalised A
8.6.2 normalised A
When the checkbox normal. A: has been activated and a number has been
entered, a constant of K dB is subtracted from or added to the frequency-
band levels resulting from the PWL so as to obtain that number as the total
A-weighted sound power level.
Manual
Emission Spectrum 8.6.3 1
8.6.3 Emission Spectrum
Frequency-dependent calculations show what this concept is really capa-

ble of. All input options described in see Chapter 8.6.1 "A-weighted Emis-
sion Value" apply here, too. The only difference is that you can enter the
names (ID codes) of frequency spectra instead of numbers.
Let us assume that the following entries are listed in the local library (siehe
Chapter 16 Libraries) of sound levels (Tables|Libraries (local)):
Name ID Type Oktave Spectrum (dB) Source

Weight. 31.5 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 A lin
Test Spectrum SP_001 Li 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 7.0 9.5 Example
Compressor 1 SP_002 Li 133.9 120.7 110.6 103.1 97.7 94.5 93.3 93.5 95.6 104.0 134.1 Example
Compressor 2 SP_003 Li 87.0 88.0 89.0 91.0 90.0 89.0 89.0 86.0 84.0 95.1 98.1 Example 8
where the total A-weighted levels are 7, 104 and 95.1 dB(A), and the spec-
tra of sound reduction index:
Name ID Oktave Spectrum (dB) Source

31.5 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 Rw
Silencer R_SD_01 0.5 2.8 5.4 7.8 9.5 12.4 12.2 11.5 11.4 12 Example
Cross Section Jump R_QS_95 4.0 4.0 4.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 6.0 5.0 5.0 6 Example
R_Flap R_001 0.0 4.5 4.8 5.0 5.8 5.4 4.5 4.0 4.0 6 Example
) To follow the example, you may find it convenient to enter these

values.
To calculate with frequency spectra,
) select Spectrum in the Type box in the edit dialog of a source.
By entering in the PWL box the ID code of compressor 1, you refer to that
spectrum.
) Enter the string SP_002
directly from the keyboard
Manual
2
Emission Spectrum
or first alternative
via the local library (click the card-index icon) by clicking the
second row and then OK to adopt it,
or second alternative
via the global library. (Hold the SHIFT key down before clicking
the card-index icon.)
This alternative kills two birds with one stone.
* By clicking a spectrum in the global library via an edit dialog of a

source, the data record of the spectrum is copied to the local library,
and its ID code is adopted in the PWL box.
8 The resulting frequency spectrum should now be displayed on the little
monitor window of the point source edit dialog.
If you were to click the card-index icon again to select a different spec-
trum, clicking OK would result in the existing entry being overwritten.
To add a second spectrum to the first by energy-equivalent addition, i. e,.
respecting the rules of level addition, you have to hold the CTRL key down
before clicking the card-index icon. Upon selection of a spectrum, its ID
Manual
Emission Spectrum 8.6.3 3
code will be appended to the existing one with a ++ operator (which sym-
bolises energy-equivalent level addition).
Of course, you can also enter this summing formula from the keyboard. As
you enter the formula, red colour indicates that the formula is not yet com-
plete, or not yet in a condition that can be interpreted by CadnaA.
The monitor at the bottom right corner of the edit dialog displays the fre- Spectrum
quency spectrum. Click it to have the diagram shown with a different Montior 8.6.3
weighting - Linear, A, B, C or D.
Manual
4
Emission Spectrum
Manual
Sound Reduction - Sound Radiation from Building Facades 8.6.4 1
8.6.4 Sound Reduction -

All types of general sources explained above can be used to simulate the
sound radiation from buildings. For example, you may simulate the slot-
type openings on all sides of a multi-storey garage (see Chapter "Mode-
ling Multiple Storey Garages") by entering circumferential line sources.
In order to mark a building facade as a sound-radiating area, and to be able
to calculate the emission from the indoor level, activate Reduction on the
edit dialog of a sound source and enter in the pertinent box the sound re-
duction index in terms of a single number or the ID code of a spectrum for
a sound reduction index. All techniques for the selection of spectra from
the libraries and the handling of user-defined formulas, which were de- 8
scribed under Point Source, apply as always.
If the checkbox Reduction is activated, but the Reduction is zero we must

enter the value 0. A sound level cannot be calculated if the field is empty.
(see Chapter 8.6.5 "Sound-radiating Area (m²)")
Manual
2
Sound Reduction - Sound Radiation from Building Facades
Manual
Sound-radiating Area (m²) 8.6.5 1
8.6.5 Sound-radiating Area (m²)
For line and point sources which simulate radiating surfaces, the sound-ra-
diating area must always be entered when the calculation is to be per-
formed on the basis of an indoor level. To this end, click the check box,
and enter the relevant area.
For a vertical or horizontal area source, an input is only required where the
actual sound-radiating area differs from the geometrical area of the area
source.
The sound radiation from a glass facade is simulated by a vertical area Exampel
source in front of it. The massive parts of the facade, which do not radiate
sound, are accounted for by entering the area of the actual glass surfaces.
8
If the Area (m²) check box is not activated, CadnaA considers the entire
area source in the calculation. Enter a value, if this is not desired.
* Always watch the Result PWL. As long as it is set to 0, parameters

are still missing. When calculating on the basis of the indoor level,
this might be, e. g., the area or the sound reduction index.
The length (m) of the line source and the area of the area source (m²) can
be seen in the Geometry dialog. For the vertical area source - drawn with
only two polygon points - this value is 0, as the area entered refers to the
horizontal projection. The area of this source can be seen after a calcula-
tion in the field Area (m²) in the edit dialog.
You can specify the exact length of a line-like object (see Chapter 5.7.10).
See also Construct Building, Chapter 9.3.4 Generate a Building
Manual
2
Sound-radiating Area (m²)
Manual
Attenuation 8.6.6 1
8.6.6 Attenuation
The Attenuation box also allows you to combine arbitrary spectra re-
trieved from the local and global libraries (see Chapter "Chapter 16 Li-
braries") by making reference to their ID codes. For two changes in cross
section and one silencer, the dialog could look like the one illustrated be-
low.
Manual
2
Attenuation
Manual
Operating Time 8.6.7 1
8.6.7 Operating Time
If the check box Operating Time is not activated, no time-interval correc-

tion is taken into account. This means that the entered noise emission is
constant over the entire reference time (see Chapter 12.4.5). Recreation-
time penalties are only applied if combined evaluation parameters (see
Chapter 12.4.6) are calculated like Lden, Lde, Ldn, Len.
If, on the other hand, the check box is activated when performing a calcu-
lation, the time intervals entered under Day/Recreation(Evening)/Night
are considered as the operating times of the source. In this case also a pen-
alty is added to the level for the time period entered in the
Calculation|Configuration|Reference Time tab if the evaluation param-
eter is a combined value like Lden, Lde, Ldn etc. 8
Consequently the applied time-interval correction results from the operat-
ing times entered and the reference time defined globally under the calcu-
lation configuration. This gives you sufficient flexibility to apply any
method of assessment.
see also:
Special Reference Time for Industry see Chapter 12.4.5 and
Compatibility mode for Industry (Recr./Evening is added to Day incl. Pen-
alty) Chapter 12.4.6 Absatz "Evaluation Parameter Tab"
Manual
2
Operating Time
Manual
Ko without Ground 8.6.8 1
8.6.8 Ko without Ground
The solid angle coefficient K0 (dB) according to VDI 2714 /16/, the direc-
tivity index DΩ according to ISO 9613 /21/ (equivalent for other guide-
lines).
The excess level in the direction of sound radiation due to reflecting sur-
faces close to the source can be accounted for by a global penalty, the solid
angle coefficient K0/DΩ. Since the reflection from the ground is already ac-
counted for in the calculation according to ISO 9613-2 Equation 11 (for
calculations on the basis of A-weighted levels), or in the degree DBM,Okt /
AGround of attenuation in the ground and meteorology (for frequency-de-
pendent calculations), only the remaining reflecting surfaces are to be con-
8
sidered when determining K0.
Source at arbitrary height above the ground K0 = 0
Source at arbitrary height above the ground in front of a wall K0 = 3
Source at arbitrary height above the ground in a corner K0 = 6
In case K0 > 0 the reflection from the building itself must not be calculated
for the source in question, as the excess level is already accounted for by
K0. In order to retain the reflectivity of the building for all other sound
contributions, it is advisable to enter a value of 0.5 as Min. Distance from
Source to Reflecting Object on the Calculation|Configuration|Reflec-
tion tab (see Chapter 12.4.8).
Manual
2
Ko without Ground
Manual
Directional Sound Radiation 8.7 1
8.7 Directional Sound Radiation

Not all sound sources radiate sound uniformly in all directions. There is,
for example, a directivity of the radiated sound for power-plant chimneys,
which depends on the exhaust velocity of the gas and its temperature. But
there are many other examples, such as the ground run-up of aeroengines
in a test facility, or the blow-off from valves, where the sound pressure lev-
el is not the same for all directions and not only a function of the distance.
In order to account for this fact, directional sound radiation was integrated
into CadnaA, both in a general way and for specific source types.
When a point source is specified, the pertinent option button in the edit
source dialog lets you assign a directivity to that source.
8
Point Source Edit Dialog
Performing a grid calculation with the inputs shown in the dialog above
will produce the following graphic.
Manual
2
Directional Sound Radiation
60.0 55.0
65.0 65.0
60.0
55.0
65.0 65.0
8
59.9
55.0
Omnidirectional radiation from a point source
Manual
Chapter 8.7 Directional Sound Radiation
Sound Radiation from Chimney Outlets or Stacks with directivity 8.7.1 1
8.7.1 Sound Radiation from Chimney Outlets

or Stacks with directivity
Chimney mouth directivity is integrated according to an older publication

/49/.
Upon clicking the Directivity button on the point source edit dialog,
specify the principal axis of sound radiation as the positive x axis (x/y/
z = 1/0/0) and select the directivity of a chimney. Specify an exhaust gas
velocity of, e. g., 30 m/s, and a temperature of 200 degrees.
Dialog for the calculation of the directivity of a power-plant chimney
With all other data of the point source left unchanged, the following graph-
ic will result from the calculation.
Manual
2
8.7.1 Chapter 8.7 Directional Sound Radiation
Sound Radiation from Chimney Outlets or Stacks with directivity
63.9 58.6
54.3 69.1
63.6
58.6
53.9 69.1
8
64.0
58.6
Radiation pattern of chimney tilted to the horizontal plane;

parameters as above
In practice, the point source will be positioned at the centre of the cross
section chimney of the outlet , and the principal direction of radiation will
be the normal vector on this outlet cross section, pointing upwards, (x/y/z
= 0/0/1). If no vector is defined, the upwarded flow is automatically cho-
sen.
For the following simplified scenario, the chimney outlet is assumed to be
at a height of 30 m.
The chimney directivity shown above includes the lower radiation down-
wards - it would therefore be wrong to attach this directivity to a point
source simulating the chimney opening if this point source is screened by
the chimney cylinder. It is recommended to suppress this screening of the
chimney cylinder for the upper radiation if chimney directivity is used. If a
Manual
chimney of, e.g., 30 m height should be modelled the following steps are
necessary:
1. Enter a cylinder with radius and height of the chimney and define it
to be reflective if necessary.
2. Enter a point source in the center of the cylinder (chimney) with the
height of 0.01 m less than the cylinder so that it is placed inside.
(Geometry|Height: -0.01|Roof).
3. In Calculation|Configuration|Industry activate Src. in Building/
Cyl. do not shield (see Chapter 12.4.9).
4. Select chimney directivity in the edit dialog point source and enter
the corresponding parameters.
8
You must take into account that now all sources in buildings and cylinders
radiate free and you get no warning if a source is located inside.
Line of section
Horizontal projection with residential buildings and power plant with 30-m chimney
Manual
4
Oblique view of the (simplified) power plant and chimney
Now enter a height of 40 m for the auxiliary-polygon line of the cross sec-
tion as illustrated above. For the sectional view thus generated, perform a
grid calculation (see Chapter 11.5.3) with a grid spacing of 1 m to obtain
the level distribution in this plane which is caused by the chimney.
Manual
Level distribution around the chimney in the vertical plane
Summary of the chimney directivity predefined in CadnaA:
Simplification for determining the radiation characteristic of chimneys and Radiation

cooling towers observing certain preconditions (following VDI 3733 Characteristik
of Chimneys 8.7.1
(draft), September 1993) and /49/:
This information is valid with the following conditions:
• diameter of the outlet di m = 5...7m;
• wind speed WL ≅ 3ms-1;

• with emission medium: CO2 and temperature TF = 473...773K;
• with emission medium: water vapour and temperature TF = 308K.
Manual
6
The angle δ is calculated as follows::
–1 2 2 –4 –1
δ = 90° + arc tan ( h × s ) – arc sin ( h + s × 10 ) – arc tan ( ( W L × T F ) ( W F × T L ) )
Directivity Index Kδ
δ f in Hz
63 125 250 500 1k 2k 4k 8k
30° 2,0 2,5 2,5 3,6 3,0 2,0 2,0 2,0
45°-60° 4,0 4,8 3,2 4,1 4,8 4,8 4,8 4,8
75° 1,0 1,5 1,5 1,5 0,8 0,5 0,5 0,5

8 90° -2,0 -2,5 -3,0 -3,5 -4,8 -5,6 -5,6 -5,6
105° -4,0 -5,5 -7,0 -9,0 -10,0 -10,6 -10,0 -10,0
120 -5,0 -7,5 -9,2 -11,5 -15,2 -19,8 -20,0 -20,0
The used equation characters signify (see also the following figure):
h source height relative (torward receiver) [in m]
s distance receiver source axis (z-coordinate) [in m]
WL downwind speed [in ms-2]
TF temperature of the emission medium [in K]
WF exit speed of the emission medium [in ms-2]
TL ambient temperature [in K]
Manual
Situation sketch for the sound emission of chimneys (by

Reinicke, W. and J. Danner: Schallabstrahlung von
Schornsteinen, Messung und technische Möglichkeiten zu
ihrer Minderung. Umweltbundesamt-Texte 17/81,
Forschungsber. 105.03.301. Berlin: November 1981)
(Sound Radiation of chimneys, technical possibilities for

abatement and measurement, Environmental Agency -
Texts 17/81, research report 105.03.301. Berlin: Novem-
ber 1981)
Manual
8
Manual
Sound Radiation from Building Elements and Openings According to ÖAL 8.7.2 1
8.7.2 Sound Radiation from Building Elements

and Openings According to ÖAL
According to the Austrian Guidelines, also the sound radiation from build-
ing elements and openings is assigned a directivity (though frequency-in-
dependent). If you select the directivity for sound-radiating elements,
according to ÖAL, for the point source of the scenario described above,
the calculation will result in the following graphic (direction of radiation
x/y/z = 1/0/0).
65.0 60.0 55.0 8

65.0
Radiation from elements according to ÖAL
The next figure also illustrates the radiation from openings according to
ÖAL.
Manual
2
Sound Radiation from Building Elements and Openings According to ÖAL
60.0 65.0 60.0
70.0
65.0
Radiation from openings according to ÖAL
In practice, the two types of sources mentioned last are located on the out-
side of buildings. To select the correct reference direction for the sound ra-
diation on the Directivity dialog, leave the default setting Determine
Direction Automatically (Nearest Building) activated, as illustrated be-
low.
Now if you position a point source next to a building facade (an object
snap of approximately 6 pixels specified under Options|Object Snap will
be helpful), CadnaA automatically determines the direction of radiation
perpendicular to the facade at this point.
For the 6-m-high, L-shaped building in the figure after the next one, the
level distribution is thus obtained without further adjustments.
Manual
Automatic determination of the direction of radiation

for sound-radiating elements and openings according to ÖAL 8
46.0
65.0 60.0 55.0
45.0
50.0 65.0 60.0 55.0
Level distribution calculated for elements according to

ÖAL using automatic determination of the direction of
radiation (the sound power effectively radiated is
precisely the same as for the other grid calculations)
Manual
4
You can easily assess the effect of different specifications on the calculated
level distributions. The next figure, for example, illustrates the result of a
grid calculation where no directivity has been assigned to the point source
simulating the sound-radiating element. In this case, the level distribution
results exclusively from the intrinsic shielding effect of the building.
47.8
63.9 59.9 55.6
46.8
51.8 64.2 60.7 56.7
Calculated level distribution caused by the sound-radiat-

ing element, when the directivity according to ÖAL has
been deactivated (thus for omnidirectional radiation)
As the position of the level boxes has not been changed, the levels exactly
show the difference between the two methods. When the numerical differ-
ence of the two level distributions in the two scenarios above is calculated,
the lines of equal difference clearly show the essential differences.
Manual
1.8 -2.0
1.8 1.0
2.0
1.8
2.0
-1.0 8
0.0 1.0
Lines of equal level difference between omnidirectional

sound radiation and sound radiation according to ÖAL
We will not comment on these differences here, but the example is an im-
pressive demonstration of how CadnaA's grid arithmetic allows you to
easily investigate the consequences of specific normative provisions.
Manual
6
Manual
Frequency-dependent Directivity, General 8.7.3 1
8.7.3 Frequency-dependent Directivity, General
To use any directivity that is taken from measurments or from literature, a

very general and flexible concept is integrated. In Tables|local Libra-
ry|Directivity for each directivity pattern a new line can be inserted. Dou-
ble click on this line opens a matrix form with frequency-columns and
lines spaced 15 degrees. This form allows to define an axial symetric di-
rectivity pattern, that is sufficient in most cases. (A complete general de-
scription would effort the directivity index in each frequency band
independance of two angles). With Name a string is entered, which can be
refered to in the PWL input line of any point-, line- or area source during
calculation.
The form allows to enter the directivity indices for all octave bands from 8
31.5 Hz to 8000 Hz in angular increments of 15 degrees. If values are only
available for larger increments, use the DEL key to delete the zeros for the
15-degree-increments where no such values are available. CadnaA will
then fill in these values by interpolation.
Frequency-dependent directivity indices in increments

of 30 degrees. The values for the intermediate angles are
deleted.
Manual
2
Frequency-dependent Directivity, General
When you close the dialog above by clicking OK and open it again, the
missing values are added in the empty fields automatically by CadnaA.
Frequency-dependent directivity indices with interpolated values
Now we can assign to a point-, line- or area source a previously specified

frequency-dependent directivity by selecting its name from the list box Di-
rectivity.
A specified directivity can be selected by clicking its name on the list
In the example, the calculation will result in the level distribution shown
below.
With the example shown we get the following noise contours after a grid
calculation.
Manual
Frequency-dependent Directivity, General 8.7.3 3
64.9 62.8
61.3 67.6
56.1
69.7
64.7
62.5 72.0
67.6 8
63.5
Level distribution resulting from the selected directivity
When the calculation is performed for an receiver point, the directivity in-
dex calculated on the Directivity dialog is added to the sound power level.
With the option standardized activated, the correction is increased or re- Normalised
duced by a constant factor for all directions so as to leave the sound level Directivity 8.7.3
specified on the edit dialog of the source unchanged although this directiv-
ity is taken into account. This enables you to enter directly the octave band
sound pressure levels that you have measured on a half circle with the
source as pivot.
Manual
4
Frequency-dependent Directivity, General
Paste 8.7.3 Clicking the Paste button on the edit dialog Directivity under Ta-
bles|Sources|Directivity allows you to paste ASCII format data from the
clipboard in the form.
ASCII format: Cells separated by TAB stops, lines separated by carriage
RETURNs.
Manual
Tennis Point of Serve 8.8 1
8.8 Tennis Point of Serve

This type of noise source is only usable in Germany because the emission
is related to the mesuring procedure of the „Taktmaximalpegel“.
Manual
2
Tennis Point of Serve
Manual
Roads 8.9 1
8.9 Roads
The source Road is radiating to all sides if the option Self-Screening is
not activated (see below in this chapter).
The values of some parameters can vary from polygon point to polygone
point, e.g., for the parameters
• cross sections or distance (see Chapter 8.9.1)
• lateral slopes (see Chapter 8.9.2)
• road heights and ground heigths (see Chapter 10.4).
The Parallel Object command (see Chapter 5.7.13) on the context menu
opened for a selected road allows you to generate barriers, embankments,
or contour lines at specified distances, or use the Station command (see
Chapter 5.7.3) for the automatic insertion of kilometre marks. 8
The parameters of a road section are entered under the edit mode on the
dialog that opens after double-clicking the road’s centre-line.
The boxes in the dialog are described, by way of example, for the applica-
tion of RLS-90 /9/. They apply analogously to the other guidelines.
Manual
2
Roads
The Edit Road Dialog
Manual
Roads 8.9 3
* Hint: The height entered in the Geometry dialog is the road surface’s Geometry
according
height. CadnaA adds to this value 0,5 m automatically as the source
to RLS90 8.9
height for calculation. Therefore the road’s z-coordinate is always
the surface height (see Chapter 10.4).
If the option Self-Screening is activated in the Geometry dialog of the Self-Screening

Road screening occurs at all points below the road surfache niveau. There-
fore you can insert roads which run at a slant up or down, without using
the extra element of the object Bridge (see Chapter 9.6).
Because the margin of the Road in CadnaA represents the axis of the ou- Additional Width
ter middle lane you should widen the Road to the real width by entering an
Additional Width > 0. The half of the entered width is added to both sides 8
of the road. As the case may be this entry could overwrite the entered addi-
tional width in Options|Appearance (see also 8.9.1 Specification of Road
Widths).
In addition to the widened road you can generate screens on the road, on Screen
one or both sides, by entering a left or right height > 0. The screens are ab-
sorbent at both sides. This property cannot be changed. Reflecting screens
or cantilevers (overhangs) can be entered with the object Screen (see
Chapter 9.5).
* In each case if you generate screens the additional width of the

road has to be >0.
* The generated screens are a property of the Road and therefore only
displayed in the 3D-special view.
Manual
4
Roads
Manual
Chapter 8.9 Roads
Specification of Road Widths 8.9.1 1
8.9.1 Specification of Road Widths
If you click on the card index icon of the field SCS/Dist. (m) in the Road
dialog the Road Width dialog appears and you can choose the desired
width by activating the corresponding option. Either
• Distance of the centerlines of the outer lanes (noise source) or
• Total width of road from curb to curb (m) or
• Cross-Sections according to RAS-Q 82+96
The road width represented on the screen corresponds to the entered width. Distance of the
The borderlines of the road are the centerlines of the outer lanes (noise outer lanes 8.9.1
sources).
The road width represented on the screen corresponds not to the entered Total width of road
width because a default distance of 1,75 m is presumed between the cen- from curb to curb 8.9.1
terlines of the outer lanes to the curb. Therefore a road with a total width
of 10 m from curb to curb has a distance of 10 - (2*1,75) = 6,5 m between
the centerlines of the outer lanes.
In menu Options|Appearance you have the possibility to display the real Display real
width of roads. For that mark the objekt type Road and enter an additional Width of Roads 8.9.1
Width. In that case the road width represented on the screen is the real
Manual
2
8.9.1 Chapter 8.9 Roads
Specification of Road Widths
width of the road (distance between the centerlines of the outer lanes plus
the additional width).
Inserted additional widthof 1,75 m for the object type

Road in Options|Appearance.
With the object type Road2 you can display the centerlines of the outer
lanes (sound source) supplementary, e.g. dashed.
Object type Road2 enables you to display the sound source

(centerlines of the outer lanes), too.
Manual
Chapter 8.9 Roads
Road layout with additional width and display of the cen-

8
terlines of the outer lanes
The chosen design of the road affected all roads in a project similarly.
List box for selection of standardized (German standards) cross sections. Standard Cross Section
(SCS)/Distance (m) 8.9.1
The standardized cross sections of roads can be selected from the list by
marking the desired parameter and confirming with OK.
* The border-lines of the road represented on the screen are not identi-
cal with those of the road or the pavement, if any. They are the cen-
trelines of the outermost lanes if no additional width is choosen (see
above: Display real Road Width)
The examples below shows the correct inputs for application of RLS-90.
Manual
4
Single Lane Road 8.9.1
For a single-lane road, enter 0 in the Standard Cross Section/Distance box

in the edit dialog Road or, if 0 is displayed as the default value, leave it un-
changed.
Multi-lane
Road 8.9.1
For a multi-lane road, either the distance between the centre-lines of the
outermost lanes is entered as a number, or the appropriate cross section is
selected after clicking the card-index icon. When selecting a6ms according
to RAS-Q 82 /29/ for a six-lane road, a distance of 24.75 m results be-
tween the centre-lines of the two outermost lanes which is the measured
value in the cross-sectional view and also the width of the road section
represented on the screen with the selected scale.
Widening of a Road
from 1 to 2 Lanes 8.9.1
Manual
Chapter 8.9 Roads
If the lane distance or the transverse slope changes along a road, each pol-
ygon point may be edited individually via the Geometry (see Chapter
10.4) button
) For this click the button Geometry
) double-click a row in the Geometry list.
In the edit dialog Road Polygon Point enter the appropriate values for the
distance of the axis of the outermost lanes.
The arrow buttons serve to access the next or previous polygon point, or
use the New button to insert a new point.
The road’s polygon point will be flashing in the graphic while being edited
in the edit dialog. In order to see this, you may have to move the dialog
box.
* We must not enter a value if the the next polygon point should have
the same distance/cross section. The entered value is valid until a
Manual
6
new value is entered at another polygon point.
8 Widening of a road from 1 to 2 lanes
Manual
Chapter 8.9 Roads
The next example is a crossing with straight through-lanes. Crossing with straight
Through- lanes 8.9.1
To generate this example, just enter the two intersecting roads. If, as it 8
would usually be the case, the traffic densities of the four adjacent road
sections are different, it is convenient and acoustically appropriate to butt-
joint the four sections in the middle of the crossing.
Even if two sections each are supposed to abut in the middle of the cross-
ing, you can first enter straight through-lanes to split them later on.
Manual
8
Splitting of Roads into Open the context menu by clicking a road’s centre-line with the right
Sections: mouse. Selecting Break Lines then splits the crossing road right in the
1. Possibility 8.9.1
middle. You can check this by clicking the splitted road because only the
clicked half will be selected. Afterwards, by clicking one of the road sec-
tions obtained by splitting, and by using the Break Lines command once
again, you can split the road that has not yet been split.
* But pay attention: Should there be other objects being intersected

by roads, which are to be subdivided, they are split at the intersection,
too.
If this is the case, and you do not wish the other objects to be split, proceed
as follows:
8 2. Possibility 8.9.1 Instead of using the crossing roads as intersection lines for splitting, place
an arbitrary auxiliary line, such as a line source or an auxiliary polygon, on
top of the centre-line of the road to be split, and apply the Break Lines
command to this auxiliary line in order to split the road. Then delete the
auxiliary line.
After splitting the roads, you can allocate different parameters such as traf-
fic densities to the sections thus obtained.
Manual
Chapter 8.9 Roads
Crossing with Filter

Lane 8.9.1
This is a combination of the arrangements already dealt with. In the transi-

tions from the two-lane roads to the crossing and in the area of the crossing 8
proper, the lanes are configured by roads with SCS = 0. These are fol-
lowed by two-lane roads in all four directions.
Any other geometric gradation may be easily derived from the above ex-
amples.
See also chapter 7.4 Example: Digitizing a Road
Manual
10
Manual
Chapter 8.9 Roads
Lateral Slope 8.9.2 1
8.9.2 Lateral Slope
In addition to the distance of the lane’s centre-line (see Chapter 8.9.1

"Standard Cross Section (SCS)/Distance (m)"), you can enter the percent-
age of the lateral slope after clicking the Geometry button in the dialog
Polygon Point. Select the option: absolute Height at every Point from
the list below the coordinate table.
The lateral slope refers to the outer lane axis which is rotated around the
road’s centre-line. A positive value lifts the outer right lane, a negative val-
ue the outer left lane. Right and left refer to the initial point when looking
toward the final point.
* The entered value is valid for all the following points. Therefore we 8
only need to enter a new value if the lateral slope changes at another
point. From this point on, this new entered value is valid for all fol-
lowing ones.
see also chapter 10.4 The Object’s Geometry
Manual
2
Lateral Slope
Manual
Chapter 8.9 Roads
Emission in dB(A) 8.9.3 1
8.9.3 Emission in dB(A)
The sound emission of a road caused by motor traffic is characterised by

the emission level, which CadnaA calculates automatically and online
from the specified parameters and in accordance with the selected guide-
line. According to RLS-90, this is the time-averaged level in a free field at
a distance of 25 m from the centre-line of an infinitely long straight road.
Activate Ld and Ln in Calculation|Configuration|Tab Eval. Parameter Note

to calculate the assessment level for day and night according to RLS90. In
this case the time interval Day|Evening|Night is not taken into account.
Manual
2
Emission in dB(A)
Manual
Chapter 8.9 Roads
Traffic Density 8.9.4 1
8.9.4 Traffic Density
Average daily traffic density Vehicles/24h. Number of vehicles passing a Counts, MDTD 8.9.4
section of the road per day, averaged over all days of the year (see also
Precise Counts below).
This item is accessible after clicking the Options button in the edit dialog. Precise Counts 8.9.4
When Precise Counts is activated, the Counts, MDTD option is deacti-
vated. The relevant hourly traffic density, M (Vehicles/hour) for the day-
time and the night-time can be entered, as well as the mean proportion of
trucks p in % (vehicles with a gross weight over 2,8 t as percentage of the
relevant traffic density). 8
Clicking the arrow of the editable list box allows you to select the classifi- Type of Road 8.9.4
cation of the road according to the chosen standards. On the basis of this
classification, default values for the proportion of trucks and for the hourly
traffic density are considered.
To calculate the two noise indicators Lden and Ln according to the EU-di- Diural Patter 8.9.4
rective /58/ the diurnal patterns for each road are required. This allows to
assign the respective traffic counts to the three time intervals. To this end,
the diurnal pattern for each road type has to be entered to the global or the
lokal library first. The following figure shows an example.
Manual
2
Traffic Density
DiurnalPatter.cna Open the file DiurnalPatter.cna in SAMPLES|ROAD on your CD-Rom.
The edit dialog of a diurnal pattern
To address this diurnal pattern to a specific road it has to be referenced via

the list box Road Type on the edit dialog for roads. By default, the road
types according to RLS-90 (or according to any other guideline for calcu-
lating road noise) are selectable. In case diurnal patterns are available from
the library these will be listed at the end of the list. In this example the di-
urnal pattern with the ID-code "TG_1" is selected.
Manual
Chapter 8.9 Roads
Traffic Density 8.9.4 3
When calculating the noise indicators Lden for roads the assignment of the
daily hours to the time intervals day/evening/night and the time penalties
for day/evening/night (see Chapter 12.4.5) are relevant.
Manual
4
Traffic Density
Manual
Chapter 8.9 Roads
Speed Limit (km/h) 8.9.5 1
8.9.5 Speed Limit (km/h)
We enter the maximum speed, in km/h, permissible on the relevant road

section for cars and trucks. The speed is taken into account according to
the choosen standard.
For the RLS 90 e.g., the german standard, the speed limit lies between Example RLS 90
30 km/h and 80 km/h for trucks, and 30 km/h and 130 km/h for cars. The
default value for trucks will be the same value as given for cars. If a differ-
ent speed limit shall apply for trucks, click the Truck check box (an X ap-
pears in the box), and enter the desired speed limit in the text box from the
keyboard.
8
If a value below 30 km/h is entered, 30 km/h will automatically be as-
sumed in the calculation. Likewise, if a speed limit above 130 km/h is en-
tered, 130 km/h for cars, and 80 km/h for trucks, will automatically be
assumed in the calculation.
Manual
2
Speed Limit (km/h)
Manual
Chapter 8.9 Roads
Road Surface 8.9.6 1
8.9.6 Road Surface
Depending on the selected standard we can make a correction for road

surfaces either by entering a value in decibels (dB) or by choosing a mate-
rial from the Surface list.
An example for surface correction values according to RLS-90,
Table 4
DStrO *) in dB(A)
for a speed limit of
no Road surface material 30 km/h 40 km/h ≥ 50 km/h
1. smooth mastic asphalt, asphalt conc- 0 0 0
rete or blinded mastic asphalt
2. concrete or corrugated mastic asphalt 1.0 1.5 2.0 8
3. pavement with a smooth surface 2.0 2.5 3.0
4. other pavements 3.0 4.5 6.0
*) For low-noise road surface materials which have proved to provide a lasting noise reduc-
tion due to recent technological developments in structural engineering, different DStrO cor-
rections may be taken into account, e. g. minus 3 dB(A) for open-pore asphalt for speed
limits above 60 km/h.
The declared corrections as per items 5. through 9. apply to roads outside villages
where the speed limit exceeds 60 km/h (according to Allgemeines Rundschreiben
Straßenbau No. 14/1991)
>60 km/h
5. concrete according to ZTV Beton 78 with steel broom 1.0
stroke with smoothing tool
6. concrete according to ZTV Beton 78 without steel - 2.0
broom stroke with smoothing tool, textured with a jute
cloth
7. asphalt concrete <= 0/11 and blinded mastic asphalt 0/8 - 2.0
and 0/11 without grit
- open-pore asphalt covering layers containing at least
15 % of voids, when new
8. - with 0/11 grain size - 4.0
9. - with 0/8 grain size - 5.0
Manual
2
Road Surface
France Choosing the French standards (Calculation|Configuration|Country) the

road will then be calculated according to NMPB-Routes 96 /50/ and con-
sequently a possible road surface correction will be calculated as a spec-
trum.
In this case we have in CadnaA the possibility of entering spectra in Ta-
bles|Libraries (local)|Sound Reduction Indices (see Chapter 16.3.4
"Spectra of Sound Reduction Index") to which we then get access in the
Road Surface list. Prerequisite is the term NMPB_(Number) in the ID of
the sound reduction spectrum (e.g. NMPB_01, NMPB_25 etc.). (Number)
is the wildcard for an abitrary integer number and of course a spektra name
which is shown in the list for selection.
Manual
Chapter 8.9 Roads
Road Gradient (%) 8.9.7 1
8.9.7 Road Gradient (%)
In the edit dialog Road we can either enter a value for the Road Gradient
(%) or CadnaA calculates the average gradient of the road in view of
their z-coordinates and the digital terrain model and inserts the values au-
tomatically if we click the menu item Tables|Miscellaneous|Calc Gradi-
ent of Roads.
* Because the value applies for the entire road, we have to pay atten-
tion that, already with the inputing of the road, we divide it into
equivalent sections if the slope changes with respect to the road.
The automatic slope calculation occurs for all roads simultaneously. If this
is not intended, deactivate those roads which are to be excluded from the 8
slope calculation. Re-activate them afterwards.
Values less than 5 % do not have any effect on the emission value. Hint for RLS90
Manual
2
Road Gradient (%)
Manual
Chapter 8.9 Roads
Correction for Multiple Reflections 8.9.8 1
8.9.8 Correction for Multiple Reflections
According to RLS-90, first-order reflections are to be taken into account

by considering first-order mirror sound sources in addition to the original
sound source "Road". This is done automatically if, on the tab Calcula-
tion|Configuration|Road, the option Strictly according to RLS-90 (see
Chapter 12.4.10) is activated, no matter which order of reflection was
specified on the tab Calculation|Configuration|Reflection (see Chapter
12.4.8).
If the option Strictly according to RLS-90 is deactivated, however, any
reflection may be excluded by specifying 0 as the order of reflection in the
Calculation|Configuration.
8
If there are closed built-up areas on both sides of the road, the resulting ex-
cess level has to be accounted for by an additional correction for multiple
reflections, which depends on the average height of both built-up areas and
on the distance between them.
We can enter the correction for multiple reflections after clicking the Op-
tions button in the edit dialog.
This is the excess sound level due to multiple reflections. Drefl dB(A) 8.9.8
If this item is activated in the edit dialog Road, you can enter a level in the
edit box. If this item is deactivated, you can enter average height and dis-
tance and specify the absorptive properties of the buildings along the road.
These data then serve to determine Drefl in dB.
The average height of the buildings making up the closed built-up area Average
along the road. Height (m) 8.9.8
The average distance between the buildings on both sides of the road. Distance (m) 8.9.8
Specify the properties of the buildings as reflecting, absorbing or highly

absorbing by selecting from the list box.
Manual
2
Correction for Multiple Reflections
But you also can force CadnaA to calculate either the multiple reflections
and/or the average height and distance and to enter the values in the corre-
sponding fields. See the following paragraph.
Calc Width With the command Calc Width of Roads (Tables|Miscellaneous)

of Roads 8.9.8 CadnaA determines the average height, distance and gaps’ proportion of
buildings straight at the roads. The results are stored in string variables and
entered in the Info-box of the corresponding Edit dialog of the roads.
Info-Box with the corresponding string variables after

executing the command Calc Width of Roads.
After that you can let CadnaA insert the values of the string variables in
the corresponding fields of the Road’s edit dialog and determine the cor-
rection of multiple reflections. CadnaA calculates on the basis of the buil-
dings’ average heights and distances of both sides of the roads first a value
which is displayed in the not yet activated field Drefl. If a correction of
multiple reflection has to be taken into account for calculation or not de-
pends also on the gaps’ proportion of buildings located straight by the
roads. Even this you can calculate it with CadnaA.
Manual
Chapter 8.9 Roads
) Open the file XL_01.cna on your CD-ROM. XL_01.cna
) Execute the command Calc Width of Roads (Tables|Miscellaneous).

Now let CadnaA enter the average height of buildings in the field Avera- Example
ge Height (m) in the Road’s edit dialog. For that we need the value of the
string variable HBEB_L (average height left) and HBEB_R (average
height right). Both values have to be added and divided with 2. Therefore
) RIGHT mouse click on a free area in your project file and choose
Modify Objects|Action: Change Attribute from the context menu
and highlight the object type Road - confirm with OK.
) The next dialog opens - select the Attribut HBEB, activate Arith-
metic und enter the following expressen:
Manual
4
(MEMO_HBEB_L+MEMO_HBEB_R)/2
8
After confirming with OK the calculated value is entered in the field
Average Height (m).
Now let CadnaA also enter the distance of the buildings (DBEB) in the
corresponding field. Therefore in the dialog Modify Attribute select the
attribute ABST and enter following formula:
Manual
Chapter 8.9 Roads
MEMO_DBEB_L + MEMO_DBEB_R
8
CadnaA now calculates with both entries the correction of multiple reflec-
tion.
But if actually a correction of multiple reflection has to be taken into ac-

count depends also on the proportion of the building’s gaps. If those are
smaller than 30 % - e.g. according to RLS90 - you have to calculate with a
surcharge for multiple reflections. If you want CadnaA to calculate this
Manual
6
value you have to enter the following formula for the attribute DREFL in
the dialog Modify Attribute:
iif(max(MEMO_LUECK_L,MEMO_LUECK_R)<0.3,DREFL,0)
After confirming the dialog with OK the option DREFL will be activated
and if the proportion of the gaps left or right are smaller than 30 % the va-
lue already calculated by CadnaA is valid otherwise 0 (zero) will be ente-
red and therefore for these roads no multiple reflection will be calculated.
The following string variables are created automatically by CadnaA if the
commannd Calc Width of Roads (Tables|Miscellaneous) is executed:
DBEB_L; DBEB_R Distance of building development (left/

right)
8
HBEB_L; HBEB_R average height (m) of building develop-
ment (left/right)
LUECK_L; LUECK_R proportion of gaps (left/right)
From other locations you can revert to the string variable with the prefix
MEMO_ in front of the name (e.g. MEMO_DBEB_L).
Manual
Crossings with Traffic Lights 8.10 1
8.10 Crossings with Traffic Lights

If we allocate a traffic light to a crossing or junction, the relevant penalty
for receiver points nearby is automatically calculated according to the ac-
tive standard.
The calculation takes into account at what time, day, evening or night, the
traffic light is active.
The check boxes allow us to separately specify the day-time, evening and
night-time activity of the traffic light.
For a crossing with traffic lights, if calculated strictly according to RLS- Example for RLS90
90, a Traffic Lights icon is inserted at each crossing point on the outer
lanes, i. e., exactly at the corners of the crossing area in the graphic repre- 8
sentation of CadnaA.
Click the traffic light icon on the toolbox, then click the first crossing point
on the outer lane axis in order to position the traffic light. We enter all pa-
rameters for the first traffic light before we insert the next one because the
parameters specified for the first traffic light will be adopted for all follow-
ing ones.
Manual
2
Crossings with Traffic Lights
EditTrafficLightdialog8.10
8
Traffic Light If a traffic light is allocated the relevant penalty for receiver points nearby
is active 8.10 then it is automatically calculated according to RLS-90, sub-clause 4.2,
table 2.
An active traffic light is indicated by a cross within the quadrangle.
Manual
Crossings with Traffic Lights 8.10 3
In the symbol bar you can choose one of the defined eval-
uation parameters (see Calculation|Configuration|Eval-
uation parameter) like Lden, Lde etc. In the above
example the crossing symbol (down to the right) is not
active if you choose Lde because this crossing is only
active at night.
Any road lying within a certain distance to this crossing with traffic lights Associated Roads
and, therefore, to be allocated to this crossing, will be considered accord-
ingly in the calculation, and will be listed on the Associated Roads box.
The option Find Automatically is activated by default.
According to RLS 90 the distance is less than 20 m. Hint for RLS 90
We insert roads manually by clicking the Insert button and selecting the
corresponding road from the object table.
Manual
4
Crossings with Traffic Lights
To allocate a road to a crossing with traffic lights, position and/or activate

at least one receiver point and start the calculation by clicking the calcula-
tor icon (pocket calculator on the icon bar).
Calculator icon on the icon bar.
Manual
Long Straight Roads 8.11 1
8.11 Long Straight Roads

Using the Long Straight Road feature from the context menu (see Chap-
ter 5.7) or from the menu Tables|Miscellaneous allows us quickly to per-
form an approximate immission calculation for roads complying with the
requirements of RLS-90, subclause 4.4.1. This calculation must not be
used in combination with the other calculation methods according to RLS-
90.
When you click the Long Straight Road command, the calculation sheet
appears where the sound emission LmE Day and Night as well as the re-
sult, in terms of the rating level Lr Day and Night, will be calculated
while you enter the relevant parameters.
8
We can save the calculation via the Save button, and load it again by click-
ing the Open button. The extension lgs is appended to the file name.
We can also open the calculation sheet via the context menu if we have in-
serted a road in CadnaA and click it with the RIGHT mouse button while
still in the edit mode.
Manual
2
Long Straight Roads
Data that we have already entered in the edit dialog Road will be adopted
in the calculation sheet.
Press the Print button to print the calculation sheet.
Manual
Railways 8.12 1
8.12 Railways
All guidelines and standards for railway noise (incl. SRMII) calculate the
noise immission only for two time intervals (day/night). If you like to cal-
culate according to EU-Interim method you have to activate the option
„Use Non-Standard Reference Time D/E/N = 12/4/8“ in Calculati-
on|Configuration|Tab Railway. Via this option you are able to calculate
as usal with two time intervals or also with three time intervals according
to EU-Interim method (for more information see chapter 12.4.11 "Railroad
Tab").
By way of example, the edit railway dialog is described for the application
of Schall 03 /8/. It applies analogously for the other guidelines.
8
Edit Dialog
Railway 8.12
The height (z-coordinate) of the railway in the Geometry dialog refers to Geometry 8.12
the top side of the rail. The default value is 0,6 m.
See also chapter 10.2 General Information for Working with Uneven Ter-
rain in CadnaA.
Manual
2
Railways
Manual
Chapter 8.12 Railways
Emission Level dB(A) 8.12.1 1
8.12.1 Emission Level dB(A)
The emission level for railways is calculated according to the chosen guid-
line.
For Example, according to Schall03, the emission level Lm,E, in dB(A)
for railways, is the time-averaged level determined in a free field at a dis-
tance of 25 from the centre-line of the track in question, and at a height of
3.5 m above the top edge of the rail, assuming the railway track is straight
and infinitely long.
If this option is activated, the types of trains and train classes, numbers of Train classes
trains and corrections, can be edited, selected from editable list boxes, or and Penalties 8.12.1
taken into account via option boxes. CadnaA will automatically calculate 8
the emission level from the specified values (see Chapter 8.12.2).
Dfb (dB) will take into account the effects of different kinds of track. If Correction Dfb
Dfb (dB) is activated, you can enter a value from the keyboard. Alterna- (dB) 8.12.1
tively, use the list box to select the kind of track from a list. To do so acti-
vate the Option button next to this list box.
Dbr = Correction for the effect of a bridge Bridge

(Dbr = +3dB) 8.12.1
Dbü = Correction for the effect of a level/grade crossing Level/Grade

Crossing 8.12.1
When the relevant range for the radius of curvature has been selected, the Radius of
emission value will, if necessary, be penalised according to the provisions Curvature 8.12.1
of the national standard.
A correction for multiple reflections is taken into account in the calcula- Multiple Reflections
tion when high-rise buildings close to railways are specified by their dis- at Railways 8.12.1
tance and their mean height.
If a value for Vmax is entered the train speed will be adjusted if necessary. Vmax 8.12.1
For the calculation the smaller value of both values is taken into account.
Manual
2
8.12.1 Chapter 8.12 Railways
Emission Level dB(A)
Manual
Train Classes 8.12.2 1
8.12.2 Train Classes
Instead of entering the Emission level we can generate a Train Class list to
calculate the emission level according to the chosen guideline.
The train class list can be edited. Therefore we have to activate the option
field Train Classes and Penalties.
We have two ways to fill out the train class list:

1. by directly completing one row after the other in the edit dialog:
Select the local list of train classes from the list box.
2. by refering to a numbers-of-trains table compiled under
Tables|Numbers-of-Trains: Select the identifier of the numbers-of-
trains table from the list box.
Completing the local list of train classes only makes sense if one section of Train Class
railway is concerned. Otherwise, if you were to split this railway track into List local 8.12.2
several smaller sections, due to modified parameters, such as track type or

bridge penalty, you would have to enter any changes, e. g., in the numbers
of trains, individually for each section. You can avoid this by compiling a
numbers-of-trains table.
Manual
2
Train Classes
Numbers-of-Trains The Numbers-of-Trains Table under Tables|Sources allows you to com-

Table 8.12.2 pile for a route a list of train classes from the global library (Tables|Li-
brary (global)|Train Classes) and the numbers of trains. This table can
then be referred to by its identifier. Any changes in the numbers-of-trains
table have to be entered only once. They will have an effect on all railway
sections to which that table was allocated, no matter whether you make the
changes via the Tables menu or in the list of train classes in the edit dia-
log.
Train Class
Boxes 8.12.2
Train Type 8.12.2 The train type is selected via Library (global)|Train Classes (see above
in this chapter), from the list of Train Types. The relevant parameters,
such as train length and speed, are thus specified.
8
Percentage of Disk Brakes p % = the percentage of the train length including the engine, occupied by
P (%) 8.12.2 vehicles using disk brakes.
Numer of Trains Specify the numbers of trains separately for daytime and night-time. (see
day and night 8.12.2 also Table of Numbers of Train above)
Note: If the numbers are given in trains per hour, multiply them by 16 for
the daytime number and by 8 for the night-time number before entering
them in the edit box.
Speed v (km/h) 8.12.2 v is the speed limit for a specific railway section or the relevant travelling
speed limit for trains which may not drive at that speed.
Train Length l is the train length belonging to the relevant train class.
(m) 8.12.2
Correction for Train Type The correction Dfz accounts for the affect of different kinds of vehicles.
Dfz (dB) 8.12.2
If the Train Type Dfz option is activated, a correction value may be en-
tered from the keyboard. Alternatively, you can select a train type from the
list box, in which case the correction is allocated automatically.
Manual
Train Classes 8.12.2 3
The emission level for a train class, resulting from the pertinent parameter Emission Lm,E,i
settings, is displayed here. For velocities of more than 250 km/h, a 1-dB incl. Dae (1dB) 8.12.2
penalty for aerodynamic noise is included as required by the "Aktuelle In-

formation des BZA München 021 vom 7.8.1991" /18/.
ASCII tables of train classes can be imported via the ODBC interface. Import Train
Object variable: ZKLST_ASC. Classes 8.12.2
Tables listing number of trains can be im- and exported (menu FILE) - for Number of Trains 8.12.2
details see Import, chapter 8.12.2 "Train Classes".
Manual
4
Train Classes
Manual
Train Classes User-defined 8.12.3 1
8.12.3 Train Classes User-defined
For different train classes you can enter user-defined data records of sound
emission (according to table 1 of S5011 /25/ and Nordic Prediction Me-
thod) and use them by refering to their identifiers (ID). A train type is defi-
ned in the library Sound Levels (see chapter 16.2) by entering the
frequency spectra of emission.
The related spectra for different speeds of a train type are indicated by Austria
their ID.
Manual
2
Train Classes User-defined
* At least two spectra with different speeds should exist and be sorted
in ascending order in the library.
Spectra-ID 8.12.3 Requirements for spectra ID:

general description: S5011_xxxx_yyy
S5011_ is mandatory
xxxx_ wildcard for a maximum of 4 characters to describe the train type
yyy wildcard for a maximum value of 3 digits for a train speed
S5011.cna Example:
S5011_UBAN_60
S5011_UBAN_100
8 Both IDs describe a train type with 60 km/h and 100 km/h.
Name You can enter an arbitrary name for the spectra. But because the name is
also visible, in addition to the ID with four characters (xxxx), in the list of
train types, you should choose a short name if possible.
Nordic Prediction For the user-defined train classes according to Nordic Prediction Method
Method 8.12.3 the above describtion applies analog. But one train class needs two spectra
A and B - this is mendatory!
Requirements for spectra ID:
NORDR_xxxx_A and NORDR_xxxx_B
NORDR_is mandatory
xxxx_ wildcard for a maximum of 4 characters to describe the train typ
A is mandatory
B is mandatory
Manual
Traffic-Count Calculator 8.12.4 1
8.12.4 Traffic-Count Calculator
With the Traffic-Count Calculator in Tables|Miscellaneous you can split

comfortable present numbers of trains or aeroplanes for the time intervals
day/evening/night without additional calculation or paperwork.
If it is applied for numbers of aeroplanes you have to pay attention that the
evaluation parameters Ld/Le/Ln are selected (Calculation|Configurati-
on|Eval.Parm tab).
By calculation according to EC-directive it is therefore possible the so far
only for the time interval day/night defined numbers of trains or aeropla-
nes to allocate for the three time intervals day/evening/night. The variables
for the flow figures of the three time intervals are for day nd, evening ne
8
and night nn.
With the example in the above screen shot the present flow figures of the
local train list for day and night will be allocated also for evening with
25 % from the day value plus 20 % from the night value. Therefore the
flow figures are lowered to 75 % of the primary value for the day and 80 %
for the night.
Manual
2
Traffic-Count Calculator
If you mark all options Apply to all corresponding tables are taken into ac-
count simultaneously (local list of train classes and the list with number of
trains predefined in the Library and the flow figures of the aeroplans.
Manual
Purge List of Numbers-of-Trains 8.12.5 1
8.12.5 Purge List of Numbers-of-Trains
When importing files which also contain lists of numbers of trains these
will be appended to those already available. To prevent the list from grow-
ing longer and longer, you can update it by using the Tables|Miscellane-
ous|Purge command. This deletes all those lists of numbers-of-trains
which are allocated to none of the railway sections.
Manual
2
Purge List of Numbers-of-Trains
Manual
Parking Places 8.13 1
8.13 Parking Places

For the time being we can choose to calculate the sound emission of park-
ing lots according to
• RLS-90 see Chapter /9/
• LfU-Study 1993 see Chapter /6/
• LfU-Study 1995 Precise see Chapter /4/
• LfU-Study 1995 Approximate see Chapter /5/
• LfU-Study 2003 /7/
and to calculate the sound immission or propagation according to
• RLS-90, for public parking lots or
• for commercial parking lots according to the standard for industry.
8
The boxes available in the edit dialog Parking Lot are adapted to suit the
option that is selected for the calculation.
Manual
2
Parking Places
Edit Dialog
Parking Lot 8.13
Calculation From the editable list box, select the method to be used for the calculation
according to: 8.13.0 of the sound emission.
RLS90 8.13 Guidelines for Noise Control at Roads (RLS-90); published by the Ger-
man Federal Ministry of Transport, Dept. for Road Construction, Ed.
1990, Traffic Gazette 44 (1990)
LfU-Study 1993 8.13 Parking Lot Study, study concerning sound emission from parking lots,
scrap yards and bus terminals, 1993 edition, issue 89, collection of publi-
cations by the Bavarian Ministry for Environmental Protection (LfU), Mu-
nich
LfU-Study 1995 Wolfgang Hendlmeier: "Noise control at parking lots and underground car
precise 8.13 parks", clause 12.2: Precise calculation method (for parking lots where the
distribution of traffic between the parking spaces can be estimated with
sufficient precision), Bavarian Ministry for Environmental Protection,
Depts. 2/4 and 2/5, November 1994
Manual
Parking Places 8.13 3
When calculating according to this method, you must also enter the dis-
tances covered within the parking lot and calculate them according to
RLS-90.
Wolfgang Hendlmeier: "Noise control at parking lots and underground car LfU-Study 1995 approxi-
parks", clause 12.3: Approximate calculation method (for parking lots mate 8.13
where the distribution of traffic between the parking spaces cannot be esti-
mated with sufficient precision), Bavarian Ministry for Environmental
Protection, Depts. 2/4 and 2/5, November 1994
Distances covered within the parking lot in search of a parking space need
not be entered separately but are considered in the parking lot calculation.
In the new study /7/ more detailed information about vehicle movements LfU-Study 2003 8.13
have been included. The number of events are referred to the number of
parking spaces and to further quantities depending on the type of lot. Addi- 8
tionally, two different procedures for the calculation of the noise emission
by parking lots on flat ground are described.
In CadnaA, both procedures are implemented, the so-called "combined
evaluation" (normal case) and the "separate evaluation" (special case).
By the combined evaluation the emission caused by the transit traffic is ac- combinedevaluation8.13.0
counted for approximately by the parameter KD. This increase just de-
pends on the number of parking spaces ng or any other specified reference
quantity n (e.g. per bed for hotels; per 10 m² area for restaurants or stores).
The Bavarian Environmental Protection Agency (LfU Bayern) has straigh-
ten out upon request that the parameter KD is to be calculated for all kinds
of parking lots based on the number of parking spaces ng or any other spe-
cified reference quantity n, although the study just refers to the variable
ng.
By the separate evaluation the emission resulting from parking movements separate evaluation 8.13.0
and from search resp. transit traffic is accounted for separately. In the cal-
culation of the noise emission the parameter KD is not applied. Thus,
search and transit traffic has to be accounted for by modelling the road li-
nes separately (e.g. according to RLS-90).
Manual
4
Parking Places
Emission The sound emission of a parking lot due to parking traffic is characterised
L*m,E in dB(A) 8.13.0 by the emission level L*m,E. This is the time-averaged level in a free field
at a distance of 25 m from the centre of the parking lot, assuming that the
total emission originates from this single point.
Counts, Parking Events per hour and parking space. You may enter the values or adopt
Spaces 8.13.0 them from a table with pre-defined numbers of events for different parking
spaces. To open this table, click the card index icon. A selected data record
is adopted via the OK button.
Library Parking Lot The table Number of Events (movements) is edited either directly via the
Events 8.13.0 edit dialog Parking Lot or via the menu Tables|Libraries|Parking Lot
Events. Entries are saved globally and are thus still available when
CadnaA is re-started.
8
Penalty 8.13.0
Dp dB(A) 8.13 Dp dB(A) is a correction for different types of parking lots (when calculat-
ing according to LfU parking lot study = Dlpa).
We edit the correction for different types of parking lots by activating the
Dp option. Alternatively, we can select a type of parking lot from the list
box (Activate this option by clicking the option button next to the list
box!).
Type of When selecting a type of parking lot from the list box, e. g., motorcycle
Parking Lot 8.13 parking lot, the corrections suggested in the selected study (Calculation
according to box) are immediately adopted.
Manual
Pass-by Levels for Line Sources with the Noise Level’s Time History 8.14 1
8.14 Pass-by Levels for Line Sources with

the Noise Level’s Time History1
For roads, railways, and other line-like sources CadnaA allows us to cal-
culate according to the choosen standards, the time history of the sound
pressure level that would result from a single vehicle or other source with
a specified emission travelling along that line.
Generating this level characteristic allows you to check very effectively,
e. g.,
• whether the effect of a noise-control device, such as a barrier, would be
sufficient for all affected partial areas,
• which noise reduction may be expected by providing a reflecting build- 8
ing facade with absorbent cladding, or
• by which amount the sound pressure level resulting from single motor
vehicles travelling by is reduced if, e. g., a zone with a speed limit of
30 km/h is established in an ordinary inner-city street.
With the RIGHT mouse key we click the command Pass-By Level from the
context menu of the line object.
* The Pass-By Level command in the context menu of a line source is

only available if a receiver point is inserted.
1. that is the recorded noise level over a period of time
Manual
2
Pass-by Levels for Line Sources with the Noise Level’s Time History
Dialog for calculation of the time history at a receiver point

as a vehicle is passing by on a road.
The possible specification depends on the object type used for the com-
mand Pass-By Level, such as road, railway or general line source.
Source Type 8.14

User-defined 8.14 If we select User-defined from the Source Type box we can enter our
own data for all provided parameters.
Light or Heavy 8.14 If we select light or heavy from the Source Type box we cannot enter the
sound power level, but it will be determined with the entered Speed (km/
h). The predefined sound power level for roads is determined according to
RLS 90 if the national standard does not describe anything about it.
Train list 8.14 We can choose previously entered train types (see Chapter 8.12.2 "Train
Classes") from the Source Type box if we use the line source Railway. We
select a train as source type by clicking on it.
Manual
The following table lists the average sound power levels for passenger cars Sound Power Level
and trucks, as a function of speed, which have to be assigned to the vehi- and Speed 8.14
cles so as to yield the emission value as an example prescribed by RLS-90

for the speed in question.
Sound power levels, in dB(A), of individual vehicles, as a function of
speed:
Speed, in km/h
30 50 80 100 120
Passenger car 92.5 97 103 106.4 109.4
Truck 105.5 110.5 115.1
Accordingly, a sound power level of 97 dB(A) can be entered for a passen- 8

ger car driving at 50 km/h. (Of course, it would be possible to automatical-
ly assign this value, but other values may have to be assumed in some
situations.)
Sampling time and speed together determine the section lengths through Sample Time 8.14
which the fictitious vehicle or the source is moved between one calcula-
tion and the next. A sampling time of 1 s may suffice to check the neces-
sary calculation time, a value of 0.1 s may be appropriate to represent a
level record showing all level variations due to shielding and reflections.
We can select the direction of traffic with respect to the direction in which Driving direction
the road was inserted. Positive means the driving direction from the initial negativ/positiv 8.14
to the final point and negative vice versa.
With the activated option Append to Diagram we are able to simulate Append to
serveral pass-bys consecutively. Diagram 8.14
Just try it: Keep the Pass-By diagram open and mark once again the same
object or a different one with the RIGHT mouse key and choose Pass-By
Level again from the context menu. Mark the option Append to Diagram
Manual
4
and for the driving direction select negative instead of positive or vice
versa depending on what you have selected before.
Pass-By If we drag the Y-axis in the Pass-By diagram in a horizontal direction then
Diagram 8.14 the vehicle symbol in the graphic will also move along the line source/
road/railway.
Another alternative is to choose a value from the Animation menu. The
Pass-By then runs with the selected speed automatically.
Auralisation 8.14 Hardware requirement: At least a sound card and loudspeaker or earhead.
In the menu Auralization|Properties the saved sound file of the relevant
8 process is opened after selection of a sound type in the list box and is re-
produced - regarding level height - according to the calculated time history
of the pass-by level.
3D-Auralisation 8.14 With the option 3D-Auralization the Doppler effect, when switching from
approach to departure, will be simulated realistically.
Listening direction at Automatically to source: View directly towards the source (shortest dis-
Receiver tance possible)
Point: 8.14
Direction (°) 8.14 Direction: View in the given angle towards the source, relative to x-axis
Calibration 8.14 Calibration: Select the desired volume in the list box and adjust the corre-
sponding playback on your audio-appliance.
Manual
For practice: Example

Pass-By 8.14
) Test the Pass-By with a simple arrangement as in the following Pass-By.cna

figure.
Simple arrangement of a road, buildings and a receiver point IP1.
) Open the context menu by clicking the road axis with the RIGHT
mouse key and selcet the command Pass-By Level.
) From the Imm.point (receiver point) list select the desired receiver
point for which the pass-by level shall be calculated - in our example
IP1.
) In the next box, Source Type, select „light“.
) Adjust the Sampling Interval to 0.1 s.
After we have confirmed with OK the diagram opens with the calcu-
lated level’s time history. The calculation time depends on the com-
plexity of the project.
Manual
6
For a light vehicle calculated level time-history

8
) Now move the mouse cursor in the diagram und press the LEFT
mouse key. On this position a vertical cursor line appears, whose
time and sound pressure level is indicated in the upper dialog bar and
a symbol (black box) indicates the vehicle’s position on the road lane
in the graphic, in the driving direction on the assigned lane axis.
) If we now drag the cursor line horizontally in the diagram then the
vehicle symbol also will move along the road. We can also choose a
value from the Animation menu.
Regarding the vehicle’s position relative to the location of buildings we
will be able to recognise reflections (increases in level) and shielding ef-
fects (reductions in level) concerning the level fluctuation.
Manual
The level’s time history can by copied for other programs like Excel or Copy the Level’s Time
Word either as sequences of numbers or as a chart. History 8.14
) Therefore activate the Level-Time diagram by clicking on it - the

upper dialog bar is then highlighted, normally blue. Now copy to the
clipboard by pressing the key c.
) In the other program - e.g. Excel or Word - choose Edit|Paste and

confirm either graphic or text.
Indicating the vehicle on the road with a symbol (black

box) and in the diagram with a vertical cursor line
) Test further pass-by possibilities. Vary the reflection of single buil-

dings by switching them on and off alternately and watching the
effect on the level’s time history.
Manual
8
This diagram also facilitates the optimisation of barriers, because you can
immediately see the effect of any modification. Going beyond the mere
consideration of time-averaged levels, the pass-by feature offers you a tool
which allows you to examine and visualise the effects of level-reducing
measures on the instantaneous levels.
Video 8.14 You can record the pass-by as video film in AVI format which you can re-
play with each standard video program such as Windows Media Player.
If you click on the button VIDEO you can configure the recording. Choose
a desired section either the whole limits or a userdefined section. The us-
derdefined section needs a name in order to select it from the correspon-
ding list. For a try-out we recommend to defined a smaller userdefined
8 section that it doesn’t take too much time for recording.
For the video recording you need a so-called compression program which
you can choose if you have entered a file name.
The list of compression programs shows all installed programs of your op-
erating system. Choose and configure one of them accordingly. After con-
firming with OK the pass-by is calculated and recorded.
Manual
Optimized Area Sources 8.15 1
8.15 Optimized Area Sources

* This source is only available if the BPL module was purchased!
Clicking this icon allows you to specify the boundary of a maximized area
source. The source is characterised by the following features.
• The method for the calculation of sound propagation is done as it was
for the general area source (see Chapter 8.5), i. e., the area is split into
partial areas taking into account its distance from the receiver point and
possible shielding objects. The partial areas are replaced by point
sources.
• When determining noise quotas using Maximized Area Sources you
should generally activate the option so that shielding objects within do
not affect the emission of area sources. This option is available for any 8
area source. (see Chapter 12.4.9 Calculation|Configuration|Indus-
try|Src. in buildings/Cylinders do not shield.)
• The edit dialog can be switched from day-time to night-time. The entry
of either the area-related sound power level PWL’’ or the total sound
power level PWL refers to the respective time.
• By the other entries in the bottom part of the dialog, the Maximized
Area Sources differs from a general area source. These entries support
the maximalisation with respect to the allocation of noise quotas.
Manual
2
Optimized Area Sources
65.0
65.0
(10/10) (250/10)
70.0
The procedure is explained below.

If immission-sensitive residential areas are situated in the vicinity of a
planned trade or industrial area the latter is so partitioned as to provide in-
dividual areas with different maximum permissible emissions. These per-
missible emission values are determined under the condition that:
• the relevant immission limits for the neighbourhood are complied with
in any case, and
• the intended use of the individual areas is prevented or restricted in the
least possible way
This generally is called noise allotment. CadnaA supports this in an ex-
tremely flexible manner using the Maximized Area Source, without forc-
ing the user to follow a particular program-inherent philosophy of
maximalization.
In order to achieve this, a usability function is assigned to each partial
area.
Manual
It assigns an area-related usability in % to each area-related sound power

level. The fact that the gradient of the curve decreases as the emission val-
ues increase shows that a further increase in the permissible emission can-
not be exploited due to the intended use. On the other hand, the usability
decreases excessively when a particular emission required for the intended
use is further reduced.
Thanks to this concept /20/ the individual requirements of planning con-
cerning institutions and parties can be accounted for in the maximalisation.
The usability function of CadnaA is approximated by two lines. This re-
quires three emission values for each partial area as a basis for the maxi-
malisation.
PWL’’ max is the maximum exploitable emission (depending

on the branch of industry - value may be up to
80 dB(A) for industries with permanent truck
traffic)
Manual
4
PWL’’ min is the minimum required emission [determined on

the basis of the absolutely necessary noise-rele-
vant processes - e. g. a 10-minute truck ride
across an area of 1,000 m2 results in 55 dB(A).]
PWL Turning is the emission value where the gradient of the us-
Point ability function changes. Below the turning point
level, a 1-dB reduction results in a stronger reduc-
tion in usability than a 1-dB increase in the range
above, and enhances the usability. Here we
should enter the value that should be "retained" in
the maximalisation.
8
The usability specified at the turning point determines the curve and thus
the "maximalising strategy".
Common data for industrial areas::
PWL’’ min 57 dB(A)
Turning Point 80 % / 60 dB(A)
PWL’’ max 65 dB(A)
The bottom part of the edit dialog for the Optimized Area Source con-
tains a slider control serving to select an emission value within the range
from min to max like the current value which is displayed in the dialog
above. For a first test, push the slider to the extreme right, thus selecting
the maximum emission value.
Manual
The most critical receiver points are entered with their relevant standard Calculation
immission levels as customary. Clicking the calculator icon on the icon bar
starts the calculation. If no receiver point turns red for either day or night, 8.15.0
8
the standard levels are complied with in spite of the maximum values
which were assumed - in this case it is not necessary to reduce emission
values.
In the calculation, all sources existing in the project - roads, railways, in-
dustry or even air-traffic noise - are taken into account as the initial immis-
sion. The individual or group (see Chapter 18.2) deactivation, or
deactivation of entire types of noise sources allows you to generate and an-
alyse any scenario for large limits.
The procedure described so far is the same as for the calculation of ordi-
nary area sources.
If red colour shows that the standard levels have been exceeded at individ- Manual
ual receiver points, the emission from the partial areas with the strongest Maximalisation 8.15.0
influence on the relevant point are reduced in steps.
CadnaA does not require a new calculation for each step. Double-clicking
the respective partial area and shifting the position of the slider will show
you the resulting change of receiver points in the graphic - practically on-
line. Depending on the desired strategy the emission values can be reduced
until compliance with the standard levels is ensured at all receiver points.
Manual
6
* Follow this procedure separately for day-time and night-time.
Automatic Selecting Optimized Area Sources on the Calculation menu will result
Maximalization 8.15.0 in an automatic, iterative reduction of the emission values by CadnaA. It is
always the reduction of emission resulting in the smallest decrease of the
area-related usability according to the concept explained above which is
carried out in this stepwise procedure.
With
Si area in m² of the ith partial area
wi area-related usability in % of the ith partial area
8 the total usability is
∑ wi • S i
w=
∑ Si
Its value is displayed at the beginning and the end of the maximalization.
The result calculated by CadnaA need not be the best if further aspects,
not accessible to the above usability function, are to be considered. In this
case, the automatic optimisation is a suitable starting point, whereas manu-
al modifications of the emission values using the slider (see above: Manu-
al Maximalisation) allow you to further adapt the scenario in the desired
way.
When the maximalisation has been completed and fixed, the Optimized
Area Source can be converted to an general area source (see Chapter
5.7.14). This is particularly useful where large data stocks are to be supple-
mented for noise immission maps.
See also:
Chapter "Noise Quota for Urban Land-Use Planning" and Chapter
12.4.13 "Optimisable Source Tab"
Manual
CadnaA-SET Option 8.16 1
8.16 CadnaA-SET Option

Technical Sound Sources Modelling, Sound Calculation and Noise Reduc-
tion with CadnaA-SET -
Module for Calculation of Sound Emission and Transmission
CadnaA-SET is a additional program option with a revolutionary concept.

Without CadnaA-SET immission prognoses for technical facilities you
do not hit the state of the art.
Manual
2
CadnaA-SET Option
Main Features:
• The frequency spectra of radiating sound power are determined from
the technical parameters.
• Complex facilities and devices with multiple sound sources and radiat-
ing areas are reproduce with their inner sound flux.
• The already existing sound source models establish a pool with imme-
diately accessible know-how
• This pool can be extended arbitrarly with the userdefined models (the
work of all employees concerning projects extended the library).
• The insertion of a silencer at a location in a sound flux string reduced
the emission of all following radiating areas automatically
8 • The impact at receiver points refering to the noise reduction concepts
can be checked easily by adjusting the technical parameters accord-
ingly (volume flux, thickness of sheet metal).
The SET-Manual:
The CadnaA-SET manual is a powerful compendium regarding technical
sound sources.
• Each sound source description consists of one or more pictures
• SET-Module Diagram with input (IN) and output (OUT)
• Technical-physical specification
• Information for the sound genesis mechanismen
• Calculation basis in the SET module (name of the SET module, used
equation, parameter terms)
• Additional hints for peculiarities such as tone incorporation, possible
noise reduction measure and details for the application insecurity of
this prognosis method.
• Literature/References concerning the applied literature, guidelines and
standards
Manual
Manual CadnaA
Chapter 9 Obstacles
Chapter 5 Basics 5
Chapter 6 Import 6
Chapter 8 Sources 8
Examples Tutorial
Manual
2 Chapter 9 Obstacles
Manual
Chapter 9 Obstacles
Contents 9.1 1
Chapter 9 Obstacles
9.1 Contents
9.2 Reflection Properties of Obstacles
9.3 Building
9.3.1 Acoustic Transparency (%)
9.3.2 Residential and Outbuilding
9.3.3 Snap Point to Building Facade
9.3.4 Generate a Building 9
9.3.5 The Building Evaluation
9.3.6 The Noise Maps of Buildings
9.3.7 Result Table for the Building Noise
9.3.8 Level-Difference-Map for Building Noise
9.4 The Cylinder

9.5 The Barriers
9.5.1 The floating Barrier
9.5.2 Barrier with Cantilever
9.6 The Bridge

9.6.1 Entering a Bridge
9.6.2 Example of a Street bridge elevated
by two embankments
Manual
2
9.1 Chapter 9 Obstacles
Contents
9.7 Embankment
9.7.1 Automatically Optimize Noise Barriers
9.8 Areas with Specified Ground

Absorption
9.9 The Foliage and Built-Up Areas
9.10 3D-Reflector
Manual
Chapter 9 Obstacles
Reflection Properties of Obstacles 9.2 1
9.2 Reflection Properties of Obstacles

One of three options can be activated to specify the reflectivity of the sur-
faces of obstacles. If the properties of the building elements, e. g. of a bar-
rier, are known, the absorption coefficient of the surface may be entered
directly.
Example edit dialog Building
No reflection is calculated for this object. No Reflection 9.2
For the following options, it is required that under Calculation|Configu-

ration|Reflection tab (see Chapter 12.4.8), an order of reflection of 1 or
more is specified.
Enter the acoustical loss due to reflection in decibels, or click the card-in- Reflection Loss 9.2
dex icon and assign it in terms of the surface classification (in accordance
with RLS90 /9/, Table 7).
Enter a single-number value, a formula, or the reference to an absorption Absorption

coefficient spectrum (siehe Kapitel 16.2 The local and global Libraries). Coefficient
Alpha 9.2
Manual
2
Reflection Properties of Obstacles
Manual
Chapter 9 Obstacles
Building 9.3 1
9.3 Building
Buildings are objects with vertical walls and an arbitrary closed polygon
as base. The rectangular shape can be forced. The roof is not considered a
reflecting or shielding object. (If necessary, enter a barrier, the top edge of
which is defined by the roof top.)
Reflections at the outer surfaces of the building will be taken into account
according to the mirror sound source method if this option has been select-
ed under Calculation|Configuration (see Chapter 12.4.8).
Sources will be shielded if the are lying within the building because their
facades are be taken into account as barriers. We can determine this by ac-
tivating or deactivating the option Sources in Buildings/Cylinders do not
shield on the tab Industry in Calculation|Configuration (see Chapter
12.4.9 "Industry Tab").0
9
The heights of a building is entered as customary in the edit dialog, under
Geometry.
With the function Deactivate Point Objects in Buildings (Tables|Miscel- Deactivate Point Objects
laneous) you can deactivate point like objects (e.g. height points, point in Buildings 9.3.0
sources) which are within the building base. That maybe sometime useful
after a third-party program’s import. Now you can easily delete the deacte-
vated objects with the funktion Modify Object (see Chapter 5.7.2).
Manual
2
Building
For further information concerning buildings see chapters:

• Quickstart Object Building see Chapter 4.14.5
• Acoustical Transparence see Chapter 9.3.1
• Generate Building see Chapter 9.3.4
• Force Rectangle in the contex menu, see Chapter 5.7.5
• Rectangular Plan, see Chapter 5.7.6
• Barriers, see Chapter 9.5
• Object snap see Chapter 11.2 „Allocating a Receiver Point to
a Building“
• Snap Point on Building Facade see Chapter 9.3.3
• Building Evaluation see Chapter 9.3.5
• Building Noise Map see Chapter 9.3.6
• Import Building Height Points see Chapter 6.4.13
Manual
Chapter 9.3 Building
Acoustic Transparency (%) 9.3.1 1
9.3.1 Acoustic Transparency (%)
We can allocate the object Building a parameter value „acoustic transpar- Application
ency“ in % by inputing a value > 0 in the corresponding edit box.
With a value larger than zero the defined percentage of the sound energy VDI 2714 / 2720 / ISO
is added to the diffracted sound energy when the sound energy is attenuat- 9613-2
General Sources
ed by diffraction with transparency zero. This property and the described
effect in the calculation method, is only active with industrial noise, that
means with the general point-, line- and area-sources calculated according
to VDI-guideline 2714 /2720 or ISO 9613-2
This feature allows the modeling of more or less open structures that are in
reality an accumulation of pipes, vessels and other technical equipment
that can be penetrated by sound energy. This modeling is performed with
the object Building which has the same shape as the described structure, 9
and a transparency value that is derived from the open cross section.
In the most general case several objects lie in the path of propagation. Effect
At first we check, which of these objects influence the diffraction calcula-

tion according to the rubber-band method (small objects that don't touch a
rubber stretched from source to receiver point remain unconsidered).
If the sound energy at the receiver point is reduced by dE according to the
screening calculation, then with a collective transparency of X % the ener-
gy (X/100)*dE is added to the sound energy calculated with transparency
zero.
The total degree of transmission for many buildings is the product of all
single transmission factors.
The calculation method with CadnaA is as follows:
At the receiver point two sound contributions are added energetically. The
first contribution is the diffracted sound over and if necessary around the
arrangement and is calculated as for objects not acoustically transparent.
Manual
2
9.3.1 Chapter 9.3 Building
Acoustic Transparency (%)
The second contribution is calculated as direct sound energy, not taking

into account the shielding objects, but multiplying this energy value by the
resulting transmission factor defined above.
With direct sound contribution Edir and the resulting transmission factor τ,
this second contribution is Edir * τ.
* Attention: This method was implemented because of user demands.

It is not described in any standard or guideline. The expanding of
transparently defined objects has no influence on the result of calcu-
lation. The value of the acoustic transparency is considered to be the
same for all directions.
Manual
The acoustic transparency of the building is 0 %: Example

Case 1 9.3.1
50
35
50
Manual
4
Example The acoustic transparency of the building is 50 %:

Case 2
9
50
47
50
Manual
If this option is activated in Calculation|Configuration|Industry the gen- Sources in Building/

eral sources as point-, line- and area sources can be placed within the Cylinderdonotshield9.3.1
building plan. The building, in which the sources are placed, does not af-
fect the emission of these sources. For other sources and receiver points
outside the building a shielding calculation will be taken into account ac-
cording to the choosen configuration.
With this option the radiation out of almost open structures can be carried Application
out. So a plant, consisting of open bundles of pipelines, can be modeled as
a house with a predefined transparency considering each specific sound ra-
diating valve as a point source.
Example: 9.3.1
Manual
6
56
56
56
Manual
Residential and Outbuilding 9.3.2 1
9.3.2 Residential and Outbuilding
A building can be labelled a "Residential Building" (default setting). If Residential and

"Residential Building" is not marked in the edit dialog, the building in Outbuilding 9.3.2
question is an outbuilding. Residential buildings and outbuildings are thus
automatically marked by different hatchings. Furthermore, only residential
buildings are considered in the automatic determination of the population
density (XL module, see Chapter 11.6.4).
Outbuilding
Residential building
9
Residential buildings and outbuildings have different hatchings
Specify the appearance of the hatching as shown on the dialog below (Op-
tions|Appearance, see Chapter 13.6)
Appearance dialog
For documantation you can enter the real number of residents and with the Residents: 9.3.2
option XL you can use this value for further calculations.
Manual
2
Residential and Outbuilding
Manual
Snap Point to Building Facade 9.3.3 1
9.3.3 Snap Point to Building Facade
The command Snap Point to Facade in the Context Menu of the marked
object or in the Context menu|Change Objects enables you to locate ob-
jects (e.g. point, line or area source or receiver point etc.) at a defined dis-
tance in front of building facades after they have been inserted.
The objects are attached to the facade with the distance definded in the edit Distance
box Distance Points-Facade. Points-Facade 9.3.3
The operation is applied for all points with a distance smaller than the Snap Radius 9.3.3
snap radius.
This could be necessary, e.g.,
• if objects have been inserted without activated Object Snap (see
Chapter 13.5) but shall have a defined distance to the facade 9
• if objects have been placed inside a building inadvertently -
they are moved and located with the defined distance outside the build-
ing or
• if points have been imported from external sources
Point Source
Area Source vertical
House
Receiver
Initial situation: House with a point source, a vertical area

source and a receiver point. These objects shall be
dragged in front of the facade with a distance of 0,05 m.
Manual
2
Snap Point to Building Facade
In the shown example objects are located near a building. The receiver
SnapePoint Facade.cna point and the vertical area source shall be dragged to the building facade
with a distance of 0,05 m
) click with the RIGHT mouse key on a free area in your graphics
) choose from the Context Menu|Modify Objects|Action: Snap

Point to Facade
) mark the vertical area source and the receiver point as shown in the
following picture and confirm with OK.
The receiver point and the vertical area source are snapped to the
building facade.
Manual
Snap Point to Building Facade 9.3.3 3
With activated option Copy ID/Name of building the contents of these

fields is copied into the corresponding fields of the „snaped“ objects.
Point Source
Area Source vertical
9
House
Receiver
Manual
4
Snap Point to Building Facade
Manual
Generate a Building 9.3.4 1
9.3.4 Generate a Building
To insert a building whose roof and four facades radiate sound, use the
convenient Generate Building command on the context menu (see Chap-
ter 5.7).
) First, insert a general area source in the shape of the horizontal pro-
jection of the building (see Chapter 8.5)
) Switch to the edit mode and double-click the area source. This opens
the edit dialog.
) Activate the Sound Reduction option, and enter an indoor level, eit-
her directly or with reference to a spectrum. Enter all further parame-
ters for this source, and click OK to close the dialog.
9
) Then click the area source with the RIGHT mouse button and select
Generate Building from the context menu.
In the Generate Building dialog, you can enter the parameters for the
height of the building and, if required, the height of the terrain at the base
of the building, and an absorption coefficient - either a single-number val-
ue or a reference to a spectrum (see chapter 16.2 The local and global Li-
braries).
Manual
2
Generate a Building
When all boxes are completed and the dialog has been closed by clicking
OK, CadnaA generates
1. a building with a specified height – 10 m in this example,
2. the appropriate number of vertical area sources (see Chapter 5.7)
whose parameters are adopted from the first area source, at a distance
of 0.05 m in front of the building walls, and a horizontal area source
at 0.05 m above the roof (if necessary, adjust the parameters via
Tables|Sources|Vert. Area Sources);
3. a surrounding contour line (see Chapter 10.5) with the absolute
height as entered.
Horizontal projection 3D-View
Manual
The Building Evaluation 9.3.5 1
9.3.5 The Building Evaluation
According to the requirements of RLS 90 /9/ and using the map symbols
defined in this guideline, there is a fairly simple way of demonstrating for
a building close to a traffic route whether the predefined and maximum
permissible rate levels on the basis of designated land use have been ex-
ceeded. It is also possible to ascertain which storeys this is true for and
which values are to be expected at the most exposed position of the facade
during the day and night.
Procedure:
) We activate - for better understanding and not because it is necessary Industry.cna
- the option No calculation of Building Noise Map in the menu
9
Options|Building Noise Map (see Chapter 9.3.6).
) Insert the object Building Evaluation with the corresponding icon
from the toolbox. For that, click inside the building plan for that buil-
ding for which an evaluation is supposed to be made.
) After placing the first symbol we should adjust the size if necessary
(see Chapter 5.4.3 "Change Dimensions"). All further inserted sym-
bols then have the same size.
* If several or even all buildings or only buildings with a certain condi-

tion of a project shall be evaluated we can use the command from the
context menu Modify Object|Action: Generate Building Evalua-
tion to insert the Building Evaluation symbols all at once (see
Chapter 5.7.2 "Modify Objects").
In this case CadnaA automatically places these symbols in the
selected buildings. The name of the building, entered in the identi-
cally named edit box in the edit dialog, will be automatically trans-
fered into the corresponding box of the Building Evaluation.
Manual
2
The Building Evaluation
Building Evaluation If you want enforce a building evaluation only for buildings e.g. with
with Condition a certain height and/or base area you can define a corresponding con-
dition for that.
To insert an expression for a condition activate the pertinent check-

box and either enter the abbreviations (see Chapter 2.5) via keyboard
or select them from the list which opens by clicking the button with
the double-arrows.
9
With the above example would be generated symbols for all build-
ings which have a relative height heigher than 3 m and a base area
bigger than 50 m². In this case both conditions must be „true“.
We adjust the symbol sizes via the table Building Evaluation
(Tables|Other Objects) with the context menu command Change
Column (see Chapter 15.2.5) and define the pertinent Land Uses.
But also you can first insert one symbol from the toolbox and make
all settings you wish. CadnaA accept the settings of the last symbol
in the table for the following building evaluation symbols generated.
Manual
9
Initial situation for a building evaluation. The icon has been placed
on the top left building. The calculation has not yet been performed.
When a building is evaluated, levels computed by CadnaA for all storeys

and in front of all facades are compared to the pertinent limit values or
standard values. The latter can be defined in two ways.
) Double-clicking on the building evaluation icon opens the correspon-

ding dialog. Activate the appropriate option for the standard values
If the option Determine from Designated Land Use is deactivated,
you can select the type of area by clicking the card-index icon next to
the Land Use box, and the type of noise can be selected in the Use
Standard Values for list box.
Although this building evaluation was originally aimed at traffic noise,
this flexible concept can also be applied to other types of noise like, e. g.,
industrial noise.
Manual
4
Evaluation of a building in a General Residential Area

9 with respect to road traffic noise
The second way is to click the Designated Land Use icon and assign a type
of land use to an area by drawing a closed line around it. Then activate De-
termine from Designated Land Use. The standard values to be compared
should then be known.
When all buildings have been provided with a building evaluation symbol,
and the calculation is triggered by clicking the icon Calculator on the icon
bar, the progress bar window will first display the calculation for the spec-
ified receiver points and then the progress of the building evaluation.
In this building evaluation, calculations are performed and evaluated one
after the other
• for all buildings bearing this symbol
• for all storeys which result from the ratio of building height to storey
height (storey heights may be edited under Options in the edit dialog
Building Evaluation.)
• for all outer facades.
Manual
Upon completion of the calculation, the top semicircle of the icon indi-
cates the range of storeys where excess levels occur. If it remains blank, no
excess levels occur, or no area of designated land use has been assigned.
The bottom quarters display the highest levels determined for the day and
9
for night.
I-VII
I-II 7060
6858
I-III I-II
6757 6959
I-III
6858
I-II
6959
I-II
6959
I-II
7261
I-II
7161
I-II
7161
I-II
6252
Labelling of the building after calculation
Manual
6
Excluding In the edit dialog Building Evaluation if you click on the button Opti-
Facades 9.3.5 on|Exclude Facade another dialog opens in which you can mark facades
not to be taken into account for a calculation.
The exclusion of irrelevant facades for a calculation of a noise map of

buildings can save a lot of calculation time.
To exclude a facade, click on the identifier of the facade, in the upper part
of the dialog, e.g., F01. Marked identifiers exclude the corresponding faca-
des from a calculation. In the graphic represantation, in the lower part of
the dialog, the currently marked facade is marked by a thick black line. If
the black dot of a facade is faded it indicates the deactivation of this faca-
de. If you click again on the identifier of a facade it will again be included
in the calculation. In this case the black dot is visible.
Manual
The Noise Maps of Buildings 9.3.6 1
9.3.6 The Noise Maps of Buildings
With the symbol for Building Evaluation (see Chapter 9.3.5) already giv-
en in CadnaA, which shows the maximum sound levels and, if necessary,
the storeys with exceeded levels, you are also able to produce a coloured
noise map of a building with each storey possessing its own sound level.
This corresponds to the 16. BImSchV /10/ for establishing passive noise
protection measures for buildings on streets.
* In interplay with variants (see Chapter 18.3) - calculation of different

scenarios - we can also quickly generate level-difference-maps of
buildings (see Chapter 9.3.8) and represent them comfortably in a
simply way.
9
Procedure
) Insert the symbol Building Evaluation with a mouse click on the
building plan.
) In the edit mod,e double-click the Building Evaluation symbol and

define a standard value by selecting the pertinent option.
Manual
2
The Noise Maps of Buildings
* If you want to execute a correct building evaluation according to the

16. BImSchV, please do not forget to deactivate all noise sources that
are not to be evaluated (see Chapter 18.2 Groups)
The representational parameters of the building noise map can be reached
via the menu Options|Building Noise Map (see Chapter 9.3.6).
) If necessary deactivate the checkbox No Calculation of Building

Noise Map and set the further desired parameters by input or selec-
tion.
) Start the calculation with the Pocket Calculater from the symbol bar
or with Calculation|Calc
Parameter in the
edit dialog Noise Map of
9 Building 9.3.6
Edit Dialog Noise Map / Evaluation of Buildings in the Option menu
Manual
Parameter
CadnaA subdivides the facade on the basis of the entered length and in- Calculation for minimum/
serts a level symbol into each section. maximum Length of
Facade 9.3.6
You can choose the calculation method for the characteristic noise level of Averaging Method
the building from the noise level of the facades (arithmetic or energetic av-
erage value, minimum or maximum value)
By activating this option no noise map is calculated and displayed for the No Calculation of Noise
building but the building evaluation is still executed. If you want to save Map for
Buildings
calculation time then deactivate the corresponding symbols.
Appearence of
Building
Noise Map 9.3.6
Choose the facade points/levels you want to display in the noise map for Show Facade
buildings from the listbox. Points: 9.3.6 9
You can also display the identifiers of these generated receiver points in
the Result Table with the <Textvariablen> STW (see Chapter 15.3.3).
Enter a corresponding value - the unit (m) will ajust the size of the symbol Size of (non) Exceeding
according to the change of scale, (mm) will not do this. If you wish you Symbol: 9.3.6
can choose different sizes for symbols which contain either exceeding or
non-exceeding noise levels.
Activation of this option will color the level symbols according to the col- Color Symbols according
our palette in the menu Grid|Appearance. to Level: 9.3.6
Activation of this option will show either the level value - in addition to Print in
colouring, if necessary - within the level symbol or as alternativ the num- Symbols: 9.3.6
ber of the program internal numbering of the facade symbols.
These levels can also be shown in the Result Table (see Chapter 15.3) by
activating the corresponding option in the field Receiver from Building
Noise Map. Also the number of the facade symbols can be displayed in
the Result Table with the <Textvariablen> FASSNR .
By clicking the Apply button we can look at the settings before closing the Apply 9.3.6
dialog box - a possible change of the facade length only has an effect after
Manual
4
a new calculation. By clicking the Cancel button the altered setting will
not be accept.
3D-Special The building’s facades are also colorfully displayed in the 3D-special
View 9.3.6 view according to the chosen color-level key after a calculation.
Arithmetic 9.3.6 With the Arithmetic field you are able to calculate different formula for or
with the noise map of buildings, e.g. level-difference-map for building
noise (see Chapter 9.3.8)
In case a horizontal receiver grid has already been calculated you can allo-
cate interpolated grid values to facade points. A separate calculation of a
noise map for buildings is unnecessary which would save calculation time.
Independent from the number of defined evaluation parameters (see Chap-
9 ter 12.4.6) the calculation results of the horizontal receiver grid provides a
bases for the building evaluation.
* Precondition for the allocation is the existing Building Evaluation

symbol within the relevant buildings and the facade points, which
can be generated by a „dummy“ calculation with only one point
source.
Procedure: 9.3.6 1. calculate desired receiver grid

2. generate face points with calculation of one single noise source (e.g.
point source - all other noise sources deactivated with Modify
Objects|Activation|Deactivate|All - except buildings and building
evaluation symbols)
3. calc the dummy noise map of buildings with the pocket calculater
from the symbol bar
4. in Option|Building Noise Map|Arithmetic enter the expression r0
and click on the button Perform Calculation
Manual
With the expression r0 the interpolated calculation results of the horizontal

grid will be allocated to the corresponding evaluation parameters of the fa-
cade points. Subsequently if you choose one of the defined evaluation pa-
rameters from the list in the symbol bar the allocated relevant result is
displayed in the facade points.
For allocation to the facade points of interpolated results of the horizontal
receiver grid, coordinates or the ground height the following expressions
can be additionally used for general formula:
Manual
6
Input Result
r0 allocation of the results from the horizontal grid to all the

corresponding evaluation parameters
r01 bis r04 allocation to the corresponding evaluation parameter

LP1 - LP4
(r01 allocates the result to LP1, r02 to LP2 etc. -
special application)
x|y|z evaluates the corresponding x-, y- or z-coordinate of the

facade point
(z allocate the z-coordinate to the facade point -
special application)
9 g evaluates the ground height at the facade
Example iff(STW==1;r0;LP)
(if it is the first floor, then allocate the interpolated result from the grid
otherwise not - kept the existing value)
Manual
Result Table for the Building Noise 9.3.7 1
9.3.7 Result Table for the Building Noise
With the generator of the new result table you can define a table showing
the results in a desired form.
Immission Point Land Limiting Value rel. Axis Lr w/ Noise Control dL req.
Name ID Storey Day Night Station Distance Height Day Night Day Night
dB(A) dB(A) m m m dB(A) dB(A) dB(A) dB(A)
IP 01 MI 64 54 22 21.51 0.50 59.6 49.3 - -
IP 02 MI 64 54 0 53.58 1.50 53.2 43.0 - -
IP 03 MI 64 54 51 35.94 1.50 51.2 41.0 - -
Building 01 EG MI 64 54 123 9.19 2.50 68.3 58.1 4.3 4.1
Building 01 EG MI 64 54 126 8.80 2.50 68.7 58.5 4.7 4.5
Building 01 EG MI 64 54 133 12.08 2.50 65.1 54.9 1.1 0.9
Building 02 EG MI 64 54 107 9.70 2.50 68.1 57.9 4.1 3.9
Building 03 EG MI 64 54 91 8.83 2.50 68.6 58.4 4.6 4.4
Building 05 1.OG MI 64 54 61 12.24 5.30 66.7 56.5 2.7 2.5
Building 06 EG MI 64 54 43 11.82 2.50 66.9 56.7 2.9 2.7
Building 07 EG MI 64 54 26 11.71 2.50 66.8 56.6 2.8 2.6
Building 08 EG MI 64 54 165 9.57 2.50 64.5 54.2 0.5 0.2 9
Building 08 EG MI 64 54 162 9.67 2.50 64.5 54.2 0.5 0.2
Building 13 EG MI 64 54 81 8.59 2.50 65.7 55.4 1.7 1.4
Building 19 1.OG MI 64 54 141 12.78 5.30 66.4 56.2 2.4 2.2
Building 19 1.OG MI 64 54 138 12.81 5.30 66.4 56.2 2.4 2.2
Result table with receiver points taken from the noise map for buildings
If you want to look at the results for the receiver points taken from the
noise map of the building in addition to the standard receiver points, please
activate the option Immpoints from Building Noise Map in the result ta-
ble’s edit box and choose the desired levels/storeys from the listbox.
Manual
2
Result Table for the Building Noise
9
Edit Dialog Result Table
To show also the column Storey, insert a new line in the edit box’s result
table if necessary.
A double-click on the line will open the edit box’s table column.
Manual
Result Table for the Building Noise 9.3.7 3
9
Column-Edit dialog of the Result Table
Enter the parameters shown above and close the dialog box by clicking Storeys
OK. The String variable STW represents the corresponding storey. (Textvariable)
STW 9.3.7
* The (String variable) STW shows the pertinent storey identifier.
Manual
4
Result Table for the Building Noise
String variable for Following String variables can be used in the Result Table to view more
BNM 9.3.7 information about the facade points of a Building Noise Map:
STW Floor Identifier
FASSNR Numbered the level icons of the building

noise map continuously starting with the
first polygon point of the building. These
so-called facade numbering can be dis-
played in the result tabel, too.Example:On
the basis of the facade partitioning (Opti-
ons|Building Noise Map) 12 level icons are
generated together for all sides of the buil-
ding. Consequently they will be covered
intern with the facade numbering from 1, 2,
3 etc. till 12. If each level icon has even 5
9 storeys so each storey will be assigned to
the corresponding facade number.
DIR Degree No. 0-360 with 0 symbolized

North direction
HIRI Direction with one letter (N-North, O-East,

S-South, W-West)
HIRI2 Direction with two letters if necessary (e.g.

NW-North-West, SO-South-East)
Manual
Level-Difference-Map for Building Noise 9.3.8 1
9.3.8 Level-Difference-Map for Building Noise
With the Noise-Map for Buildings and activated variants we can quickly
calculate the differences in levels at buildings in various project scenarios
and can represent them easily.
Therefore, at first we calculate the noise maps for buildings for all variants
with Calculation|Calc|All Variants. If we switch through the variants by
selecting the variant name at the symbol bar the pertinent result is dis-
played on the screen.
To better recognize the levels, displayed in the symbols, deactivate the op-
tion Color Symbols according to Level, if necessary, or choose a differ-
ent color palette with Open Palette in the menu Grid|Appearence|
Option (see Chapter 11.5.2).
9
We calculate the level differences by subtracting the results of the variants. Calculate Level
For that, open the dialog Options|Building Noise Map and enter the perti- Differences
nent formula in the box Arithmetic/actual Variant.
We calculate the first variante V01 with the actual situation and the second Example: Noise Map in
variant V02 with the actual situation plus noise protection measures, e.g. a Levels differences for
Buildings
noise protection wall. What level differences does the noise protection
wall gain at the facades?
After calculating all variants (Calculation|Calc|All Variants), we create
another variant, e.g., V03 - differences - and activate this by selecting its
name from the list box in the symbol bar.
In the dialog Options|Building Noise Map|Arithmetic/actual Variant
we enter the following:
LPT1 - LPT2
Click the button Perform Calculation. The button Apply displays the re-
sult immediately without closing the dialog. Otherwise close the dialog by
clicking the OK button.
Manual
2
Level-Difference-Map for Building Noise
We can enter LPT01 or just LPT1.
* In this example the variant V03 will be overwritten if we calculate all

variants again. The calculation of the level differences must be
refreshed. The map of level differences for buildings is always dis-
played in the activated variant and therefore overwrites the existing
result.
The functions, which you can use in the Arithmetic box, are identical with
those from the Result Table.
Function and Operators see Chapter 2.6
Manual
Chapter 9 Obstacles
The Cylinder 9.4 1
9.4 The Cylinder

A Cylinder can - like a building - shield and/or reflect. It is defined with
two points.
• The first point defines the central point and
• the second point the radius through its distance to the first point.
The height is entered, as customary, in the edit dialog under Geometry
(see Chapter 10.4).
Line source
Source
Immission
point
Reflecting cylilnder
Rays reflected by the cylinder Lines of equal sound levels
Sources inside the cylinder are shielded because the walls are considered
barriers. This standard effect can be switch off by activating the option
Sources in Buildings/Cylinder do not shield (see Chapter 12.4.9).
Manual
2
The Cylinder
Manual
Chapter 9 Obstacles
The Barriers 9.5 1
9.5 The Barriers

Reflections at the outer surfaces of a barrier are taken into account accord-
ing to the mirror sound source method if
1. a reflection > 0 is selected (see Chapter 12.4.8) and
2. a barrier is defined as reflecting by entering a Reflection Loss or,
alternatively, an Absorption Coefficient Alpha in the edit dialog.
The standard setting of a barrier is No Reflection. But we can define a Re-
flection Loss or an Absorption Coefficient Alpha for the left and/or right
side of a barrier. Left and right refer to the view from the inital point to the
final point of a barrier’s polygon points.
Strict provisions are made by RLS-90 /9/ concerning the neglecting of lat-
eral diffraction and of ground attenuation in the calculation of the shield-
ing effect. For all other sources you may define on the tab 9
Calculation|Configuration|Industry (see Chapter 12.4.9) to what extent
lateral diffraction shall be taken into account and, if necessary, you may
modify the barrier coefficients.
See also
the following chapter 9.5.1 The floating Barrier and
chapter 9.7.1 Automatically Optimize Noise Barriers
Manual
2
The Barriers
Manual
Chapter 9.5 The Barriers
The floating Barrier 9.5.1 1
9.5.1 The floating Barrier
The Cadna object Barrier was modified to also include barriers on bridg-
es.
The Floating Barrier option is available in the edit dialog Barrier. If this
option is activated, the height of the barrier from its bottom to top edges
can be entered in the z dimension box, in addition to the height specified in
the Geometry dialog. If the height of the barrier (i. e., the relative height
of its top edge) is, e. g., 10 m, and 3 m have been entered as its
z dimension, the bottom edge is 7 m above the ground.
Such a barrier whose bottom edge does not rest on the ground has the fol-
lowing properties:
1. The shielding effect is calculated as customary for each ray hitting
the actual barrier surface, considering all three propagation paths 9
(over, under and laterally around the barrier), if necessary.
2. Rays passing underneath the barrier’s edge are not attenuated. This
effect is therefore calculated correctly.
3. Diffraction around the bottom edge is – currently – not taken into
account.
4. Reflections of rays hitting the barrier’s surface are calculated accor-
ding to the principle of mirror image source, if necessary. This allows
you tocalculate the increase in level caused by, e. g., large indicator
boards and similar items.
) If a barrier is installed on a bridge (see below), the height of the bar-

rier section on the bridge must be entered as either
- the height of the top edge above the base plate of the bridge, and
the Building Height button in the Geometry dialog must be
activated - that means 3 m in our example - and the same value
must be entered for the z dimension after Floating Barrier has
been activated, or
Manual
2
9.5.1 Chapter 9.5 The Barriers
The floating Barrier
- the height of the top edge as an absolute value – thus 13 m in

our example. The z dimension remains the same (3 m).
* In both cases, further polygon points must be inserted (see Chapter

5.4.1) for the barrier where it intersects contour lines.
The barrier is calculated correctly in both cases.
Interpolate height of contour li

first point 10 m, last point 0 m
10-m
contour line
Bridge
First point
2 additional polygon points Barrier on bridge

0-m contour line
9
Inserting a barrier on a bridge
Bridge.cna ) In the two dialogs below enter the height of a reflecting barrier as 3 m
above bridge level .
3-m-high barrier on a bridge in the 3-D front view
Manual
The floating Barrier 9.5.1 3
Activate Floating Barrier in the edit dialog Specify the barrier height above the 9
bridge by selecting the building roof
option.
If the cross-section view of the noise map is calculated, the level distribu-
tion is as illustrated below. The distortion of the lines of an equal sound
level in the top right hemisphere - which is due to the reflection at the bar-
rier - and the shielding effect of the 3-m-high barrier on the left side of the
bridge - can be clearly seen.
Sound level distribution in a vertical plane for a road on a bridge with a barrier
Manual
4
The floating Barrier
Manual
Barrier with Cantilever 9.5.2 1
9.5.2 Barrier with Cantilever
Also barriers with cantilevers can be constructed and calculated in

CadnaA. In this case we activate the option Cantilever and insert a corre-
sponding value for the cantilever horizontal and vertical.
The barrier height in the dialog Geometry is, as with the upright barriers,
the height of the defracting upper edge.
If the barrier’s height is specified as 3 m in the dialog Geometry and the

cantilever horizontal and vertical as 1 m, each a barrier is constructed as
displayed in the following image.
By selecting left or right the cantilever points to the corresponding side
according to the first polygon point entered when looking toward the final
polygon point. The cantilever is displayed graphically as a dotted line.
Manual
2
Barrier with Cantilever
Barrier with cantilever displayed in 3D front view
Barrier with cantilever in 3D special view
Manual
Barrier with Cantilever 9.5.2 3
* The slope area of the cantilever is supposed to be completely

absorbed in each case.
Manual
4
Barrier with Cantilever
Manual
Chapter 9 Obstacles
The Bridge 9.6 1
9.6 The Bridge

The object type "Bridge" considerably extends the modelling capacities,
particularly with respect to road-traffic and railway noise.
CADNA A's 3-D view of a bridge
* The CadnaA bridge is a horizontal slab with a closed polygon as its

borderline. All sound rays not hitting the bridge remain unaffected
by it.
* If a source lies above the bridge level and a direct sound ray inter-
sects the slab, the shielding by the slab (edges) will be calculated for
receiver points not directly under the bridge-slab.
* For sound rays from sources lying below the bridge, which, on their
path to receiver points above the bridge, intersect the slab, the shield-
ing effect is also calculated considering the top edge of the bridge as
the diffracting edge.
Manual
2
The Bridge
* Diffraction to the space below the bridge is not considered – results

under the bridge are irrelevant!
* For the time being, the bridge-slab is always a plane and parallel to
the reference plane, regardless of the contour of the terrain.
* The height is always that of the first point (accessible via the Geo-
metry dialog, or directly via Tables|Obstacles|Bridge). Heights
entered for the other corner points in the Geometry dialog are irrele-
vant. (The currently used standard dialog for the entry of polygon
lines will be adapted for bridges at a later point in time.)
* When objects on the bridge-slab are to be allocated a height, the

slab is regarded as a building roof – which means that you can
directly enter the height above the level of the bridge-slab in the Geo-
9 metry dialog after activating the Building Roof option.
* In the sectional view, the bridge-slab is not represented (for the time
being).
This means that road constructions of this kind can be correctly consid-
ered acoustically. The sound at ground level resulting from a road or a rail-
way on a bridge nearby are calculated correctly and directly by
considering diffraction around the edges of the bridge.
* Rays passing below the bridge, which, for a bridged gap in an

embankment, result in sound sources on one side of the embankment
and cause a sound on the other side, are considered automatically
(see example "Bridged Gap in an Embankment").
Thanks to an extension of the definition of barriers, even barriers on a
bridge can be calculated correctly (see Chapter 9.5.1 "The floating Barri-
er").
See also self-screening of Roads chapter 8.9.
Manual
Chapter 9.6 The Bridge
Entering a Bridge 9.6.1 1
9.6.1 Entering a Bridge
We recommend you enter all coordinates from the keyboard to be able to

follow this example best.
Click the pertinent toolbox icon and enter the x and y coordinates in pairs
on the dialog serving to enter a point. This dialog opens as soon as you
have typed the first number. Close the dialog by clicking OK, then type
the necessary numbers.
To be able to view your entries, set the scale to 1:1,000, and drag the right
scroll box downwards, and the bottom scroll box to the left, as required.
Save this practice file, if you wish to work through the following exam-
ples.
) Click the bridge icon on the toolbox. 9
) Enter the co-ordinates 50/50, 250/50, 250/70 and 50/70. The bridge is
drawn as a rectangular closed polygon.
) Open the edit dialog by double-clicking its borderline, and enter a

height of 10 m relative in the Geometry dialog.
Edit dialog for a bridge object
Manual
2
9.6.1 Chapter 9.6 The Bridge
Entering a Bridge
9
Geometry dialog
) Furthermore, enter a point source at 150/30/1 with a sound power

level of 100 dB, and a
) calculation area with the co-ordinates 35/15, 280/15, 280/150, and

35/150.
) Under Grid|Specifications, enter an receiver point spacing of 2 m

and a height of 5 m.
) Calculate the grid.
The model entered in the 3-D frontal view. (Options

menu)
The point source lies below the bridge.
Manual
Entering a Bridge 9.6.1 3
After the calculation, the representation of lines with same sound levels in Bridge1.cna
steps of 1 dB should be similar to the following illustration.
Calculation area
Bridge
Source
The lines of equal sound level demonstrate the passing of rays below the bridge.
9
As the source and receiver point grids lie below the bridge-slab, the result-
ing graphics are those typical of free sound propagation.
) Now change the height of the source to 15 m so it lies above the

bridge level.
The model entered in the 3-D frontal view. (Options

menu) The point source lies above the bridge.
After the calculation, the level distribution should show the shielding ef- Bridge2.cna
fect of the bridge slab as in the following illustration.
Manual
4
Entering a Bridge
Calculation area
Bridge
Source
Level distribution on the ground when the point source lies above the bridge level
9
Below you will find some important notes on the proper handling of this
object.
* In practice, ramps and other passages should be defined by contour

lines on both sides of the bridge, and point 1 of the bridge-slab
should "rest" on ground level (relative height = 0). The road section
on the bridge is then specified so as to have two additional points not
lying on the bridge slab and at a relative height of 0 at the contour
line level. Remember: CadnaA always interpolates heights between
points.
Manual
Example of a Street bridge elevated by two embankments 9.6.2 1
9.6.2 Example of a Street bridge elevated

by two embankments
Now we model a gap in an embankment below an existing bridge. If nec- Bridge2.cna

essary, edit the limits (Options menu) for the following example (bottom
left corner x = -100). Switch off the representation of the grid (Grid|Ap-
pearance|No Grid).
) Use the contour line icon to draw a rectangle lying at a height of 10 m
around the first section of the bridge. If right angles are desired, use
the SHIFT key. Start by drawing the longer side of the rectangle.
) Upon completion, copy this rectangular contour line and move it to

the end of the bridge.
10-m
contour line
9
Bridge
10-m contour lines around the beginning and end of a bridge.
) Enter two more contour lines adjoining the edges of the rectangular
contour lines, and activate Interpolate Height From First and Last
Points, first point at 10 m, last point at 0 m. (Use the Copy feature in
combination with the CTRL key!)
Interpolate height of contour line
first point 10 m, last point 0 m
10-m
contour line
Bridge
First point
Contour lines adjoining rectangular contour lines
Manual
2
Example of a Street bridge elevated by two embankments
) To finalise the gap in the embankment, you need one more 0-m con-
tour line to describe the base of the embankment. Enter this as illust-
rated below.
Interpolate height of contour line
first point10 m, last point 0 m
10-m
contour line
Bridge
First point
0-m contour line

Point Source
Example of a bridged gap in an embankment
In the 3-D frontal view, the model should look similar to the illustration
9 below.
3-D frontal view
Manual
Example of a Street bridge elevated by two embankments 9.6.2 3
3-D isometric view

9
) Now draw a road over the bridge. Its relative height should be 0 m.
Enter a standard cross section, such as b2.
) If the road over the bridge only has a first and last point, it will
remain at a height of 0 m which means it does not lie on the bridge.
You can easily check this on the 3-D frontal view. Although undesi-
red, this interpolation by CadnaA is correct, because interpolations
of heights can only be performed between the existing points. In this
case, there are two points (first and last points) at a height of 0 m.
Consequently, it is necessary to enter more points for the road.
) Specify two more points at each end of the road. At each end, place
one point inside the 10-m rectangular contour lines and one just out-
side between the two parallel contour lines with their first points at a
height of 10 m. To this end, select the road in the edit mode, hold the
CTRL key down (the mouse pointer drags along a plus sign) and click
the road at the desired location.
Manual
4
Example of a Street bridge elevated by two embankments
Bridge.cna The road now correctly bridges the gap in the embankment, as illustrated
below (see also chapter 10.3 Fit Objects to DTM or DTM to Objects).
Two more points for the road were entered on each side of
the bridge, one inside the rectangular contour-line, and
one just outside.
* Finally, please note that the bridge object was developed to allow the
correct and guideline-compliant calculation of road-traffic and rail-
way noise taking into account the passing of rays below the bridge
and the shielding of the noise from above. As no complete three-
dimensional barrier calculation is performed, the object should be
used for this purpose only and should not be combined with arbitrary
other objects.
Manual
Chapter 9 Obstacles
Embankment 9.7 1
9.7 Embankment
An embankment with crest of a specified width has a shielding effect due
to diffraction around its two top edges. For the calculation of the insertion
loss DE, these two edges are considered as one non-reflecting double barri-
er. In the sectional view (see Chapter 13.12), the embankment is therefore
represented by these two barriers.
Display of the embankment’s cross section

9
There are two ways to insert an embankment:
1. Manual insertion using the toolbox icon, or
2. using the Parallel Object command from the context menu (see Chap-
ter 5.7.13).
Using the toolbox icon:
) Click the toolbox icon,
) enter the line for the base of the embankment.
) In the edit mode, double-click the base line to open the edit dialog.
Manual
2
Embankment
) Enter the appropriate parameters.
Upon closing the dialog by clicking OK, the embankment is shown with
its slope.
Crest
Slope
2-D view of the embankment

relative height The relative height in the dialog Embankment describes the upper edge
of the embankment and the height in the Geometry dialog the height of
the base.
Manual
Chapter 9 Obstacles
Embankment 9.7 3
If the slope is positive, the sloped side will be drawn to the right, as seen Slope
along the base line in the direction of insertion, otherwise to its left.
The Parallel Object command from the context menu allows you to insert
an embankment running parallel to a road by specifying the distance.
(see also chapter 9.7.1 Automatically Optimize Noise Barriers)
Manual
4
Embankment
Manual
Chapter 9.7 Embankment
Automatically Optimize Noise Barriers 9.7.1 1
9.7.1 Automatically Optimize Noise Barriers
CadnaA is able to determine autonomously the required height of a noise

protection wall/barrier which is needed to obey given maximum levels by
means of iterative calculation.
* Because of the object’s structure, for such an optimization we have to

use the object Embankment and n o t the object Barrier.
The following simple example shows the course of events:
Road with a Noise Barrier and a Receiver Point
The represented road exceeds the permitted value at the receiver point.
Therefore a noise barrier shall be constructed in the given position in such
a way that the permitted value is not exceeded.
* To perform an optimizing calculation it is absolutely necessary to

assign the relevant maximum value as Standard Level (dBA) to the
receiver points. It is of no significance if you enter the maximum
value directly or have it determined out of the type of land use. (In
that case, do not forget to insert an area of Designated Land Use, see
Chapter 11.4)
Manual
2
9.7.1 Chapter 9.7 Embankment
Automatically Optimize Noise Barriers
To perform an optimizing calculation the relevant

maximum value must be assigned to the receiver
points
9
The object Embankment must be given
• a slope of 1:0 and
• a top width of 0
* Do not enter a value for height - this is what CadnaA is supposed to

determine.
To opitmize the height of the Noise Barrier automatically

in the edit dialog Embankment all values have to be
zero.
Manual
In the next step we subdivide the noise barrier with the Break into Pieces
command from the context menu of the Embankment. In the example 10
sections of identical size have been formed. Now select an appropriate
view in the menu Options|3-D-View, e.g., isometric.
Options|3-D-View|Isometric
9
In the symbol bar of this dialog you can find the symbol Optimize Barri-
er.
After clicking, the parameter dialog will open and we can define our strat-
egy of optimization.
Settings A Settings B
Both dialogs show examples for possible settings.
Manual
4
In the upper text box a pattern similar to the group definition can be en-
tered by which only the walls with identical ID codes will be integrated
into the optimizing calculation. On the left hand side only the activated
Embankments are integrated, on the right hand side only the Embank-
ments with the string „Barrier“ plus two additional characters.
With every step of the calculation a barrier section is raised by the value
given in „element height“. The longer the calculation takes the shorter the
subdivided elements are and the lower the value of the element’s height is.
The result of multiplying Element height by Maximum number of ele-
ments is the upper limit for the height of the barrier.
In the following combo box you can select the name „area“ or enter any
other name, e.g., the product name of a noise barrier. In the first case the
value 1, in the four subsequent boxes, will remain unchanged and optimi-
zation is executed in a way that the entire surface of the noise protection
9 wall is minimized. With the setting A the further sample calculation is ex-
ecuted.
The setting B in the right figure takes into consideration the fact that the
costs per square-meter can depend on the height of the noise barrier be-
cause costs for a foundation have to be apportioned and because, with the
increasing height of the wall, greater wind pressures will have to be with-
stood. Optimizing is then executed in a way that will minimize the total
cost.
Please note that the combo box cost/m² must not be left without an entry.
The cost schedule of a noise barrier can be saved/deleted with the corre-
sponding buttons. A saved cost schedule, valid for all projects, will be at
your disposal in the combo box.
After the setting A has been confirmed, the optimizing calculation will be-
gin.
Manual
Subdivision of the noise barrier into sections of 10m

each - Calculation with the setting B
9
An element width of 3m leads to the following representation:
Subdivision of the noise barrier into sections of 3m

each - Calculation with setting A
CadnaA first checks if the maximum value (Standard Level (dBA)) has
been exceeded at the maximum height of all wall elements - in this case a
Manual
6
message box will pop up. After the corresponding modification of the con-
figuration the calculation will be restarted.
* Please note that with optimizing barriers all settings of the program
will be considered. This is valid for projection, reflexion and consid-
eration of all activated elements. Owing to the large number of steps
of calculation it is always advisable to deactivate all objects that have
no effect on the result. Another alternative is to cut the relevant part
out of the entire project - the optimized wall will then be imported
into the project.
In the following example a noise barrier will be positioned in the given lo-
OptimizeBarrier- cation in front of a gap in a way that a maximum value, given for the re-
Gap.cna
ceiver point behind the gap, can be maintained.
Initial Situation
In this case the wall is subdivided into 42 elements with a width of 1 m.

This leads to a contour of the upper edge of the wall as shown in the graph-
ic below. Calculation was executed strictly according to RLS90 with
buildings considered as non-reflecting.
Optimizing a barrier with calculation strictly according to RLS90
Manual
Now calculation is repeated with builidings considered as reflecting, and

integration of reflexions up to the 5th order are included. Inclination will
also be considered in deviation from the regulations of RLS90. This is ap-
propriate because the represented situation can only be dealt with insuffi-
ciently by following the RLS90. As the result shows, a much higher wall
would be necessary to meet this non-trivial situation.
Optimizing a barrier with a 5th order reflexion
With the optimization of barriers CadnaA is able to perform an efficient

positioning of noise protection facilities. 9
Manual
8
Manual
Chapter 9 Obstacles
Areas with Specified Ground Absorption 9.8 1
9.8 Areas with Specified Ground

Absorption
By default, CadnaA calculates point, line, and area sources on the basis of
the frequency-independent excess attenuation due to the effects of the
ground and meteorological effects as specified in the guideline VDI 2714 /
16/, sub-clause 6.3. It is to the disadvantage of this method that special
sound propagation conditions such as the considerably enhanced sound
propagation over, e. g., reflecting water surfaces or concrete-sealed indus-
trial courts is not taken into account.
In such cases, it is possible to apply the calculation method described in
VDI 2714, Annex D, or in ISO 9613–2 /21/.
This method is frequency-dependent. The levels in the individual frequen- Frequency-dependent
cy bands are affected to different extents. For the application of this meth- Calculation
od, CadnaA therefore requires: 9
) frequency spectra to be entered for the emissions of sound sources

instead of the mere A-weighted sound power levels.
) frequency-dependent calculation must to be selected in the edit dia-

log of the source.
) the option Calculation|Configuration|Industry|Ground

Attenuation Spectral must to be activated.
) Running CadnaA and inserting a point source near the left border of
the screen; entering as its sound power level PWL, a value of
100 dB(A). Then
) inserting an receiver point near the right border of the screen.
) Calculating the level by clicking the calculator icon; recording the

noise level displayed on the edit dialog receiver point. (In our
example, this level was 44.1 dB(A)).
Manual
2
Areas with Specified Ground Absorption
9
Calculation configuration for ground attenuation in fre-
quency bands and ground absorption 0
) Under Calculation|Configuration|Industry activate Ground Atte-

nuation in Frequency Bands. The default value of 1 for the ground
absorption G is not edited.
) When the dialog is closed, a new calculation must be given the same
level as the first one. This is not remarkable because only an A-
weighted level of sound power has been entered for the source so far,
meaning its spectrum is not known.
) Now double-click the point source to open its edit dialog and select
Spectrum in the Type box. Even if nothing is entered, CadnaA now
assumes the specified form of the spectrum and thus identical levels
for each band of A-weighted spectrum. For the calculation, the spect-
rum is normalised to the sound power level entered before, i. e.,
100 dB(A).
Manual
Chapter 9 Obstacles
Areas with Specified Ground Absorption 9.8 3
A new calculation is now performed on the basis of the data entered with
frequency-dependent ground attenuation. Compare the values before and
after.
) Now enter in the Calculation|Configuration|Industry a ground

attenuation of G=0 for sound-reflecting ground - the calculation
results in a level higher than the first level.
Beside this global specification of the ground absorption, which refers to
the entire project, individual areas may be assigned specific absorption co-
efficients. Upon clicking the Ground Absorption icon on the toolbox, en-
ter the borderlines of the area. The ground absorption is specified in the
edit dialog (opened by double-clicking on the borderline of the area). For
areas to which no such area has been assigned, the global settings as de-
fined under Calculation|Configuration will apply.
Try, for example, to enter sound propagation conditions for a reflecting 9
water surface within a lawn area by entering G = 1 for the global calcula-
tion configuration, and G = 0 for the area of the water surface. With an ap-
propriate calculation area, the grid calculation will yield the level
distribution as illustrated below.
Manual
4
Areas with Specified Ground Absorption
Level distribution calculated with frequency-dependent

ground attenuation. The source is located close to an area
covered by water.
If overlapping areas are entered, the one entered last (so-to-say the one on
top) will always be taken to apply in the overlapping area. Under Op-
tions|Appearance, such areas with specified ground absorption can be as-
signed any colour, such as an opaque blue for the lake in our example.
A list of these entered areas can be found under Tables|Obstacles|
Ground Absorption.
Manual
Chapter 9 Obstacles
The Foliage and Built-Up Areas 9.9 1
9.9 The Foliage and Built-Up Areas
A built-up area is defined by the closed polygon forming its borderline. It Built-Up Areas
is taken into account in the calculation according to VDI. If only traffic 9.9
noise is to be calculated strictly according to RLS-90 or strictly according
to Schall03 /8/, this entry has no effect on the calculation.
A foliage area is defined by the closed polygon forming its borderline. It is Foliage
taken into account in the calculation according to VDI and Schall03. If 9.9
only road-traffic noise is to be calculated in accordance with RLS-90, this
entry has no effect on the calculation.
Manual
2
The Foliage and Built-Up Areas
Manual
Chapter 9 Obstacles
3D-Reflector 9.10 1
9.10 3D-Reflector
The object 3D-Reflector models a plane reflector freely orientated in
space. The 3D-reflector is a screening surface where the shortest deviation 3D-Reflector
path between source-receiver governs the screening effect. Lateral scree-
ning and 1st order reflections are considered. In addition, individual edges
of the 3D-reflector can be excluded from the calculation of lateral scree-
ning (see paragraph Exclude Edges). This option allows to restrict the
screening at an edge e.g. at adjoining buildings.
The reflector's surface has to be plane. When polygon points not forming a
plane have been entered a quadratic averaging is used to generate a plane
surface. However, in these cases the reflector will be still displayed as en-
tered.
If reflections are entered reflections at boundary surfaces of barriers will
be taken into account according to the mirror sound source method. Strict 9
provisions are made by RLS-90 concerning the neglecting of lateral dif-
fraction and of ground attenuation in the calculation of the shielding effect.
For all other sources it may be defined under Calculation|Configuration|In-
dustry to what extent lateral diffraction shall be taken into account, and the
barrier coefficients may be modified/specified.
When clicking on button "Exclude Edges" on dialog 3D-Reflector a dialog Exclude Edges 9.10.0
box opens allowing to mark reflector edges not to be taken into account for
the calculation of diffraction.
To exclude an edge, click once on the name of the edge in the upper part of
the dialog, e.g., E01. Marked identifiers exclude the corresponding edge
from a calculation of diffraction. In the graphic representation, in the lo-
wer part of the dialog, the currently marked edge is marked by a thick
black line. If the black dot of a edge is faded it indicates the deactivation of
this edge. If you click again on the name of an edge it will again be inclu-
ded in the calculation. In this case the black dot is visible again.
The function is restricted to max. 32 edges. If a 3D-reflector has more then
32 edges further edges cannot be excluded.
Manual
2
3D-Reflector
see also Technical-Notes:

TN02012004_Special_Objects.pdf
3D_reflector_e.pdf
Manual
Manual CadnaA
Chapter 10 Topography
Chapter 5 Basics 5
Chapter 6 Import 6
Chapter 8 Sources 8
Examples Tutorial
Manual
2 Chapter 10 Topography
10
Manual
Contents 10.1 1
10.1 Contents
10.2 General Information for Working with
Uneven Terrain in CadnaA
10.3 Fit Objects to DTM or
DTM to Objects
10.3.1 Point-like Objects
10.3.2 The Line-like Objects
10.3.3 Two-Dimensional Objects 10
10.3.4 Three-dimensional Objects
10.4 The Object’s Geometry

10.5 Contour Lines
10.6 Fault Lines
10.7 Height Points
10.7.1 Generate Contour Lines from Height Points
10.8 Display Ground Height
Manual
2
10.1 Chapter 10 Topography
Contents
10
Manual
General Information for Working with Uneven Terrain in CadnaA 10.2 1
10.2 General Information for Working with

Uneven Terrain in CadnaA
The contour of the terrain has two major effects on the calculation of
sound propagation.
1. It determines the heights of sources, shielding objects, and receiver
points, if the heights of these have been entered as relative values.
For short distances, this, in turn, may affect the length of the sound
path, thus the propagation loss, the path length difference around the
barrier, and, consequently, the insertion loss.
2. The average height of the sound ray, thus the ground attenuation, is
determined from the contour of the terrain.
Any program calculating immission must approximately calculate the
heights of the terrain from the input information available. Modelling the
terrain completely - using, e. g., an overall system of contour lines in fine
steps - is often ruled out because data is missing and would lead to a con- 10
siderable increase in calculation times.
Therefore, the most effective method with regard to data input is to use
only as much detail in the height information as is needed, from the acous-
tic point of view, taking into account the two above-mentioned effects.
This is particularly true where data collection and input require time and,
consequently, expenses. It does not apply where existing data can be im-
ported. In this case, it may become necessary to reduce the amount of data
by Simplifying the Geometry (see Chapter 5.7.11).
Being somewhat familiar with the program-internal procedures will help
you to determine the degree of detail needed and reasonable. Therefore,
we will give you a brief description of how contour-line information is
processed by CadnaA.
For each contour line and fault of line, the program internally generates a
barrier with this line as its top edge and which is perpendicular to the refer-
ence plane with an absolute height of 0.
Manual
2
General Information for Working with Uneven Terrain in CadnaA
Where the height of an object has been given as a relative value, i. e., as
height above the ground, the program calculates, prior to the actual calcu-
lation of propagation , the absolute height of the terrain at the object base -
or the height of the terrain above the reference plane - for the polygon
points determining the object height. This is achieved by evaluating the in-
formation on the nearest contour lines.
This evaluation is done for
• the first point (corner entered first) of closed polygon lines defining
buildings
• each point entered for open polygon lines defining roads, and for gen-
eral line sources, barriers, and similar objects
• each point entered for closed polygon lines defining parking lots, gen-
eral area sources, and similar objects.
In the calculation of propagation, the sound ray from the source point to
the receiver point intersects the horizontal projections of all contour lines
10
and fault lines and any path length difference. Thus the shielding effect of
the elevated terrain is determined. Furthermore, the height of the sound
ray above the contour lines and fault lines at all intersections along with
the path lengths between these points serve to determine, by numerical in-
tegration, the average height of the sound ray, and from this value, the
ground attenuation. The heights of the terrain at source and receiver point,
determined, if necessary, from the contour lines near these points, are tak-
en into account.
The procedures and program strategies described above lead to the follow-
ing conclusions regarding correct data input.
Manual
Fit Objects to DTM or DTM to Objects 10.3 1
10.3 Fit Objects to DTM1 or

DTM to Objects
CadnaA calculates the heights of objects and of the terrain at the pertinent
polygon points of the objects. For the area in-between, a linear interpola-
tion is performed.
Therefore, the user may have to enter additional points where contour lines
and objects intersect to allow the change in slope of the terrain at such
points to be taken into account.
To evaluate the heights between contour lines with only a few polygon
points you can also insert additional polygon points for the contour lines
automatically in CadnaA. For that, you have two possibilities when execu-
ting the command: either directly at the object’s context menu, this would
affect only that object or its sourrounding terrain, or with the Modify Ob-
ject command and the corresponding Action which would affect the desi-
red objects which you have selected in the dialog (see Chapter 5.8): 10
1. Fit Objects to DTM. This command uses contour lines and edges of
triangulation to fit the object to the surface of the digital terrain
model.
2. Fit DTM to Object. This command changes the whole terrain model
by cutting existing contour lines and inserting new ones.
1. Digital Terrain Model
Manual
2
Fit Objects to DTM or DTM to Objects
An example with the object Road:

The existing DTM in the cross-section view
and in the top view:
10 Exampel:
Fit Objekt to DTM A road on a DTM with only an initial and a final point. Therefore the
object is unable to adjust to the ground..
Top View 3D-Special View
Manual
The road after executing the command in the Context menu|Fit Object to
DTM. Additional polygon points are inserted for the road at the intersec-
tion of the contour lines. Therefore, the object adjusts itself to the ground.
After executing the command Fit DTM to Object the following dialog Example:
appears in which you can set the parameters for the adjustment of the ob- Fit DTM to Object
jects. 10
In this box define the additional width for the ground around the object Width/Additional Width
which shall be located at the same height. CadnaA than inserted parallel
contour lines in the defined distance and deleted them between road and
parallel contour lines.
Because the margin of the Road simbolizes the middle axeses of the outer-
most lanes you have to insert an additional width for the real width of the
road which is taken into account with the half width for each side.
Manual
4
* With open objects like Roads, Railways, Line sources etc., the par-
allel contour lines are placed at the distance of the half value of the
defined additional width; with closed objects like Buildings, Area
sources etc., contour lines are placed around the objects with the
defined value.
10
Top View: 1 Width/Additional Width, 2 Sampling Distance, 3 Distance from Curb
Sampling Distance For the best adaptation on the DTM you can define a distance (box Sam-
pling Distance) in the cross-section of the object in which a base-point
should be placed for the new contour line.
Manual
The Situation after the command Fit DTM to Object has been executed
with the Sampling Distance of 20 m. The parallel contour lines are clearly
visible.
When inputting a slope the resulting angle adjusts the DTM in this area by Slope 1: 10
inserting new base-points of contour lines.
Manual
6
Cross-Section Top View
Situation after executing the com-

mand Fit DTM to Objects with a
Slope 1: 1.50.
10
3D-Special View
Manual
Chapter 10.3 Fit Objects to DTM or DTM to Objects
Point-like Objects 10.3.1 1
10.3.1 Point-like Objects
Point-like objects such as point sources, receiver points and tennis points
of service have three co-ordinates - x to the right, y upwards, and z for the
height - which describe their position. These values are listed in the col-
umns of the pertinent object tables.
The z coordinate can be entered as a relative height, an absolute height, or
the height above the building roof. If a relative height is given, the abso-
lute height z results from the height of the terrain at the position given by
the x and y coordinates of the point plus the relative height entered. If, for
a point, a definite height is to be achieved, it is convenient to enter an ab-
solute height.
10
Manual
2
10.3.1 Chapter 10.3 Fit Objects to DTM or DTM to Objects
Point-like Objects
10
Manual
The Line-like Objects 10.3.2 1
10.3.2 The Line-like Objects
The line-like objects such as line sources, roads, and railways, are defined
by an open polygon line or by a series of points.
The first and last points of the polygon line may have the same, or differ-
ent, heights (relative, absolute, or above the building roof, see Chapter
10.4). The heights of the points inbetween are determined automatically
by linear interpolation. Another alternative is to enter each point of the
polygon line with a different absolute height.
10
Manual
2
The Line-like Objects
10
Manual
Two-Dimensional Objects 10.3.3 1
10.3.3 Two-Dimensional Objects
Two-dimensional objects, such as area sources and parking lots, are de- Two-dimensional
scribed by a closed polygon line or by a series of points. Objects (Excluding
Vertical Ones) 10.3.3
By entering the height of the first point, all points can be assigned the
same height (relative, absolute, or above the building roof). Another alter-
native is to enter each point of the polygon line with a different absolute
height.
Two-dimensional vertical objects such as vertical area sources and barriers Two-dimensional
are defined by an open polygon line or by a series of points describing Vertical Objects 10.3.3
their top edge plus a z dimension describing their bottom edge. The top
and bottom edges are always parallel and have identical horizontal projec-
tions. Refer to "Line-like Objects" above for the entering of the height, or
z coordinate, of the points of the polygon line defining the top edge.
10
Manual
2
Two-Dimensional Objects
10
Manual
Three-dimensional Objects 10.3.4 1
10.3.4 Three-dimensional Objects
Buildings are defined by a closed polygon line or by a series of points de- Buildings
fining their top edge. They always extend from the ground to the top edge
thus defined. Refer to "Two-dimensional Objects (Excluding Vertical
Ones)" above for the entering of the height, or z coordinate, of the points
on the polygon line defining the top edge.
If the height of the building has been given as a relative value, the absolute
height of the top edge results from the height of the terrain at the first point
(corner entered first) plus the relative height of the building.
Cylinders are defined by the position of their centres in the horizontal pro- Cylinders
jections, and also by their radii and heights (relative, absolute, or above the
building roof).
If the height is entered as a relative value, the absolute height of the cylin- 10
der’s top edge is the sum of the height of the terrain at the centre and the
relative height.
Manual
2
Three-dimensional Objects
10
Manual
The Object’s Geometry 10.4 1
10.4 The Object’s Geometry
Any line-like, two-dimensional or three-dimensional object, except cylin- Horizontal Projections

ders, can be forced to be rectangular while entering the defining polygon With Right Angles 10.4
line by positioning the points using the mouse with the SHIFT key pushed
down. If rectangles are to be generated, it is convenient to enter the longer
side first. When clicking the third point to define the shorter side, the
mouse pointer is positioned on the first point, and when clicking again, the
third, longer side is automatically drawn with the correct length. A final
click with the right mouse button suffices to close the rectangle. This pro-
cedure is particularly advisable when inserting buildings having right an-
gles in their horizontal projection.
The geometry dialog shows the coordinates of an object. It is accessible Geometrie

via the Geometry button in the edit dialog. The edit dialog can vary from Dialog 10.4
the displayed dialog of a building depending on the selected object.. 10
Example of geometry dialog
The table of coordinates in the edit dialog can be edited. For that, double- Coordinates
click on the corresponding row. Polygon point 10.4
Manual
2
The Object’s Geometry
x-y-z-Coordinates Depending on the selected options from the list under the table of coordi-
Ground height 10.4 nates you can either edit only the x-y-coordinates and/or the z-height and/
or the ground height.
Cross section/Distance/ Also in the road dialog Geometry you can enter the Standard Cross Sec-
Slope of Roads 10.4 tion (SCS)/Distance of the central axis from both outer lanes and/or the
slope of the road for each polygon point.
If the distance of a lane and/or a slope is entered, CadnaA adjusts the val-
ue for all further polygon points until a new input ensues.
The corresponding fields of the table remain empty. A new value is en-
tered only if a value changes. Consequently for the calculation the next
above entered value will be considered for an empty table field in the col-
umns Distance and Slope.
More Options Depending on the selcted option from the list, the following parameters in
the coordinate table are possible:
10
Interpolate from • Only the x- and y-coordinates are editable in the table of coordinates.
First/Last Point 10.4
• Enter the heights, or z co-ordinates of the first and, if necessary, last
point. For that mark the identically named option.
After a calculation - if an initial and final height, for the First and Last
point, was entered - the interpolated heights on each point are dis-
played in the table of coordinates.
If the height is equal for each point of an object then the checkbox of
the Last Point should be deactivated. The initial height of the First
Point will be assigned to the whole object (standard setting).
• With the following options determine the kind of height by activating
its check box.
relative Height 10.4 Height, in metres (m), above ground. The absolute height of the ground
can be different for different locations due to contour lines, fault lines, and
the default height specified under Calculation Configuration.
Manual
The absolute Height is the height above a reference plane, usually mean absolute Height 10.4
see level (M.S.L.)
This option allows you to directly enter the height above the roof of a Roof 10.4
building in order to facilitate the specification of the height for external
sound sources on the roof of the building. If the source lies within the hor-
izontal projection of the building, its height will be calculated as the sum
of the height of the building and the height above the roof specified here.
If different heights for polygon points are assigned to a building, the height
for that object will be calculated with the first height point of the building.
An area source, e.g., placed within the horizontal projection of a building
and whose height is assigned to the option "Roof" will have a uniform
height even if the heights of the polygon points are different. You may
have to input the height on each point directly by using the option "abso-
lute height at every point".
In CadnaA buildings are modelled like "open boxes" without a roof. K0 10.4.0 10
Therefore K0 will be calculated according to the height above the digital
terrain modell for point-, line- and area sources placed within the horizon-
tal projection of the building.
This option may also be activated for Floating barriers (see Chapter
9.5.1) on bridges. The height of the top edge of a barrier then results from
the bridge height plus the specified height above the building’s roof.
If this option is activated, the z co-ordinate can be specified individually Enter Absolute Height
for every point. The given value of z is the absolute height of the object in at Every Point 10.4
this case.
To this end, double-click on the relevant row in the coordinate table of the
edit dialog. The edit dialog polygon point appears. When the desired z co-
ordinate has been entered, by clicking the arrow buttons, or pressing
ALT+SHIFT+> or ALT+SHIFT+<, you will be taken to the next or previous
set of coordinates, respectively, without leaving this window.
Manual
4
The advantage of using the hotkeys is that the cell currently selected will
remain selected while switching, and that the corresponding entry will be
overwritten when you enter a new value. This procedure allows you to eas-
ily enter all heights for a polygon line one after the other.
unknown Heights 10.4 Usually, to correctly model the course of a polygon, you will also have to
enter polygon points whose heights are unknown and which would have to
be interpolated. This task can be performed by CadnaA as well.
If the absolute height of some points is unknown, the value of the height is
deleted for these points. The default height is 0 m. Just press the DEL key
to delete it (the box is now empty). When the dialog is closed, CadnaA up-
dates the value by interpolation. You can check the interpolated values by
opening the dialog again.
Absolute Height/Ground With the option absolute Height/Ground at every Point we can enter the
at every point 10.4 ground height for each point additionally.
10 All other possibilities are the same as described above for Enter Absolute
Height at Every Point.
See also Chapter 5.7 paragraph "Example: change height from absolute to
relative and vice- versa"
Reference Point 10.4.0 CadnaA has an internal list of reference points which is helpful to transmit
coordinates automatically, e.g. for transformation of objects or for calibra-
tion of bitmaps. Particular if you have big coordinates you could produce
mistakes while entering values via the keyboard yourself. With the list of
reference points you can easily transmit coordinate into the corresponding
fields automatically.
Example: Calibrate a bitmap using reference points without entering a single coordi-
nate.
Demo2.cna ) Therefore open the file Demo2.cna on your CD-Rom in the directory
SAMPLES. This is a copy of the file Demo1.cna in which originally
a bitmap is contained. But you will calibrate a bitmap yourself now.
Manual
To calibrate the bitmap as accurate as possible you should choose four re-
ference points in your opened file. Therefore
) double-click an object which coordinates shall be the first reference

point. Open its Geometry dialog and double-click the corresponding
data record of the coordinates.
In this example you must remember the building’s corner because
subsequently you have to click on the corresponding corner in the
bitmap for the first reference point if you calibrate the bitmap.
10
) Click on the buttom RefPoint - the following dialog opens.
Manual
6
As you can see the coordinates of your reference point is entered

automatically in the corresponding fields New Reference Point. If
you now want to use it - like in our example - as first reference point
you have to activate the pertinent option Reference Point 1:.
) Proceed with the other three reference points analogously. You only
10 have to activate the pertinent option for the respective coordinates.
Therefore for the next reference point the option Reference Point 2:
etc.
If you have defined all four reference points
) insert an arbitrary frame of a bitmap anywhere in your file and open

its edit dialog.
Demo1.bmp ) Click on the card-index icon beside the field File and choose the
bitmap file Demo1.bmp on your CD-Rom in the directory SAMP-
LES. The path and the file name has to be displayed in the field File.
) Afterwards click the button Calibrate Bitmap and activate all four
reference points by clicking the corresponding options. As you can
see all coordinates are entered in the pertinent fields automatically.
Manual
Now if you confirm with OK you will be asked for the individual refer-
ence points by CadnaA which you have to click in the bitmap point by
point.
After clicking the fourth reference point and confirming with OK your bit-
map should now be placed correctly in your file. 10
For further information see Chapter 14 Pictures.
Manual
8
10
Manual
Contour Lines 10.5 1
10.5 Contour Lines

Contour lines and fault lines serve to create a model of the topographical
conditions or of the contour of the terrain. They are entered with absolute
heights.
A contour line allocates to the terrain along these lines a defined height
above the reference plane. The height at any point of the line is specified
as generally described for line-like objects.
The contour of the terrain between the contour lines is interpolated for the
calculation, depending on the settings specified on the Calculation|Con-
figuration|DMT tab.
The topographical conditions or uneven terrain may cause shielding ef-
fects and affect ground attenuation in the propagation calculation. Further-
more, the absolute height of objects whose height has been given as a
relative value is determined by taking into account the height of the terrain
at the base of the object as resulting from contour lines and fault lines.
10
For the calculation of the shielding effects of elevated terrain, contour
lines are treated like the top edges of barriers. Elevations generated by in-
terpolation between the contour lines are not taken into account in this cal-
culation.
The table Contour Lines (Tables menu) only lists the first and last points.
The listed heights are absolute values (see above).
The geometry data of the contour lines can be exported or printed by refer-
ing to the key word #(Table, Hline_GEO) .
Manual
2
Contour Lines
10
Manual
Fault Lines 10.6 1
10.6 Fault Lines

Contour lines and fault lines serve to create a model of topographical con-
ditions or of the contour of a terrain.
A fault line is interpreted as a discontinuity in the terrain surface between
the heights of the terrain defined by the adjacent contour lines or the
heights applying directly to the terrain on both sides.
10
A fault line is defined by a line in the x-and-y plane. The fault lines table
(Tables menu) lists these lines with their automatically generated serial
numbers.
The geometry data of fault lines can be printed or exported using the key
word #(Table, Bruch_GEO) (see Chapter 17.4).
The height of the terrain near fault lines is interpolated arithmetically if the
option Determine Height from Contour Lines is active and is not easily
predictable in the individual case.
Manual
2
Fault Lines
If a specific discontinuity is to be forced, it is always advisable to activate

the option Enter Height at Every Point and to directly assign the z values
to the left and right of the fault line by editing the coordinates table (see
Chapter 10.4).
For the calculation of the shielding effects caused by elevated terrain, fault
linesfault lines are treated like the top edges of barriers, with their heights
as determined by the contour line model.
Elevations generated by interpolation between contour lines and fault lines
are not taken into account in the calculation of the shielding effect.
fault lines are entered as line-like objects. Once the line has been inserted
and double-clicked, the edit line-of-fault dialog opens. You can then enter
the co-ordinates like for any line-like object. (Giving the height is option-
al).
see also Calculation Configuration|DTM tab
10
Manual
Height Points 10.7 1
10.7 Height Points

The topography, i.e., the geographical structure of the ground surface, can
be constructed with Contour Lines, Height Points and Fault lines. Note
that only lines, that means contour lines and fault lines, are considered
screening objects. Although the ground surface constructed with height
points is used to determine the height of objects with relative heights, it
does not influence the average height of a ray above ground (ground atten-
uation!) and is not taken into account as diffracting, except when the op-
tion Triangulation is activated. In this case the height points are
connected by additional lines and these are used in the screening calcula-
tion and for ground attenuation (see Chapter 12.4.7 "DTM Digital Terrain
Model Tab").
With the height points a defined height will be assigned to the ground
above the reference plane at the relevant location. This height will be de-
fined generally as it was for Point Objects .
10
The shape of the ground between the height points will be interpolated in
the calculation according to the Calculation|Configuration.
The uneven surface of ground defined exclusively by height points is not
affected by screening. The absolute height of objects, for which a relative
height has been defined, is calculated according to the ground height re-
sulting from the height point model at the base point of the object.
If Triangulation is not activated, no screening effect will be taken into ac-
count for uneven ground defined only by height points.
After inputting and double-clicking on the Height Point, the dialog opens,
containing edit boxes for the input of coordinates as is usual with point ob-
jects.
Many height points will occupy many memory and therefore your project Use Contour line
file would be very big because height points can also have an ID or a na- as Cluster of
Height Points 10.7.0
me which has to be managed.
Manual
2
Height Points
To save memory you can convert (Modify Object|Convert to|Contour li-

nes) the height points into contour lines which produces a cluster of height
points. A cluster exists of about 1,000 height points which are linked to a
contour line. The contour lines can be converted back again to height
points.
HP.cna Open the file HP.cna on your CD-Rom (Samples|Topography). The file
contains about 4,000 height points.
) From the context menu execute the command Modify Object|Con-

vert to|Contour lines.
) Afterwards open Tables|Obstacles|Contour Lines.
You can see now that in this example only five contour lines exist. If you
click on a datarecord the corresponding contour line will be highlighted.
Delete Height Points 10.7 If the height point information for the digital terrain model is too detailed
10
you can delete them with the command Delete Height Points in Ta-
bles|Miscellaneous. After executing the command and entering a height,
the height points are deleted which deviate from each other less then the
defined height. By that, the height point model will be reduced according-
ly.
(see Chapter 10.7.1 Generate Contour Lines from Height points.)
Import Ascii-File as If you get an Ascii-file with x-y-z-coordinates which symbolize Height
Height Points 10.7 Points you could either import this file via ODBC interface (see Chapter
6.5) or with the function File|Import|Import format:ASCII-POLY. The
following describes the import via File|Import.
In both cases the Ascii-file should have three columns with column hea-
ders e.g. x, y and z and the columns should be separated by TAB.
Manual
Height Points 10.7 3
Ascii-file separated with TAB
If you import this file with File|Import|Import Format: ASCII-POLY

you get all points joined to a line, as Aux. Polygon, with different heights
for each base point.
Click with the RIGHT mouse button on this line and choose Convert
to|Contour Line from the context menu. Now you have one Contour 10
Line in your file. Again with the RIGHT mouse button convert this Con-
tour Line into individual Height Points.
If you now want to create from the Height Points different Contour Li-
nes then see Chapter 10.7.1 "Generate Contour Lines from Height Points"
Manual
4
Height Points
10
Manual
Chapter 10.7 Height Points
Generate Contour Lines from Height Points 10.7.1 1
10.7.1 Generate Contour Lines from Height Points
In contrast to contour lines height points usually have the disadvantage

that ground attenuation and shielding will not be taken into account in the
calculation of sound propagation (except if you have activated the DTM
Triangulation see Chapter 12.4.7).
To avoid this you can generate contour lines from the height points.
1. First define a grid in the menu Grid|Specification in which the

heights are to be calculated.
2. Click on the icon Show Ground Height.
3. Execute a grid calculation (Grid|Calc. Grid).
* For definition and representation of the lines of equal height the dia-
log boxes of the receiver point’s grid are used analogously. For the
representation of the lines of equal height use also the dialog of the 10
receiver point’s grid (Grid|Appearance). The lines of equal sound
power level are now lines of equal height. You can also use colour
settings in the menu Options.
In the menu Level Range (upper limit, lower limit, class width) you can
define - from which height (lower limit) to which height (upper limit) and
with which height differences (class width) - these lines shall be represent-
ed. If you quit the dialog with OK, you can see which contour lines will be
generated in the next step. Now press ALT+F12 - the represented lines of
equal height are now converted into the object type Contour Line.
Manual
2
10.7.1 Chapter 10.7 Height Points
Generate Contour Lines from Height Points
10
Manual
Display Ground Height 10.8 1
10.8 Display Ground Height

At the individual points of a calculated grid (beside the sound level for the
evaluation parameters) the ground height is also calculated and saved as a
separate value from the contour lines, height points and fault lines as taken
into account from the standard height defined in Calculation|Configura-
tion if necessary.
After the grid calculation beside the coordinates (x/y) and the sound level
(L), the ground height (G) will also be displayed in the status bar at the po-
sition of the mouse cursor.
* You do not need a sound source if you only calculate the ground
height.
If you choose Ground from the evaluation parameter list in the symbol bar 10.8.0
not the sound level is shown longer, but the value of the ground height
will be activated and displayed on the screen equivalent to the settings
made in Grid|Appearence. The Lower and Upper Limit should now be 10
entered, and it should include all current ground height values.
If you activate Line of Equal Sound Level, the contour lines calculated
with interpolation will be displayed.
* Hints for professionals: If you want to generate proper contour lines

in your project just press ALT+F12.
see Chapter 10.7.1 "Generate Contour Lines from Height Points" and 10.7
Height Points: „Use Contour line as Cluster of Height Points“
Manual
2
Display Ground Height
10
Manual
Manual CadnaA
Chapter 11 Immissions
Chapter 5 Basics 5
Chapter 6 Import 6
Chapter 8 Sources 8
Examples Tutorial
Manual
2 Chapter 11 Immissions
11
Manual
Contents 11.1 1
11.1 Contents
11.2 Receiver Points
11.2.1 Utilization - Standard Level - Infringement
11.2.2 Calculation and Presentation of Results for Receiver Points on the Display
11.2.3 Check Consistency
11.2.4 Sound Pressure Level
11.2.5 Partial Levels
11.2.6 Floors
11.3 Designation of Land Use

11
11.4 Land Use
11.5 Grid of Receiver Points
11.5.1 Grid Specification
11.5.2 Appearance of Grid
11.5.3 Vertical Receiver Grid
11.5.4 Calculating a Grid
11.5.5 Grid Arithmetic
11.5.6 Creating a Grid of Receiver Points
from Iso-dB-lines
Manual
2
11.1 Chapter 11 Immissions
Contents
11.6 CadnaA Option XL

11.6.1 Noise Maps and their Evaluation
with CadnaA
11.6.2 Conflict Maps
11.6.3 Evaluation
11.6.4 Population Density
11.6.5 Closing Buildings
11.6.6 Object-Scan
11.6.7 Monetary Evaluation of Noise according
to BUWAL
11
Manual
Receiver Points 11.2 1
11.2 Receiver Points

A calculation of sound immission can be performed for a grid of points
(see Chapter 11.5) or for points specified individually after clicking the
Pocket Calculator in the icon bar. The icon shown above serves to insert
single receiver points at the desired position in the project.
As opposed to receiver points in a grid you can save all intermediate val-
ues for the individually placed receiver points (see chapter 12.6 Calcula-
tion Protocol).
You also can display the sound rays of the corresponding order of reflec- Generate
tion (see Chapter 12.3). Therefore activate the option Generate Rays in Rays 11.2.0
the edit dialog of the receiver point. The rays are deleted if you calculate
again with deactivated option Generate Rays.
To allocate a receiver point with the same distance to a building, you can Allocating a receiver
activate the Object Snap in the menu Options. The receiver points will point to a building 11.2.0
then be placed in front of the building at the defined distance from the fa-
cade. The default distance is 0,05 m. Therefore no receiver point disap-
11
pears accidently inside the building.
To open the edit dialog Receiver Point click either with the RIGHT mouse
click (insertion mode) on the border of the receiver point or make a dou-
ble-click (in the edit mode).
Manual
2
Receiver Points
Receiver Point Edit Dialog
The presentation and number of calculated values depend on the defined

evaluation parameters (see Chapter 12.4.6).
As default if the results at a receiver point exeeded the defined limiting va-
lues its symbol changed red. Alternative you can choose a different color
11
via a formula (see Chapter 13.6).
Object Geometry see Chapter 10.4
11.2.0
Manual
Chapter 11.2 Receiver Points
Utilization - Standard Level - Infringement 11.2.1 1
11.2.1 Utilization - Standard Level - Infringement
If standard levels are allocated to receiver points after a calculation you

can easily notice in the graphic if the standard level has been exceeded or
not. In the case of infringement the receiver point has been colored red on
default or in a color defined via a formula (see Chapter 13.6 "Object Ap-
pearance").
The standard level can be entered either directly in the pertinent edit field
or can be defined by the kind of utilization (land use) and their allocated
standard levels. Choose one kind of land use from the combo box, which
has been previously entered in the menu Options|Land Use (see Chapter
11.4).
If the checkbox Determine from Areas of Land Use is activated, the
standard level will be determined through a calculation from the kind of
land use inside of whose area the receiver point lies. The standard level is
displayed after the calculation in the corresponding field.
11
Manual
2
11.2.1 Chapter 11.2 Receiver Points
Utilization - Standard Level - Infringement
11
Manual
Calculation and Presentation of Results for Receiver Points on the Display 11.2.2 1
11.2.2 Calculation and Presentation of Results for

Receiver Points on the Display
In CadnaA since release 3.5 for single receiver points can be calculated si-
multaneously up to four evaluation parameters (see Chapter 12.4.6).
Start the calculation of the evaluation parameters for the individual receiv-
er points either in the menu Calculation|Calc or via the icon in the icon
bar.
If you have defined different evaluation parameters after a calculation, the
colors for receiver points may change when a limiting value has been ex-
eeded (see Chapter 13.6 "Object Appearance").
To see the results of the calculated evaluation parameters select its identi-
fier from the symbol bar. Also in Tables|Partial Level you will see the re-
sult of the choosen evaluation parameter.
see also chapter 11.2 paragraph: Allocating a Receiver Point to a building.
11
Manual
2
Calculation and Presentation of Results for Receiver Points on the Display
11
Manual
Check Consistency 11.2.3 1
11.2.3 Check Consistency
If receiver points or point sources lie within a building, CadnaA will draw
your attention to this by opening the dialogue Check for Consistency as
soon as you trigger a calculation.
If required, this allows for modifications before the calculation. 11

Click a line on this window to select the pertinent object in the graphic. If
the object in question lies outside the area visible on the screen, click the
line again while holding sown the SHIFT key. This brings the object on the
screen.
Double-clicking a line opens the pertinent edit dialog.
Click the Cancel button to stop the calculation, or click Continue to pro-
ceed.
Manual
2
Check Consistency
11
Manual
Sound Pressure Level 11.2.4 1
11.2.4 Sound Pressure Level
If a frequency-dependent calculation has been performed, levels will be Level Spectra 11.2.4
displayed for each frequency band. If, for a noise source, only one band is
missing, no spectra will be displayed.
The calculated levels of the evaluation parameters are displayed in the
Level (dBA) box. As time-averaging has already been performed, this will
usually be a rating level (if other corrections needed for the calculation of
the rating level have been taken into account when entering the emission
data.).
11
Results in frequency bands for Day (Ld) and Night (Ln)
The value of infrigiment is displayed in the box Excess Level if the stand- Infringement 11.2.4
ard level has been exceeded for this receiver point.
Manual
2
Sound Pressure Level
11
Manual
Partial Levels 11.2.5 1
11.2.5 Partial Levels
The sound level at a receiver point resulting from a specific sound source
is called a partial level.
Clicking the Partial Levels button on the edit dialog opens the list of par-
tial levels.
11
List of partial levels at a receiver point with all noise

sources and calculated evaluation parameters
The list of partial levels displays, for the specified receiver point, the par-
tial levels of the calculated evaluation parameters - in frequency bands, if
necessary - of all sound sources accounted for in the calculation. The list
of partial levels determines, e. g., the ranking of priorities for effective
noise control measures.
Select the Sort Column (see Chapter 15.2.4) command from the context
menu to have the columns sorted by, e. g., partial levels in ascending order.
Double-clicking the cell of the receiver point opens the edit dialog of the
source that causes this partial level.
Manual
2
Partial Levels
Selecting the menu Tables|Partial Levels opens an overall list of the par-
tial levels at all receiver points caused by all sources accounted for in the
calculation.
11
Manual
Floors 11.2.6 1
11.2.6 Floors
This context menu command allows you to generate at a receiver point a

row of further receiver points for the floors above or below.
Insert a receiver point in front of a building. (Be sure the object snap is ac- Example
tivated.)
A building in CadnaA with a receiver point at a distance

of 5 cm (object snap) from the facade.
) Click the receiver point using the RIGHT mouse button. From the con- 11
text menu (see Chapter 5.7) select Generate Floors.
) Select/enter the values as on the dialog Floor above, and click OK to

close the dialog. CadnaA then creates three more receiver points in a
vertical row above the first one. They have the same name as the first
Manual
2
Floors
one, plus the storey number.
) Afterwards open the Table|Receiver Points.
When all heights have been entered, and the storey numbers have been ap-
pended, the table of receiver points should look similar to the above illus-
tration.
If necessary, use the 3-D view (see Chapter 13.13) to check if the storeys
11
were entered correctly.
3D-Wire model View „Cabinet“
Manual
Designation of Land Use 11.3 1
11.3 Designation of Land Use

Areas of different land use allow for the description of the designated land
use in accordance with the Land Use Ordinance. Points within such areas
can thus be assigned the standard levels for the different types of noise
(Options|Land Use). This feature allows you to adopt the types of desig-
nated land use for the entire CadnaA project directly from development
plans, and to calculate sensitivity maps. This leads to conflicting maps
where the differences between the rating levels calculated for each type of
noise and the standard levels, as per the designated land use, are calculated
(Prerequisite: XL module).
CadnaA can also automatically assign the pertinent standard levels to all
receiver points lying within a defined area of Land Use. The prerequisites
are
1. that the checkbox Determine from Areas of Land Use is activated
in the edit dialog of the receiver point and
2. an area of designated land use is inserted in which the receiver points
are included. 11
Enter the borderlines of the areas of designated land use after clicking the
icon on tool box.
In the edit mode double-click the borderline of the inserted area and select
the type of land use from the list box.
Manual
2
Designation of Land Use
Population / (Prerequisite: XL module) - The menu command Grid|Population Densi-

km² 11.3.0 ty allows CadnaA to approximate the population density from the build-
ings, and to assign it to the areas of designated land use (see Chapter
11.6.4).
Monetary Data 11.3.0 (Prerequisite: XL module) - A technique to evaluate the noise is described
in the study /55/. This method has been integrated into CadnaA (see Chap-
ter 11.6.7).
11
Manual
Land Use 11.4 1
11.4 Land Use

Via the menu Options|Land Use, the standard levels for the defined eval-
uation parameters (see Chapter 12.3.6) applying to the different types of
noise and the appearance - filling pattern and colour - are assigned to the
different types of land use. These different kinds of land use can be select-
ed in the edit dialog of the object Area of Designated Land Use (see
Chapter 11.3).
11
In this dialog you can define new kinds of areas. Therefore
) select a blank line in the Land Use table. (Just click the white area.)
) Then enter a name and the pertinent standard levels in the boxes.
Colours, line style, and filling pattern for representation of the area can
then be selected as customary after clicking the colour button.
In practical work it will be useful to switch off the filling pattern of areas
with a certain land use for the clarity of the colored noise maps.
User-defined types of land use are saved with the project. They are not
available for other projects.
Manual
2
Land Use
11
Manual
Grid of Receiver Points 11.5 1
11.5 Grid of Receiver Points

In the menu Grid you can specify a grid of points on which the immission Calc Grid 11.5.0
level is calculated for all defined evaluation parameters (max. four grids,
additionally to the ground) and the result displayed as colored noise map
with lines or areas of equal sound levels. The calculation of the sound lev-
el for this grid of points is started with the command Grid|Calc Grid (see
Chapter 11.5.4).
If you want to display a calculated specific grid choose its identifier from
the list in the symbol bar.
With the command Grid|Save as only the calculated grids will be saved, Save Grid as 11.5.0
not the project file with the objects.
The following formats can be saved: CadnaA, ASCII, LIMA.
With the command Grid|Open you can load calculated grids (noise map) Open Grid 11.5.0
only when it has been saved before either as a grid with the command 11
Grid|Save or from a CadnaA file which included a calculated grid. For
that, select the corresponding file in the dialog. With multiple selections
you are able to load several grids simultaneously into the current file. A
grid cannot be opend via the menu File|Import!
In case a grid file contains several grids of different evaluation parameters
they will only be displayed if the same evaluation parameters also exist in
the current file.
Following grid formats can be opend: CadnaA, ASCII, LIMA, SoundPlan.
If the Option Keep Current Grid is activated you can load grids in the Keep Current
current file without deleting the existing ones. The first existing calculated Grid 11.5.0
grid in the current file sets the mash of the grid. By different widths the
loaded grids will be adjusted to the first grid by interpolation.
Manual
2
Grid of Receiver Points
This function enables the calculation of a big file with divided calculation
areas on different computers sharing the file by calculating only one of the
calculation areas one after the other. Afterwards all the grids will be load-
ed together into the original file with Grid|Load and activated Option
Keep Current Grid (see Chapter 18.6 "PCSP - Program Controlled Seg-
mented Processing").
Delete Grid 11.5.0 A calculated grid can be deleted with the command Grid|Delete. The
command cannot be undone.
11
Manual
Chapter 11.5 Grid of Receiver Points
Grid Specification 11.5.1 1
11.5.1 Grid Specification
Enter the distance between receiver points for the x and y directions and
the receiver point height, in meters. By default, the receiver point height is
relative, with regard to the ground.
If you wish to calculate an absolute grid height, activate the pertinent op-
tion. In this case, the grid does not follow the topography. Receiver points
lying in the ground are omitted.
A finer grid results in a higher density of receiver points. This enhances
contrast in the graphic representation of the areas or lines of equal sound
level, but it will also require more time for calculation.
11
Determine the limits of the grid under Options.
If the option Define Grid over entire Limit is activated the grid covers Define Grid over
the entire defined limits (Options|Limits) of the project file. entire Limit 11.5.1
If the option is deactivated you can restrict the calculation area by input of
the x- and y-coordinates for the upper and lower edges of the receiver
Manual
2
11.5.1 Chapter 11.5 Grid of Receiver Points
Grid Specification
point grid. Another alternative is to draw a Calculation Area with the icon
from the toolbox (see Chapter 12.5 "Selecting Data for the Calculation").
Exclude Sound Sources/ This default setting means that, as far as possible, no receiver points are
Buildings 11.5.1 placed, and thus calculated, within the horizontal projections of sound
sources and buildings.
Use Height When Use Height of Buildings and Exclude Buildings are activated at
of Buildings 11.5.1 the same time, the horizontal projection of a building is excluded from the
grid where the building height exceeds the height of the immission point
grid.
Example: • Building 1 = 3 metres high
• Building 2 = 5 metres high
• Immission point height 3. 5 metres
• Under Grid specification, Exclude Buildings and Account for Build-
ing Height are activated.
• Under Options|Appearance|Buildings, the setting is "transparent“.
• On the tab Calculation|Configuration|General, the option Extrapo-
late Grid under Buildings is deactivated.
11
A grid calculation with an appropriate sound source at an appropriate
height would, for example, result in the following graphic.
Manual
Grid Specification 11.5.1 3
Graphic representation after calculation of a receiver

point grid at a height of 3.5 m with the option Use Height
of Building active 11
* To see this effect make sure that the buildings’ colour is not opaque!
(see Options|Appearance)
Manual
4
Grid Specification
Delete The command Delete Grid Points from the context menu of a calculation
Grid Points 11.5.1 area is useful to „cut out“ calculated noise maps either to replace that por-
tion after a new calculation or to use only a section of a big noise map. The
PC-memory used for the deleted section of the grid will be deallocated..
The whole Noise Map Calculation area (horse ;-) with deleted
grid points inside the polygone
11
New calculated grid for a portion the small noise map imported with
of the noise map Grid|Open| Keep current Grid
Insert an abitrarily shaped calculation area over a calculated noise map,

highlight the polygon and select Delete Grid Points from the context me-
nu. Choose either inside or outside the polygon.
The settings of the current grid will be assigned to the imported grid.
Manual
Appearance of Grid 11.5.2 1
11.5.2 Appearance of Grid
Grid|Appearance determines the layout of the graphics after a grid calcu-

lation.
If this item Lines of equal Sound Levels is activated, lines with the same Lines of equal Sound
value of the calculated sound level are displayed. The width of the level in- Levels
(Iso-dB-Lines) 11.5.2
terval is defined under Class Width.
When displaying Iso dB lines, make sure, before the calculation, that the 11
option Extrapolate Grid Under Buildings on the Calculation|Configu-
ration|General tab has been deactivated.
Otherwise, lines could be drawn under buildings if, as a result of the grid
specification, some grid points were to lie within buildings.
The Boundaries of the areas are interpolated geometrically. Area of equal Sound
Levels 11.5.2
If the option Exclude Sound Sources/Buildings (see Chapter 11.5.1
"Grid Specification") has been activated, there may be uncolored areas
close to buildings or area sources as a result of the specified receiver point
grid.
In order to avoid this, you may, under Calculation|Configuration, acti-
vate the option Extrapolate Grid under Buildings (see Chapter 12.4.3
"General Tab") before carrying out the calculation. The colored areas will
Manual
2
Appearance of Grid
then reach up to the contours of the objects in question as closely as possi-

ble.
Grid 11.5.2 Areas where the calculated sound level lies within pre-defined intervals
are given the same color in the representation. You determine the intervals
under Options, either by loading an appropriate palette or by editing the
allocation of colors to level intervals.
Oversampling 11.5.2 With the default setting oversampling value 1 the representation occurs
with a resolution resulting from the settings made in the choosen grid.
If the value is > 1 more intermediate points will be generated on which the
sound level is determined by interpolation of the already existing points.
The option Class Width does not affect the display.
No Grid 11.5.2 No noise map is displayed if this option has been activated. However, you
will always see the coloured map in the 3D-special view. To avoid this,
switch to the mode Display Ground Height before you change to the 3D-
special view.
11
Level Range 11.5.2 The range over which Iso dB lines or areas of equal sound level are repre-
sented starts at the value given as lower limit and ends at that defined as
upper limit.
Class Width The value given in this box will only have an effect if one of the options
Lines of Equal Sound Level or Areas of Equal Sound Level is activated.
The width of a class defines the steps between subsequent Iso dB lines.
Lower and upper limits define the level range.
Grid Points After a calculation, executed with the command Grid|Calc Grid, you can
Show Dots either display the receiver grid points or the sound levels calculated at the-
or Values 11.5.2
se points. For that in Grid|Appearance option Grid Points select either
Dots or Values.
If you have activated the view Display Ground Height (see Chapter 10.8)
the values of the ground height in meters will be displayed instead the
sound levels or if you have executed an Object-Scan (see Chapter 11.6.6)
the values of the corresponding attribute.
Manual
Appearance of Grid 11.5.2 3
Activating this option results in continuous transitions being generated be- Progressive
tween one color and the next. The appearance of the printout will depend Colors 11.5.2
on the selected printer.
In this part of the dialog, individual colors can be assigned to each respec- Apperance of Grid
tive range of noise level. Options 11.5.2
Clicking a color button opens either the "Line Style" dialog (if the option Assign Colors 11.5.2
Iso dB Lines is selected) or the selection box Colours (if the option Areas
of Equal Sound Level is selected).
It is possible to integrate this palette with its allocation to the classes of

noise levels either directly in the graphical display with the object icon
Symbol (see Chapter 13.11.3) or as a key in the default printout of the
graphic or in the user-defined printout.
You can emphasise Iso dB lines at specified intervals. In order to draw Iso-dB-Line
thicker lines for the multiples of, e. g., 10 dB, click the arrow button to the Intervals 11.5.2
right of the list box and select „??0.0". (The question marks serve as wild-
cards for any other figure). If the lines for multiples of 5 dB are also sup-
posed to show, then select „??5.0" from the second list box. Now all that 11
remains to be done is defining the line widths by specifying the desired
widths in tenths of millimetres in the second box on the right. When the
window is closed by clicking OK, you can check the settings on the
screen.
Manual
4
Appearance of Grid
11
Manual
Vertical Receiver Grid 11.5.3 1
11.5.3 Vertical Receiver Grid
Grid calculations can be performed for arbitrary vertical sections, and the
results can be displayed as lines of equal sound level or as coloured noise
maps. This representation may be printed, copied or saved or displayed in
the 3D-special view.
vertical noise map in 3D-special View
The following example illustrates an initial situation that is easily generat-

11
ed. On both sides of a road are two buildings.
Click the pertinent icon Vertical Grid and draw a line with only two poly-
gon points to determine the position of the desired vertical grid. You may
enter an arbitrarily number of vertical grids. Open the edit dialog and un-
der Geometry, assign a height to the vertical grid polygon up to which a
grid calculation is to be performed. In our example we have set 50 m.
Manual
2
Vertical Receiver Grid
11
The vertical grids dialog
Calculate automatical Trigger the calculation of the grid by clicking the button Calculate. The
edit dialog remains open. If the option autom. right to the button Calcula-
te is activated the grid would be calculated together with the horizontal
grid. In that case the dialog would be closed.
Global In the edit dialog of the Vertical Grid the settings of the grid can be speci-
fied directly if the option global right to the button Specification is deacti-
vated . The settings can be different to the horizontal grid. In the other case
the specifications of the horizontal grid will be used.
Save as Save the grid as usual as *.CNR file. If you do so the grid will be kept and
displayed again if you open the edit dialog after closing otherwise not.
Manual
Vertical Receiver Grid 11.5.3 3
The pertinent noise level is displayed at the particular position of the

mouse pointer in the cover bar of the dialog.
Via the button Copy you can copy the graphics into the clipboard and you Copy
can inserted it again with STRG+V in a third-party program.
11
Scenario in 3D-Special view - the path on the road
If you have inserted several vertical grid sections you can see them all in
the 3D-special view if you use e.g. an Aux. Polygon as path.
For printing the vertical grids can be referred to in the plot-designer as
3D-speical view or as cross-section view from the edit dialog.
Manual
4
Vertical Receiver Grid
11
Manual
Calculating a Grid 11.5.4 1
The command Calculate Grid in the menu Grid starts the calculation for
the specified receiver point grid.
If no particular calculation area has been defined - either using the toolbox
icon (see Chapter 12.5 "Selecting Data for the Calculation") or via the
menu Grid Specification - the calculation is performed for the entire lim-
its (see Options|Wrap-around). Otherwise, only the specified area will
be calculated.
The grid calculation takes into account all objects and sound sources, even
if they lie outside the specified calculation area.
see also Check Consistency chapter 11.2.3.
With the activated option Update during Grid Calculation the calculated Update during
grid is built up by colored areas while the calculation is still in progress. Grid Calculation 11.5.4
A grid calculation may be stopped, or interrupted to be resumed later on, at Stop Grid
exactly the point where it was stopped. Calculation 11.5.4 11
To stop the calculation, click the Stop button.

Some time may elapse before CadnaA reacts to your input and stops the
calculation.
Manual
2
Calculating a Grid
Press Shift key to continue If you wish to resume the calculation where you stopped it, save the
project file. CadnaA "memorises" the progress made in the calculation. To
continue the calculation, hold down the SHIFT key while clicking
Grid|Calculate Grid.
11
Manual
Grid Arithmetic 11.5.5 1
11.5.5 Grid Arithmetic
In the field Expression for New Grid you may enter a formula from
which a new noise map is generated using the grid currently displayed on
the screen, r0, and the grid files specified under R1 through R6.
The expression r0 for the current grid referes to the grids of all defined
evaluation parameters (max. four). Therefore a grid arithmetics will be ex-
ecuted for all grids of evaluation parameters.
For clarification a simple example is shown in the following screen shot:
11
If you enter in the first field Expression for New Grid r0+1 and if the
checkboxes of the other evaluation parameters are deactivated the grids of
all evaluation parameters will be taken into account automatically. (the
same effect would be if you activate the corresponding checkboxes and
enter in each field starting with the first one: r01+1 - second field r02+1
and so on).
Manual
2
11.5.5 Chapter 11 Immissions
Grid Arithmetic
The checkboxes of the single evaluation parameters have to be activated

only for special cases.
In the further example given here, the levels of the grid RK_STR.CNA are
numerically subtracted from the energetic sum of the levels of the current
grid (r0) and those of the grids saved as R_B.CNA and RK_G.CNA. Also
in this examaple all grids of evaluation parameters are taken into account.
11
As a test problem calculate the grid for a point source in front of a reflect-
ing barrier and save it and refer to it in field R1. Now deactivate reflection
and calculate the energetic difference between r0 and the saved grid using
the command sequence r1-- r0. The ISO-dB lines in the graphics illustrate
the sound field of the mirror’s sound source.
The referencing of the itemization grids of evaluation parameters field Ex-
pression for New Grid 1 till 4: r01 for the grid of the first evaluation pa-
rameter; r02 for the second grid etc. till r04.
see Chapter 11.5.5 "Grid Arithmetic"
see Chapter 11.5.6 "Creating a Grid of Receiver Points from Iso-dB-lines"
Manual
Creating a Grid of Receiver Points from Iso-dB-lines 11.5.6 1
11.5.6 Creating a Grid of Receiver Points

from Iso-dB-lines
You can also generate a grid of receiver points in CadnaA from Iso-dB-
lines of an external file. In some cases you will only get certain Iso-dB-
lines, e.g., aircraft noise areas. If you now wish to add this information to
your already existing grid you will also need a grid of receiver points (see
Chapter 11.5.5 "Grid Arithmetic").
Try out this function by, e.g., first exporting the Iso-dB-lines to DXF (with
activated option Height is Level and deactivated option No Grid points)
and then using this file to generate a grid of receiver points from these Iso-
dB-lines. For that use a separate new CadnaA file to avoid to calculate the
maybe existing grids of evaluation parameters again.
1. File|Import|Format: DXF IsodB.dxf
In the Options dialog import the Iso-dB-lines as Contour Lines! Lay-
ername *. Deactivate the auxiliary polygons.
11
But of course this way only works if the values of sound levels are
integrated as height in the file of importation.
2. Subsequently calculate ground grid (its calculated automatically with
Grid|Calc Grid - if necessary, enter class width as well as upper
and lower limit (When calculating only the ground grid, no source is
needed - but first specify the desired spacing of the receiver point
grid in Grid|Specification).
3. Raster|Arithmetik - Expression for new grid: r0g
That's it. This has turned the ground grid to a grid which you can save for
further use but make sure that an evaluation parameter from the symbol
bar is choosen - not Ground, then Grid|Save. Now this grid file can be
used for grid arithmetik. Open it in one of the fields R1 to R6 and refer to
it in your expression.
If necessary do not forget to delete the contour lines.
Manual
2
Creating a Grid of Receiver Points from Iso-dB-lines
But what is happened, if the value of sound level is only integrated as tex-
tual information, e.g., like an entry in the ID box after the file has been im-
ported as contour line?
Sound level values as textual information in the ID box -

the values are not yet assigned as height.
A resolution also exists here - keyword Modify Attribute.

11
Go on as described above with point 1 and 2 but integrate the following
steps
Raster_IsodB.cna
Step 2 a ) Change the entry in the ID box with the function Change Column
(see Chapter 15.2.5) so that only the entry of the sound level value
exist. In the example in the above figure leads the following entry to
the desired result.
Manual
Expression for the command Replace String The results are the sound level values only
Now you have to swap the sound level values from the ID box into the Step 2 b
field Geometry|Height (First Point). Therefore 11
) Click with the RIGHT mouse key on a free space in your project file
and select Modify Object|Action|Modify Attribute|Object type
Contour Line from the context menu and confirm with OK.
) In the dialog Modify Attribute select HA as Attribute (for the

height of the first point) and the option Arithmetric|New Value= ID Double-arrow key
(you can choose this attribute from the list if you click on the double-
arrow button)
Manual
4
Settings to insert the sound level value from the ID box into the height field
) Close the dialog with OK and confirm also the following dialog with
button ALL. The sound level value from the ID box is then inserted
into the height field as z-coordinate.
11
Now go on again as described with point 3. In this example we have speci-

fied a grid spacing of 5 x 5 m.
Manual
Iso-dB lines imported as Contour lines and
11
converted into a grid (apperance with ares of equal sound levels)
Manual
6
11
Manual
CadnaA Option XL 11.6 1
11.6 CadnaA Option XL

* The Option XL (formaly SIP) is an additional modul for CadnaA
and only runs with the basic version. The following menu functions
are accessible only if the option XL has been purchased:
Calc Map of Conflicts, see Chapter 11.6.2,
Evaluation, see Chapter 11.6.3
Population Density, see Chapter 11.6.4, and
Object-Scan, see Chapter 11.6.6
Monetary Evaluation of Noise according to BUWAL,
see Chapter 11.6.7
The CadnaA option XL is an extremly flexible tool for creating noise
maps. If all the data exists for a given scenario and a corresponding project
file has also be created, the final process is easily done with the XL-option
of CadnaA.
We will not discuss the accumulation of data any further here, but we
would like to point out that the difficulty, for the production of noise maps,
considerably depends on whether a part of or all the essential data can be 11
optained in a digital format and if the program can import them.
Manual
2
CadnaA Option XL
11
Manual
Chapter 11.6 CadnaA Option XL
Noise Maps and their Evaluation with CadnaA 11.6.1 1
11.6.1 Noise Maps and their Evaluation

with CadnaA
The following picture is an excellent example of this situation. A heavily Initial Situation
traveled road with a mean daily traffic density of about 15.000 vehicles per
24 hours leads through a built-up area.
11
A built-up area with 13.000 inhabitants for which a noise

map and a noise reduction plan is to be produced.
Manual
2
11.6.1 Chapter 11.6 CadnaA Option XL
Noise Maps and their Evaluation with CadnaA
Noise Maps 11.6.1 The complete data of the project - this is valid for our built-up area as well
as for a big city - is contained in a single file which can be opened with a
double-click on its file name. Anyone who has already suffered under oth-
er programs with its numberless run files, command files and the modules
which have to be loaded one after the other will very much appreciate this.
On the basis of the mighty group concept of CadnaA it is easily possible
to calculate noise maps consecutively for road traffic and/or railways, for
industry and trade plants, for sport and leisures facilities, for aircraft noise
and for any other source of noise. For that, it is only necessary that each
source is allocated a noise type with at least one character in its ID code.
If, for example, the ID codes of all roads contain the characters S30 as
first digits, then all roads will be deactivated for a calculation with the fol-
lowing entry in the edit dialog Group.
Test this with the
example file
XL_01.cna
11
Edit dialog Group
If all noise sources are deactivated - except those which have to be calcu-
lated - you can start the calculation (Grid|Calc Grid) with the desired set-
tings made in Calculation|Configuration.
In our example for the built-up area with the through-road it has been cal-
culated in a 10 m grid. Switch on the option Raster, Oversampling 1 in
Grid|Appearance.
The noise exposure for each city or built-up area can be easily discovered
with such a colored noise map with the corresponding legend .
see Chapter 11.5 "Grid of Receiver Points"
Manual
Noise Maps and their Evaluation with CadnaA 11.6.1 3
In CadnaA the areas of diverse land use can be allocated different permit-
ted or standard values for the individual noise types. Therefore you have to Noise Maps Maximum
draw a closed polygon (with the icon Area of Designated Land use from Values 11.6.1
the toolbox) around a region which you can allocate a certain usage. After
double-click on this polygon you can enter the pertinent ranking of land
use.
The hatched area is in our example a pure residential area

(PR) with standard values for the individual noise types 11
Edit dialog Land Use in which the classification of land

use can be allocated.
Manual
4
Noise Maps and their Evaluation with CadnaA
In the edit dialog Land Use the density of inhabitants (population/km²)

can also be entered. This value is required if, e.g., an evaluation is to be
carried out according to a noise impact value. The population density can
determined, also automatically, by counting the buildings in this area with
CadnaA.
Digital Zoning Plan/ The mentioned land uses result from the zoning plan, urban land use plan-
Land Utilisation ning or the legally binding land use plan or by consideration of the actual
Plan 11.6.1
present usage. We pracitally have a digital zoning plan if all areas are allo-
cated such land use.
see Chapter 11.3 "Designation of Land Use" and chapter 11.4 "Land Use".
11
Manual
Conflict Maps 11.6.2 1
11.6.2 Conflict Maps
A conflict occurs where the relevant maximum receiver value has been ex-
ceeded. In the same way as the actual noise impact is illustrated as a level
in the noise map, the conflict maps can depict the degree of excess and de-
viation from the relevant standard receiver value in a coloured map.
Prior to the calculation of the conflict map the file with the noise map
should be saved (File|Save As).
After the areas of designated land use (see Chapter 11.3) have been speci-
fied, the conflict maps can be calculated because CadnaA then knows the
relevant maximum sound levels at the receiver points for each type of
noise.
) To this end, select from the list the type of noise which was used to XL_01.cna
calculate the current noise map on the dialog opening. In our example
we only have calculated the traffic noise.
11
In the calculation, the standard receiver values specified for this type of
noise will be considered for any type of land use. (They are specified un-
der Options|Land Use - see Chapter 11.4.)
As a rule, the coloured representation of the map disappears upon comple- conflikt.pal
tion of the calculation, because the palette was not matched to the differ-
ences in level occurring in the conflict map. It is therefore convenient to
generate a specific palette for maps of conflicts under Grid|Appearan-
ce|Options, and to save it as conflict.pal. A negative value for the lower
limit of the representation range should also be selected here.
Manual
2
Conflict Maps
With such created conflict maps it becomes immediately clear which resi-
dential buildings lie in red areas or by which buildings the standard or per-
mitted level has been exceeded.
11
Manual
Evaluation 11.6.3 1
11.6.3 Evaluation
Although the conflict maps (see Chapter 11.6.2) neatly illustrate problem
areas, this information is still far too detailed for an evaluation of different
planning alternatives. An unambiguous scaling in terms of a single-
number rating is required here.
There are numerous ways for such a single-number rating. Presently, how-
ever, there is no generally accepted and standardised algorithm. As the
purpose is to quantify the noise impact on a complete area, all these con-
cepts agree in raising the noise impact quantity with an increasing number
of persons concerned and with increasing sound level or increasing excess
level. The number of persons concerned, N, is generally considered as a
linear influence. The influence of the sound level, however, is a matter of
controversy. An exponential term is certainly appropriate since the effect
of an increase in level by x dB is the more detrimental the higher the origi-
nal level, or the excess level, is.
In order to accommodate different concepts and to remain open to future
developments the evaluation formula may be specified arbitrarily by the 11
user. The following example illustrates the simplest possible concept, i. e.,
adding the excess levels per inhabitant for the entire area.
LB = ∑ N i × Ü i
with
LB Noise impact value
Ni Number of persons subject to excess level Üi
Üi Excess level in dB
Manual
2
Evaluation
Such an evaluation can only be carried out for an area, if

• the calculated noise map is available in CadnaA and
• all areas to be considered in the evaluation are assigned a designated
land use, and thereby a standard receiver value.
Then, under Grid|Evaluation, open the dialog and - as a simple test - en-
ter the characters fl in the field Expression. This entry fl causes the
addition of all grid surfaces which results in the total area.
11
Since fl shows the area in m² of each grid point when scanning them all,
and consequently, adding up these areas, clicking Calculate will yield the
total area covered by the grid. For a noise map the entry shown in the fol-
lowing dialog may appear as an example. The total area here is approxi-
mately 2.3 km² .
If you click on the double arrow button on the right hand side of the field
expression a list with predefined expressions and formulas opens - e.g. you
also could mark the identifier „Area of grid rectangle“ of the expression fl
instead of entering it via keyboard. The expression will be inserted auto-
matically.
Manual
Evaluation 11.6.3 3
The following variables are available for an evaluation formula:
Variable Meaning
fl area of a grid element in m2
r0 current level on this grid element 11

na limiting value
naein population density in inhabitants/km2
nages limiting value of noise caused at the receiver point

from all noise types together
naind limiting value of noise caused at the receiver point

from industry
nastr limiting value of noise caused at the receiver point

from road traffic
nasch limiting value of noise caused at the receiver point

from railway
naflg limiting value of noise caused at the receiver point

from air traffic
Manual
4
Evaluation
naog grid point in area of land us, yes/
nagfz Floor Space Ratio FSR
namiete Rent/m²/a
namind Abatement of rent (in monetary unit, by increase of

the noise level by 1 dB), e.g. 1% percent abatement
of rent per 1 dB (according to BUWAL)
All the usual operators (see Chapter 2.6) like +,-,*,/,<,> can be used. The
sign ++ allows an energetic summing and the sign -- an energetic subtrac-
tion. The command iif(criterion, expression1, expression2) results in the
criterion being checked and the value resulting from expression1 being re-
turned if the criterion has been fulfilled; the one resulting from
expression2 being returned if the criterion has not been fulfilled.
11
Manual
Evaluation 11.6.3 5
Example with
functions 11.6.3
Function Result after Calculation
1 number of raster elements
fl total raster area
naein*fl/1e6 number of inhabitants in all areas of

designated land use
iif(r0>=65,naein*fl/1e6,0) number of inhabitants subject to levels

of more than 65 dB
iif(r0>=nastr,naein*fl/ number of inhabitants subject to excess

1e6,0) road noise
max(naein*fl/1e6*r0,0) the above-mentioned value of noise im-

pact, if applied to the conflict maps
iif((r0<Lo)*(r0>Lu),fl,0) qm-area of a certain level

(Lo = upper level, Lu = lower level)
11
With this, subtly differentiated analyses can be created quickly an simply.
After an expression has been specified, it is convenient to enter an identifi-
cation in the field Name for the quantity to be calculated. This identifica-
tion appears in the list box Evaluation as soon as another line in this box
is clicked. Now you may enter a further expression for a single-number
evaluation. For a noise map, e. g., with the evaluation dialog below, the
noise impact results in a value of 1430 (inh.*dB) for the night-time.
Manual
6
Evaluation
Clicking the line "Inhab with exceeding" results in the following display:
11
Thus 190 inhabitants are subject to excess night-time levels. The average
excess level is:
Ümittel = 1430 / 190 = 7,5 dB
You can find a list with pre-defined expressions if you click on the arrow-
button. To insert a pre-defined expression just click on its identifier. You
can change and save the expression with a new name in the user-defined
list Evaluation.
Manual
Population Density 11.6.4 1
11.6.4 Population Density
The density of inhabitants for a certain area or the numbers of residents

per building will be required if an evaluation like the noise impact value is
to be performed.
Either we have these numbers and enter them via keyboard and import or
we evaluate and enter them. This estimation can, however, be a laborious
job. CadnaA can settle this automatically in an effective way.
The following is required to calculate the density of inhabitants/km²:
• areas of designated land use (see Chapter 11.3) have to be inserted
• in these areas buildings (see Chapter 9.3.2) are included and
• a formula (see Chapter 2.6) has to be entered for the calculation of
inhabitants.
* We do not need areas of designated land uses if we calculate only the

residents of buildings.
With Grid|Population Density we open a dialog for entering a formula 11
with the variables indicated in the dialog for the calculation of the inhabit-
ants.
In the above figure we have presupposed that in each case, on average,

40 m² of floor space can be allocated to one person and that the floor
height is on average 3 m.
Manual
2
Population Density
Calc Residents per After confirming the dialog with OK all buildings which are marked as
Building 11.6.4 residential buildings will be allocated a population according to the en-
tered formula and the number of inhabitants will be entered in the dialog
Building. The population is also displayed in the table Building
(Tables|Obstacles).
Calculate Population After confirming the dialog Calculate Population Density with OK all
Densiy in areas of individual areas with designated land uses - and here again all buildings -
Land Use 11.6.4
will be run through to determine the population with the entered formula.
The calculated number of inhabitants will be entered in the field Populati-
on/km² in the dialog Area of Designated Land Use. In each case this re-
sults in the population per km² in each area of designated land use.
Normalise to actual The number of inhabitants determined while considering the buildings
number of may deviate from the actual number of inhabitants. If the latter is known, it
Inhabitants and
Number of
may be entered in the edit dialog Number of Inhabitants in Entire Area:
Inhabitants in Entire when Normalise to Actual Number of Inhabitants has been activated.
Area 11.6.4 CadnaA then converts the population densities determined for the individ-
ual areas of designated land use using an appropriate factor to match the
11 total number of inhabitants in all areas of designated land use to the total
number specified.
Afterwards, when the edit dialog for an area of designated land use is
opened, the calculated population density is displayed. In the menu Ta-
bles|Other Objects|Areas of Designated Land Use all values are listed
in the table.
Manual
Kapitel 11.6 CadnaA Option XL
Closing Buildings 11.6.5 1
11.6.5 Closing Buildings
* This command is only available if you have purchased the option XL

(see chapter 11.6)
With the command in the menu Tables|Miscellanous|Close Buildings
you are able to connect individual polygon lines to a closed polygon and to
represent them as the object Building. This is helpful if you have to import
buildings in CadnaA with files from a third-party program (like AutoCad
DXF file), buildings which are drawn with individual lines instead of with
closed polygons.
11
Initial situation: An imported DXF file where buildings

are drawn with individual lines. Those have to be impor-
ted first as the object Auxiliary Polygon. Then the lines
have to be connected to a closed polygon and are auto-
matically converted to buildings afterwards.
Handbuch
2
11.6.5 Kapitel 11.6 CadnaA Option XL
Closing Buildings
First import (see chapter 6.2) the third-party file with the corresponding
file format into CadnaA. Make sure that the „open“ buildings are imported
as object type Auxiliary Polygon. After importing them, delete elements
which you do not need or use the group function (see chapter 18.2) to
deactivate elements. If you execute the command Close Buildings, all
existing and activated Auxiliary Polygons are connected to the correspon-
ding settings and converted to the object Building automatically.
11
The imported DXF file after transaction of the command

Close Buildings. The buildings are now closed polygons.
In the provided picture the „open“ buildings have the layer name „buil-
ding“. This identifier appears in the ID field in the edit dialog of the object
after being imported into CadnaA. Therefore you can create groups very
easily.
Handbuch
Group definition in CadnaA
The first group for the buildings is activated and the second group with the
asterix * in the field Expression is deactivated for all remaining objects.
Therefore only the lines are closed and automatically converted in the ob-
ject Building with the identifier „building“ in their field ID.
After clicking the command Table|Miscellanous|Close Buildings the fol-
lowing dialog appears with self-explanatory settings.
11
With the activated option Combine Buildings terraces are combined to a

single Building with barriers lying inside, replacing the indoor walls.
Handbuch
4
Closing Buildings
With the command Close Building the option Combine Buildings has
been activated for the buildings in the right-hand picture. For those buil-
dings all indoor walls are replaced with barriers and the buildings are com-
bined in a single building as a closed polygon. The objects in the upper
left-hand picture are eight individual buildings. The option Combine Buil-
dings was not activated.
11 After combining the lines to create a closed polygon and converting them
to buildings, the original identifier in the ID is overwriten with an identi-
fier containing the character L and a number, e.g., L1, L2, L3 etc. This
identifier indicates what has happend while connecting and combining au-
xiliary polygons into buildings or barriers.
Handbuch
11
L1 a detached building or barrier
L2 building inside a building or barrier inside a building
L3 building inside a building inside a building or barrier inside a

building inside a building etc.
So just create groups to check if the connection and converting has been
successful in all cases.
Handbuch
6
Closing Buildings
11
Handbuch
Object-Scan 11.6.6 1
11.6.6 Object-Scan
The Object-Scan in the menue Grid is a powerful tool. With the selected Object Type 11.6.6
object type you can add an arbitrary attribute value or a calculated attribute
value of a user-defined link for all objects of the choosen type.
The adding and displaying of the final value can occur in the following Action / Sum
ways: into: 11.6.6
1. As a target in Action / Sum into you choose Single Values. The eva- Single Values 11.6.6
luation then takes place for the entire project file and the result value
is displayed in a message dialog.
2. As a target in Action / Sum into you choose Specified Aereas / Specified Areas/
Polygons. Then you can choose a Target Object Type whose Polygons 11.6.6
objects are closed polygons. Furthermore you have to choose an

Attribute which belongs to the selected Target Object Type in
which the, inside the closed polygon, added values are assigned to.
3. As a target in Action / Sum into you choose Grid and as Window Grid and 11
Size define the length of a side of a square inside of which a result Window Size 11.6.6
should be determined in a grid. This square is arranged so that its

pivot is a grid point. The entire grid is run through in that way, by
shifting the window step by step to the next grid point.
4. As a target in Action / Sum into you choose Table. The evaluation Table 11.6.6
then takes place in a table either with user-defined intervals (min -
max) of an arbitrary attribut or by predefined formulars (button Pre-
defined).
* The procedure using the mentioned methods are described with one
example each at the end of this chapter.
Manual
2
Object-Scan
Pay Attention! * Due to the fact that now can be calculated up to four evaluation para-
meters (chapter 12.4.6) simultaneously the name of the fields Day
and Night (Formula for summation and formula for total) are not
anymore topical. Analyses are not only made for day and night but
for abitrary evaluation parameters. Anyhow we have deceided to
keep these names Day (field 1) and Night (field 2) for the time being
so that files calculated with an older release of CadnaA still can be
analysed. But de facto with the appropriate expression in field 1 (day)
or/and field 2 (night) you can refer to the corresponding evaluation
parameter, e.g. GW1 till GW4 (limiting value of evaluation parame-
ter 1 - 4) to analyse the desired inquiry.
Open the dialog Object-Scan in Grid|Object-Scan.
11
The Dialog Objekt-Scan
Target Object Type You can only choose a Target Object Type if Specified Areas /Polygons
Expression for ID are selected in the field Action /Sum into.
Attribute D/N 11.6.6
Manual
The result is then written in the selected Attribute (e.g., Name for the cor-
responding field in the edit dialog of the object)
* Don’t use the same attribute for Day (field1) and Night (field2). The
results will be overwritten then.
In the field Window Size (m) you can define the side length of an invisib- Window Size (m) 11.6.6
le quadrate within which a result in a grid is calculated. This quadrate is
arranged so that a grid point its central point is. The whole grid will be cal-
culated by shifting iteratively the window to the next grid point.
11
The window only has an effect if the option Grid (Action/Sum into) is
selected.
For Day (field 1) and Night (field 2) we can enter or choose from the vari- Formula for
able list a term determining which value should be added up for each loca- Summation 11.6.6
ted object.
Manual
4
Object-Scan
Variable list We open the variable list by clicking the double-arrow’s button beside the
corresponding field. Only the pertinent variables of the chosen object type
are displayed. For inserting a desired variable just click on it. To overwrite
an existing variable in the field, double-click the variable before you open
the variable list.
11
Variable list in the Dialog Object-Scan
Variable The variable list is separated with a horizontal line. The variables below
this line are object specific. You will find an explanation for these abbrevi-
ations in chapter 2.5.
Above this line are all special variables listed which we can use for the ob-
ject-scan.
prop Part of the object which is inside the window. With exten-
ded objects it is the proportion of the area; with line objects
the proportion of the length..
area_p Total area of an object (by closed polygons).
area_i Area of an object which lies inside the window.
area_w Area of the window
Manual
prop_l The proportion of the length of open or closed lines which

are lying inside the window (well in distinction to prop
with areas determined by the protortion of the perimeter )
len_p The total length of an open or closed line (therefore also the
perimeter line of an area)
len_i The length of the part, of an open or closed line, which is
lying inside the window
int_lo lower limit of an interval
int_hi upper limit of an interval
) To determine the total kilometers of roads in a project, choose the fol- Example of formulas
lowing
object type Road Action/Sum in Single Values
and enter the following term into the box
Formula for Summation len_p
(Add the total length of the line objects)
) To determine the total residents of buildings in a project, choose the 11

following
object type Building Action/Sum in Single Values
Formula for Summation iif(WG_NUM, EINW,0)
(If it is a residential building, add the residents, otherwise add zero)
Manual
6
Object-Scan
) To determine the total floor area of the building, enter the following
object type Building Action/Sum in Single Values

Formula for Summation
iif(WG_NUM, area_p,0)*PO_HREL_P1/3
(If it is a residential building, add the ground area of the buildings,
otherwise do not and multiply the total area with the relative height
of the first building point for each building and divide this with 3 m
floor height)
Calculation After completing the inputs for all desired fields and closing the dialog by
confirming OK the results are automatically written in a local Textblock.
Textblock The name of the local textblock created automatically for the results is for
Day #(Text, OBJSCANT) and for
Night #(Text, OBJSCANN).
11 The Textblocks are located in Tables|Libraries (local). You can use them
as usual, e.g,. for reports, legend or for export files.
If you want to determine different object attributes you should rename the
Textblocks because a new result overwrites the previous result.
In case you have determined the road kilometers of a project then rename
the textblock, e.g., in RdKm. CadnaA creates a new textblock OBJSCAN
if you repeat the Object-Scan.
But we can also display the result in a Textbox in the graphics by refering
the Textblock in the Textbox, e.g., as follows:
Roadtraffic = #(Text, OBJSCANT) km
Formula An entered expression determines which value is calculated with the value
for Total 11.6.6 saved in the variable sum from the above Formula for Summation.
Grid 11.6.6 By choosing Grid, in the field Action/Sum into, the result is assigned to
the grid point in the pivot of the Window.
Manual
We can use the variable sum for both fields - Day or Night - instead sumt
or sumn. The saved result for Day or Night will be recognized and used
from CadnaA by entering sum in the corresponding field.
A total evaluation for the entire calculation area can also be determined. Single values
For this choose Single Values in field Action/Sum into. With the variable
sum is the term, defined in the field Formula for Summation, evaluated
for all objects in the whole calculation area and displayed in a message di-
alog. With the following example results the number of all residents in the
existing area.
11
Dialog Object-Scan and the corresponding terms
Result Dialog
Manual
8
Object-Scan
A common way of using the Object-Scan is the calculation and represen-

tation of Noise Impact of Residents (NIR).
Example of the three mentioned methods:
SmallCity01.cna The basis is the example file SmallCity01.cna (If you want to see the eng-
lish or German textboxes you can switch to variant V01 or V02 in the
symbol bar).
11
Manual
) The total length of all roads in the project shall be determined . Example
Single Values
11
Selected is the Object Type Road and Single Values in Action/Sum into.
In the field Formula for Summation the term len_p is entered for the
Attribute or via the list selected.
len_p shows generally the polygon length of the object representation.
The alternative is to select the object-specific parameter PO_LEN from the
variable list.
After confirming with OK the result dialog appears with the following
message
Manual
10
Object-Scan
The road net has consequently a total lenght of 3226 m.

In the same manner the number of buildings can be evaluated or the whole
sound level of all point sources, or each other computable or deducible va-
lue from the attribute parameters of the choosen object type.
Example: ) In the Name box of each area of Land Use, in the above displayed
Areas
example, the number of buildings shall be displayed.
Object Type: Building, Action / Sum into: Areas, Target Object:
Land Uses.
11 With these settings and with the list box Attribute D/N you have access to
all attributes of the Object Type Land Use. The summed final value, for
the selected attribute, is assigned to each existing area of Land Use. With
selection of Name as attribute this value is written in the Name box of the
Land Uses.
Just counting the formula „1“ for the summation could be used. But then
buildings also placed on the border of the areas are completely counted -
the sum of the entered buildings is bigger than the real number of buil-
dings in the whole project.
If this final balance is to be correct a building on an area border must be
counted as only a part < 1, which correspond to the area part of the buil-
ding inside the area of land use. This is happen with an entry of prop as
Formula for Summation via the variable list.
After confirming OK the numer of buildings are entered in the Name box
in the edit dialog of the Land Uses.
Manual
In the following example each building, with a symbol of Building Evalu- Example:
ation, is assigned to a representative sound power level.. Grid
11
Furthermore for each building is the population known.

The amount of the noise impact shall now be evaluated for each building.
This is dependent on the number of residents n and the sound level L of the
buildings.
LEG Haus = n ⋅ 2 0.1⋅(L − L0 )
wereas L0 is the valid maximum value.
This impact measure shall be added for the whole area and a coloured map
shall be generated, which displays the impact measure corresponding to
1000 m² in each case.
Manual
12
Object-Scan
The Object-Scan achieves this with the following dialog:
The Formula for Summantion correspond to the above term.

11
SmallCity02.cna In this example the population is assigned to the individual buildings.
On a coloured map the buildings could be coloured equivalent to the popu-
lation but cannot be optically distinguished when they are displayed in a
big scale. For that reason the population density shall be averaged over a
larger area of 100 m x 100 m and displayed as a coloured map with popu-
lation/100 m².
Manual
Open the dialog Grid|Object-Scan as shown in the following:
Select in the first box for Object Type Building because the evaluation
shall refer to the population in buildings
11
The variable prop supplies for each building inside the Window the va-
lue 1 and for buildings on the border of the Window a value from 0 to 1
which specifies the part of the building area located inside the Window.
With the product prop*einw therefore the population which has been al-
loted to the specified square is added. The result is saved in the variables
sumt for the day and sumn for the night (the bulding attribute „populati-
on“ is for day and night equal).
In the example the area of the specified Window and therefore 100 m x
100 m = 10000 m², is divided by the area_w and multiplied by 100. The
division leads to the population per m² and the multiplication to the popu-
lation per 100 m².
Manual
14
Object-Scan
Example Table We want to determine the number of buildings with heights predefined
within the intervals in a table. Therefore choose the settings shown in the
following picture:
11
int_lo < = HA
- the building height is smaller equal the defined lower limit of the inter-
val.
int_hi < HA
- the building height is smaller then the defined upper limit
You have to enter the desired height intervals in a table. Therefore click on
the button Table, insert as many lines (Ins-key) as necessary and enter the
corresponding limits in the columns min and max .
Manual
If you close the table and the dialog Object-Scan with OK the evaluation
will be executed and the result is shown in the table.
If you choose a predefined entry via the button Predefined both a corres- Predefined
ponding formula is entered in the field Formula for Summation and an
appropriate table is created automatically.
11
Manual
16
Object-Scan
11
Manual
Monetary Evaluation of Noise according to BUWAL 11.6.7 1
11.6.7 Monetary Evaluation of Noise according

to BUWAL
* The CadnaA Option XL is required for the evaluation!
A technique to evaluate the noise is described in the study /55/. This me- The method
thod has been integrated into CadnaA.
This method takes into account the reduction in value of rented flats that
results from high noise levels. This is done by converting the noise load of
residential areas into amounts of money. If the value of a noise reduction
measure is to be evaluated, then this is done by calculating the noise distri-
bution with and without this measure. The difference in the two amounts
of money is represented by the reduced value according to the noise ex-
pressed in value of the measure.
The philosophy behind this technique shall not be discussed in detail here.
It shall only be mentioned that this method of evaluating and assessing the
noise is conservative and tends to underestimate the negative aspects of 11
noise. The use of the influence of the noise on the rent prices of residential
areas doesn't take into consideration many other negative consequences,
like the long term health of the population and the development of a city.
But nevertheless this technique is a pragmatic and transparent way of as-
sessing cost-benefit relations when noise is evaluated. And this is always
positive.
Manual
2
Monetary Evaluation of Noise according to BUWAL
Application with areas The evaluation method is applied to areas of designated land use. The fol-
of designated land use lowing diagram shows a simple and easily understandable example.
(Example 1) 11.6.7
area of designated land use calculation area
road
Area of designated land use with road
11
and the edit dialog of this object (example 1)
Manual
The edit dialog of the RA-residential area shows (see chapter 11.3) that Monetary Data
when "Monetary Data" is activated three further values can be entered (local)
• Floor/Ground Ratio (NAGFZ)

• Rental/m²/a (NAMIETE)
• Rental abatement (NAMIND)
The bracketed abbreviations are the names of variables needed later to per-
form necessary operations.
In the edit fields for rental abatement in the dialog Area of designated
Land Use the two variables
• LP sound pressure level
• NA_STR maximum value for noise from road traffic (defined in Opti-
ons|Land Use|Limiting Value)
are used to express the loss in value for all areas with sound levels within
5 dB under the maximum value.
The floor/ground ratio is a factor that that, when multiplied by the
ground area, gives the maximal residential area of buildings permitted on
11
this area. Rental/m²/a: can be entered in any currency unit. The calculated
results are then related to this currency.
The factor in the equation of input line Rental Abatement - 0.01 in the
first example - is the loss of rent due to a level increase of 1 dB. 0.01, me-
aning rentals are reduced by 1% if the level raises 1 dB.
Further variables needed in the expressions of evaluation :
• Area of a grid element in m² (FL)
• Logical value (0-false, 1-true) as a definition if a grid element is inside
an area of designated land-use or not (NAOK)
Manual
4
Calc Grid In the first step, to come to a monetary evaluation of the noise, the noise
level is calculated on a grid for the whole area.
Evaluate Grid With the second step the evaluation, with the defined formula in
Grid|Evaluation, is calculated for all grid points and the result is added
up.
The following results are obtained when using the expressions on the right
side. The accuracy depends on the size of the grid elements because a grid
element is taken to be in an area if the grid point is located in it. It is there-
fore recommended you use grid spacings as small as possible.
FL Calculation area in m²
FL*NAOK Area of designated land use in m²
FL*NAOK*NAGFZ Total residential area in an area of
designated land use
FL*NAOK*NAGFZ*NAMIETE Rental for all areas of
designated land use
11 FL*NAOK*NAGFZ*NAMIETE*NAMIND
Reduction in rent caused by noise
With example 1:
• the calculation area (FL) is 10080 m².
• The size of the area of designated land use is 8000 m².
• The floor/ground ratio is 0.8.
So the maximal residential area on this estate is 0.8 x 8000 m² = 6400 m².
The rental with 100 € per year and m² is therefore 640.000 €.
Manual
The three above mentioned values floor/ground ratio, rental/m²/a and Evaluation example 1--
rental abatement have been entered in the edit dialog of this area - the va- loss in value based on
residential areas 11.6.7
lues are therefore only valid for this individual area (local). It is also pos-
sible to enter these values in Options|Land use for each type of general
land use (global) - in this case they are valid for all areas of this type. If the
values have been entered globally and locally, the local values for an area
dominate. Globally defined values are used for all areas of this type where
no local ones exists.
The calculation of levels for example 1 with a grid spacing of 1m x 1m and Step 1 -
a receiver height of 4m (see chapter 11.5.1) leads to the result shown in the Calculation of sound
pressure
following diagram. levels 11.6.7
60
area of designated land use 11

calculation area Result of the grid calcula-
tion with a grid spacing of
65 1m and a receiver height
of 4m
70 road
Manual
6
Step 2 - After noise levels have been calculated on the specified grid, the evaluati-
Evaluation 11.6.7 on in the form of a reduction in value is carried out in Grid|Evaluation.
The example file Monetary1.cna just includes the correct expressions.
Monetary1.cna The expression for calculating the annual reduction in rent resulting from
noise is
FL*NAOK*NAGFZ*NAMIETE*NAMIND
11 After a click on Calculate the reduction in rent of 60416 € caused by the

noise is shown.
Changing the number of cars (MDTD) to 10000 cars/24h, recalculating
and evaluating with the described steps shows a reduction in this noise in-
duced loss to 40789 €. With the same technique all possible measures like
screens and barriers or reorganisation of traffic flows can easily be evalua-
ted and ranked.
Manual
Evaluation example 2a - loss in value based on resi-

dential premises as single digit value
With example 1 the residential area was calculated from the whole area
and the floor/ground ratio was the basis for the evaluation. This meant that
the probability of people living at any certain position in this area was re-
garded to be the same for all positions.
It is also possible to use the exact position of all buildings and their geo-
metric location - this gives a result that is more accurate because the scree-
ned and therefore quieter facades reduce the building’s noise level and
lead to a better result for well designed buildings and residential areas.
Example 2 uses this technique. With example 2a the noise induced loss of
value for all buildings is calculated as a single number value. This is the
best procedure if different strategies for noise reduction are to be ranked.
The following diagram shows example 2, a scenario with roads, buildings Monetary2.cna
and areas of designated land-use. The above mentioned values are defined
globally (Options|Land use).
11
Building evaluation and calculation of a building’s noise map Step 1 11.6.7
for all residential premises
In Options|Building noise map select energetic for the Averaging Me-
thod (see chapter 9.3.6).
Manual
8
55 51
54 50
59 45
Noise induced reduction in value: 513038.35

52
59
I-IV 49
44
5950 52
5244
49
49
49
56
55 52
52 45 45 43
37
35
48
55
55
39 49 46 4343 42
5142
39 I-IV 47 47
60 46
60 52 51
50 5042 47
55 60 50 45
49 45
56 50 47
55
48 47
58
48
49 41 39
49 47
58 49
38
48 49 49 49 47
58 48 49
5041 46
58 49 48
49504948 49 38
38
58 47
48
47 47 35 35
53
55
54
48
50 42 42 37
55 48 45 37
50 40
46 35 33
50
42
50 47 4941 43
45
37
44
43
34
I-IV 47 44
60 51 49 49
47 49 50 41 47
46 45 34 34
42
6151 59
54
52
48 51
48 45 48
47
49 41 37
61 51 48 49 4949 46
50 50 49
48 49 47
54 49 47 37
55
5950
48 48 51
51
49 47
5041
57
53
52
49
47
47 47 5143 48
50
45
43
50 47 49
50 47 49 48
46 48 48
54 51
42
56 56 50 46 48
46 46
47 47
51 43 51
51
54
5244 44 47
48
I-IV 51
47 48 47
42
6151
61 60 44 51
48
4949
4941 47
48 47
5143
48
50 50 51
51
52 49 47
52 49 48 48
55 61 51
49 47
60 45 45 45 47 50
57 51
44 47
47
51 44
47 44 49 50
48 50 49
49
60 XIV-XXXII 56 47 49
48 47 49 50
50
43
6051 5143 50
48
48
48
49
44
48
49 50
60 56
49
49 49 5042 47 46
45
47
48
49 50 44
50 49
50
51
50 50
49
5042 46 48 50
5042 44
59
56
47
49
49
49 47
46
47 5042 47 50
55 59 58 49 49 48 48 49 50
59 59 58 59 53 47 44 44 46 47
56 48
47 47
49 48
49
60 52
5345 50
49
48
6050 55 48 49
59 54 50
49 50
49 48
5042
55
60
59
49 4941 47 50
56 50 47
59 50 54 55 50 48
48 47 48
49
49
50 46 46
58 55 48 48 44
55 49 43
57 49 48 48 50
4749 50
51 I-IV
57
5748 55
47 46 44 46
46 46
47
56 55
46
45
47 46
47 50 50 42 49
46
51
48
47
6252 62 55 51
47 46 46 38 44 46
47 50 48
59
57
51 51
49 40 47
49 50
47
5143 51
50
50
47
47 46 47
5445 52
49 50 50
50
48 48 46
46
47
46
48 4948 49
51
50
51 5143 47
49 50
54 49 49 50 49
54 53 V 47
48 47
50
50
49
5546 50
50
44
44
57 55
56
54 49
54
59 52
5950 57 50 5444 52
51
59
58 52 53
54
48 58 54 47 47
46
59 47
46
49
I-IV 50
45
47
51
48
54
57 6455 64
51
51
IV 51
45 51
50 5143
45
62
56 49
5445 49 52 48 47
64
57
I-IV 50
53 52 52 44
54 49
5849 55 50
52
54 48
52
55 46 49
59
58
58 57 I-IV 47
49
47
46 47
60 50
54
I-IV 52
57
5747 55
50
51
50
51 52
6658 57
52 57 50
IV-V
48
5244
66
I-IV
57 55 53 50 53 5345 51 48 46
65
65
58
58 58
57
5646 51
57
6253 55 53 52 52
50
I-III
50
64
I-V 59
56
55 54 56
50
47 47
53
6658 63
62
62 52 51
5548 50
49
66 55
65
49 5244 52
55 54
51
48 50
4952 51
48 52 49
48 51
48 50
50
50
56 51
49 51
57
I-V 47
48
53 45
56 48 47
60 60 50 55 52
51
69 I-IV 59 57 I-IV 52
51
53
55
50
50
50
50 51
50
7365 69
60 56
6050 55 52
III-IV
53
52 46 I-IV 51 54
I-IV
53
73
60 58 58
59
55 45
48
56
61 52 54
5649
54
53 5446 54
57 585756
56
I-IV 52 51 59
5661
60 57
56
59 49
51
I-IV 60 59 55 53 52
69 I-IV 56 56
53
51 52
53
59 53 53 59 49 55
60 59 51
7466 68
59
56 49 47 46
53
74 53 59 47
74 53 56
63 I-III 52
I-IV 54 I-IV 58
62 51 53 59 50 50
5952 52
63
6757 62 6052 59
58
51
50 53 51
52 52 50
64 I-IV 57 59 59
I-IV 59 59
63
63
6355
58
5959
58 I-IV 57 I-IV 57
67
67 6757 59 59 60 60 55
63 61
61 58 6053 58 6153 58
55 61 62
67 55
67 63 63 60 5457 61 59
60 59 59
63 60 59 56 58
75 I-IV 63 62
55
55
74 74
73
72
64
6757 I-IV 55
74 I-V I-IV
64 63 63 54
73
66 67 6858 63 58
7466 69 70
7567
69
69
73 67
68 65 I-IV 59
69
I-IV 67 64
63 64
68 68
67 66 68 6858 I-IV
62
7366 64
64
53
62
65 69
69 68
65
6959 64
56
59 68 65
59 66
I-IV 65
69
69
64 I-IV 67
58 54 54
48
65 69 54 54
6960 64 65
69 7162 60 65
58
57 56
56 55
55 54 51
51
63
57 I-IV
70
I-IV I-IV 64
56 69 69 68
59
I-IV 67 65 I-IV
64
6959
65 69
68 66
6962
66 65
65 6962
64
63 I-IV 69 71
71
7264 67 68
6962 65
69 71 68 69
56
55 69 59 64 64
I-V 72
707170 69 69 68
69
68
69
69
71 69 69
54 65
55
54 6959 54 64
69
69
56
61
63
I-IV
54 64
69 58 68
64 68
52
53 65
I-V 64 68
64 68
6858 63 72
53
64 I-V 68 I-IV 71
54
6858 64
7261 57
67
54 58
56 57
72
70 71
68
64
I-IV 67
I-IV
68
62
7060
66
7262
67
64 58
59
57
11 Scenario with buildings, roads and areas of designated land use

(and symbols for building evaluation)
The building evaluation symbols have been attached to all buildings auto-
matically using the Modify Object command. Then the calculation for de-
fined receiver points is started (this includes calculation of façade levels
and building evaluation.
Step 2 11.6.7 Evaluation as single digit result using Object-Scan

Evaluation is carried out using the command Grid|Object-Scan (see
chapter 11.6.6). The parameters and expressions that should be used for
this type of evaluation are shown in the following window. Leaving this
window with OK, the single digit result is calculated taking into account
the façade levels of all 97 buildings.
Manual
Edit Dialog Objekt-Scan
The following parameters are used:

11
PO_AREA ground surface covered by the building
(area of polygon)
PO_HREL_P1 relative height of the building at point 1
The other parameters are explained above.
After confirmation with OK the noise induced reduction in value for all
buildings is shown. In this case: 513038,35 € .
Manual
10
Evaluation example 2b - loss in value based on indi-

vidual residential premises for all areas of designa-
ted land-use
The same scenario shown in example 2a is used again, but now the result
is to be evaluated for all areas separately.
Monetary2.cna Load example2.cna and open Tables|Other Objects|Areas of designated
Land use. You see that the column Name is empty.
Step 1 11.6.7 Building evaluation and calculation of a building’s noise map

for all residential areas
This calculation has just been done - if not look to step 1 in the last chap-
ter.
Step 2 11.6.7 Evaluation for each separate area using Object-Scan

The reduction of value due to noise shall be calculated separately with re-
gard to the buildings in in each area. This resulting value shall be written
into the attribute Bez (that means that the result is written in the field
11 Name in the edit dialog - any other attribute can be chosen).
Open the dialog Object-Scan with Grid|Object-Scan and in Action /
Sum into: select Specified Areas / Polygons as shown in the following fi-
gure.
Manual
The parameters in the dialog Object-Scan to write the

results in the field Name of each area
Target object type is Area of Designated Use. With Bez as attribute the
result is written in the field Name of each area. After doing this evaluation
you find the result value in column Name of Tables|Other Objects|Area
11
of Designated Use as shown in the following table.
Results in column Name after evaluation
Manual
12
The value 0.00 (zero) in the field Name indicates that either the assess-
ment level is more then 5 dB below the maximum sound level (and there-
fore no rent reduction occurs) or that non building is placed in that area.
Evaluation Example 2c - Evaluation of average loss

in value in a gliding window and presentation
as a coloured map
Only to be complete, this further method shall be mentioned. Calculation
of facade levels and building evaluation is the same as in the examples be-
fore.
To present the result as a coloured map a grid must be calculated. This is
necessary because the grid points must already exist before you can alloca-
te a value to a grid point calculated for a window with Object-Scan.
To save calculation time, this is best done with all roads switched off. Cal-
culate the grid, e.g., with a spacing of 5 m. For evaluation use Grid|Ob-
11 ject-Scan with the parameters and adjustments as shown:
Manual
Parameter settings to calculate the reduction in rent
The reduction in value for all buildings is added up in a window of 100m x

100m, normalised to 100 m² and attached with the grid point in the center. 11
Then the window is moved one grid spacing and the same is repeated. At
the end all parameters in Grid|Appearance must be chosen so that all va-
lues can be presented in the map (colours, the lower and upper limit etc).
Manual
14
11
Manual
Manual CadnaA
Chapter 12 Configuration of Calculation
Chapter 5 Basics 5
Chapter 6 Import 6
Chapter 8 Sources 8
Examples Tutorial
Manual
2 Chapter 12 Configuration ofCalculation
12
Manual
Contents 12.1 1
12.1 Contents
12.2 Sound Rays and Reflection
12.2.1 Sound Rays from Point Sources
12.2.2 Sound Rays from extended Sources
such as Line and Area Sources
12.2.3 The Projection Method for
extended Sound Sources
12.2.4 Reflection
12.2.5 Reflection of the 1st Order
12.2.6 Reflections of Higher Order
12.3 Displaying Sound Rays

12
12.4 Configuration
12.4.1 Country Tab
12.4.2 Implemented Calculation Methods
12.4.3 General Tab
12.4.4 Partition Tab
12.4.5 Reference Time Tab
12.4.6 Evaluation Parameter Tab
12.4.7 DTM Digital Terrain Model Tab
12.4.8 Reflection Tab
12.4.9 Industry Tab
12.4.10 Road Tab
12.4.11 Railroad Tab
12.4.12 AzB Tab
Manual
2
12.1 Chapter 12 Configuration of Calculation
Contents
12.4.13 Optimisable Source Tab
12.5 Selecting Data for the Calculation

12.6 Calculation Protocol
12.7 Compact Protocol
12
Manual
Sound Rays and Reflection 12.2 1
12.2 Sound Rays and Reflection

CadnaA enables the calculation of sound propagation according to stand-
ardized procedures (calculation according to standards like CRN, CRTN,
ISO 9613 etc.) and with settings that are defined by the user.
This chapter deals with the second task and its possibilities with CadnaA
and is therefore more concerned with the pysical aspects of sound propa-
gation. This is very important for us because CadnaA is used increasingly
for expert work, in scientific work at universities and in lectures. Although
the professional usage requires a strict application of the pre-determined
guidelines and standards it can be very helpful in correctly processing spe-
cial problem-orientated cases which are not covered by the regulations.
This especially concerns the treatment of reflections of a higher order.
With the above regulations a reflection of the first order is only dealt with
according to the mirror image method and therefore the reflection of a ray
at one acoustically even surface.
The contribution of more orders of reflections to the total result, e.g., at the
building facades on both sides of a closed built-up road, will be taken into
account by calculating analytically a correction for multiple reflections
12
from the geometrical and acoustic parameters.
This strategy fails if the geometries of the road built-up at both sides is
completely different and varies from building to building. The same prob-
lem exists with the noise level in backyards - it must be calculated taking
into account high order reflections.
CadnaA is able to calculate reflections completely up to higher order. It is
clear that this increases calculation times, because the number of rays
grow exponentially with this reflection order. With the possibility to show
all these calculated rays at the screen, CadnaA is a very helpful tool in
learning and teching about sound propagation.
Chapter 12.3 explains how paths of rays can be displayed. Because of the
selective display possibilities for the different orders (by using groups), the
handling might look a bit complicated, but it is an excellent tool for clari-
Manual
2
Sound Rays and Reflection
fying the executed calculation and therefore can be helpful in a technical

report in many cases. We recommend that the detailed examples be under-
stood step by step. Once you have taken this initial hurdle the inclusion of
ray representations in drawings and text documents is easily possible.
12.2.0
12
Manual
Chapter 12.2 Sound Rays and Reflection
Sound Rays from Point Sources 12.2.1 1
12.2.1 Sound Rays from Point Sources
In a physical sense a wave field goes out from a source Q which transports
the sound power in all directions via the movement of the air particles. Be-
cause the surface of the spheres’ hull expands with increasing distance,
and the sound power is distributed over the hull over a certain period of
time, the sound intensity decreases and therefore the sound pressure level,
too. With increasing distance source - receiver it becomes quieter.
12
Sound propagation from Source Q to Reciver Point RP physical (left) and numerical (right)
If CadnaA calculates, the distance between source Q and receiver RP will

be determined and, with the sound power level of the source, the sound
pressure level at the receiver point will be calculated with analytical for-
mulas which have been derived from the physical model. The wave field is
in a certain way replaced by one ray from source to receiver.
Manual
2
12.2.1 Chapter 12.2 Sound Rays and Reflection
Sound Rays from Point Sources
If there are many sources there are also many sound rays which have to be
considered in the calculation. For all receivers affecting sound rays the cal-
culated proportion of the level will be added energetically.
IP1 IP1
Q6 Q6
Q1 Q1
IP2 IP2
Q2 Q2
Q3 Q3
Q4 Q5 Q4 Q5
IP3 IP3
5 Sources and 3 Receiver (IP) The Sound Rays
12.2.1
12
Manual
Sound Rays from extended Sources such as Line and Area Sources 12.2.2 1
12.2.2 Sound Rays from extended Sources

such as Line and Area Sources
Even in the case of calculating the noise level from an extended source as
the area source shown in fig. A, a distance has to be found that can be used
in the equation of propagation. This may be wrong if the pivot of the ex-
tended source is used as starting point of the ray. Since, actually, each ar-
bitrary portion of the area source emits sound, the same value of a level
must result if the total stripe according to figure B is to be subdivided and
the sound pressure level at the receiver point is calculated as the sum of the
levels of the 5 contributions from the partial sources FQ1 till FQ5.
IP IP
FQ FQ1 FQ2 FQ3 FQ4 FQ5
12
A: Area source with sound ray B: Partitioning of the area sources
However, the partial sources, according to figure B, result in different par-

tial levels because of the different distances. On the basis of the energetic
addition a higher sound pressure level results from fig. B than from taking
into account only one ray emitted from the pivot as shown in fig. A.
This error has been avoided in CadnaA by partitioning each extended line
or area source in sufficiently small parts for automatic calculation.
But these partial areas do not have the same size as shown in figure B.
They become even smaller the closer the corresponding section of the ex-
tended source is to the receiver.
Manual
2
Sound Rays from extended Sources such as Line and Area Sources
This dynamic division, which must newly be calculated for each receiver,
leads to a considerably faster calculation in comparison to the equal divi-
sion. The following figure shows the sound rays, which CadnaA takes into
account, with the irregularly shaped area source provided below.
IP
The sound rays for the area source which CadnaAis tak-
ing into account for the calculation.
12
Manual
Sound Rays from extended Sources such as Line and Area Sources 12.2.2 3
The same applies to line sources. By the road shown in the following fig-
ure the borders of the stripe are the axis of the outer lanes which are each
considered as line sources and taken into account in the calculation of lev-
el .
IP
The sound rays for the roads which CadnaA is taking into
account for the calculation.
12.2.2
12
Manual
4
Sound Rays from extended Sources such as Line and Area Sources
12
Manual
The Projection Method for extended Sound Sources 12.2.3 1
12.2.3 The Projection Method for

extended Sound Sources
The automatic division of an extended sound source into smaller partial ar-
eas depending on the distance of the receiver (see Chapter 12.2.2 "Sound
Rays from extended Sources such as Line and Area Sources") is not suffi-
cient to avoid errors in the calculation of sound pressure levels.
IP
12
Figure 1: Calculation of the area source „soccer field“ with two sound rays
Let us take the example of a soccer field as in the upper figure. For a noise
calculation at the remote receiver point IP CadnaA would split the soccer
field into two partial areas and would therefore take into account two
sound rays. This is correct for the shown situation.
Manual
2
The Projection Method for extended Sound Sources
Now a shielding club house with a height of 8 m is located in the position

shown in the following figure.
IP
Clubhaus
Figure 2: Soccer field with partially shielding club house
In the calculation of both displayed sound rays, screening and therefore a

lower sound pressure level occurs in each case. But, in fact, not all partial
areas, which are included in the calculation with the paths of the two rays,
are shielded by the building. The resulting sound pressure level would be
too low in the present example.
CadnaA avoids this error by using a projection method.
With that, in the first step the area sources will be divided into shielded
and non-shielded areas and in the second step subdivided according to the
12
relation of area size to receiver distance. In this way, in the present exam-
ple, 12 partial areas are created: altogether, nevertheless, because of the
large distance from the receiver (340 m), 8 areas are not shielded and 4 ar-
eas are shielded.
Manual
The Projection Method for extended Sound Sources 12.2.3 3
IP
Clubhaus
Figure 3a: Two step division according to shielding

objects in the path of rays and the distance of the receiver
In the present example the calculation results in 44 dB(A) of free sound

propagation according to figure 1, 39 dB(A) in the calculation of the situa-
tion with the club house without using the projection method according to
figure 2 and 42 dB(A) with correct division resulting from the use of the
projection method according to the figure 3a.
Figure 3b shows the projection method with a road 12
Figure 3b Projection method for a road
Both axis of the outer road lanes - that is the margin of the road stripe in
the CadnaA presentation - are first divided according to the shielding ob-
Manual
4
The Projection Method for extended Sound Sources
jects between receiver and road. Then a subdivision occurs according to

the distance criteria.
Figure 3 c: Projection method for reflecting sound parts
Much more complicated are the relations in the projection of the reflecting
sound parts dealt with in the next chapter. Figure 3 c shows the construc-
tion of both sections for the axis of the outer road lanes which are neces-
sary because of the reflecting building. The same method - graphically
hardly to explain - will also be applied by CadnaA for the multiple reflec-
tions dealt with futher on.
12 Although the projection method naturally extends the calculation consid-

erably it should always be switched on for a detailed calculation like
„acoustical zoom“. After all, even in the simple situation figure 3a, 12
paths of rays instead of 2 must be calculated.
Manual
Reflection 12.2.4 1
12.2.4 Reflection
Additional sound rays appear in the sector of the path of sound propaga-
tion from reflective objects which affect the receiver and could increase
the sound level.
The mirror-source method will be applied regularly by the calculation of
reflection and it is therefore assumed that the reflective areas are „acousti-
cally even“. In the experience of engineering the numerical calculation of
diffuse reflection has only been achieved over the statistical approach for
the density of scattering objects (see e.g. /32/). A numerically correct reso-
lution for point-precise calculation with diffuse reflection is dealt with in /
33/. But this is still a lavish resolution for the professional practice.
On the other hand the mirror-source method has been proved excellent for
the propagation of sound, also in cases strictly without even areas. The
propagation of sound including reflection up to an extremly high order has
been described precisely (see to this /34/ and /12/) for industry halls in
which the surfaces areas are anything but even (through extensions such as
pipelines and so on).
12
Manual
2
Reflection
12
Manual
Reflection of the 1st Order 12.2.5 1
12.2.5 Reflection of the 1st Order
You are required to calculate the reflection of the first order if such a re-
flection contributes to the sound level at the receiver according to the
guidelines RLS90 /9/, Schall03 /8/ and ISO 9613-2 /21/.
The calculation occurs in three steps which have to be carried out for each
reflective area according to each Q-IP pair.
1. Step: Constructing the position of the mirror sources
2. Step: Sectioning the connecting line of the reflected source - receiver
point with an area and determining the breakhrough-point.
3. Step: Calculating the part of the sound level according to the longer
path of the ray over the reflecting area including the absorption
coefficient of this area.
In the example shown below two parts of sound level are taken into ac-
count at the receiver (IP) which are calculated from the displayed paths of
rays.
12
Figure A: The paths of rays with the reflection of the first order
Manual
2
Reflection of the 1st Order
Important for the correct calculation of reflection, according to the men-

tioned guidelines, is that all reflections of the first order be checked and, if
necessary, be included in the calculation. That is not obvious - software
programs exist which check, starting at the receiver, a ray only till the first
reflector crosses the path of the ray in the plan, even if this reflector is not
affecting anything because of the low height and the area lying behind
which reflects the ray. The calculation of reflection must, as in the exam-
ple of picture A, also find a level-raising contribution if, as in picture B, a
low obstacle at the base seems to block the ray’s path.
H=8m
IP
H=1m
12 Q
Figure B: The paths of rays for the reflection of the first

order with obstacles in the path of the ray.
A typical example of this case is shown in figure C. The program only in-
vestigates up to the first reflector which is found, then at the house on the
left side of the road the amount of reflection which is caused by the high
building is not taken into account only because a 1 m high wall is located
between this high building and the four lane road. This calculation is not in
accordance with RLS90 in this case.
Besites this, CadnaA takes into account reflections if screening objects
obstruct the path of the reflected sound ray. The part of the sound level
which was caused by the reflecting sound at the receiver point is then re-
Manual
Reflection of the 1st Order 12.2.5 3
duced by the value which results from the screening calculation for the
path: mirror-source - receiver.
12
Figure C: For the calculation of the sound level at the left residential building, according to
RLS90, the reflection of the traffic noise on the high right building has to be cal-
culated despite the low wall between the road and the building.
CadnaA also calculates the reflection for extended sources such as line or
area sources, but these objects will be split into sufficiently small partial
sources. Figure D shows the already familiar soccer field with three build-
ings located in the neighbourhood and the paths of rays taken into account.
Manual
4
Reflection of the 1st Order
Figure D: The paths of rays taken into account in a calcu-

lation of sound levels on a soccer field
12
Manual
Reflections of Higher Order 12.2.6 1
12.2.6 Reflections of Higher Order
In calculating reflections of second order all valid mirror-sources have to

be reflected again on all reflecting areas to prove the validity of each re-
flection and to calculate the corresponding path of the ray.
The number of rays with a further order of reflection results from the pro-
duct of the number of reflections from the last order multiplied by the
number of valid reflectors. The specification of this numeric method is
found in /33/.
It is obvious that the number of possible reflections explodes with an in-
creasing number of orders. Calculations up to higher orders are only com-
pletely possible for very restricted arrangements. On the other hand, a
reflection has to be calculated first before its contribution can be evaluated
as irrelevant.
CadnaA enables the calculation of reflections of high orders for all type of
sources. The paths of ray can be displayed and the sound level contribu-
tions of the reflections are separately identified. According to the specifi-
cations of the standards for the source type Road and Railway with
activating these standards only reflection of first order are calculated using 12
mirror-image method - reflections of higher order are taken into account
with a penalty for multiple reflections.
An example for the complete calculation of reflection up to the 10. order is
shown with the backyard in figure A. A point source located in front of
the opening beams into the backyard, and the sound level shall be calculat-
ed at the represented receiver IP.
Manual
2
Reflections of Higher Order
Figure A: Radiation in a backyard
12
Manual
Reflections of Higher Order 12.2.6 3
12
Manual
4
Reflections of Higher Order
Figure B: All paths of rays for each individual order of reflections in the backyard
12
Figure C: All possible paths of rays in a calculation up to the 10. order
By the way - CadnaA needs only a fraction of a second with a Pentium

computer for a complete calculation up to the 10. order as in this example.
Abitrary arrangements of objects can be taken into account for a calcula-
tion of reflections. With this technique it is possible to perform the calcula-
tion of the sound level corresponding to the reality in cases not
corresponding to the valid guidelines.
Manual
Displaying Sound Rays 12.3 1
12.3 Displaying Sound Rays

If Generate Rays is activated in the edit dialog of a receiver point all cal-
culated rays with this target point are inserted as auxiliary plygon lines.
With double-click on such a ray its contribution to the sound level at the
receiver is indicated. This sound contribution is shown in the field ID with
its proportionate level, e.g., RAY_419_00 which signifies that the direct
sound ray (_00) contributes 41.9 dB.
The rays are shown on screen as if they cross screening objects straightly -
nevertheless screening is calculated taking into account vertical and lateral
diffraction. In this case an s will be attached in their identifier. A shielded
ray of the eighth order for which a calculation of diffraction has been en-
forced may have an identifier RAY_419_08s.
On this base, rays with a certain order of reflection can be displayed or
switched off easily in CadnaA with the efficient group function
(Tables|Groups see Chapter 18.2 "Groups"). If the rays are displayed, all
diffracted sound rays can be switched off in the representation by deacti-
vating the group with the expression *_??s.
With corresponding settings for all deactivated objects in Options|Appe-
12
rance (see Chapter 13.6 "Object Appearance") you can enforce the dif-
fracted and non-contributed, mostly irrelevant rays to disappear
completely.
But the best is learning by doing - trace step by step the following exam-
ple.
) Start CadnaA
) In Options|Limits enter the values for the limit as shown in the follo-
wing dialog.
Manual
2
12.3 Chapter 12.2 Sound Rays and Reflection
Displaying Sound Rays
Insert the following objects
) Point source with PWL 100 dB, Name Q1 - coordinates 20/5/5
) 2 buildings with a height of 25 m and Reflection loss of 0 dB
- building 1 (80/60 , 85/60 , 85/100 , 80/100)

- building 2 (0/130 , 5/130 , 5/160 , 0/160)
Click in the toolbox on the icon and enter the value 80 via the
keyboard - hereby an edit dialog opens to enter a polygon point
- press the TAB-key and enter the value 60 - confirm with OK
12
and enter the next value for the second pair of coordinates.
After inserting the coordinates of the first building, quit the
insertion mode by clicking with the RIGHT mouse key.
Again with the RIGHT mouse key, click once on the line of the
building plan - the edit dialog opens.
Click on the button Geometry and enter a building with a rela-
tiv height of 25 m.
Repeat this for the second building. The building height is
adjusted automatically.
Manual
) 2 Receiver points
- I2 (35/110/5) and
- I3 (35/170/5)
Click on the corresponding icon in the toolbox
Enter the coordinate via keyboard and close the edit dialog
polygon point by clicking OK
Open the edit dialog by clicking with the Right mouse key on
the margin of the receiver point.
Confirm with OK.
) In Calculation|Configuration|Reflection adjust a max. reflection

order of 2 or more
The rays for the receiver I3 shall be displayed.
) In the edit mode, open the edit dialog for receiver I3 by double-cli-
cking on its border and activating the option Generate Rays.
12
) Now start the calculation with a click on the Pocket Calculator in
Manual
4
the icon bar.

The following representation occurs after the calculation. CadnaA has cal-
culated the direct ray, a reflection of the first order and a reflection of the
second order. (CadnaA calculates reflections completely up to the speci-
fied order - shall we bet that there are no more possible paths?)
H o us e 2 I3 H o us e 2 I3
I2 H o us e 1 I2 Ho us e 1
12 S our c e S o ur c e
The scenario after calculation and display of rays
After double-clicking a ray - or by Tables|Other Objects|Aux.Polygon -

you can identify the rays on the basis of its ID, e.g., RAY_419_00 which
means that the level contribution of this ray is 41.9 dB and the last two
digits indicate the order of reflection. Double zero is the direct ray without
reflection, 01 is a reflection of the first order, 02 of the second order and so
on.
Manual
* Now pay attention to the possibility of CadnaA in the tables - if you

click on a data record, e.g., of the table Other Objects|Aux. Polygon
the corresponding ray in the diagram will be marked and can easily
be identified.
Now only rays of the second order shall be displayed . This is in our exam-
ple simplified by directly switching off the non-desired ray in the corre-
sponding edit dialog on its ID field. But the deactivation of rays described
in the following way is, however, with complex layouts the only realistic
alternative.
) Insert in Tables|Group a new table row (press the INS-key), double-

click it and enter the expression *_02 in the same-named field and
confirm with OK.
12
) Insert a second line after the first one and enter the expression R*
and
Manual
6
) deactivate this group (just enter a minus character - in the column

Marking). After confirming with OK you will only see the desired
group with rays of the second order.
DisplayRays.cna If the deactivated rays are displayed as bright grey dashes, let them disap-
pear completely - this representation would still cover all activated rays in
more complex situations. For this, use Options|Appearance| (deactiva-
te) see Chapter 13.6 "Object Appearance".
To get to know the deleting of rays and the handling with shielded rays we
recommend you do the following exercise.
) Activate all groups again in Tables|Group
) Click on the House 1 and copy it in a position with a left offset so that
only a ray of the second order is intersected (see following figure)
House 2 I3
12
I2 House 1
Source
Manual
* You do not need to delete the rays! If you start the calculation again,
the rays are updated.
Now start a new calculation - click on the Pocket Calculater in the icon DisplayRays2.cna
bar. The ID of the ray which intersects the new building now contains the
identifier RAY_220_02S. To eliminate only the shielded rays from the
representation
) insert a new row in Tables|Group, enter *s in the field expression

and deactivate this group. The shielded ray disappears.
Maybe you should save this file as a default file for some tests on your
own and open this file if you want to create such situations. You can delete
all existing objects before. The correct groups then exist and you only need
to change the order of reflection in the middle row to display all orders of
reflections, one after the other.
12
Manual
8
12
Manual
Configuration 12.4 1
12.4 Configuration
In developing CadnaA, it was, and continues to be, our goal to give the
professional user the desired freedom of choice and control while relieving
those only interested in overall results from having to master all the availa-
ble options. This complexity and flexibility of CadnaA is particularly evi-
dent when large stocks of data have been entered which are then to be
processed under the Calculation|Configuration menu.
To meet the requirements for the calculation according to EC-directive on
environmental noise CadnaA since release 3.5 possesses a brand-new con-
cept for defining and calculating evaluation parameters (see Chapter
12.4.6). In this concept you have beside a multitude of pre-defined noise
levels (for single or combined time intervals) also different evaluation pa-
rameters (like uncertainty sigma). Furthermore you can define evaluation
parameters by formulas.
In CadnaA since release 3.5 can be calculated simultaneously up to four
evaluation parameters either for single receiver points or in a receiver grid
(additionally to the ground).
The Calculation Configuration dialog serves to specify all settings re-
12
quired for the calculation, and, quite conveniently, to save these settings
with the calculated project file.
There are various tabs for groups of options within this dialog. Click the
tab for the desired group to specify and select the options.
By way of example, the tabs are described here for application of the Ger-
man guidelines. They apply accordingly to those of other countries.
also see chapters
11.2.2 Calculation and Presentation of Results for Receiver Points on the
Display
18.7 Batch Operation
18.6 PCSP - Program Controlled Segmented Processing
Manual
2
Configuration
12
Manual
Chapter 12.4 Configuration
Country Tab 12.4.1 1
12.4.1 Country Tab
In the field Country we choose from a list the name of a country or group Country 12.4.1
according to whose guidelines and standards we want to calculate our 12
project. Thereby the fields Industry, Road, Railway, and Air-traffic dis-
play the corresponding guidelines/standards used to calculate these noise
types.
If you select User-defined, you can choose among the calculation proce-
dures implemented or purchased for the different types of noise.
For example, to calculate according to the TA-Lärm enforced since Nov.
1, 1998, select Germany(TALärm) as the country setting. The tabs and
the available options may differ depending on your selection.
The button Configuration allows you to save your calculation configura-
tion and load it again if required (see also chapter 18.8 Prototype File).
Manual
2
12.4.1 Chapter 12.4 Configuration
Country Tab
12
Manual
Implemented Calculation Methods 12.4.2 1
12.4.2 Implemented Calculation Methods
Germany: 12.4.2
VDI 2714 " Outdoor sound propagation", January 1988, Beuth-Verlag, VDI 2714 12.4.2
Berlin, Köln
VDI 2720 Sheet 1, " Noise control by barriers outdoors", March 1997, VDI 2720-1 12.4.2
Beuth-Verlag, Berlin, Köln
DIN 18005-1 : 1987-05 DIN 18005-1 12.4.2
Noise abatement in town planning; calculation methods, Beuth Verlag
Berlin
RLS90 Guidelines for Noise Control at Roads (RLS-90) Published by the RLS90 12.4.2
German Federal Ministry of Transport, Dept. for Road Construction, Ed.
1990, Traffic Gazette 44 (1990)
Schall03 Guidelines for the Calculation of Sound Immission from Schall03 12.4.2
Railways Schall 03, Akustik 03, Ed. 1990, DB (German Railways), Cen-
tral Administration, Munich
Current Information of BZA Munich - Akustik - BZA München Schall03 - Aerodynamic
103.10313, 962/6302, Sheet 1, 021 from 17.8.1991, DB (German Influences 12.4.2
Railways), Central Administration, Munich 12
TA-Lärm: Sixth general administrative regulation concerning the Federal TA-Lärm 12.4.2
Immission Control Act (Technical instruction for noise protection – TA-
Lärm) dated 1998-08-26, published in Gemeinsames Ministerialblatt dated
1998-08-28, enforced since 1.11.1998
Zur Bestimmung der meteorologischen Dämpfung - Eine Anleitung mit TAL98 12.4.2
Beispielen - Landesumweltamt NRW, Postfach 102363, D-45023 Essen
18th regulation for the execution of the Federal Immission Protection Act 18.BImSchV 12.4.2
(Regulation concerning the protection from noise from sports facilities -
18. BImSchV) dated 1991-07-18, Bundesgesetzblatt, annual set 1991, part
1, p. 1588
Manual
2
Implemented Calculation Methods
ISO 9613 12.4.2 ISO 9613

Acoustics - Attenuation of sound during propagation outdoors -
Part 1: Calculation of the absorption of sound by the atmosphere, 1993
Part 2: General method of calculation (ISO 9613-2:1996)
ISO International Organization for Standardization, Switzerland
Meteorology: 12.4.2 according to ISO 9613 and CONCAWE - selectable on the Tab Industry
VDI 3770 12.4.2 VDI 3770 Characteristic noise emission values of technical sound sources;
Sports and recreational facilities; First working draft as of February 1996
AzB 12.4.2 AzB Guideline for the calculation of noise areas in the vicinity of civilian
and military airports according to the law for the protection of aircraft
noise ed. 30.3.1971 (BGBI I, S. 282)
MLus92 12.4.2 Merkblatt über Luftverunreinigungen an Straßen - Teil: Straßen ohne oder
mit lockerer Randbebauung, Ausgabe 1991, Geänderte Fassung 1996, For-
schungsgesellschaft für Straßen- und Verkehrswesen e.V., Köln, Arbeits-
gruppe Verkehrsführung und Verkehrssicherheit.
European
Standards: 12.4.2
12 Directive Directive 2002/49/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of
2002/49/EC 12.4.2 25th June 2002 relating to the assessment and management of environ-
mental noise, Official Journal of the European Communities, L189/12,
EN, 18.7.2002
ECAC.CEAC ECAC.CEAC Doc. 29 "Report on Standard Method of Computing Noise
Doc. 29 12.4.2 Contours around Civil Airports", 1997. Of the different approaches to the
modelling of flight paths, the segmentation technique referred to in section
7.5 of ECAC.CEAC Doc. 29 will be used.
Harmonoise Harmonised Accurate and Reliable Methods for the EU Directive on the
Assessment and Management of Environmental Noise: WP3: Engineering
Models. Programming The Point-To-Point Propagation Model. Type of
Document: Technical report; Document reference: HAR34TR-041124-
CSTB01; Level of confidentiality: Public, Date: 24/11/2004; Author: Dir
Van Maercke
Manual
Austria: 12.4.2
Schallabstrahlung und Schallausbreitung ÖAL Nr. 28, Dezember 1987, ÖAL 28 12.4.2
Österreichischer Arbeitsring für Lärmbekämpfung, A-1200 Wien, Wex-
str.19-23
(ÖAL Guideline #28, Sound Radiation and Sound Propagation, December
1987, Austrian Association for Noise Abatement)
Berechnung der Schallimmission durch Schienenverkehr, Zugverkehr, ÖNORM
Verschub- und Umschlagbetrieb, 1. Dezember 1994, Österreichisches S5011 12.4.2
Normungsinstitut (ÖN), Heinestr. 38, Postfach 130, A-1021 Wien
(ÖNORM S 5011 : 1995-04 Determination of noise immission caused by
rail traffic - Railway traffic, shunting and cargo handling operations)
Richtlinie der Österreichischen Forschungsgemeinschaft Straße und RVS 3.02
Verkehr (FSV) - Arbeitsgruppe „Verkehr und Umwelt" - Arbeitsausschuß Lärmschutz 12.4.2
„Immissionsschutz Lärm", RVS 3.02 Lärmschutz, Stand Dez.1997
(RVS 3.02 Protection from Noise, December 1997, Austrian Research As-
sociation for Road and Traffic, Echenbachgasse 9, A-1010 Wien, Austria)
Switzerland: 12.4.2
Schweizer Schriftenreihe Umweltschutz Nr. 57 - Anleitung zur Ermittlung STL-86 12.4.2
12
und Beurteilung von Lärmimmissionen an Straßen, Herausgegeben vom
Bundesamt für Umweltschutz Bern, Januar 1987
(Swiss Report Environmental Protection No. 57 - Instruction for investiga-
tion and evaluation of Noise Immission from Roads, published by Federal
Office for Environmental Protection, Bern, January 1987)
Schweizerisches Emissions- und Immissionsmodell für die Berechnung SEMIBEL 12.4.2
von Eisenbahnlärm, Herausgegeben vom Bundesamt für Umwelt, Wald
und Landschaft, Bern, März 1990
(Swiss Method for the calculation of railway noise, published by Federal
Office for Environmental, Forest and Conservation, Bern, March 1990)
Manual
4
Nordic
Guidelines 12.4.2
Industry 12.4.2 Environmental noise from industrial plants - General prediction method.
Danish Acoustical Laboratory, The Danish Academy of Technical Scienc-
es, Report no. 32, 1982
Railway 12.4.2 Railway Traffic Noise - The Nordic Prediction Method, TemaNord
1996:524, Nordic Council of Ministers, Store Strandstraede 18, DK-1255
Copenhagen K, ISBN 92 9120837 X, ISSN 0908-6692
Road 12.4.2 Road Traffic Noise - Nordic Prediction Method, TemaNord 1996:525,
Nordic Council of Ministers, Store Strandstraede 18, DK-1255 Copenha-
gen K, ISBN 92 91208361, ISSN 0908-6692
United
Kingdom: 12.4.2
CRTN 12.4.2 Calculation of Road Traffic Noise, Department of the Environment Welsh
Office, London: Her Majesty’s Stationery office, 1988
CRN 12.4.2 Calculation of Railway Noise - 1995 - Deparment of Transport, HMSO,
London
BS 5228 12.4.2 Noise immission by construction sites: British Standard BS 5228
12 Frankreich: 12.4.2
NMPB - Méthode de calcul incluant les effets météorologiques, version expérimen-
Routes 96 12.4.2 tale, Bruit des infrastructures routières, Janvier 1997 - Centre d’études sur
les réseaux, les transports, l’urbanisme et les constructions publiques
Service d’études techniques des routes et autoroutes - Laboratoire central
des ponts et chaussées - Centre scientifique et technique du bâtiment
Netherland 12.4.2
SRM II 12.4.2 Railway Noise: The Netherlands national computation method "Stand-
aard-Rekenmethode II" published in "Reken- en Meetvoorschrift Railver-
keerslawaai '96, Ministerie Volkshuisvesting, Ruimtelijke Ordening en
Milieubeheer, 20. November 1996".
Concawe 12.4.2 Concawe - the oil companies international study group for conservation of
clean air and water - europe (established in 1963), report no. 4/81, „the
Manual
propagation of noise from petroleum and petrochemical complexes to

neighbouring communities, Prepared by C.J. Manning, M.Sc., M.I.O.A.
Acoustic Technology Limited (Ref.AT 931), CONCAWE, Den Haag May
1981
Swedish guideline for air turbine noise selectable for industry - Ljud fran Sweden 12.4.2
vindkraftverk
Czech Republic 12.4.2

Kozak, J., Liberko, M.: Updated Method for Calculation of Road Traffic Liberko
Noise (in Czech), Annex of the Newsletter of the Ministry of the Environ-
ment of the Czech Republic. 1996, No. 3, p.1-16
USA 12.4.2
Still in process: FHWA Federal Highway Administration Model (http:// TNM
www.trafficnoisemodel.org) TNM Version 2.5, McTrans Center Universi-
ty of Florida, 2088 Northeast Waldo Road, Gainesville, Fl 32609, http://
mctrans.ce.ufl.edu
Air Pollution Standard (only include in APL additional option of CadnaA): 12.4.2
12
Germany: 12.4.2
Bundesministerium für Umwelt, Naturschutz und Reaktorsicherheit: Erste TALuft 2002
Allgemeine Verwaltungsvorschrift zum Bundes–Immissionsschutzgesetz
(Technische Anleitung zur Reinhaltung der Luft – TA Luft) vom 24. Juli
2002, Gemeinsames Ministerialblatt vom 30. Juli 2002 (GMBl. 2002, Heft
25 – 29, S. 511 – 605) Carl Heymanns Verlag KG, Luxemburger Straße
449, 50939 Köln (Tel.: 0221/943730)
Calulation method AUSTAL2000 (propagation method Air Pollution, see AUSTAL2000
http://www.austal2000.de
22.Verordnung zur Durchführung des Bundes-Immissionsschutzgesetzes 22. BImSchV
(Verordnung über Immissionswerte für Schadstoffe in der Luft - 22.
BImSchV) vom 11.9.2002 (BGBl. I S. 1819, geändert durch VO v.
27.5.1994, BGBl. I S. 1095) BGBl. III/FNA 2129-8-22
Manual
6
Europe 12.4.2
EC-Standard COUNCIL DIRECTIVE 1999/30/EC of 22 April 1999 relating to limit
1999/30/EG values for sulphur dioxide, nitrogen dioxide and oxides of nitrogen, partic-
ulate matter and lead in ambient air
12
Manual
General Tab 12.4.3 1
12.4.3 General Tab
Sound sources, whose contribution to the sound immission at the receiver max. Error
point is negligible, will be disregarded in the calculation if the overall error (dB) 12.4.3 12
induced by this simplification is not larger than the defined value. There-
fore, the larger the maximum permissible error in the final result, the
shorter the time required for the calculation.
For expertise work and not very large projects the setting 0 should be cho-
sen. If noise maps of cities are calculated a value of 0.5 or 1 should be a
good compromise.
The search radius defines a circle around the receiver point. Only sound max. Search
sources within this circle will be considered in the calculation. This is Radius (m) 12.4.3
helpful with very large projects - 2000 m maybe a good choice in those
cases.
The Minimum Distance Source to Receiver Point serves to avoid calcu- Min. Dist. Source to
lations near the area around a sound source. Imm. Point 12.4.3
Manual
2
General Tab
Uncertainty 12.4.3 In CadnaA you also have the possibility to evaluate the accuracy of noise
prediction. This accuracy depends on the accuracy of the emission values
used and the accuracy resulting from the calculation of propagation.
Propagation In addition to the uncertainty of the emission levels you also can take into
Coefficient account the uncertainty of the propagation calculation (meteorology etc.).
Uncertainty
For that enter the corresponding value in the box Propagation Coeff.
Uncertainty.
For the time being a standard deviation óD for the attenuation D which de-
pends on the distance is taken into account by CadnaA with the following
formula
⎛d ⎞
σ D = k ⋅ lg⎜⎜ ⎟⎟
⎝ d0 ⎠
where k can be defined by the user, d is the distance source – receiver and
d0 is a reference distance of 10 m. Based on experience a value of K = 3
maybe used.
* An entered sigma or a coefficient of propagation does not change the

12 assessment levels.
Standard To take the uncertainty into account you have to enter a Standard Devia-
Deviation tion sigma in dB in the Memo Window (see Chapter 5.5.3) of all noise
sources. If the sound power level of the source has been measured, this is
Manual
the standard deviation of reproducibility according to grade 1, 2 or 3 (see

ISO 3740 series)
The MemoWindow in the Edit Dialog of a Source

Make sure that you have chosen at least one of the evaluation parameter Sigma
SIGMA (for day | evening | night) in the Evaluation Parameter Tab.
After confirming the dialog with OK and executing the calculation with
Grid|Calc Grid (see Chapter 11.5) you get the distribution of uncertainty 12
in a grid.
The calculation of sigma for single receiver points (see Chapter 11.5) is
executed with the command Calculation|Calc or by clicking on the calcu-
later icon in the icon bar.
You can display the sigma for the receiver points either in the Result Ta-
ble (see Chapter 15.3) choosing the expression e.g. Level SigmaD (for
sima day-time) from the column list in the dialog of the Result Table or in
a Label (see Chapter 5.7.4) directly at the receiver point.
In /52/ is showed how the uncertainty of calculated assessment levels and
the uncertainty of calculated noise propagation can be determined. The 950_22_Uncertainty.pdf
application of the system realized in CadnaA is demonstrated in this publi-
cation with an explicit example.
Manual
4
General Tab
Extrapolate Grid Under Selecting this option will generate "seamless" transitions from the hori-
Buildings 12.4.3 zontal projection of an object to coloured areas and lines of equal sound
levels regardless of the calculation grid selected. This is achieved by inter-
polation of the levels calculated for the grid points (see also chapter 11.5.2
Appearance of Grid).
We recommend, however, that you deactivate this option before the calcu-
lation if lines of equal sound level are to be displayed with the option Ex-
clude Grid under Buildings active (see Chapter 11.5.1 paragraph
"Exclude Sound Sources/ Buildings").
Grid If this option with the settings n*n is selected, then a calculation is made at
interpolation 12.4.3 each of these (n+1) points of the specified grid points (Grid|Specifi-
cation), in the first step only and at the pivot of every rectangle, limited by
4 points.
If one of the following conditions is not fulfilled for one of the 4 edge
points and the center point of a n*n arrangement of grid points then this
rectangle is subdivided into 4 equal quadrangles and, for each quadrangle,
the same test is again performed. If one of these conditions is still exceed-
ed, then a further subdivision recursively occurs until the conditions are
12 fulfilled or all points, in accordance with the grid specification, are taken
into account in the calculation.
Conditions: The conditions are:
1. The mean level calculated from the levels at the 4 edge points should
not differ from the level at the center point more than the specified
maximum deviation (default setting 0.1 dB). This must be fulfilled
for both diagonal lines.
2. The difference between the largest and the smallest calculated level
at the 4 corner points of the rectangle is, at most, equal to the speci-
fied maximum value (default setting 10 dB).
If these conditions are fulfilled, then the interpolated values match the real
values inside the rectangle sufficiently and the levels at the remaining
Manual
points inside the rectangle are interpolated from the levels calculated at the
4 corner points.
You can use this approximation method to accelerate advantageously the fast
time consuming calculation of diffraction for road and railway traffic with Screeing (exp.) 12.4.3
many buildings.
In the calculation of diffraction you only take into account objects which
protrude into a predefined gradiation of a parabolic ray - low buildings
will not be checked in this way at all.
If this option is activated obstacles which are not cutted by the ray are not
displayed in the cross-section (see Chapter 13.12) either.
* This method should not be used for the calculation of point, line and
area sources according to VDI 2714 /16/ or DIN ISO 9613-2 /21/.
Selection of calculation method: Ray Tracing (RT) and Angle Scanning (AS) 12.4.3
Basically two methods or calculation strategies are used by noise predic-
tion software - the Ray-Tracing or the Angle Scanning model. CadnaA is
the only software program which both models offers to use. The Ray-Trac-
ing model is used by default. 12
The ray paths between sources and receivers are constructed deterministi- Ray Tracing (RT)
cally. Extended sources are subdivided dynamically using the projection
method. The parts covered by a single calculation ray are smaller in small
distances and larger in large distances. Screening objects and all gaps be-
tween them produce one ray minimum.
With deactivated option Angle Scan Method the Ray-Tracing model is
used.
Manual
6
General Tab
Ray-Tracing-model - with projection - extended sources

subdivided dynamically
12
Angle Scanning (AS) With activated checkbox Angle Scan Method the following described
method is taken into account.
It was additionally implemented to be compatible with Mithra a french
software program (CSTB).
Calculation of the level at a receiver point is done by rays starting from the
receiver and spaced in equal angle steps. Only objects crossed by the ray
are taken into account in the calculation. Point sources in the angle cone
are virtually moved to lay on the calculation ray.
Manual
Angle Scan Method - Rays starting from the receiver and

spaced in equal angle steps
12
If MITHRA Compatibility is activated, all the approximations used in Mithra Compatibility

Mithra are also used in CadnaA - this is the mode that should be used if
existing MITHRA projects are loaded and the results in CadnaA should be
the same.
* The checkbox is only available if the option CadnaA-Mithra is

purchased.
Manual
8
General Tab
12
Manual
Partition Tab 12.4.4 1
12.4.4 Partition Tab
For line sources and area sources the largest dimension of a section, gener- Raster Factor 12.4.4
ated by splitting, equals the product of the grid factor and the distance of 12
the centre of the section from the receiver point.
You may specify the maximum and minimum section lengths to be gener- Length of
ated by automatic splitting. The min. section length may also be given as Section 12.4.4
percentage of the total length.
Method 1 is the so-called "precise" method according to /31/, which yields Partition Acc. to RB-
the longest possible sections. Lärm 92, Method
1 12.4.4
When this option is activated, the calculation will be executed by project- Projection
ing the obstacles and applying the propagation rules. Otherwise, only of: 12.4.4
propagation rules will be considered in the calculation.
Extended sources such as line or area sources will be - according to the
normative requirements - divided into such small elements that their big-
Manual
2
Partition Tab
gest expansion is smaller then the distance of source-receiver points when

multiplied by the Raster Factor.
If the option projection is activated, also a pre-partitioning of shielded and
non-shielded elements takes place before the partition according to criteria
of distance (pre-partitioning of all rays of sound from the immission point
to both outermost points of each shielding object).
For noise maps of cities it is recommended to deactivate this option to ac-
celerate the calculation.
See also chapter 12.2.3 The Projection Method for extended Sound Sourc-
es
Projection at With this option also elevated areas defined by Contour Lines, are also
Terrain Model 12.4.4 taken into account in the pre-partitioning of line- and area sound sources.
Maximum If the receiver point is further away from the source than the entered dis-
Distance Source- tance then no projection is taken into account.
Receiver: 12.4.4
Search Radius For the partitioning of sources according to the projection requirements
Source: 12.4.4 the only obstacles which are taken into account are those within the en-
12 tered distance from the source.
Search Radius For the partitioning of sources according to the projection requirements
Receiver: 12.4.4 the only obstacles which are taken into account are those not as far from
the receiver point as the entered distance.
Manual
Reference Time Tab 12.4.5 1
12.4.5 Reference Time Tab
The average level of sound pressure over a period of time ist to be comput- Reference
ed, taking into account the actual duration of the sound impact from a Time: 12.4.5 12
source in accordance with the basic requirements for the evaluation.
To calculate the noise indicators at single receiver points with CadnaA ac-
cording to the requirements of a guideline the configurations of the calcu-
lation have to be preset (menu Calculation|Configuration). On the tab
Reference Time the required settings for the reference times and the as-
signment of each hour of the day with respect to the intervals day/evening/
night can be selected.
* The calculation of the noise indicators Lde , Ln and Lden is possible

with the standard version of CadnaA. However, the evaluation and
the assessment of the number of people living in dwellings with a
certain noise level applies with the method "Object Scan". Prerequi-
site is the CadnaA option XL.
Manual
2
Reference Time Tab
The reference time is applied for all noise types and concerns primarily the
combined evaluation parameters like Lden, Lde, Ldn and Len (see Chapter
12.4.6). For the single evaluation parameters like Ld, Le and Ln no time
correction is taken into account except by industry sources if the Opera-
ting Time is activated and an operating time is entered in the industry dia-
log.
Allocating Hours/Time In the 24 input boxes in the dialog each hour is assigned to the three time
Periods 12.4.5 intervals day/ evening/ night. As variables the letters D (daytime), E
(evening), and N (nighttime) can be applied. Enter the corresponding let-
ters respecting the requirements of the relevant guideline. From the as-
signed time intervals it follows for which relative parts of the day the
corresponding penalties have to be considered.
It is not mandatory to fill all fields with letters you can let them empty and
you can write either with capital letters or lower cases. Therefore if you
like to calculate the loudest hour at night-time according to TA-Lärm it is
sufficient if if you enter only one N (and of course in the industry dialog
you have to activate the checkbox Operating Time and you have to enter
the operating time in minutes during this loudest hour in the field Night).
12 Penalties 12.4.5 Penalties are only taken into account for combined evaluation parameters
like e.g. Lde, Ldn etc. Enter the desired penalty according to your require-
ments, e.g. according to the definition of Lden enter penalties for Evening/
Recr. Time Penalty 5 (dB) and for the Night 10 (dB).
With all these setting both total levels for single receiver points and for
grids will be calculated.
Special Reference Time On the lower part of the tab Reference Time special reference times for
for Industry 12.4.5 industrial sources can be entered (in minutes).
This option is interesting if standards or guidelines require not the whole
hour but e.g. a half hour (30 minutes).
This option has also an historical meaning - it assured the compatibility
with projects calculated with older CadnaA releases. If an older project is
Manual
Reference Time Tab 12.4.5 3
opened this option and the option Compatibility Mode for Industry from
the evaluation parameter tab are activated.
* With the option Special Reference Time for Industry activated the
allocation of hours (see further above) is ignored and the entered time
intervals are considered.
The default value is 960 minutes (16 hours) for the daytime (the evening is
considered being a part of the daytime), 480 minutes (8 hours) for the
night-time - these times have been the default settings in older releases of
CadnaA.
Therefore if e.g. the loudest hour of the night is to be calculated as re-

quired by TA-Lärm you can either enter the reference time here for night
60 minutes or alternative above in the dialog Allocation Hours with only
one N for one hour. The operating time in the source dialog must then, of
course, be the operating time of the source during this loudest hour in both
cases.
You will find further information about the EU directive and CadnaA in
the threee files RefTime_Eval_1/2/3.PDF on your CD-Rom in SAMP- RefTime_Eval.PDF
LES|DATAKUSTIK_INFO.
12
If this option is activated, you can select the areas for which to calculate Recreation Time Penalty
recreation time penalties. This is only possible if only for: 12.4.5
• areas of designated land use have been specified using the Designated
Land Useicon on the Toolbox
• or immission points have been assigned a Land Use on the pertinent
edit dialog.
In accordance with the requirements of the TA-Lärm, this option allows
you to apply the recreation time penalty only to "general" and "purely" res-
idential areas while excluding mixed and industrial areas.
Manual
4
Reference Time Tab
12
Manual
Evaluation Parameter Tab 12.4.6 1
12.4.6 Evaluation Parameter Tab
To meet the requirements for the calculation according to EC-directive on

environmental noise CadnaA since release 3.5 possesses a brand-new con-
cept for defining and calculating evaluation parameters. In this concept
you have beside a multitude of pre-defined noise levels (for single or com-
bined time intervals like Lden, Lde, Ld etc.) also different evaluation param-
eters (like uncertainty sigma). Furthermore you can define evaluation
parameters by formulas. The following evaluation parameters can be cho-
sen or entered:
• Noise levels for single time intervals: Ld (day), Le (evening), Ln
(night)
• Noise levels for combined time intervals: Lden, Lde, Len, Ldn
• Uncertaintiy for time intervals: SigmaD (day), SigmaE (evening), Sig-
maN (night)
• Formulas (total noise levels or noise type specific, day|evening|night,
singular value or spectral values, total level or levels in octave, linear/
A-/B-/C- or D-weighted)
12
Evaluation Parameter Tab in Calculation|Configuration
Manual
2
Evaluation Parameter Tab
If no formula is entered (which would exclude noise types for calculation)

all defined evaluation parameters will be calculated for all existing noise
types.
In CadnaA since release 3.5 can be calculated simultaneously up to four
evaluation parameters either for single receiver points or in a receiver grid
(additionally to the ground).
Listbox Type In the listbox Type choose the evaluation parameter you like to calculate.
In the corresponding dialogs, like e.g. receiver point edit-dialog, up to four
evaluation parameters are displayes depending on how many you have de-
fined.
The evaluation parameters according to e.g. TA-Lärm are Lde (noise level
for day- and evening-time) and Ln (level night-time) or one parameter ac-
cording to EC-directive e.g. Lden (for the day-evening-night index).
The evaluation parameters are internal serially numbered with alias LP1,
LP2, LP3 and LP4 starting with the inital field. With these alias you can
refer to in formula or expression.
12
Field Name In the listbox Name you may enter an user-defined expression (alias) for
the selected evaluation parameter, e.g. Day. You have to activate the
checkbox on the left hand side of the field before you can enter an alias..
Field Type with selected noise index Lde and activated

field Name with an entered user-defined alias „Day“.
With the checkbox Name activated the alias of the evaluation parameter
will be displayed in the corresponding dialogs instead.
Manual
Evaluation Parameter Tab 12.4.6 3
Receiver points dialog with three defined and calculated

evaluation parameters - the first parameter with an alias.
Additionally in the field Unit you may enter an identifying item (e.g. Unit Field
dB(A) or sigma) wich will also be displayed if the checkbox is activated.
If you have chosen the type formula (=f(x)) from the listbox Type you can Formula Field
12
either enter an user-defined formula and/or you can define one with pre-
defined expression by clicking on the double arrow on the right-hand side
of the expression field..
With the example formula the noise level index Ld will be

calculated only for industry sources spectral and linear
weighted.
Manual
4
Evaluation Parameter Tab
If you click on the double arrows you open sub-lists with

pre-defined formulas.
With these pre-defined expressions and corresponding operators you can

define your own formulas.
You will find advanced information about reference time and evaluation
RefTime_Eval.PDF parameters with CadnaA in the three files RefTime_Eval_1/2/3.PDF on
your CD-ROM in directory SAMPLES|DATAKUSTIK_INFO.
12 Compatibility mode This option is implemented to be compatible with files calculated with ol-
for Industry 12.4.6 der releases of CadnaA.
This option is active automatically (together with option Special Refe-
rence Time for Industry on Reference Time tab) if these files are ope-
ned because the time interval day (Ld) includes the evening and the
penalties accordingly. Therefore this option can only be used with single
evaluation parameters like Ld but not with combined evaluation values
like Lde. In the last case an error message would occur with the possibility
to change the evaluation parameter.
Manual
DTM Digital Terrain Model Tab 12.4.7 1
12.4.7 DTM Digital Terrain Model Tab
The ground height defined by this option is used in the calculation if no Standard
other information, given by contour lines or height points, is available in Height 12.4.7 12
an area. To each source, receiver point and object, an absolute ground
height is assigned which results from its position within the system of con-
tour lines .
Triangulation meshes existing height points and contour lines to form tri- Terrain
angular planes. This speeds up the calculation. In this case you must not Models 12.4.7
calculate a grid to be able to look at the terrain model in 3D (Special) (see

Chapter 13.14).
Manual
2
DTM Digital Terrain Model Tab
DTM: Triangulation DTM: Search Contour Lines

The edges of the triangle is taken into account This DTM shows the ground height which is taken into
for shielding account when positioning objects with relative heights.
Explicit In addition, if you activate the option Explicit Edges Only, only the en-
12 Edges Only 12.4.7 tered contour lines will have a screening effect and not the edges of the
formed triangular planes. The activation of this option does not effect the
3D (Special) view.
Objects with Ground at If this option is activated, the height of the base point of the objects, whose
every Point influence heights have been entered in the Geometry dialog with the option absolu-
DTM 12.4.7
te Height/Ground at every Point, determines the terrain height at their
position.
Search Contour Lines Search Contour Lines (Average) - (Average of a contour line informa-
(Average) 12.4.7 tion according to squared-distance).
Local Inclined Search Contour Lines (Local Inclined Plane) (approximation of plane
Plane 12.4.7 surfaces by using the defined contour lines).
Normally the triangulation method should give the best results because it
also takes into account - according to the physical reality - the convex sur-
Manual
DTM Digital Terrain Model Tab 12.4.7 3
face planes between the contour lines and the height points, which are
formed by the newly set edges during screening.
* When applying triangulation you should always keep in mind,

though, that the contour lines should be formed by a dense succession
of points because these represent the corners of the created triangles.
A surface modelled by contour lines with only two end points will
form a very coarse and extended plane.
You can show triangulation lines in CadnaA. The setting is "invisible" by Representation of
default. Select a corresponding line type in Options|Appearance (see Triangulation
Lines: 12.4.7
Chapter 13.6)..
12
DTM: Triangulation (rough) DTM: Triangulation (fine) plan presen-

plan presentation tation after using the command Spline
Manual
4
DTM Digital Terrain Model Tab
DtM: Triangulation (rough) DTM: Triangulation (fine)

3D-Special view 3D-Special view
Search Radius for In order to determine the height of the terrain at a point, all contour lines
Contour Lines (m) 12.4.7 within the radius specified here are considered. The greater the search ra-
dius, the longer the calculation time.
Lift Sources under If objects lie underneath the terrain height, e.g., this may happen after im-
12 Ground to Ground porting digital data from different data sources, it will be assumed, that the
Niveau 12.4.7
relativ height is zero during the calculation. The terrain model is not chan-
ged.
Manual
Reflection Tab 12.4.8 1
12.4.8 Reflection Tab
If we calculate reflections we have to pay attention to two things

1. that you enter in Calculation|Configuration Reflection Tab the
maximum order of reflection you want to take into account and
2. that the objects’ settings (buildings, barriers, cylinders), which have
to be included into a calculation with reflection, are adjusted for
reflection.
Although CadnaA calculates reflection with an extremly fast algorithm,
the number of essential steps of calculation explodes with an expanding
number of order and with the amount of reflecting surfaces. A calculation
with an order of reflection higher than 1 should therefore always be ap-
plied to well defined scenarios with few objects. For such special investi-
gations a corresponding small part from the total scenario of the project
file should be separated (see Chapter 5.7.2 "Modify Objects").
12
Reflection Tab in Calculation|Configuration - input of the

max. order of reflection and search radius (m) for reflec-
tors.
Manual
2
Reflection Tab
max. Order of The maximum order of reflections, which are taken into account as mirror
Reflection 12.4.8 image sources, strongly influences the calculation time. In most cases, tak-
ing into account first-order reflections is sufficient. Considering the calcu-
lation times, it is recommended you use higher orders of reflection only for
limited scenarios containing few objects.
For calculations of road traffic noise according to RLS 90 /9/ and railway
noise according to Schall03 /8/, first-order reflections shall be considered
exclusively. Therefore, if values ≥ 1 are entered, the user input is ignored,
provided that the options Strictly according to RLS-90 (see Chapter
12.4.10) or Strictly according to Schall03 (see Chapter 12.4.11 have been
activated
* At present, CadnaA calculates reflections up to a maximum order of

20.
It is possible to view the sound rays contributing to the level at a
receiver point (see Chapter 12.3 "Displaying Sound Rays").
Search Radius for Criteria for the Calculation of Reflections

Reflecting Objects
Around Source/ If the field is empty or the value 0 is entered, no reflecting areas will be
12 Receiver Point 12.4.8 checked in principle.
If a value other than 0 is entered, this is interpreted as the distance, in me-
tres, from the source point, or receiver point, within which all reflecting
objects are taken into account.
Max. Distance Source If the receiver point lies outside the distance here specified, no reflections
to Receiver Point 12.4.8 are calculated.
Manual
If the distance entered here is smaller than the one mentioned above, the Interpolate from:
proportion of reflected sound is continuously reduced between these two
distances to avoid discontinuities in the representation of the Iso-dB lines.
Settings: max. distance Source-Receiver: 100 m, interpo-

late from: 100 m and reflection of 1st order. The Iso-dB-
12
Lines show leaps because of reflections.
Manual
4
Reflection Tab
For interpolate from: Leaps will be avoided for Iso-dB-

Lines with a value which is smaller (in the example 30 m)
than the distance source-receiver
Min. Distance Immission If, for the calculation of the sound level in front of a window, a receiver
Point to Reflecting
12 point is placed in front of the building wall, the reflection from the build-
Object 12.4.8
ing itself must not be taken into account in the determination of the charac-
teristic immission level.
It is therefore recommended you enter approximately 0.5 m or 1 m. In ac-
cordance with the guidelines, no reflections are then calculated for those
immission points which have been assigned to the building by means of
the Object Snap (see Chapter 13.5).
Interpolate If the distance entered here is larger than the one mentioned before, there
up to: 12.4.8 is a continuous transition from "no reflection at all" to "maximum" reflec-
tion.
Manual
You should enter approximately 0.5 m if the increase in radiation in the Min. Distance Source to
half- or quarter-space due to the sources of reflections from the building is Reflecting Object 12.4.8
accounted for by assigning a global directivity index K0. This reduces cal-
culation time without preventing the calculation of reflections for other
sources (see chapter 8.6.8 Ko without Ground).
12
Manual
6
Reflection Tab
12
Manual
Industry Tab 12.4.9 1
12.4.9 Industry Tab
The settings made on the Industry tab have an effect on the following
12
sources:
• the general point, line, and area sources, vertical and horizontal (see
chapter 8.3, 8.4, 8.5)
• optimisable area source (see chapter 8.15)
• parking lot according to VDI (see chapter 8.13))
• tennis point of service (see chapter 8.8)
Three options for lateral diffraction are available for selection: Lateral
Diffraction 12.4.9
• non-lateral diffraction
• only one object - lateral diffraction is not calculated if more than one
object intersects the line connecting the source to the immission point.
• some objects - the two shortest possible convex rays around the
arrangement are determined and taken as a basis for the calculation.
Manual
2
Industry Tab
Under Only up to Distance (m), enter the distance between source and re-
ceiver point for which lateral diffraction is to be taken into account.
Noneg.pathdifference12.4.9 With activated option by ISO 9613-2 no barrier attenuation is calculated if
the ray from the source to the receiver is above the upper edge of the barri-
er.
Ground For taking into account the ground attenuation you may choose the follow-
Attenuation 12.4.9 ing options:
Exclude Ground Attenua- No ground attenuation will be taken into account for shielded sound rays
tion over Barrier 12.4.9 according to VDI 2720 equation (5) De = Dz - DBM,0 ≥ 0 dB or ISO
9613-2 equation (12).
Include Ground Attenua- The ground attenuation is calculated for a sound ray diffracted over an ob-
tion over Barrier 12.4.9 ject, taking into account the change in the average height above the ground
of the sound ray passing over the barrier according to VDI 2720, equation
(2) De = Dz - D0 + Dm ≥ 0 dB
10m-Criterion 12.4.9 If a source is more than 10 m above ground and at least one edge of the
barrier is more than 10 m above the ground then it is calculated according
to VDI 2720 equation (6) De = Dz or ISO 9613-2, annotation 15 equation
(13) will be taken into account.
12
No sub. of neg. With this option activated, negative ground attenuation is not subtracted
Ground Att. 12.4.9 from screening attenuation (according to ISO 9613-2 equation (12)). So
the effect of reflecting ground is not distroyed by barriers.
Manual
The calculation method according ISO 9613-2 offers two alternatives to Ground
calculate the ground attenuation Agr: Attenuation
spectral 12.4.9
1. method in frequency bands according to section 7.3.1 with the
ground absorption G as parameter,
2. method for a-weighted levels according to section 7.3.2 not applying
the ground absorption G.
As in project files the sound emission of sources can either be given in
spectral form or as A-weighted levels, several possibilities exist to calcu-
late the ground attenuation. In CadnaA four calculation options are offered
Designation Procedure
none no ground attenuation at all
not spectral method 7.3.2 is used in all cases
spectral, spectral sources The method 7.3.1 is used for all spectral
only sources, in all other cases the method
7.3.2 is used. (This is the same as in Cad-
naA, version 3.3, with "Ground Att. spec-
tral" being checked.) 12
spectral, all sources method 7.3.1 is used in all cases, for non-
spectral sources the corresponding octave
band is used
12.4.9
When calculating the ground absorption in frequency bands the global Ground
ground absorption for areas not covered by the object "Ground Absorp- absorption G: 12.4.9
tion" can be defined here (0 <= G <= 1). By default, a value of G=1 is as-
sumed (porous soil).
We recommend to activate the option Use Map of Ground Absorption if Use Map of
a lot of areas of ground absorption are inserted in your project file. This Ground Absorp-
tion 12.4.9
would accelerate your calculation because a program internal „map of
ground absorption“ will be preestimated and be used for the final calculati-
on.
Manual
4
Industry Tab
ÖAL * Hint for the calculation according to ÖAL: The ground absorption is
always calculated by the selected country setting Austria regardless
whether this option is activated or not.
see also chapter 9.8 "Areas with Specified Ground Absorption"
Insertion For the insertion loss you may choose the following options:
Loss 12.4.9
• Dz without limit
• Dz with limit
• De,o with limit
According to ISO 9613-2 and VDI 2720 the insertion loss caused by barri-
ers and screens is, at most, 20 dB if a single - and 25 dB if more than one -
screening edge is crossed by the ray (the latter is also the case with one
thick barrier). With the option Abar /Dz without limit activated in menu
Calculation|Configuration|Tab Industry the barrier equations of this
guideline are used for any height without this limitation.
The insertion loss De,o with a limit is a former option in CadnaA (in order
to prevent alterations with older projects).
Obstacles within When this option is active, any obstacle, such as buildings, foliage, barri-
12 Area Source do not ers etc., lying within area sources, including parking lots and optimisable
Shield 12.4.9
area sources, are ignored.
Example: Area source "Industry South" with obstacles
Manual
When the option is active, the levels at the immission point are calculated
as if the obstacles did not exist.
Source Partial Level
WG 1
Name M ID Daytime Night-time
Industry South 74.5 54.5
Level resulting from the area source - option active -

in which obstacles do not shield the area source.
For any other source, the obstacles will act as shielding objects even if this
option is activated.
Source Partial Level
WG 1
Name M ID Daytime Night-time
Industry South 71.4 51.4
Level resulting from the area source - option inactive -

in which obstacles shield the area source.
Buildings and cylinders are included in a calculation of sound propagation Buildings/Cylinders

as if the walls where screens or barriers with the defined height and with- do not shield 12.4.9
out a closed roof or ceiling. 12

Buildings: This option activated allows to model complex industrial facil-
ities with pipes, motors, gears and pums as building. the sources are locat-
ed correctly inside but sound from soruces outside is screened. If this
technical „block“ is partially transparent for noise from sources outside,
this can be taken into account with the parameter Transparency in the edit
dialog of the object Building (see Chapter 9.3.1).
Chimneys/stacks: This option is important if the radiation from the upper 950_21_Chimney.pdf
chimney opening is modelled by locating a point-, line- or area source. In
this case the cylinder, which may be necessary to reflect and shield noise
from sources outside, does not falsify the chimney’s directivity by addi-
tional screening. In this case the point source should be positioned at a
height a little bit lower than the chimney height (otherwise the cylinder re-
acts again as a screening object). With the same option it is possible to
Manual
6
Industry Tab
simulate the emission of a thick tube, which shall be taken into account as
a screening object for sources and immission points at opposite sides, by a
line source positioned in it's axis /57/.
Cylinder 3D-View with a vertical line source inside
see also chapter 9.3.1 "Acoustic Transparency (%)"
Barrier The barrier coefficients C1, C2 and C3 according to VDI 2720 /13/ and
Coefficient 12.4.9
12 ISO 9613-2 /21/ can be edited. This allows you to adapt the barrier equa-
tion to special applications. The default setting is correct for ISO 9613-2.
C3=0 means that the different values recommended for single and multiple
screens in ISO 9613-2 or VDI 2720 /13/ are used automatically.
If a value of 0 is given to C3, this value will be considered according to the
cases distinguished in VDI 2720 (single or double barrier).
Downwind (Select Country Tab|Industry: VDI)

Conditions
(VDI only) 12.4.9 If this option is activated, the downwind conditions according to
VDI 2714 /16/ is taken into account in the calculation.
If this option is deactivated, a correction for the long-term noise impact,
DLang, according to VDI 2714, Equation (18) is taken into account.
Manual
Temperature and rel. Humidity are used as a basis for the calculation of Temperature / Rel.
the attenuation by the atmosphere in accordance with the selected guide- Humidity 12.4.9
line. The temperature also serves as the ambient temperature when calcu-
lating the exhaust stack’s directivity.
From the listbox Meteorology you can select the methode which will take Meteorology 12.4.9
into account the meteorology if you have chosen the corresponding guide-
line for Industry in the dialog Configuration|Calculation|Country.
This option is available when calculating sound propagation according to Correction for Meteoro-
ISO 9613-2 /21/. logical Effects C0
(dB) 12.4.9
If the option is deactivated, the equivalent level of continuous sound pres-
sure in octave bands, under downwind conditions, is calculated according
to ISO 9613-2, Clause 6, Equation (3).
If the option is activated and a value is entered, the A-weighted long-term
level of equivalent continuous sound pressure is calculated according to
Clause 6, Equation (6) of this standard. To determine the correction for
meteorological effects, Cmet, which is additionally considered here, the
factor C0 is required according to Clause 8, Equations (21) and (22). Ac-
cording to Clause 8, this factor is estimated after fundamental analysis of
12
the local meteorological statistics, or (this is another useful hint) is speci-
fied by the local authorities.
See chapter Calculation of the Meteorological Correction Cmet Calculation of C0

from the
Wind statistic 12.4.9
According ISO 9613-2 it is possible to take into account the influence of CONCAWE 12.4.9
meteorology according CONCAWE /51/. Therefore choose ISO 9613 for
Industry in Country and CONCAWE for Meteorology. In that case
Cmet is replaced by K4 in the ISO-calculation.
Manual
8
Industry Tab
12
Manual
Road Tab 12.4.10 1
12.4.10 Road Tab
The following is based on the RLS90 /9/ Standard but most of the explana-
tion about input, modification and calculation are the same for all stand-
ards implemented in CadnaA. Ask for special information in case of other
standards.
12
If the Strictly according to RLS-90 check box is activated, CadnaA will Strictly according to
calculate, for roads, RLS-90 12.4.10
• only the first-order reflections, irrespective of the value specified on

the Reflection tab.
• the two outermost lanes separately as line sources with a height of
0.5 m above road , and
• neither lateral diffraction
• nor attenuation due to foliage and built-up areas
• nor meteorology.
Manual
2
Road Tab
* Note: All other settings made on the Reflection tab under "Criteria
for the Calculation of Reflections:", such as the search radius for
reflecting objects, will apply even if the Strictly according to RLS-
90 option is activated.
Example 12.4.10 ) Deactivate all options on the Road tab by clicking them (no check
marks)
) Enter a road with the pertinent values. For illustration purposes,

select, e. g., a broad road with the standard cross section a6ms.
12
Edit road dialog
Manual
Road Tab 12.4.10 3
) Define a line across the road using the auxiliary polygon.
Road with auxiliary polygon
) Enter a height of 30 m for the auxiliary polygon in its edit dialog

Geometry.
) Activate the context menu by clicking the auxiliary polygon with the
right mouse button, and select Section.
) Under Specification, select a grid of, e. g., 1/1/1.
) Then click Calculate.
As you see, CadnaA has calculated the road as if the source were posi- 12
tioned at its centreline, because the option Calculate Outermost Lanes
Separately was deactivated on the Road tab.
Grid calculation in the road area, not "strictly according to RLS-90"
) Select again Calculation|Configuration |Road tab.
) Activate the option Strictly According to RLS-90 by clicking it

(check mark), and close the dialog.
Manual
4
Road Tab
) From the context menu of the polygon, select Section again.
) Restore the grid specification 1/1/1, and calculate again.
The result clearly demonstrates that CadnaA has calculated the lanes sepa-
rately this time, as required by the guidelines.
Grid calculation in the road area, "strictly according to RLS-90"
You may repeat this calculation with other variants.
) Insert, e. g., reflecting buildings along the road.
Enter a reflection order of 0 and, first, calculate not Strictly According to

RLS-90. Then repeat this procedure, but this time Strictly According to
RLS-90 etc.
12 Note STL86 When calculating the road noise according to STL86 you can choose the
(Switzerland) 12.4.10 calculation of propagation according to STL. Therefore, deactivate the op-
tion Calc Propagation acc. to RLS90 in the tab ROAD.
Manual
Railroad Tab 12.4.11 1
12.4.11 Railroad Tab
The following is based on the Schall03 /8/ Standard but most of the expla-
nation about input, modification and calculation are the same for all stand-
ards implemented in CadnaA. Ask for special information in case of other
standards.
12
If the Strictly according to Schall03 check box is activated, CadnaA will

calculate, for railways,
• only the first-order reflections, irrespective of the value specified on
the Reflection tab.
• the railway bonus of 5 dB (the calculated levels are 5 dB lower than
they would be measured) , and
• neither lateral diffraction
• nor attenuation due to built-up areas
• nor meteorology.
Manual
2
Railroad Tab
Deactivating the self- For calculations according to the German railway guideline Schall 03 the
screening of buil- self-screening of buildings with backside receiver points can be alterna-
dings 12.4.11
tively considered or not.
To do so, a memo-variable SCREEN_TEST_ID=1 has to be defined for
the respective building. With the variable being set it will be checked
whether the ID of each receiver point corresponds to the building-ID. With
corresponding IDs the respective building is screening, otherwise not.
Use Non-Stan- If Use Non-Standard Reference Time=(12/4/8) ist activated the time in-
dard Reference tervals on the Reference Time tab is taken into account for the calculation.
Time 12.4.11
The values (12/4/8) in this example will be updated to the defined time in-
tervals (hours day/evening/night).
Country Setting If Austria is chosen in menu Calculation|Configuration|Tab Country

Austria 12.4.11
(Selection box Country) the standard ÖNORM S 5011 /25/ is used as the
default for the calculation of noise from railroads.
12
Manual
Railroad Tab 12.4.11 3
With this option activated, the height of the ground at the position of the Source Height 0,5 m (for
source, which is used to calculate the attenuation by absorption of the Ground Attenuation)
ground, is assumed to be 0.5 m less than the z-coordinate of the source.

This is a requirement of the standard ÖNORM S 5011.
If it is not activated, the height of the ground is derived from the topografic
model defined by contour lines, but a minimal distance of 0.5 m between
source and ground is assumed. With this last condition the noise from a
railway in a cut can be calculated correctly without the necessity to design-
ing the bottom of the cut with contour lines. In this case the outer diffract-
ing edges of the cut are modelled by two contour lines and the z-
coordinate of the railway track is defined with the correct lower value. The
bottom of the cut is then assumed to be 0.5 m below the source.
12
Manual
4
Railroad Tab
12
Manual
Aircraft Tab 12.4.12 1
12.4.12 Aircraft Tab
This tab is only relevant, if you have purchased the option FLG (formerly
AzB). See the CadnaA manual on air-traffic noise.
12
Manual
2
Aircraft Tab
12
Manual
Optimisable Source Tab 12.4.13 1
12.4.13 Optimisable Source Tab
* This command is only available if you have purchased the CadnaA

BPL option (Commercial Areas).
12
With the optional feature BPL of Cadna the object optimal source can be
used. This is an area source with an adjustable sound power level per m².
With one or more of these radiating areas and immission points with de-
fined maximum values for the noise levels in the vicinity, the emission of
these sources can be adjusted automatically by an iterative process. This
option is used to find the maximum noise emission of planned industrial
areas that is possible without an inadmissible noise load for residential ar-
eas nearby.
This calculation of the maximum permissable emissions can be carried out
with different strategies (according to the governmental requirements in
different countries). The relevant options can be selected in menu Calcu-
lation|Configuration|Tab Opt.Src. These options for the Calculation of
Optimisable Sources are
Manual
2
Optimisable Source Tab
like Industry- like Industry-Sources: all calculations with optimisable sources use the
Sources 12.4.13 settings as they are defined in the menu Calculation|Configuration|Tab
Industry
Freefield Freefield (4*pi*r²): sound propagation is calculated with only geometri-
(4*pi*r²) 12.4.13 cal divergence in a free-field being taken into account. No other damping
effects like air absorption and diffraction are inserted in the calculation
L= Lw - 11 - 20 lg(r).
Freefield Freefield (2*pi*r²): sound propagation is calculated with only geometri-
(2*pi*r²) 12.4.13 cal divergence in a semi-free-field being taken into account. No other
damping effects like air absorption and diffraction are inserted in the cal-
culation
L= Lw - 8 - 20 lg(r).
12
Manual
Selecting Data for the Calculation 12.5 1
12.5 Selecting Data for the Calculation

For a partial calculation, deactivate existing objects. Various tools, which
may be combined, are available for this purpose. These tools are described
below.
We either include or exclude objects for the calculation Exclude Objects

for the
• individual objects via the ID in the edit dialog of the object (see Chap- calculation 12.5.0
ter 5.5.3) or
• with groups (see Chapter 18.2) or
• with variants (see Chapter 18.3)
Deactivated objects are displayed by default with dashed lines. You can
change this in Options|Apperance (see Chapter 13.6).
After clicking this toolbox icon, you insert a closed polygon around the
area for which you want to calculate the level distribution over a grid of re- Calculation Area
ceiver points (see Chapter 11.5). You can insert several calculation areas. calculating
defined Areas 12.5.0
With the option Exclude Area in the edit dialog Calculation Area it is
possible to exclude for a calculation another area inside the existing calcu-
lation area. Inside this area the receiver point grid is not calculated. 12
The inserted calculation areas are also registered simultaneously in Ta-
bles|Other Objects|Calculation Areas. The order of the records also de-
termine the order of calculation.
For these calculation areas, CadnaA will take into account all objects,
even outside the calculation area, unless they are deactivated.
You may specify several calculation areas. The total area of all defined
calculation areas essentially determines the time required for the calcula-
tion. It is therefore advisable, for the first test, to specify a large spacing
between the receiver points under Grid|Properties, in order to watch the
progress of the calculation once it has been started and, if required, to
abort the calculation and restart it with a different spacing between the re-
ceiver points.
Manual
2
Selecting Data for the Calculation
The level distribution was calculated for this calculation

area with all objects within the limits.
The calculation for a calculation area is started via the menu Grid|Calcu-
late Grid (see Chapter 11.5.4). If several calculation areas exist, these are
12 calculated one after the other.
see also Check Consistency Chapter 11.2.3.
Manual
Calculation Protocol 12.6 1
12.6 Calculation Protocol

The command Calculation|Protocol allows you to save all intermediate
results from the calculation for individual receiver points (not for a grid of
receiver points). You may then generate a formatted printout of this proto-
col file, or import it, as ASCII format, to another application, such as a
spreadsheet program, for further processing.
But be careful - even with normal projects this tables will be enormously
large. You should deactivate all sources and activate only those that shall
be analysed. (For that: after a calculation in Tables|Partial Level sort your
partial levels ascending to see which noise sources are the loudest.)
12
To this end, activate the check box Write Protocol in the Calculation Write Protocol 12.6
Protocol dialog. The default log file is cadnaa.log. If a different file name
shall be used, click the Select button to enter a file name or select an exist-
ing file. Activate one of the options Overwrite File or Append to File.
Close the dialog by clicking OK.
Don’t forget to deactivate the option Write Protocol afterwards.
If this option is activated, not the entire calculation will be entered for all Compress
frequency bands. An A-level calculation with the accordingly weighted Spectra 12.6
levels will then be issued for the attenuation values dependent on frequen-
cy (e.g. De).
Manual
2
Calculation Protocol
see also 12.7 Compact Protocol)

Protocol 12.6.0 When the calculation for defined immission points - no grid point calcula-
tion - has been performed via the calculator icon on the icon bar, the spec-
ified file will list all intermediate results for each ray from sound source to
immission point.
To view the log file, either click
• Edit or
• Print on the Calculation Log dialog.
In the first case, the text editor opens the log file as ASCII text. If an error
message appears, the text editor cannot open the file because it is too big.
In this case, run a different word processor, such as MSWord, and open the
file as customary.
If you click the Print button, the Print Protocol dialog opens where you
select the printer to be used and the paper size and enter the desired print-
ing range option. Then click Preview. The formatted protocol appears in
the print preview window.
The Preview window displays the individual formatted tables. Depending
12 on the size of the project, completing the print preview on the screen may
take several minutes, because also for each partial level, all intermediate
results are shown. Therefore, if necessary, specify one immission point as
printing range in the print dialog. The completion of the print preview
cannot be aborted.
The legend of the protocol can also be printed. The file PROT_END.TXT
is copied to the program directory during the installation of CadnaA. This
file generates the key at the end of the protocol. If you prefer having the
legend at the beginning, rename the file to PROT_BEG.TXT.
You can also edit the file to suit your needs. To this end, open it using an
editor (see Chapter 17.2.1 "Template Files").
Manual
Chapter 12.6 Calculation Protocol
Compact Protocol 12.7 1
12.7 Compact Protocol

* The Compact Protocol works only for industry sources and if it is
calculated according to ISO9613.
Use the Compact Protocol to produce a value for the effective screening
coefficient and the proportion of reflected sound, referred to the overall
source, line by line for each source, even extended sources such as area or
line sources. .
Name ID Freq LxT LxN LrT LrN Refl Abar,eff
When calculating, e. g., an area source with screening, the values with and
without a screen are calculated automatically, and the effective screening
coefficient is indicated as the difference Abar,eff.
For the compact protocol, generate a protocol using the function Calcula-
tion|Protocol (see Chapter 12.6). Then compress it using File|Export|Ex-
port format: Compact protocol and specify a filename. CadnaA does
not automatically add the extension TXT to the filename. Click OK to
confirm and CadnaA will create a tabulated ASCII file allowing further
editing as required. 12
Manual
2
12.7 Chapter 12.6 Calculation Protocol
Compact Protocol
12
Manual
Manual CadnaA
Chapter 13 Graphics
Chapter 5 Basics 5
Chapter 6 Import 6
Chapter 8 Sources 8
Examples Tutorial
Manual
2 Chapter 13 Graphic
13
Manual
Chapter 13 Graphics
Contents 13.1 1
Chapter 13 Graphics
13.1 Contents
13.2 The Limits
13.3 Scale
13.4 Coordinate Grid
13.5 Object Snap
13.6 Object Appearance
13.7 Layer
13.8 Fix Objects
13
13.9 Auxiliary Polygon
13.10 The Section
13.11 Settings for Objects with Frames
13.11.1 Text Box
13.11.2 Level Box
13.11.3 Symbol
13.11.4 Station Mark
Manual
2
13.1 Chapter 13 Graphics
Contents
13.12 The Cross Section

13.13 3D-Wire Model
13.14 3D-Special View
13.15 Paths of 3D Special View
13.16 Video Recording
13
Manual
Chapter 13 Graphics
The Limits 13.2 1
13.2 The Limits

The diagram in the CadnaA main window displays all objects that have
been entered so far, irrespective of whether they were entered via the
mouse, from the keyboard, by digitizing or importing. The graphic repre-
sentation can be displayed in different scales by zooming (see Chapter
13.3), copying (see Chapter 5.4.5) and printing out (see Chapter 17.2.3).
The graphic objects are synchronized with the corresponding data record
in the object tables. The current data recorded in the table automatically
marks the corresponding graphic object so that you can always see which
object or which polygon point you are working on (see Chapter 15.2).
The limit is a rectangular area to which the graphic representation on the
screen and thus the accessibility of objects is restricted.
It is specified in Options|Limits. You can enter the coordinates of the bot-
tom left and top right corners in the dialog which then opens.
The limits may be edited at any time.
13
The Edit Dialog Limits
Manual
2
The Limits
Background of the The background of the limits is the area outside the specified limits. The
Limits 13.2.0 default color is grey. You can change the background color in Opti-
ons|Miscellaneous in the usual way by clicking on the color button.
13
Scroll bars 13.2.0 Calculations can be restricted to shielding objects only (buildings and bar-
riers) within the limits. If, for the currently selected scale, the limits extend
beyond the area represented on the screen, scroll bars will be shown at the
bottom and/or right sides of the window. These serve to position the visi-
ble area within the limits. If the limits do not extend beyond the area visi-
ble on the screen, the scroll bars will be hidden.
Manual
Chapter 13 Graphics
The Limits 13.2 3
Instead of adjusting the sector of the graphic with the scroll bars you can
also drag the graphic representation, with the mouse key depressed, like a
sheet of paper, freely to all sides. With the mouse key depressed on a free Drag Graphic 13.2.0
area in the graphic the mouse cursor changes to a mouse pointer looking
like a hand. In this mode you can move the representation accordingly.
With the activated option Options|Miscellaneous|Update during Drag Update during

Drag 13.2.0
the graphic is either built up continously while moving the representation 13
or after letting go the mouse key.
The coordinates of a point can be seen in the status bar at the bottom right Information
of the CadnaA main window when the mouse pointer is positioned on that in the Status Bar 13.2.0
point. After a grid calculation, the status bar will also display the levels (L)
and the ground height (G) at the point where the mouse pointer is posi-
tioned.
Sources lying outside the limits are also considered in the calculation. Ob- Objects outside the
stacles that lie outside the limits, however, are not automatically consid- limits 13.2.0
ered. In this case, a warning message will appear.
Manual
4
The Limits
Ignore causes the objects outside the limits to be disregarded

in the calculation.
Repeat results in the limits being modified so as to comprise

all objects.
Cancel aborts the calculation.
Calc As a further tool for correcting the limits when objects lie outside, you can
Limits 13.2.0 select the menu command Options|Limits and click the Calculate button
in the dialog. The limits will then be modified so as to comprise all ob-
jects. The dialog will then display the x and y co-ordinates of the updated
limits.
13
Manual
Chapter 13 Graphics
Scale 13.3 1
13.3 Scale
Use the zoom tools to modify the scale of the diagram, either via the edita-
ble list box Scale 1: on the icon bar, or via the three global tools in the
toolbox
„Zoom +“
„Zoom -“
„Zoom to Limits“
By clicking the arrow to the right of the box Scale 1: on the icon bar, a list Combo Box
of predefined scales drops down. You may click the desired scale on that "Scale 1:“ 13.3
list. The graphic on the CadnaA main window will be modified according-
ly
13
Combo box
You may also enter an arbitrary scale. Click the edit box and enter the de-
sired value. Then press RETURN.
Manual
2
Scale
Zoom + 13.3 The "Zoom +" icon on the toolbox allows you to enlarge the graphic repre-
sentation of a specific area. After clicking this icon, the mouse pointer
drags along a little magnifier icon with a "+" sign.
There are two comfortable ways of enlarging a selected area:
1. Clicking an object with the LEFT mouse button enlarges the graphic
by a factor of two with each click. The position of the mouse pointer
becomes the new centre of the displayed area.
2. If you hold the LEFT mouse button down, you can draw a rectangle
around the objects you wish to enlarge. Upon releasing the mouse
button, the area within the rectangle will be enlarged so as to fill the
screen.
The enlarging is undone in reverse order by clicking with the RIGHT
mouse button.
Zoom - 13.3 The "Zoom -" icon on the toolbox allows you to reduce the graphic repre-
sentation of a specific area. After clicking this icon, the mouse pointer
drags along a little magnifier icon with a "-" sign.
Clicking an object with the LEFT mouse button reduces its size by a factor
of two. You may repeat this several times.
13
The reducing is undone in reverse order by clicking with the RIGHT mouse
button.
Manual
Chapter 13 Graphics
Scale 13.3 3
All objects lying outside the visible area will immediately be shown on the
CadnaA window when you click this icon. The scale of the representation Zoom to Limits 13.3
is automatically selected according to the dimensions of the limits and the
size of the CadnaA window.
If you hold the SHIFT key depressed while clicking the "Zoom to Limits"
icon, CadnaA will recalculate the limits and will also show all objects in
the window. However, the new limits are only temporary (analogous to
the command Options|Limits|Calc), which means the limits specified by
the user are not overwritten.
This feature is convenient where the specified limits cover a wide area
containing relatively few objects, or if the objects all lie within a small
proportion of the limits.
13
Manual
4
Scale
13
Manual
Chapter 13 Graphics
Coordinate Grid 13.4 1
13.4 Coordinate Grid

By selecting the command Coordinate Grid in Options, you can have a
user-defined grid displayed on the screen, serving, e. g., as an aid for posi-
tioning and/or reading of coordinates. If this grid is shown on the screen,
it will also be copied and printed.
The grid spacing and the appearance are defined in the dialog Coordinate
Grid.
Activate the option Show Coordinate Grid by clicking the check box.
The grid spacing is given in metres, and the grid size is given as a percent-
age. With a grid size of 100 % the grid lines are solid.
Example
13
Grid spacing 10 m, Grid size 20 % Grid spacing 10 m, Grid size 100 %
You can select line style and colour via the Line Style button to match
your preferences. Click this button and select appropriate values.
Manual
2
Coordinate Grid
13
Manual
Chapter 13 Graphics
Object Snap 13.5 1
13.5 Object Snap

Open the Object Snap dialog via the menu command Options|Object
Snap.
If a line is supposed to connect to an existing line, the new first point will
be positioned precisely on the last point of the existing line, if the distance
of the two points is less than the specified object snap.
Likewise, points sources and receiver points located within that distance in
front of a building side are assigned to that building side. They will then be
positioned at a userdefined distance in front of it. The default distance is
5 cm. The object snap also allows the seamless joining of partial areas to
give one combined area, for example, for the purpose of determining noise
quota for area sources in the process of noise allotment.
13
If the object snap is given in pixels, the snap radius on the screen will be
independent of the selected scale. If it is given in metres, the scale must be
considered. In both cases, checking is facilitated by the effective snap radi-
us being displayed on the monitor box.
Manual
2
Object Snap
13
Manual
Chapter 13 Graphics
Object Appearance 13.6 1
13.6 Object Appearance

Use the menu command Options|Appearance to specify the line widths,
colors and hatchings, if any, of the object types in the graphic representa-
tion on the screen. This is valid for all objects of the same type. Only the
auxiliary polygone can be defined directly in its edit dialog in a different
way additionally .
Clicking this command opens the dialog Appearance.
13
The settings refer to the selected object type. Upon clicking the Apply but- Apply 13.6.0
ton, the modifications are applied to the objects on the main window while
the dialog remains open. Clicking Cancel results in the dialog being
closed and the modifications being undone. Clicking OK also closes the
dialog, but the modifications are adopted.
If the Transparent option is active (box is checked), objects of the select- Transparent 13.6.0
ed type appear transparent. If this option is inactive (box is not checked),
the objects appear opaque. This is useful when, e. g., a background bitmap
is used in a project. With the Transparent option activated, the bitmap is
still visible through the CadnaA objects on top of it.
Manual
2
Object Appearance
If, despite the Transparent option being active, an object does not appear
transparent, this is not an error in Cadna, but in your graphics driver. (Re-
quest a new driver from the manufacturer, if necessary.) You can see
whether the current driver supports the Transparent feature by checking
the Monitor box which gives a preview of the effects of the specified set-
tings.
Color Via the Color button you can either choose a color directly by activating
the option Direct Input of Color and clicking the colored button or you
enter the color with a formula. In this case activate the option Use Formu-
la for Color.
Direct Input After clicking the colored button choose the desired color by clicking on it
13 of Color 13.6.0 and confirm with OK.
Define With the button Define Color you can mix your own color and add it to
Color 13.6.0 the color palette with the corresponding button.
Use Formula If you activate the option Use Formula for Color you can display an ob-
for Color 13.6.0 ject colored depended on a certain value of an attribute. The following fi-
gure shows area sources colored depended on their area related sound
level (LWST).
Manual
Chapter 13 Graphics
You can either enter the usable attribute abbreviations (see Chapter 2.5) di-
rectly or select them from the popup list after clicking the arrow button.
13
Popup list to select the attributes
Manual
4
Object Appearance
Color Palette 13.6.0 In the box Color Palette you can either choose the color palette of the cur-
rent grid (Grid|Apperance|Option) by selecting the option (current
grid) or you can define a color by entering the value of the color. There-
fore select the option (direct, w/o palette). This function is usefull if you
want to emphasize a certain value with a color.
In the following figure the road sections are colored green if their mean
daily traffic density (MDTD) is < 10,000 and red if their MDTD ≥ 10,000.
For that mark the Road in Options|Apperance and enter the formula as
shown in the following figure.
13
13.6.0 When clicking the color palette button a Windows-color can be selected.
The RGB-value is written into the input box of the formula.
Manual
Chapter 13 Graphics
With this possibility you also can display an object transparent (value -1)
or opaque (RGB) depended on a value of an object attribute. This is valid
for all objects which are filled out and/or are bordered with a continuous
line.
If you want display, e.g., a noise map with Iso-dB-Lines and the Iso-dB-
Lines shall only run over buildings which hights are lower as the calcula-
ted receiver point grid otherwise not, then mark the object building and 13
enter the following formula:
In the following figure is one height of a building 4,5 m and the other 6 m.
The receiver point grid is calculated with a height of 5 m. With the above
Manual
6
Object Appearance
entered formula and with the option Grid|Properties|Option|Use Height

of Buildings activated you would get the following presentation.
Iso-dB-Lines drawn over buildings depending on the building height
Color.cna ) Open also the file Color.cna on your program CD (Samples|Graphic)

and have a look on the examples (Options|Appearance Road and
Building). Also deactivate all roads and recalculate the file. You will
see that the building changes its color depending wether the defined
standard value is exceeded or not.
Color Attributes for With the functions Modify Objects or Import via ODBC interface you
aux. Polygons can allocate colors to aux. polygons.
The meaning of the attribute ?_COLOR is:
13
L_COLOR defines the color of the line and
F_COLOR defines the color of the filling.
?_COLORR is r, the red component (in[0,255])
?_COLORG is g, the green component (in[0,255])
?_COLORB is b, the blue component (in[0,255])
?_COLOR and ?_COLORX is the sum r+256*g+256*256*b. ?_COLOR
is a dezimal value and ?_COLORX a hexadecimal.
Manual
Chapter 13 Graphics
* Deactivated objects, which are invisible displayed (Appearance/Line deactivated objects

resp.Fill) in the graphic, cannot be highlighted anymore. This pre-
vents the objects to be highlighted by mistake.
13
Manual
8
Object Appearance
13
Manual
Chapter 13 Graphics
Layer 13.7 1
13.7 Layer
In Options|Layer you can determine the order in which objects are drawn.
With that you can manipulate the object type which will be covered by an-
other one. Therefore, click onto the corresponding object type and drag
this, with the mouse key held down, to the desired order. The object on the
top of the layer list is drawn first and the object on the bottom of the layer
list last.
If you click the button Apply, then all alterations will be applied without Apply
closing the dialog. 13
Manual
2
Layer
13
Manual
Chapter 13 Graphics
Fix Objects 13.8 1
13.8 Fix Objects

You can protect all objects from inadvertently shifting with the icon Fix Fix Objects
Object in the icon bar. If you click on it, all objects are then „frozen“. Ed-
iting is still possible. Another click on the icon removes the fixing.
13
Manual
2
Fix Objects
13
Manual
Chapter 13 Graphics
Auxiliary Polygon 13.9 1
13.9 Auxiliary Polygon

The auxiliary polygon is an object without any acoustical meaning. It al- Auxiliary Polygon
lows you to generate open or closed polygon lines to enhance the graphical
representation or to do other things. Check or un-check the box Closed
Polygon in the edit dialog as required.
You can change the appearance of the polygon either globally
(Options|Appearance) or directly in its edit dialog. Each polygon can
have a different color, line width or line type. For that deactivate the check
box Use global Properties.
* Auxiliary polygons are not be adjusted to the digital terrain model. If

this is desired you can convert them to line sources. Switch to the
Options|3D-View so that CadnaA can determine the heights and
convert them back again.
13
Manual
2
Auxiliary Polygon
13
Manual
Chapter 13 Graphics
The Section 13.10 1
13.10 The Section Section
This object has no acoustical meaning. You can use a section

• to copy objects inside a section to the clipboard (see Chapter 5.4.5
"Copying Objects" ). For that, the section has to be marked.
• to print objects inside a section. For that you have to give it a name (see
Chapter 17.2.3 "Print Graphics").
• to modify objects (see Chapter 5.7.2 "Modify Objects").
• to import objects only inside an existing section (see Chapter 6.3.2
"Importing in Section only").
• to calculatate in the PCSP mode (see Chapter 18.6 "PCSP - Program
Controlled Segmented Processing").
The margin of the section is neither printed nor copied. You can insert a
text in the field description which can be printed via the Plot-Designer. For
that use the keyword #(Range, Parm1, Parm2) either in a textbox directly
in the file or in a textcell in the Plot-Designer (keyword see Chapter
17.4.25).
13
You can insert sections arbitrarily. These are clearly registered with their
names and coordinates in Tables|Other Objects|Section.
Insert section see Chapter 5.3.1 "Inserting Objects Using the Mouse".
Manual
2
The Section
13
Manual
Chapter 13 Graphics
Settings for Objects with Frames 13.11 1
13.11 Settings for Objects with Frames

With respect to their appearance in the graphics, objects with a frame
around them are edited individually via their edit dialog. Only the object
Symbol is exempted. The following toolbox icons appear in a box:
Text Box
Level Box
Symbol
Station Mark
They are used for explanatory information or to refine the graphic repre-
sentation and are acoustically irrelevant.
We will use the text box as an example to explain all settings which apply
analogously to all such objects. Special settings are explained in the perti-
nent sections.
The chapter Inserting Objects (see Chapter 5.3.1 "Inserting Objects Us-
ing the Mouse") describes how to insert the individual objects.
13
* Adjust the size and all other settings immediately after inputing the
first object. All further objects of the same type adopt the settings. In
this case insert the following objects only by clicking once on the
desired position.
Any inserted box is listed on the pertinent object table under Tables|Oth-
er Objects. You may use this table to change settings for all existing boxes
at once without clicking each individual box. Select the Change Column
command (see Chapter 15.2.5) and define the desired settings.
Manual
2
Settings for Objects with Frames
13
Manual
Chapter 13.11 Settings for Objects with Frames
Text Box 13.11.1 1
13.11.1 Text Box Text Box
This tool allows you to insert up to 30,000 characters of text in your graph-
ics.
Open the dialog of the text box to enter text in the corresponding field.
13
The edit dialog of the text box.
Manual
2
13.11.1 Chapter 13.11 Settings for Objects with Frames
Text Box
Font 13.11.1 As soon as the box is closed, the text you entered appears. The font’s size
and style are specified via the Font button. In the example below, this is
Arial, 10 pt, italic at a scale of 1 : 1,000.
Inthis text boxyoucanenter

upto30,000characters.
For anewlinepressthereturnkey.
Thefont type, its sizeandcolor canalsobe entered.
A text box with frame in CadnaA
Frame 13.11.1 If the Frame option is active, the box will hide objects lying under it, as is
the case in the figure above. If this option is inactive, no frame is drawn
13 around the text, and objects that were hidden before will become visible.
Manual
Text Box 13.11.1 3
Inthis text boxyoucanenter

upto30,000characters.
For anewlinepressthereturnkey.
Thefont type, its sizeandcolor canalsobe entered.
Text box with option frame inactive
If you select the Scale Dimensions option on the edit dialog, the box and Scale
the text are scaled in accordance with the current scale. Dimension 13.11.1
* If this option is active, it is convenient to switch to the intended print-

out scale before you enter the text for the first text box. Then specify
the font size you consider appropriate for the scale you chose. You
may then return to the scale which is appropriate for the work on the 13
screen. The selected setting is adopted, although re-scaled, for all fur-
ther text boxes, until you edit it again. This makes sure that all text
boxes have the same font size.
Manual
4
Text Box
Otherwise:
Pkt 1 ⋅ M1
= Pkt 2
M2
Pkt1 = Size of the font in the box at scale M1
M1 = Scale under which the font size was selected
Pkt2 = Font size under different scale M2 of the graphic

representation
M2 = New scale chosen after inserting the text box.
* If you wish to globally edit the frame sizes, font sizes or fonts of all
boxes after having inserted them, you can do so via the tables by
selecting the Change Column command (see Chapter 15.2.5
"Change Column Content"). It is then not necessary to edit each indi-
vidual box.
Frame Enter the centre coordinates to precisely position each box.

coordinates 13.11.1
Frame size 13.11.1 The size of the boxes/frames can be given to millimetre precision by enter-
13 ing width and height.
Manual
Text Box 13.11.1 5
Enter an angle to continuously rotate the box. Angle 13.11.1
Th
e
In up w ze
fo
Fo pe
th to line an
nt
is 3
r a , it
ty
te 0,0 pre co
ne si
xt 0 s l o
bo 0 c s t r c
s
x ha he an
yo ra re a
u
ca cter urn o b
d
n s. ke e
en
te
r
t ls
y. en
te
re
d.
Rotated text box with angle -45°
The options on the Alignment dialog serve to align the text in the box. Alignment
Text 13.11.1
13
Manual
6
Text Box
13
Manual
Level Box 13.11.2 1
13.11.2 Level Box Level Box
After performing a grid calculation, this tool allows you to display the cal-
culated value at any point within the calculated grid (see Chapter 11.5) -
also the height of the ground at that point.
By default, the calculated value displayed in the box is updated automati- Update
cally. This corresponds to the Update Automatically option. It means that automatically/
Hold Value 13.11.2
each time a calculation is performed or a other evaluation parameter is
choosen from the listbox on the symbol bar, the actual result calculated for
that point is displayed in the level box in the graphics.
If Hold Value is activated, the level box will not display the new value af-
ter a calculation, but the "old" value is retained. Iso-dB lines and areas of
equal sound level, however, will always be updated.
This is an interesting option when, e. g., calculation variants with and
without noise-control measures are to be represented. In that case, howev-
er, the Update Level option would have to be activated for the second lev-
el box inserted at that point.
The other options are explained in chapter 13.11.1 Text Box.
13
Manual
2
Level Box
13
Manual
Symbol 13.11.3 1
13.11.3 Symbol
This tool allows you to insert various symbols in your graphic. You may Symbol 13.11.3
specify an angle to position them accordingly.
If you insert something from the MS-Windows clipboard in a CadnaA
graphics - e.g. a table or image - CadnaA automatically creates a Symbol
object. You can change its settings with regard to its Symbol options.
After clicking the Symbol tool and with a further click in the CadnaA
main window, a dotted frame appears (default setting is "no frame"). Dou-
ble-clicking on this frame opens the edit dialog where you click the arrow
of the list box and select the appropriate symbol. A preview of the selected
symbol is shown on the monitor.
If the check box Maintain Aspect Ratio is active, the symbol will always Maintain
be displayed with the original aspect ratio, which means it will not be dis- Aspect Ratio 13.11.3
torted when the size of the box is edited.

For the symbol Caption:Grid you can choose any suffix you like, the de- Suffix for Symbol Caption:
fault suffix is dB. For that enter the variable SUFFIX and its value into the Grid 13.11.3
INFO-window of the Symbol dialog (e.g. suffix=dB(A)).
Symbols inserted in the graphics will simultaneously be registered in the 13
symbols table on the Tables|Other Objects menu.
Manual
2
Symbol
Symbol dialog
The symbols list also contains, as symbols, the outlines of tennis courts
and soccer fields. You can thus easily label these types of sports facilities
in CadnaA. (A typical soccer field is 110 x 70 m, a tennis court is 24 x
11 m)
But you can also create your own symbols. They are stored in the local
symbol library in menu Tables and will be displayed also in the listbox in
the edit dialog of the Symbols for selecting (see Chapter 16.5).
13
Make your settings for the appearance of the symbols in Options|Appea-
rance (see Chapter 13.6).
see also chapter 5.4.6 Inserting from the Clipboard.
Manual
Station Mark 13.11.4 1
13.11.4 Station Mark
Generate Station see Chapter 5.7.3.
The reference point indicates the coordinates of the station. Reference point 13.11.4 13
With the activated option (default) the station marks are automatically and Angle automatic
perpendicularly directed torward the line or the polygon point. update 13.11.4
Deactivate this option in the dialog of a station mark to enter a different

angle for the alignment. This angle is kept if the stations would be updated
(Tables|Miscelleanous|Update Station).
Manual
2
Station Mark
13
Manual
Chapter 13 Graphics
The Cross Section 13.12 1
13.12 The Cross Section

If you define a line on the map on the screen by entering its first and last
points, you can view a section along this line in an additional window.
This section shows the height of the terrain as well as the cross sections
through any three-dimensional objects encountered, e. g., buildings and
barriers.
The sources can also be displayed in the cross Section
To insert a line on the map, activate any toolbox icon for a line-like object,
13
such as an auxiliary polygon, and enter the first and last points. Then
switch to the Edit Mode and click the line with the RIGHT mouse button.
This opens the context menu (see Chapter 5.7) where you select the Cross
Section command.
In the cross section all sources cut by the section line are also displayed if Source 13.12
the checkbox Source is activated.
The path of a ray from the initial to the end point - how it is considered in Ray 13.12
the calculation by the program - can be displayed by activating the corre-
sponding option.
The z-coordinates in the sectional view are multiplied by the value of the Z-Factor 13.12
Z-factor to enlarge arbitrarily and, therefore, to clarify the difference in the
height.
Manual
2
The Cross Section
Copy/Print 13.12 With the Copy button you can copy the sectional view in the clipboard and
with the Print button you can print it out.
In the cross section you can also calculate a vertical grid (see Chapter
11.5.3 "Vertical Receiver Grid").
* Hint to insert a image of a cross section from the clipboard into

CadnaA with the right scale:
The sectional drawing includes in its width a margin of 3 mm for

each side. In case this picture shall again be inserted, according to
scale, in CadnaA via the clipboard, the total 6 mm margin has to be
taken into account in the length of the object Symbol.
Remember: The contents of the clipboard are again inserted in
CadnaA as Symbol (see Chapter 13.11.3 "Symbol").
In the edit dialog of the Symbol take into account the 6 mm margin
as follows:
) Activate the option Maintain Aspect Ratio
) Enter the corresponding length plus the margin in meters
13 6mm
------------ • Scale = Meter
1000
Manual
Chapter 13 Graphics
3D-Wire Model 13.13 1
13.13 3D-Wire Model

The diagram on the screen is a projection of the entire model on the hori-
zontal reference plane, x/y. Points and lines are thus the shadows of all ob-
ject outlines, assuming that the model is illuminated by a very distant light
source located vertically above it.
Like any individual view, this top view has the disadvantage that objects
which lie one behind the other, as viewed along the direction of projection,
cannot be distinguished. The height of an object, its dimension in the z di-
rection, cannot be seen from the horizontal projection.
In the following representation in CadnaA, the diagram will not enable
you to judge whether the immission point on a building is a single point or
a group of several points.
There are further viewing options under OPTIONS|3-D View which are
helpful here. For the example shown here, the Front View is as follows:
13
This representation immediately clarifies that there are two points, one
above the other. Position the mouse pointer on one of the points to read its
Manual
2
3D-Wire Model
z co-ordinate on the status bar. (Of course, it would also be possible to find
that value on the pertinent table, but this would be too inconvenient if you
were to check the co-ordinates of many receiver points.)
A side view of the same situation would look like this:
Checking the height is most conveniently done using the front view (look-
ing along the y direction towards higher values of the co-ordinates, which
means upwards with respect to the screen) and the side view (looking
along the x direction towards smaller values of the co-ordinate, which
means to the left with respect to the screen).
13
Side View
Front View
The views Isometric, Cavalier and Cabinet are projections at pre-set an-
gles - just check them out.
Manual
Chapter 13 Graphics
3D-Wire Model 13.13 3
Under the general Parallel Projection, you may specify arbitrary angles
under which to look at the model. Phi is therefore the angle relative to the
positive x-axis whereas positive means counterclockwise. Theta is, in line
of sight, the elevation angle towards the horizontal plain.
You can change the angles by inputing a value via the keyboard or with the
arrow keys via the numerical key block: the angle Phi with the keys 4 and
6 and Theta with 3 and 9. Just test it.
13
see also chapter 9.7.1 Automatically Optimize Noise Barriers.
Manual
4
3D-Wire Model
13
Manual
Chapter 13 Graphics
3D-Special View 13.14 1
13.14 3D-Special View

The 3-D special view is a graphic representation with hidden lines, taking
into account the visibility of the individual surfaces. You can move
through this 3D-Scenario on specified ways or move freely by using the
numerical keyblock (see Chapter 13.15).
All acoustically relevant objects are displayed, if they are not deactivated.
Auxiliary polygons are never displayed in the 3-D-special view.
You can also edit objects in this view. Just double-click on the relevant ob-
ject to open the edit dialog. Changes that will have an effect on the 3D-
View are updated at once.
13
Model with a road on a bridge and an embankment cre-

ated with contour lines. The DTM is calculated with trian-
gulation.
Manual
2
3D-Special View
Ground Model 13.14.0 Also the digital model of terrain (DTM) is displayed automatically without
enforcing a grid calculation by the user if the option Triangulation (see
Chapter 12.4.7 "DTM Digital Terrain Model Tab") is activated. Otherwise
you have to calculate a grid. You do not need a sound source if you only
want to calculate the terrain model.
If a receiver point’s grid had been calculated the coloured areas of equal
Display Ground height
sound levels are shown in the 3-D-special-View for day as well as night. If
this is not desired, just switch to the Ground Height View before you
open the 3-D-special-View.
You can move into the 3D-special view by pressing the RIGHT mouse key
on an object which opens the context menu. Click here on the command
3D-special-View. To do so you have to be in the edit mode before
(CTRL+E). How you move through the 3D-special-View is described in
detail in the chapter 13.15 Paths of 3D Special View.
In the dialog Properties in 3D (Special) the following possible settings
are given:
13
Manual
Chapter 13 Graphics
Camera offset: with Camera offset:
• vertical: you can modify the height of your view

• horizontal: lateral transfer,
positive value = to the right, negative value = to the left
The entered value will adapt the speed accordingly. However, the real Speed (km/h)
speed depends on the project size and on the hardware.
With this value you can determine the angle of the visible area to the left Field of
and to the right. There are limitations, however. A default angle of 45° view (°) 13.14.0
should be appropriate.
This setting has been integrated for a possible adjustment to your graphic Distance
card. It defines the visible area of your model from the front (near plane) Range 13.14.0
to the back (far plane - horizon). Some graphic cards cannot handle the de-
fault settings. If this should be the case, adjust the values accordingly. In
both text boxes a value > 0 must be entered.
Select Resolution factor in the dialog Properties. This factor determines Copy to
the resolution of the representation of your 3D-model as metafile for the clipboard: 13.14.0
transfer to another program or for the printout.
* Attention: The actual resolution of your bitmap depends on the reso- 13

lution settings of your monitor. If you already have a high resolution
on your monitor and then select the factor 10, copying will take long
time. So start your approach very cautiously.
Copying is executed by clicking on the menu Copy or by pressing the
shortcut ALT+K. However, CadnaA accepts your representation only up
to a maximum resolution of 1024 pixels. In the other case you will see
only a frame with an X. If this should occur, transfer the copy to another
graphics program first and save it in a bitmap format. With CadnaA Op-
tion BMP you can open your graphics as usual.
You can record your 3D animation. This maybe useful if the animation is Video
very slow because you are working on a big project or your computer does Frame Rate: 13.14.0
Manual
4
3D-Special View
not have a good performance or you just want to give the Wave-file to
your customer to give him an impression of his project. In that case enter a
value for the number of pictures which should be recorded in a second.
The default setting is 15 frames.
Record Then click to the menu Video after confirming the dialog Properties with
Video 13.14.0 OK . You will be asked for a file name in which the video is saved as AVI-
file. After clicking the Save button an option dialog appears for compress-
ing the video. Make your corresponding settings dependent on which vid-
eo drive (codec compressor and decompressor) you use. After confirming,
the video is recorded.
We recommend that you record the video over night if it takes a long time.
The playback of the video can be made, e.g., with WINDOW MEDIA
PLAYER or a comparable one.
See also see Chapter 13.16
13
Settings in menu Properties in the 3D-special view
Manual
Chapter 13 Graphics
You can adjust the brightness and/or the color of the 3D-special view: Lights 13.14.0
Camera Point: is light from the position of your head. Camera Point
Camera Parallel: parallel light (as if the sun were shining from behind Camera Parallel
you).
Sun Parallel: sun shines perpendicular (high noon). Sun Parallel
Ambient: defuse light Ambient
13
Manual
6
3D-Special View
13
Manual
Chapter 13 Graphics
Paths of 3D Special View 13.15 1
13.15 Paths of 3D Special View

How do we move through our virtual 3D model?
Initial Situation:
You have a complete CadnaA project with DTM, buildings, roads, streets Function for control
and miscellaneous sources. of your model
You would like to check your model in the Special-3D-View. You want to
have a closer look at different sections of your model. These are:
• a certain section of a road
• several sections of a road
• a certain area without roads and, of course,
• also the entire project model in the survey, seen from all directions.
For this example we are going to use the file demo1.cna, which you al- Demo1.cna
ready know and which is on your CD-Rom.
) Open the file Demo1.cna (File|Open). Example
) If there is a coloured grid activated in the file, deactivate it in the

menu Grid|Appearance|No grid. A calculated receiver point grid is 13
also represented in the Special-3D-View - from CadnaA version 3.0
upward - regardless whether this view is activated in the normal
view.
In Calculation|Configuration (see Chapter 12.4.7) we have activated
DTM|Search Contour Lines (Average). You can also activate the option
Triangulation . There is no terrain model in this example, therefore this as-
pect is insignificant.
Nevertheless we would like to describe some features related to the alter-
native terrain models in 3D (Special):
• You do not have to calculate a grid to see the terrain model in 3D (Spe-
cial) when Triangulation is activated.
Manual
2
Paths of 3D Special View
• The terrain model will build up faster with Triangulation than with
the option Search Contour Lines.
• The coloured representation of the receiver point’s grid is more coarse
in 3D (Special). You can modify this a little if you select a value >1 in
Grid|Appearance|Raster, Oversampling.
Just try it: Enter the value 5. After that you can activate the option No
grid again. This has no effect on the 3D (Special) view, as you already
know.
) In our example we click on the Sandrachweg - the street running

straight from the lower left-hand corner to the upper right-hand cor-
ner - with the right mouse key at an optional point on the middle axis
and select in the context menu 3D (Special). The 3D (Special) dialog
opens.
Maximize ) The dialog is usually located in the upper left-hand corner by default.
Extend the dialog by dragging or clicking on the symbol Maximize
in the upper right-hand corner (the symbol in the middle!) of the 3D
(Special) dialog.
13
3D-special view, the view from the object road called Sandrachweg
Manual
Chapter 13 Graphics
) Press ENTER/RETURN - you are now moving at a speed of 100 km/h Automatic drive by
pressing the Return-key
and with a camera position at a height of 1 m from the beginning of
the road until you reach the end or until you press Esc and therefore
stop your move.
) Click on the menu Properties in the 3D (Special) dialog.
) Enter the value 5 in the textbox Vertical in Camera Offset. Confirm

with OK and press Enter. You are now moving at a height of 5 m
above the street. (Try out different heights.)
) Stop the movement with Esc and click on a railway in your project - Different sights
without closing the 3D (Special) dialog - with the right mouse key -
and select 3D (Special) again. Minimize the 3D(Special) window so
that you are able simultaneously to look at your project in the normal
view. As soon as you click with the right mouse key on another
object and select 3D (Special) while the 3D (Special) dialog is still
open, the dialog will show the view from the current object.
Also try out different speeds in the dialog Properties. Enter Speed
If you press Enter or click on the menu Animation, the move will start at
the first point of the relevant object and will end at the last point.
Also have a look at your model from the top of a building. To do this press 13
RETURN. You will then move "around the roof" at the given speed.
Stop your movement with Esc. If you have stopped the movement, you Numeric keyblock
can easily continue it with the numeric keys on your keyboard. With or arrow keys
• Keys 8 and 2 move forward or backward

• Keys 4 and 6 turn left or right
• Ctrl + key 4 or 6 sideways left or right
• Keys 9 and 3 move upward or downward (maintaining the view on the
object)
• Key 5 return to initial position
• Key 7 move vertically upward
• Key 1 move vertically downward
Manual
4
3D-dialog must be active During this process the 3D (Special) dialog must be activated - just click
on it, if necessary. The entered speed in the dialog Properties has no effect
on the key movements. These depend on the performance of your hard-
ware!
Summary With the numeric keys on your keyboard you can move freely in your vir-
tual model, starting from the initial point. Any object can be your starting
point. You can also move around this object by pressing ENTER. The set-
tings in the dialog Properties are valid then.
Another little exercise -
) enter an auxiliary polygon with the following coordinates into your

file Demo1.cna:
Point x 55, y 96, z 100 relative
Point x 122 y 147 z 50 relative
(Remember: activate the icon in the toolbox and just enter the value -
the polygon point dialog opens!)
After you have entered the auxiliary polygon
) click on it with the RIGHT mouse key and select 3D (Special).

You now look on the demo example from 100 m (first point) down to
13 50 m (second point). You are looking again from the first to the last
point. If you press Return, you will move along this line.
Play a little with the length of the polygon - shorten or extend it and have a
look at the effect. Select initial and final height or shift the polygon. Leave
the 3D (Special) window open.
Road Sections In practice it will happen that a road consists of several sections, due to
changing data (not as smooth as in our demo example). So what can you
do to move along this partitioned road (by pressing RETURN) in your virtu-
al model without interruption?
You can insert a continuous auxiliary polygon along the road you want to
move on. If you did this with your mouse, you would probably be stopped
by the virtual police for an alcohol check.
Manual
Chapter 13 Graphics
You better duplicate the road, join the duplicates to form a continuous road
(Connect Lines ) and convert it into an auxiliary polygon afterwards. Just
try it.
* Auxiliary polygons are not visible in the Special 3D-View.
If this leads to sharp bends, straighten them out by selecting Spline in the
context menu (right mouse key) and, if necessary, correct the design of the
lines. You would move along this center line anyway - even if you had not
executed Spline - in case the automatic movement around the bend was
impossible at the given speed.
You have now learned that you either can use an arbitrary CadnaA object 3D-Camera 13.15.0
from your project to start and to move along in the 3D-special view or you
additionally insert a polygon with a initial and/or final height. Undoubted-
ly the second possibility has the advantage that you have a defined 3D-
path, which you can re-open again without recovering the view you had
before. Afterall you have still another possibility.
If you move through your project within the 3D-special view and you find
a position which suit you, then you can press the C key on your keyboard
to fix this camera position. CadnaA inserts then a auxiliary polygon auto-
matically and writes in its ID box the expression 3D-CAMERA. This view
can also be displayed in your printout with the Plot-Designer (see Chapter 13
17.2.4) in a 3D-cell.
Manual
6
3D-Camera with a fixed By a „3D-drive“ above a road or by a virtuell „flight“ along a air route
Viewpoint 13.15.0 with the command 3D-special from the context menu the point of view is
always equal to the moving direction.
In a lot of cases you may wish to keep an object as your center on which
you are looking during bypassing. You can manage it - insert a short auxi-
liary polygon with the center as starting point. The auxiliary polygon’s
first point is decisive. This point is always the point of view from each ar-
bitrary object or polygon if you write in its ID box the expression
3D-CENTER
(pay attention to the capital letters!). During each movement of the auto-
matical animation - caused by pression the RETURN key - is now the initial
point of the auxiliary polygon the focus.
Racingcourse.cna For an example open the file Racingcourse.cna. The red circle symbolized
the air route. Click on it with the right mouse key and select 3D-special.
The 3D window opens and if you press the return key you will fly along
this circle but always with the focus on the first polygon point of the small
auxiliary polygon 3D-CENTER. This must not be so long as in our exam-
ple because only the first inserted point is relevant.
see also:
13 Duplicate (see Chapter 5.7.1)
Connect Lines (see Chapter 5.7.8)
Spline (see Chapter 5.7.12)
Quick Start: another example of 3D-Special (see Chapter 4.14.1)
Manual
Chapter 13 Graphics
Video Recording 13.16 1
13.16 Video Recording

The simulation of a Pass-By Level (see Chapter 8.14) and the movement
in the 3D-Special view (see Chapter 13.14) can be recorded in a video.
Such a file, like an AVI-format, can be replayed with a corresponding
Windows Media Player independent of CadnaA.
A powerful tool for presentational purposes.
In order to use the video function, you need on your system the corre-
sponding video driver which is able to decode and encode pictures.
Annotation: For the time being we are using the DivXCodec5. You can
download this decoder for free (http://www.divx.com). Please understand
that we are not responsible for this software and that we cannot support it
either.
For the video recording of a pass-by a lot of receiver point grids are calcu- Recording
lated. The number of calculated grids depents on the number of pictures a Pass-By as
Video
which are recorded per second (Framerate (fps)).
If you enter, e.g., the value 15 in the field Framerate, for the replay, 15
grids per second are calculated and recorded while the entered speed is
taken into account for the object which is passing by.
13
So, before you select the command Pass-By Level from the context menu
make all your desired settings for a grid calculation in menu Grid and
maybe also in the menu Calculation|Configuration.
Afterwards choose the command Pass-By Level from the context menu of
the corresponding line object and enter the desired setting
Open the example file, which already has been calculated and recorded,
and look at the settings. Also pay attention to the menu Calculation|Con- Pass-ByVideo.cna
figuration.
Manual
2
Video Recording
The Dialog Pass-By Level
Open the corresponding video AVI file with a double-click. Should this
Pass-ByVideo.avi file not open, then the appropriate Windows Media Player is missing. If
this is so then you have to install it from the CD-Rom of your Windows
13 operating system.
Section If you choose a section, then this one is the „calculation area“ for the re-
ceiver point grid.
follow source By activating the option follow source the section of the graphics is
moved with the source.
Scale By activating this option the entered scale is used, in other cases, the cur-
rent scale in the project.
Manual
Chapter 13 Graphics
Video Recording 13.16 3
By activating this option and entering a value this resolution is used, in the Resolution (dpi)
other case, the settings of your computer screen are used. The bigger the
value, the finer the resolution and the bigger the file.
After clicking the button Video, the dialog Save as opens. Enter the name Video
of the file in which the video is saved.
After confirming with Save a further dialog opens in which you can select
the desired video driver.
In the example of the Pass-By the grid calculation and the recording of
the video starts. This created AVI-file can be run with the corresponding
Windows Media Player.
In the 3D-Special View the recording of the video starts after clicking on Video recording in the
the menu Video and entering a file name as described in the preceding par- 3D-Special View
agraph on the pre-defined path.

Individual movements made by the user with the arrow keys are not re-
corded.
See also see Chapter 13.14
13
Manual
4
Video Recording
13
Manual
Manual CadnaA
Chapter 14 Pictures
Chapter 5 Basics 5
Chapter 6 Import 6
Chapter 8 Sources 8
Examples Tutorial
Manual
2 Chapter 14 Pictures
14
Manual
Chapter 14 Pictures
Contents 14.1 1
Chapter 14 Pictures
* The Option BMP is an additional modul for CadnaA and only runs with the basic version.
The following described functions are accessible only if the option BMP has been purchased
14.1 Contents
14.2 Insert Bitmaps
14.2.1 Bitmap Size and Position
14.3 Import Bitmap

14.3.1 Delete Bitmap
14.4 Web-Bitmaps
14
Manual
2
14.1 Chapter 14 Pictures
Contents
14
Manual
Chapter 14 Pictures
Insert Bitmaps 14.2 1
14.2 Insert Bitmaps

* The option BMP is only available if you have purchased it.
There are two types of computer graphics: Bitmaps and Vektor graphics. In
CadnaA we can open or import (see Chapter 14.3 "Import Bitmap") dif-
ferent formats of Bitmaps.
Bitmaps use a color grid (pixel) for the display of images. Each pixel is as- Bitmaps 14.2
signed a certain position and a color value. With bit-mapped images pixels
are worked on, not objects or figures.
Bitmaps are the current electronic medium for half tone images as, e.g.,
photos or digital drawings because the shades and colors can be repro-
duced in fine gradations. Bitmaps are resolution dependent, that means
they have a solid number of pixels. Scaling on the screen or during print
out with a resolution which is too low can therefore result in the losing of
details or in irregularities in appearance.
Vector graphics contain lines and curves which are defined by mathemati- Vector graphics 14.2
cal objects - so-called vectors. Vectors describe images on the basis of
their geometric properties. This type of graphics is not used in CadnaA.
The bitmap option is frequently used to insert scanned maps such as sur-
veyor’s plan, land register or catastral plan. They serve as a background
pattern for inputing noise sources, receiver points and other objects with
acoustical meaning. But also photos, e.g., digital pictures of machines, 14
buildings or others which have the JPEG format. The number of pictures
you can insert depends, of course, on your hardware, on the memory ca-
pacity of your equipment and on the resolution (DPI) of your image files.
CadnaA does not save the bitmaps in the cna-file but refers to the bitmap
files with their file name and pathes. If you now shift your project cna-file
and the bitmap into a different folder on your hard drive, CadnaA will find
the bitmap if the cna-file and the bitmaps file are in the same folder.
We have several different possibilities for inserting bitmaps in our project
file:
Manual
2
Insert Bitmaps
• via the table (Tables|Other Objects|Bitmap)

• with the toolbox icon and
• by importation via File|Import (see Chapter 14.3 "Import Bitmap") or
• ODBC interface (see Chapter 6.5). This procedure is advantageous if a
lot of bitmaps shall be included in one CadnaA-file and if a list exist
(e.g. MS-Excel file) which contains all file name of the bitmaps and
their corner coordinates. In that case all bitmaps will be imported and
placed in the CadnaA graphics automatically.
Pull up an arbitrary sized frame with the icon from the toolbox . If no bit-
map has been inserted yet, a frame with a bitmap sign appears.
An empty bitmap frame - a bitmap file has not been selected yet.
If you have already defined a bitmap and if you insert another frame, the
new frame will also contain the last selected bitmap file.
If you click with the RIGHT mouse key on the margin of the frame the edit
14 dialog will open in which you can select the desired bitmap file.
Manual
Chapter 14 Pictures
Insert Bitmaps 14.2 3
After clicking the folder icon on the right side of the File box, select the
bitmap file in the usual manner.
As an alternative you can also insert a bitmap file via Table|Other Ob-
jects|Bitmap. In this tabel all inserted bitmaps are clearly registered.
In the box Name enter a more meaningful name than the file name if nec-
essary. This name is displayed in the first column of the table.
14
Manual
4
Insert Bitmaps
14
Manual
Chapter 14.2 Insert Bitmaps
Bitmap Size and Position 14.2.1 1
14.2.1 Bitmap Size and Position
To avoid a distorted representation of the background image on the

CadnaA main window, you must specify its dimensions and its intended
position within the main window or the limits.
You may do so by entering
1. the co-ordinates of the bottom left and top right corners, or Coordinates 14.2.1
2. the resolution of the map in dots per inch (DPI) and the scale, or
3. reference points, the coordinates of which are known (calibration).
If the Resolution option is activated, you must know the resolution in DPI Resolution 14.2.1
(e. g. 150, 200, 400 etc.) used when the map was scanned and the scale of
the map. This method is particularly convenient if only the relative posi-
tions of objects matter, and their absolute coordinates are irrelevant.
The Calibrate Bitmap button opens a dialog which allows you to enter up Calibrate
to four points with known coordinates on the map. As soon as you have Bitmap 14.2.1
entered these points and confirmed by clicking OK, CadnaA will load the
bitmap and prompt you to click the reference points on the bitmap which is
displayed on the screen. CadnaA will then determine the correct coordi- 14
nates for the representation. Under this mode, you may use the zoom mag-
nifiers to enlarge the reference point to be clicked.
You should always select this method when more than one bitmap file is to
be inserted because in this case the absolute position of the bitmaps is de-
cisive for a correct representation. In practice bitmaps will overlap, partic-
ularly near the edges because the scanning causes discontinuities not
present in the original map.
When all reference points have been identified, you can save this calibrat-
ed bitmap under a different name. You need not do so, however. It is con-
Manual
2
14.2.1 Chapter 14.2 Insert Bitmaps
Bitmap Size and Position
venient, when the calibrated bitmap is large, up to several Megabytes, and,

moreover, has been rotated because of the calibration. CadnaA calculates
the position of the bitmap, which may take several minutes. Saving the bit-
map in the right position means not having to re-calculate it when the file
is opened again.
Save the entered coordinates under a name so you can reload them by just
selecting that name.
14
Bitmap file as background information for input of acous-

tically relevant objects.
Manual
Chapter 14.2 Insert Bitmaps
Bitmap Size and Position 14.2.1 3
Insert the objects on the map which is now displayed on the main window.
The background information of the scanned maps allows

you to quickly insert and calculate the acoustically rele-
vant objects in CADNAA. A representative diagram of the
calculation results can be printed.
14
Manual
4
14.2.1 Chapter 14.2 Insert Bitmaps
Bitmap Size and Position
Bitmap fix 14.2.1 As long as the option in the dialog Bitmap|Fix Bitmap is activated, size
and position of the bitmap cannot be modified.
Show Bitmap 14.2.1 The bitmap icon on the icon bar allows you to show or hide bitmaps by
activating or deactivating the Show Bitmap check box.
see also chapter 10.4 The Object’s Geometry, Reference Points
14
Manual
Chapter 14 Pictures
Import Bitmap 14.3 1
14.3 Import Bitmap

* The import of bitmaps only works properly if the Option Bitmap
has been purchased.
The bitmap format used for File|Import enables you to automatically
place bitmap files (e.g., tif files) in bitmap frames, provided that the corner
coordinates of the bitmap are saved in the equally named additional file
with the extension TFW and both files are in the same directory (e.g., bit-
map file named 34139ca2.tif and coordinate information file named
34139ca2.tfw).
You can select the files to be imported by multiple choice . It is of no sig-
nificance whether you mark the TFW file or not - CadnaA will find the
corresponding information and will automatically load all files one after
another.
You can also import other bitmap files with the same method. In this case
you do not have to create a bitmap frame from the toolbox. CadnaA will
automatically create this frame in the lower left corner of your limits, giv-
ing it a size of 10 x 10 m. You can adjust this frame accordingly in the edit
dialog as usual.
Following Bitmap formats can be imported for the time being (modifica-
tions subject to change at any time):
CALS Raster, DCX, GEM Image (IMG), GIFF, IOCA (ICA), JFIF, 14
JPEG, JTIF, LEAD CMP, Macintosh Pict (PCT Macintosh QuickDraw),
MacPaint (MAC), Microsoft Paint (MSP), MPT (Multipage TIFF), OS/2
Bitmap, PCD (Kodak PhotoCD Files), PCX, Photoshop 3.0 (PSD), PNG
(Portable Network Graphics), PostScript Raster (Encapsulated PostScript),
SUN Raster (RAS), TIFF, TIFF CCITT (also Group 3 and 4), TIFF
(LZW), Truevision TGA (TARGA), Windows Bitmap (BMP), Windows
Metafile (WMF), WinFax Group 3, WinFax Group 4, WordPerfect (WPG
WordPerfect raster files) and some others. Just check formats of your own.
Manual
2
Import Bitmap
14
Manual
Chapter 14 Pictures
Delete Bitmap 14.3.1 1
14.3.1 Delete Bitmap
Like any other object, you can delete a bitmap using the DEL key. This will
only remove the bitmap from the display of your project on the screen, and
the reference to the file from the objects table, but it will not delete the file
from your disk. The Edit|Undo command allows you to restore the dis-
play.
14
Manual
2
14.3.1 Chapter 14 Pictures
Delete Bitmap
14
Manual
Chapter 14 Pictures
Web-Bitmaps 14.4 1
14.4 Web-Bitmaps
With the export format Web-Bitmaps in File|Export you can export your
CadnaA project file as internet-suitable Bitmap(s). This means that these
files can be saved with different scales and with a definable resolution for
quick loading via the internet.
This „pre-work“ makes it possible to place, e.g., your projects on your
Homepage to provide your customers or market with information about
your work. The interested person can then have a look at representations of
your project with different resolution by zooming in or out.
14
Bitmaps saved with different scales.
Before you execute the export command draw a Section (see Chapter
13.10) over the area in your project file which you want to save as Web-
Bitmap and enter a name for this section.
Manual
2
Web-Bitmaps
File Name 14.4.0 After executing the export command, enter a file name as base name to be
saved under and the corresponding options by clicking the button Option.
CadnaA then saves the necessary number of bitmaps, dependent on the
chosen options, automatically with the equivalent extensions in alphabeti-
cal order. For the following example three files with different scales have
been saved.
Webtest_demo1_a.bmp is the file with the largest scale (whereas
Webtest_demo1 was the original file name and a is the extension),
Webtest_demo1_b.bmp is the file name for the scale with the magnificati-
on step 2 and Webtest_demo1_c.bmp is the file name for the magnificati-
on step 3 etc.
14 Export Options for Web-Bitmaps
Section 14.4.0 Select the desired section by clicking on the section name in the list.
Largest Enter the largest scale you want to display (if you are not sure, check in
Scale 14.4.0 CadnaA which scale could be useful).
Manual
Chapter 14 Pictures
Web-Bitmaps 14.4 3
Enter the number of desired magnification steps. If you enter the value 3 Magnification
then two further diagrams are created magnified by the factor 2 with the Steps 14.4.0
start value entered in the field Largest Scale (in the above example dia-
grams with 1:5000, 1:2500 and 1:1250).
Enter the desired resolution in dpi. But remember - the higher the resolu- Resolution 14.4.0
tion the longer the loading time of the bitmaps. 100 dpi are normaly suffi-
cient. The bitmaps are created with the resolution of the computer screen if
you don’t enter a resolution on your own. This resolution is normaly suffi-
cient, also.
You can divide your project file if it is too big. In that case activate the op- Generate
tion Generate Tiles. CadnaA then divides the file automatically in the de- Tiles 14.4.0
fined size (Width and Hight of Tiles) and generates for each section or
tiles the corresponding number of bitmaps with the settings entered under
Option. Sections without any objects are not created if the check box Sup-
press empty Tiles is activated.
CadnaA cannot supply the program for the handling of the bitmaps in the
internet but each „Web-Programer“ can process the bitmaps. If you are in-
terested in this you can also get in touch with us of course. You will find an
example with http://www.noiseRus.com.
14
Manual
4
Web-Bitmaps
14
Manual
Manual CadnaA
Chapter 15 Tables
Chapter 5 Basics 5
Chapter 6 Import 6
Chapter 8 Sources 8
Examples Tutorial
Manual
2 Chapter 15 Tables
15
Manual
Chapter 15 The Tables
Contents 15.1 1
15.1 Contents
15.2 The Tables
15.2.1 The Table’s Button Bar
15.2.2 Inserting a Row
15.2.3 Editing Table Cells
15.2.4 Sorting Columns
15.2.5 Change Column Content
15.2.6 Adjusting the Column Width
15.2.7 Copying and Pasting Data Records
15.3 The Result Table

15.3.1 Edit Result Table
15.3.2 Column Headings
15.3.3 Column Contents
15.3.4 Display Column Content
15
Manual
2
15.1 Chapter 15 The Tables
Contents
15
Manual
The Tables 15.2 1
15.2 The Tables

All objects inserted via the graphics will automatically be adopted as data
records in the pertinent table of objects and vice versa. An object entered
by giving its data in the table of objects will appear as a graphic object in
the CadnaA main window. The tables of objects are all compiled under the
pertinent category term on the Tables menu.
A check mark in front of an item on the Tables menu indicates that data
records of that type are available.
As you know, the tool icons (see Chapter 4.8) from the toolbox can be ac- Open Tables with 15
tivated via shortcuts. The edit mode, e.g., with CTRL+E, the street icon Shortcuts
with CTRL+S (see also online help keyword „Shortcut“).

You can also open the corresponding table of objects with the same char-
acter keys, but without the CTRL key and you can close it again with the
ESC key. You press, e.g., the key s that opens the road table, key b for the
railway table and so on. By doing so the first data record is activated auto-
matically.
Manual
2
The Tables
Synchronisation 15.2 The tables and the graphics are synchronised. When a record in a table is
selected, the corresponding graphic object on the main window is as well.
Even an individual polygon point, edited on a Geometry dialog, will be
flashing so you always know what you are working on.
Editing Data records may be inserted, edited, copied in and deleted from the ta-
Data records bles. When a data record is deleted from a table, the corresponding graphi-
cal object on the main window is deleted as well.
Delete For deleting a data record from the table you can use either the DEL-key or
Data record 15.2.0 the command Delete from the context menu.
You can bring back a deleted data record with the command Edit|Undo.
15
Manual
Chapter 15.2 The Tables
The Table’s Button Bar 15.2.1 1
15.2.1 The Table’s Button Bar
The button bar shown in the figure below appears on all object tables ac-
cessed via the Table menu.
Click this button to close the dialog and to adopt any selected value or data Close 15.2.1
record or to apply changes.
A selected data record, at the same time, selects the corresponding graphic Synchronize
object. If the graphic object is outside the area visible on the screen, click- Graphics 15.2.1
ing this button will make it visible.
Pressing the button Copy copies the entire table to the clipboard (alterna- Copy 15.2.1
tively, press CTRL+C). The table can then be pasted in other Windows’ ap-
plications or you can paste one individual data record in a table of the
same object type in CadnaA (see Chapter 15.2.7).
As usual the tables can be printed directly by clicking the button Print. Print 15.2.1
The keywords for user-defined printout or export of the object tables can
be found in the online help with the „keyword“ or in chapter 15.2 The Ta-
bles of this manual.
This button allows you to select the font and the character size for screen Font 15
presentation and printout as usual.
Manual
2
15.2.1 Chapter 15.2 The Tables
The Table’s Button Bar
15
Manual
Inserting a Row 15.2.2 1
15.2.2 Inserting a Row
If no object has been inserted then you can only see the table head without
any rows. To create a new data record you have to insert a new line either
• via the context menu or (see Chapter 5.7)
• by pressing the INS key
To insert a row via the table context menu, just press the RIGHT mouse key
on the row where you want to insert a line before or after the current one.
If the table is empty, just click on the RIGHT mouse key below the table
head and the context menu opens.
15
Then select the appropriate command Insert before/after by clicking it

with the LEFT mouse button. A new, blank row is now available for the in-
put of data.
Another alternative is to just press the INS key and the new row will then
be inserted before the current one.
Manual
2
15.2.2 Chapter 15 The Tables
Inserting a Row
15
Manual
Editing Table Cells 15.2.3 1
15.2.3 Editing Table Cells
The table cell can be edited. If its value depends on that of another cell, it
will immediately be updated when a parameter in the other cell is edited.
You can also modify the MDTD in the roads table. This results in an im- Example
mediate updating of the Lme for day-time, and, if necessary, for night-time.
If you enter the Lme directly, the data used before to calculate it will not be
shown in the table any more.
* Hints regarding Editing:
• Clicking a table row will not result in the entire row, but only an indi-
vidual cell being selected (highlighted). This becomes the active cell
which you can edit. The corresponding graphical object will also be
selected.
• The up and down arrow keys (↓ ↑) serve to navigate from one row to
the next, and the left and right arrow keys (→ ←) do the same for the
cells of a row.
• You can edit the selected cell by entering the desired value or text. A
vertical-bar cursor (|) will appear in that cell. Any existing value will
be overwritten (overwriting mode). Please also note how to enter deci-
mals (see Chapter 5.5.4).
• There are two editing modes: Overwrite (default) and Insert. Under
the overwriting mode, any existing text is overwritten (deleted com-
pletely). Under the insertion mode you can modify the text, add to it, or 15
delete it using the BACKSPACE and DEL keys.
• If you wish to add to the existing text, or correct it, press the F2 key
(insertion mode). Any text in the cell will be retained. You can move
the vertical-bar cursor backwards and forwards across the text using
the left and right arrow keys (→ ←).
Manual
2
Editing Table Cells
• To terminate editing, in the overwriting mode, either

- press the left or right arrow key (→ ←): The cursor moves on to
the next cell belonging to the same data record –, or
- press the up or down arrow key (↓ ↑), or RETURN: The cursor
moves on to the next row but stays in the same column.
• Under the insertion mode, just press RETURN to stop editing. This will
also result in the cursor moving on to the next row following the one
just edited it will remain in the same table column.
• ESC exits the edit mode and restores the previous value.
• Pressing RETURN when not in the edit mode results in the Tables dialog
being closed (just like clicking OK).
• Double-clicking a table cell opens the pertinent edit dialog of the
object, as customary.
15
Manual
Sorting Columns 15.2.4 1
15.2.4 Sorting Columns
By default, CadnaA lists all inserted objects in the sequence in which they
were entered. When the Sort command on the context menu is clicked, the
selected table column is sorted in numerical or alphabetical order, either
ascending or descending, depending on which option buttons were activat-
ed in the dialog:
Click the column to be sorted with the RIGHT mouse button, select the
Sort command from the context menu, and activate the appropriate op-
tions in the dialog.
The tables will then be sorted as specified and will also be printed in that
order. Also the graphic objects will be „drawn“ according to their order in
the table.
You also can shift individual rows within the table. For that, hold down the Shift Rows 15.2.4 15
mouse pointer on that row you want to shift and move the mouse pointer to
the desired position and release the mouse key.
Manual
2
Sorting Columns
15
Manual
Change Column Content 15.2.5 1
15.2.5 Change Column Content
CadnaA offers a comfortable tool for the editing of specified ranges of ta-
bles on the basis of the current value.
This can be either a conversion of numerical values (arithmetics) or a
modification (substitution) of character strings.
For the examples below, you should open a table – for example the table of
point sources – of a CadnaA project, or just enter a few points and open
the pertinent table of object.
Click the column to be edited using the RIGHT mouse button. On the con-
text menu, select Change Column.
In the dialog which then opens, you may restrict the modification to a Range of
Range of rows up to or starting from a row which you specify by clicking Rows 15.2.5
it. In the default setting, all elements of the selected column will be modi-
fied.
If the column contains numerical values, both arithmetic and string con-
version are possible. In all other cases, only string conversion is possible.
The current numerical value may be replaced by a different constant value, Arithmetic 15.2.5
or by one that is computed from the current value.
+, -, /, * are operators used as customary. x stands for the current value.
++ and -- stand for level addition and subtraction.
15
see Chapter 2.6 Examples of Formulas and Operators
This operation may be required if a data record, e. g., the CadnaA project Replace
for an enterprise, is to be embedded in larger limits, requiring modification String 15.2.5
of the ID code.
Specify a search string in the box Search For: only strings matching this Search for
string will be converted.
Manual
2
Change Column Content
The characters * (asterix: arbitrary number of arbitrary characters) and ?

(questionsmark: one arbitrary character) act as wildcards used as custom-
ary. If sections of a string are to be re-used in the conversion, these are en-
closed in brackets.
Replace with In the box Replace with: you may combine arbitrary character strings
with the string sections marked by brackets in the search string. \1 . . . \n is
used as a symbol for these marked string sections (see Chapter 2.8).
This flexible logic allows you to perform practically any operation re-
quired to convert strings.
Automatic Numbering With the rhombus # you can number automatically the column in your ta-
in Tables 15.2.5 bles. One rhombus # results in a one digit value from 1 to 9, two rhombus-
es ## result in a two digit value from 01 to 99, three rhombuses result in a
three digit value from 001 to 999 and so on. After the value 9 CadnaA
starts with 0 again.
Enter the rhombus in the field replace with.
Example How can you find out how many buildings, barriers, point sources, etc. are
in the project without having to count them individually?
Here is the answer:
Demo1.cna ) Open a file, and take a look at the pertinent table of object (e.g., have
a look at the building table in the file DEMO1.CNA).
15
Manual
Existing tabel with building - initial situation
) Position the mouse pointer on the column Name.
) Click it using the RIGHT mouse button and select Change Column
on the context menu.
) Specify the settings as shown in the figure below.
15
Manual
4
Automatic numbering with the function Change Column
The figure shows automatic numbering using two digits and the character
string \1 means that the current value is to be retained.
15
Result of the automatic numbering
Manual
This command thus allows us to quickly determine the number of objects.

(How many buildings are there in Demo1.cna? - Find out.)
If you wish to remove the numbering, use Change Column again, and en-
ter what is shown below.
How to remove the automatic numbering from the above example
With this command only the numbering at the beginning of the line is de-
leted (see also chapter 2.8 Strings and Operators).
15
Manual
6
15
Manual
Adjusting the Column Width 15.2.6 1
15.2.6 Adjusting the Column Width
The column widths of all tables can be adjusted
1. To this end, position the mouse pointer on the table header of the line individually 15.2.6
separating the columns which you want to adjust. The mouse pointer
turns into a two-headed arrow. Hold the LEFT mouse button down
and move the mouse in the desired direction. Then release the mouse
button.
2. Just double-click on the separating line of the table header. The automatically to the
columns will be adjusted so, that all characters of each column are longest columns 15.2.6
visible.
3. For that, hold the SHIFT key down while double-clicking on the divi- automatically to fit table
ding line of the table header. CadnaA tries to fit all columns into the into window 15.2.6
tables window. You can undo this with another double-click without
pressing the Shift key.
When closing the table, the table columns will have their default width
again.
15
Manual
2
Adjusting the Column Width
15
Manual
Copying and Pasting Data Records 15.2.7 1
15.2.7 Copying and Pasting Data Records
A data record may be copied to the clipboard so as to be pasted in an ob-

jects table of the same type.
To do so
) first, click any cell of the record to be copied,
) then click the Copy button on the Tables dialog (or press CTRL+C),
) insert a new row in the table (context menu Insert before/after), and
) finally, press CTRL+V to paste the data record that was saved to the
clipboard.
The copied data record can only be pasted in a table of the same object
type. Therefore, the data record of, e. g., an area source, cannot be pasted
in a point sources’ table.
15
Manual
2
Copying and Pasting Data Records
15
Manual
The Result Table 15.3 1
15.3 The Result Table

CadnaA contains an efficient generator of tables which can represent all
results for defined receiver points in any desired way. If you want to repre-
sent the evaluation of projects in the customary form of a table, you have
to generate a template for this table. Afterwards this template will only
have to be referred to in order to represent calculation results in a standard-
ized way.
Therefore, save the default table with a different name and adjust it as de-
sired. In each project in which you open this template table the results will
be displayed in the created shape. The template table has the extension
CNT.
The Result tables can be printed out directly with the button Print or the
layout can be seen in the print preview.
Editing Result table see Chapter 15.3.1
The table’s button bar see Chapter 15.2.1
15
Manual
2
The Result Table
15
Manual
Chapter 15.3 The Result Table
Edit Result Table 15.3.1 1
15.3.1 Edit Result Table
(Menu Tables|Result Table|Button Edit)

You may individually create column headers, numbers of columns and
contents. Instead of defining several result tables, define only one with all
columns you may require and switch them off with one mouse click if you
don't need them.
Also, in invisible columns you may save interim results for further calcula-
tions and finally display the results in another visible column.
Edit Dialog Result Table

15
The options in the dialog of the result table are some sort of filters where
you can determine which receiver points or parameters are to be displayed.
Enter a string corresponding to the ID (see Chapter 5.5.3) of a line-shaped Axis for
source (e.g., road or railway track) if you want to issue, e.g., station, dis- Station 15.3.1
tance or height of a receiver point in relation to this source in the result ta-
ble. This presupposes that you have defined corresponding columns for
Manual
2
15.3.1 Chapter 15.3 The Result Table
Edit Result Table
these values in the result table and that you have entered the corresponding
predefined name (e.g. axis: station) as Column Content.
Receiver from Select, by clicking in the corresponding list box, the class of receiver
Building Noise points of the calculated noise map of a building which you want to have
Maps 15.3.1
represented in the table (e.g., All, maximum Level, 1.Floor etc.).
Noise map of buildings see Chapter 9.3.6.
Only exceeding BNM- With this option activated, only those receiver points exceeding maximum
Immpoints 15.3.1 values are represented.
Inserting a Create a new column by choosing either the Insert before/after command
Column 15.3.1 from the context menu or by pressing the INS key.
For editing, double-click the corresponding row or choose the edit com-
mand from the context menu. With that, the Table Column dialog opens
to define headings and contents of the columns.
15
Manual
Column Headings 15.3.2 1
15.3.2 Column Headings
You may define three headings at most for each column in the result table. Tables|Result Table|Edit
If you want a header to jump-over other columns you have to connect
them with the expression PREV.
Let us say you have created two columns in the result table to identify a re- Example
ceiver point. The first column should display the name of the receiver
point with the heading "Name". The second column should display the ID
with the heading "ID". But over both columns together should be dis-
played the heading "Receiver Point".
In the Table Column dialog for the first column insert in Line 1 of the
box: "Receiver Point", in Line 2: "Name". Turn to the next column by
clicking the right arrow button and enter in Line1 of the second column: :
PREV and in Line 2: "ID"..
15
In the above example is the heading Receiver point writ-

ten over both columns with the expression PREV
Manual
2
Column Headings
Description 15.3.2 Description is for internal information and only shown on the screen in
the dailog Result Table in the status bar on the lower left-hand side if the
cursor is positioned in the corresponding column.
Field Column 15.3.2 see Chapter 15.3.3 "Column Contents"
Precision 15.3.2 Enter the number of digits after the decimal sign. By value 1 levels are
shown, e.g., 49,5 dB and by 2, e.g., 49,51 dB.
Rounding up Enter the value by which the last digit shall be rounded up.
by the
last digit 15.3.2 If you enter, e.g., 0.1, the value 49.1 will be rounded up to 50.0, the value
49.11 will be rounded up to 49.20 a.s.o.
Alignment 15.3.2 The alignment of the text within the frame or the table column can be se-
lected by clicking the respective option. The preview thumbnail will show
the selected alignment.
Display see Chapter 15.3.4 "Display Column Content"

(the content of the
columns) 15.3.2
15
Manual
Column Contents 15.3.3 1
15.3.3 Column Contents
You define the column content in the list box Column. You may do so by
choosing the desired value from the list box with pre-defined variables or
by editing an expression. In the last case you have to choose (user defi-
ned) from the list box. With that, the box expression will be activated and
you may enter your own expression consisting of strings and operators.
Selecting (user defined) the following strings can be used:: (user defined) 15.3.3
Expression Information
LP1 to LP4 at the receiver point calculated evaluation para-

meter 1 to 4
LP1 to LP4 refer to the current variant
LP1V<n> to at the receiver point calculated evaluation para-

LP4V<n> meter 1 to 4 for variant no
<n> refers to the variant corresponding to the

number (LP1V03 means the level of the variant
03 for the evaluation parameter 1)
LP1_<n> bis Just as above with regard to a corresponding band

LP4_<n> of a spectrum with the number after the un-
derscore
example:
15
Manual
2
Column Contents
LP1V03_02 The calculated frequency level at 125 Hz of the

evaluation parameter 1 for the variant 03 at the
receiver point.
The numbering of the frequency starts at 00 for

31.5 Hz and is continously counted for each dup-
lication of Hz-frequency: 00 = 31.3 / 01 = 63 / 02
= 125 / 03 = 250 / 04 = 500 etc. (see result table
template Imm_Spek.cnt on your CD-Rom as ex-
ample)
GW1 bis GW4 Maximum Value: defined for evaluation parame-

ter 1 to 4
(could be the maximum value of land use or the
standard level at the receiver point depending on
which parameter is used)
SP<n> Column of the result table

<n> consecutive number of the column, e.g.,
SP4 (is the 4. column). To count the column num-
ber use either the dialog Edit Result Column or
the dialog Table column and not the Result ta-
ble itself because the invisible columns are coun-
ted as well.
SIGMAD, The resulting uncertainty sigma dB (see Chapter

SIGMAE, 12.4.3) of calculated sound pressure levels can be
15
SIGMAN displayed for the receiver points for Day/Eve-
ning/Night.
Examples for LP1V01-GW1

Expressions and
Formulas This expression subtracts from the calculated evaluation parameter 1 of
the variant01 the maximum value. The result is displayed in the column.
You can also enter complex Boolean Formulas, like, e.g.,
Manual
Column Contents 15.3.3 3
(SP15>GW1)*(SP19>0.05)*((SP19>2.05)+(SP15>69.05))
With this formula you can define conditions, which - if they are fulfilled -
indicate, e.g., a right to noise protection measures in the result table. If the
result is 0, the condition is not fulfilled, if the result is >0, the condition is
fulfilled (Yes=1; No=0)
For the condition to be true in the given example, the first two brackets
must fulfill the condition, but only one of the last two brackets must fulfill
the condition.
You may display information from the info-box in the edit dialog of the re- String
ceiver point. Enter the same string in the expression-box as you did in the Variable 15.3.3
info-box. But first you must choose String variable from the column list-
box.
In the Memo-box of the receiver point you may write an arbitrary string
followed by an equals sign. All information written after the equals sign is
reported in the result table.
The Info-box of the receiver point contains the string: FLRNR=1234/8 Example: 15.3.3
15
In the dialog of the Result Table choose (String variable) from the list-
box and enter FLRNR in the expression/variable box.
1234/8 will be displayed as the result.
Manual
4
Column Contents
Default- Default String variable only for the Result Table - capital letters are
String variable mandatory:
STW Displays the floors of the Building Noise Map
FASSNR Facade numbering - in the Building Noise Map the

level icons are internally numbered continously, star-
ting with the first polygon point of the building’s side
according to the direction in which the building was
inserted. These so-called facade numbers can also be
displayed in the Result Table.
Example: Because of the facade partitioning (Opti-

ons|Building noise map) 12 level icons for all building
facades come out side by side. Therefore, the icons
are numbered internally with the facade numbers 1, 2,
3 etc. up to 12. If each level icon has 5 floors, then it
will be these floors which are assigned to the corres-
ponding facade number.
DIR Degree No. 0-360 with 0 symbolized North direction
HIRI Direction with one letter (N-North, O-East, S-South,

W-West)
HIRI2 Direction with two letters if necessary (e.g. NW-

North-West, SO-South-East)
15
Manual
Display Column Content 15.3.4 1
15.3.4 Display Column Content
After you have defined the column content you may also affect the display Options 15.3.4
of the results by using one of the options Display.
always without precondition - the column content is displayed as defined always

in any case.
never - column is invisible - neither the column nor the column content is never (Column is
visible but the value is available. You may calculate with it further on by invisible)
refering to the column number in order to display the final result in another
column.
You can refer to a column with SP<n>. If you want to refer, e.g., to the
fourth column of the table then you have to write SP4 (Kapitel 15.3.3
Column Contents).
only if: The display is tied on a precondition (only if - then - else) only if
only if: x>0 Example: 15.3.4
then: -
The result is only visible if the value is bigger than zero, if not, a dash is
shown. Instead you may also enter:
only if: x>0
then (activate): yes
15
else: no
In this case if the value is bigger then zero the column content would be
"yes" otherwise "no".
Manual
2
Display Column Content
15
Manual
Manual CadnaA
Chapter 16 Libraries
Chapter 5 Basics 5
Chapter 6 Import 6
Chapter 8 Sources 8
Examples Tutorial
Manual
2 Chapter 16 Libraries
16
Manual
Contents 16.1 1
16.1 Contents
16.2 The local and global Libraries
16.3 Spectra
16.3.1 Entering and Editing Frequency Spectra
16.3.2 Generation of frequency spectra for sound power and indoor levels
16.3.3 Sound Level Spectra
16.3.4 Spectra of Sound Reduction Index
16.3.5 Absorption Coefficient Spectra
16.3.6 Output of Spectra
16.4 Libraries Manager

16.5 Symbol Library
16.6 Text Blocks
16
Manual
2
16.1 Chapter 16 Libraries
Contents
16
Manual
The local and global Libraries 16.2 1
16.2 The local and global Libraries

Global libraries are available for all project files, whereas local libraries
apply only to the project in process. They are accessable via the Tables
menu.
You can insert user-defined spectra in all libraries via the keyboard or by
importation. The importation can happen via the library manager (see
Chapter 16.4) provided that these are CadnaA files. Spectra from third-
party files can be imported in the local library via the ODBC database in-
terface (see Chapter 6.5).
In the globale library you will find data records for
• Spectra (see Chapter 16.3)
- sound levels (see Chapter 16.3.3)
- sound reduction indices (see Chapter 16.3.4)
- absorption coefficients (see Chapter 16.3.5)
• SET-S (see Chapter 8.16)
• Parking lot events (see Chapter 8.13)
• Railway Groups (see Chapter 8.12.2)
• Text blocks (see Chapter 16.6)
and in the local library
• Spectra
- sound levels
- sound reduction indices
- absorption coefficients
• SET-S
• SET-T 16
• Directivity (see Chapter 8.7.3)
• Number of Trains (see Chapter 8.12.2)
• Symbol Library (see Chapter 16.5)
• Text blocks
Manual
2
The local and global Libraries
User-defined The user-defined spectra in the global libraries are contained in the file
Entry for global Library CADNA.DAT in your CadnaA program directory. This file will not be
in CADNA.DAT 16.2
overwritten by an update. You should save this file regularily to prevent
data loss.
Global Library If you want to define a different folder as the program folder for the CAD-
on a Server 16.2 NA.DAT , then you have to make an entry in the CADNAA.INI in the pa-
ragraph [MAIN] as follows:
LibFile=DRV:\Path\Cadna.dat
For DRV enter your drive and path of the folder where the CADNA.DAT
is saved.
With that you have the posibility to lay your data in the global library onto
a server where all your colleagues have access to it.
* But pay attention: CadnaA reads only the INI-file if at least one glo-
bal Text Block exists (Tables|Library (global), see Chapter 16.6). If
you actual don’t use Text Blocks create a „Dummy“ text block on
your computer and afterwards copy this Cadna.dat file to your ser-
ver.
16
Manual
Spectra 16.3 1
16.3 Spectra
The Sound Level Spectra table already lists a number of spectra. These
are the typical indoor level spectra for commercial enterprises as listed in
the Guideline VDI 2571 /15/.
This chapter deals with the spectra. We assume that you are already famil-
iar with the edit dialog of the objects for general sources
• point, (see Chapter 8.3)
• line (see Chapter 8.4) and
• area sources (see Chapter 8.5): horizontal and vertical,
The Sound Level Spectra library stores sound pressure levels and sound
power levels independent of their weighting. You can supplement this li-
brary according to your needs.
* Spectra are made with reference to their ID.
If you require a spectrum from the global library for a project file, it will
be copied to the local library by either:
) copying all required spectra in advance by pressing the Local

Library button,
or
) copying the required spectra while working on the project. By

making reference to a spectrum via the edit dialog of an object, it will
be automatically copied to the local library.
* Remember: From the edit dialog, you access the global library by 16
clicking the card index icon of the PWL box with the SHIFT key held
down.
Manual
2
Spectra
16
Manual
Chapter 16.3 Spectra
Entering and Editing Frequency Spectra 16.3.1 1
16.3.1 Entering and Editing Frequency Spectra
The procedure laid out below applies to both global and local libraries. We
assume that you are familiar with the editing of tables and the inserting of
new rows (see chapter 15.2.3 Editing Table Cells). Spectra, too, may be
entered either directly in the table, or via the spectrum edit dialog (opened
by double-clicking the table row).
Under Name, enter some explanatory information on the spectrum. The Name 16.3.1
entry may be as long as you wish, but it is convenient to limit it to the col-
umn width.
16
Manual
2
16.3.1 Chapter 16.3 Spectra
Entering and Editing Frequency Spectra
Spectrum ID 16.3.1 The ID serves to make reference to a spectrum in the edit dialog of an ob-
ject..
• It may be up to 15 characters long,
• must start with a letter,
• must not contain blanks,
• must not contain operators (+;-;/;* etc.) - (see if necessary chapter 2.6
Operators and Functions), and
• no special characters (see if necessary chapter 2.8 Strings and Opera-
tors).
We suggest the following:
Use the first letter to denote the type of sound level, for example
- L = sound pressure
- P = sound power
- R = sound reduction
- A = absorption
Append a serial number, for example L001, L002, P001, P002. In this con-
text please read chapter 15.2.5 Change Column Content.
Source 16.3.1 Enter information on the origin of the spectrum here.
Spectrum and A spectrum may A-, B-, C-, D-, or Lin-weighted. The spectrum list box
Weighting 16.3.1 serves to assign a weighting to a spectrum by entering the appropriate let-
ter, or by selection from the list.
* Select the weighting before you enter the spectrum.
16 The Weighting column of the table lists the corresponding letter codes. A
blank entry means the spectrum is Lin-weighted.
Follow the explanations and examples below to get a better understanding.
Manual
Generation of frequency spectra for sound power and indoor levels 16.3.2 1
16.3.2 Generation of frequency spectra for sound

power and indoor levels
In order to understand the following, we presuppose that your are familiar

with dealing with frequency spectra, their generation, storage and transfer,
as well as the use of the global and local libraries.
It is also possible to calculate the frequency spectra of the sound power
level, e.g., from measured sound level spectra.
These features are reached when generating a new spectrum in the local or
in the global library.
Example: Insert a new line in the local library and open the dialog by dou-
ble-clicking this line.
16
With the expressions available in the list box Type you have five possible Spectrum
choices to determine a frequency of a spectrum. Type 16.3.2
Manual
2
Generation of frequency spectra for sound power and indoor levels
Li Li indicates that the entered, or in some other way generated, spectrum is

an indoor sound pressure level - e.g. for the calculation of the radiation
from a building . This can be useful for documentation.
Li from interior With this option the level of an indoor sound spectrum can be calculated
sources from the level of a spectrum of sound power from sound sources like ma-
chines etc.
In principle this calculation requires a statistical theory. For each frequen-
cy band the following formula applies:
Li = LW − 10 × lg( A) + 6 (1)
For
Li Indoor level in a room with the frequency band in dB
LW Sound power level of all sources with the frequency band i in dB
A equivalent absorption area with the frequency band in m²

The equivalent absorption area is calculated with the following formula:
A=α ×S (2)
with
α the average absorption coefficient of the room’s surface areas
S the area in m² of the room’s surface
16 Practical The spectra of the sound power level of the single sources in a room have
procedure 16.3.2 to be saved so that they can be referenced with their identifier (ID).
After selection of the option Li from interiour sources from the list Type
new lines can be inserted in the list of Interiour Sources in the usual way.
Manual
After double-clicking on the inserted new line, single spectra can be refer-
enced by typing their ID or you can choose the desired spectrum directly
from the library by clicking the index card symbol.
In the box Absorption displayed in the dialog Spectrum you can either
enter a single value of the average characteristic coefficient of absorption
or the ID-Code of a coefficient-spectrum of absorption from the local li-
brary. By clicking the index card symbol the spectrum can be chosen di-
rectly from the local or - with SHIFT key - global library.
When the surface of the room in m² is specified, the resulting indoor level
of a spectrum is displayed as well in the monitor as in the corresponding
line in the table after closing the dialog with OK (plastic-box-production
in the following figure).
16
Manual
4
The spectrum of an interior level Li04 for the „Plastic-box-production“ is

therefore the result if 3 moulding machines, 5 presses and 6 circular saw
bands are running in a room with a surface area of 1020 m² and an average
spectrum of absorption, spectrum Am from the local library.
The additional parameter (c) with the type-name Li(c) shows that this
spectrum has been calculated from other spectra. Its values cannot be
changed by editing.
Lw 16.3.2 Lw indicates that the entered, or in some other way generated, spectrum is
a sound-power-level - e.g., to define the radiation of an outdoor source.
This can be useful for documentation.
Lw calculated from Lp With this option the determination of the sound power level from the radi-
+ area + near-field- ation from openings is supported. The averaged sound pressure level spec-
correction 16.3.2
trum is determined by measurement in the opening cross-section.
An example is the spectrum LOE1 in the following figure:
16
Manual
This spectrum shall be determined in a 2 m² large cross-section of an outlet

of an exhauster. After double-clicking this line the corresponding edit dia-
log opens. In the field TYP the option Lw calculated from Lp + area +
nearfield-correction is selected.
In addition to the size of the exit area a short distance-correction can be en-
tered which will then be added arithmetically to the frequency-band level.
With this correction it can be taken into account that the rays don't cross
the exit area vertically - only in this case, apply the following conversion
formula
LW = Lp + 10 × lg( S ) (3)
with
S exit area in m2 16
* (Hint: If sound penetrates the area S from all directions, a correction
of -3 dB may be useful. This is the case, e.g., if sound radiated from
machines in a room penetrates the environment through an open
door. In the exit-cross-section of an absorbent duct there are no cross-
modes and the near-field correction is 0. In a duct without any
absorption a value between 0 and -3 may be correct depending on the
Manual
6
propagation conditions between source and exit along with the diam-
eter of the opening).
After closing the dialog the calculated spectrum is inserted in the library
and its Type expression is supplemented with a (c) indicating that this
spectrum has been calculated. Its values cannot be edited.
Lw calculated from Lp The sound power level of a source can be measured with the enveloping
+ distance + sphere surface method in accordance with one of the standards ISO 3744 /3/ or
partition 16.3.2
3746 /41/. In many cases it is appropriate to measure the sound emission
of a source at a distance that is large in comparison to source dimensions
and to use only one or a few measuring points if the source radiation is
unidirectional. If the radiation has a direction, the measurements are un-
dertaken at more points oriented in different directions and a mean spec-
trum is calculated in the first step by energetic averaging. If the source
doesn't radiate in all directions, but only into a portion n% of the sphere,
then the sound power level Lw is calculated from the measured level Lp
with
⎛ n% ⎞
LW = Lp + 10 × lg( 4πr 2 ) + 10 × lg⎜ ⎟ (4)
⎝ 100% ⎠
It is presupposed that the data record Mot03 in the local database corre-
sponds with, e.g., the spectrum of sound levels of an operating electro-mo-
tor standing on a reflecting floor at a distance of 5 m.
16
Manual
After double-clicking this line you will see the settings made in the edit di-
alog. You have to enter the Distance as 5 m and because of the hemispher-
ical sound propagation a Sphere Part with 50 %.
After closing this dialog with OK the calculated spectrum is inserted in the
library and its expression in the box Type is supplemented with (c) indi-
cating that this spectrum is being calculated. Its values cannot be edited.
16
Manual
8
16
Manual
Sound Level Spectra 16.3.3 1
16.3.3 Sound Level Spectra
A level-over-frequency spectrum is a sequence of values, with each value Level Frequency

signifying a level in a specific octave band. Entering zero as a value, not Spectra 16.3.3
entering anything, or a blank, are interpreted in different ways. 0 means
that the level is 0 dB. A blank, or no entry, mean that this frequency band
has no valid entry.
If spectra are available, the calculation, evaluation, and representation of
the rating level at the immission point will be based on the spectral infor-
mation. If, however, there is no value in a frequency band of the spectrum
for a source being taken into account in the calculation, no rating level will
be displayed for this band.
A level-over-frequency spectrum is only unambiguous if the underlying Weighting 16.3.3

frequency weighting – Lin, A, B, C, or D – is known. To ensure unambigu-
ity, the relevant standards always require Lin-weighted spectra. In practi-
cal noise control, however, using the A-weighted levels has proven
convenient, too, because it allows you to determine the relative contribu-
tion of each frequency band level at the A-weighted sound level – the val-
ue of ultimate interest – by just looking at the values. This facilitates a
quick selection of those frequency ranges which need to be considered
first in the constructing of noise-control measures. There is a risk, howev-
er, that spectra with different weightings are mixed in an inadmissible way.
CadnaA makes use of a concept which avoids this risk while still allowing
a quick visual evaluation by means of weighted frequency spectra.
• Spectra may be entered with any of the Lin-, A-, B-, C-, or D-weight- 16
ings, the user being responsible for supplying correct information on
the weighting. (Only this information allows for the correct calculation
of the unweighted spectrum.)
• If you mistakenly entered the wrong weighting, you may modify this at
any time by assigning a different weighting.
• Any of the weightings mentioned above can be selected for output on
Manual
2
Sound Level Spectra
the screen, or on the printer, either globally for all spectra of one table,
or individually for each one of them.
An example of how to enter a spectrum is given below.
) Open the appropriate, currently blank, table of the local library via
Tables|Libraries [local]|Sound Level.
) Insert a row, and open the edit dialog (by double-clicking the inserted
row).
This standard spectrum with a level of 0 dB in each frequency band is val-

id for the entire frequency range from 31.5 Hz to 8,000 Hz. Nine valid fre-
quency bands with a level of 0 dB each result in a total Lin-weighted level,
indicated as Total Lin: of
(0 + 10 x lg(9)) dB = 9.5 dB
16 The A-weighted level is 7.0 dB(A).
) Change the weighting from Linear to, e. g., A by either
- entering A in the Spectrum box, or

- by selecting a weighting from the list which drops down when
you click the arrow to the right of the Spectrum box.
You will then see the weighted spectral levels.
Manual
) Repeat this with different weightings, and watch the total weighted
level displayed on the dialog in each case.
* Switching to another weighting in the edit dialog Spectrum does not

change the underlying frequency spectrum.
Therefore, at first, switch to the appropriate weighting before you
enter a frequency spectrum.
But even if you selected the wrong weighting and confirmed the values
you entered, you do not need to delete them in order to just enter them
again. The second important dialog, Modify Spectrum, is one tool to help
you here.
) First, switch back to Linear on the edit dialog Spectrum which

results in 0 being again displayed for each frequency band.
) Click the calculator icon to the right of the Spectrum box.
In the default setting, Apply Weighting is activated, with the A-weighting 16

being selected.
If you click OK now, the A-weighting will be applied to the values, but the
Linear weighting will still be assigned to the spectrum in the edit dialog.
* Selecting a specific weighting in the Modify Spectrum dialog means

converting and thus manipulating the values. This implies an actual
modification of the spectrum saved in the library.
Manual
4
Sound Level Spectra
The edit dialog should now look similar to the following illustration:
Now the A-weighting corrections are displayed as levels. Your procedure

tells the program to interpret and process this spectrum as Lin-weighted.
Again, switching to other weightings on the edit dialog will not affect the
spectrum saved in the library.
This is very convenient if you have entered the correct values but the
wrong weighting. Suppose you enter the above sequence of values directly
as a Lin-weighted spectrum. Afterwards, you find out that during the
measurement of these values, the instrument had been set to measure A-
weighted levels.
Since you have selected Lin-weighting, you wish to generate linear levels
from the measured A-weighted levels, thus applying a kind of an inverse
16
A-weighting. Therefore,
) click the calculator icon, then the arrow, and select -A from the list
which opens.
Manual
By clicking OK, the original spectrum is restored to the edit dialog.
* Instead of selecting a different weighting via the dialog Modify

Spectrum and in order to leave the values unchanged, you may also
switch to a different weighting directly on the Spectrum dialog.
When doing so, hold the SHIFT key down.
16
Manual
6
Sound Level Spectra
Modify The three other options on the Modify Spectrum dialog similarly lead to a
Spectrum 16.3.3 manipulation of the values.
• Fill Spectrum with Constant K
- enters an arbitrary value K for each band.
• Add Constant K to Bands
- arithmetically adds the value of K to the current value.
• Normalise Spectrum to Total Level K
- adds the same correction to each frequency band value so that
the resulting total level, weighted as specified on the edit dialog,
equals the value of K.
This gives you extreme flexibility in handling spectra while maintaining
consistency in the data. We recommend you try out the combinations de-
scribed above as well as the many other possible ones.
16
Manual
Spectra of Sound Reduction Index 16.3.4 1
16.3.4 Spectra of Sound Reduction Index
The input dialog for sound reduction indices in octave bands is accessed
via Libraries [local]|Sound Reduction Indices.
) Insert a new row and open the edit dialog.
Unlike the edit dialog for the level spectrum, this one does not assign any
weighting to the values. This would not make any sense with sound reduc-
tion indices.
Instead it will be indicated the weighted sound reduction index Rw - deter-

mined from these values in accordance with DIN EN ISO 717-1 /26/ - and
the spectrum adaptation terms C and Ctr which also depend on the spec-
trum. All tools for the manipulation of spectra, as described above, are ac-
cessible via the calculator icon and effective here.
Applying a weighting here, however, is to be understood as a purely arith-
16
metic operation without any relation to noise effects which are implied in
sound level spectra. By activating, e. g., Fill Spectrum with Constant K,
where K=50, and with the subsequent selection of A on the Apply
Weighting box, you generate an approximately realistic sound reduction
index spectrum with a weighted sound reduction index of 49 dB. If you
then select Normalise Spectrum to Total Level K, you generate a sound
Manual
2
Spectra of Sound Reduction Index
reduction index for the spectrum with an arbitrary weighted sound reduc-
tion index K (for example 53 dB as in the figure above).
(Such manipulations are only useful for practice and for studying the ef-
fects of modifications on parameters. For other projects, you should enter
values in the edit dialog which have been measured.)
16
Manual
Absorption Coefficient Spectra 16.3.5 1
16.3.5 Absorption Coefficient Spectra
The input dialog for absorption coefficients in octave bands is accessed via
Libraries [local]|Absorption Coefficients.
) Insert a new row and open the edit dialog.
Unlike the edit dialog for the spectrum of sound level, this one does not as-
sign any weighting to the values. This would not make any sense with ab-
sorption coefficients.
Instead, the reflection loss DLA,a,Str - determined from these values by the
method given in ZTV-Lsw 88 /56/, and the weighted absorption aw which
also depends on the spectrum - are given. All tools for the manipulation of
spectra, as described above and accessible via the calculator icon, are ef-
fective here, too.
However, it does not make sense to apply a weighting here, because rea-
sonable sound absorption coefficients lie between 0 and 1. 16
(Such manipulations are only useful for practise, and to study the effects of
modifications to parameters. For other projects, you should enter values in
the edit dialog which have been measured ).
Manual
2
Absorption Coefficient Spectra
16
Manual
Output of Spectra 16.3.6 1
16.3.6 Output of Spectra
Just like any other table, spectra tables can be copied to the clipboard us-
ing the Copy button, or CTRL+C, and they may be printed out (see Chap-
ter 17.4) or exported (see Chapter 17.3.2) by using their keywords. Only
local libraries can be printed and exported.
Keywords for Spectra Tables
#(Table,LibL) Table of sound levels
#(Table,LibR) Table of sound reduction indices
#(Table,LibA) Table of absorption coefficients
16
Manual
2
Output of Spectra
16
Manual
Libraries Manager 16.4 1
16.4 Libraries Manager

With the Library-Manager in menu Tables|Library-Manager all spectra
in CadnaA-files can be copied or deleted comfortably.
You can
• copy data inside of CadnaA from the local to the global library and
vice-versa
• save spectra in separate library files (*.dat) and
• delete all, or selected, spectra
With these features your are able to maintain your libraries.
In the listbox Library choose the desired library and mark the correspond-
ing option for the type of library.
16
The Dialog Library Manager
Manual
2
Libraries Manager
Library-Type 16.4 With the option Type you can determine which spectra or libraries you
want to use. Default refers to the library which is installed with the pro-
gram and with File you have access to a CadnaA library file (*.dat) in
which the desired spectra are contained.
Select With the option Selection you can either select ALL spectra from the cor-
Spectra 16.4 responding library or you can select spectra which only match the expres-
sion you have entered with the expression in the ID box (see Chapter
5.5.3) of the spectra. For that, mark the corresponding option.
Action 16.4 With the option Action you determine what you want to do with the selct-
ed spectra - to Copy/Save or Delete them.
Destination 16.4 With the action Copy to you can define which library - either global or lo-
cal - you want to copy the selcted spectra to. For that, mark the corre-
sponding option. Having marked the option File, you can choose the path
and the name of the file. The extension DAT is attached automatically.
The Destination is deactivated if you choose Delete. In this case all select-
ed spectra are deleted.
Name You must also define how you want to handle the original spectrum if a
Collisions 16.4 collision of identical names occurs. Do this by clicking the desired op-
tions.
Importing Spectra from You can import spectra from external databases into the local library via
16 external Databases16.4.0 the ODBC interface (File|Database see Chapter 6.5). This is convenient,
e.g., if you have measured spectra on an Excel sheet.
Manual
Symbol Library 16.5 1
16.5 Symbol Library

With Table|Libraries (local)|Symbol Library you may import your own
created symbols and use them with the tool from the toolbox. This is an Object Symbol 16.5
advantageous procedure to get the full resolution of an image with each
scale. You may also determine the color, the angle of alignment and adjust-
ment by changing the scale factor.
Open a new CadnaA file and create the desired picture by using the auxi- Creating user-defined
liary polygon from the toolbox. Another option is to import a drawing in Symbols
DXF format by using the layer of object type Aux. Polygon in the option
dialog. For that CadnaA file, adjust the limits so that the picture occupies
Aux.Polygon 16.5
it completely (Options|Limits|Calc). Save this file with a pertinent name
und close it.
16
DXF CAD graphics imported as Aux.Polygon in Cad-

naA. The smallest Limits has been calculated with
Options|Limits|Calc. This file has been saved then as
CadnaA file (e.g. Flieger.cna).
Manual
2
Symbol Library
Open a new file and insert (INS key) a new line in Tables|Libraries (lo-
cal)|Symbol Library. A double-click on the new line opens the dialog Li-
brary Symbol. Enter a name for the new Symbol in the corresponding
field. This name can be again found in the listbox in the dialog of the Sym-
bol.
Importation By clicking the button Import you can select the CadnaA file in which
your image is saved. Close the dialog by confirming OK. Now you can
place your „Flieger-Symbol“ in your file and if necessary you can enlarge,
reduce or turn it.
With the tool Symbol from the toolbox draw a pertinent frame in your
project file where you want to place this new Symbol.
16 In the dialog of this Symbol frame you can now choose your symbol by
clicking the corresponding name - in our example „Flieger“. The image is
displayed in the preview monitor.
Manual
Symbol Library 16.5 3
After the input of all desired settings close the dialog by clicking OK.
With that, the Symbol is placed in your project file.
16
The inserted Symbol rotated 90°.
Manual
4
Symbol Library
Colour and line width of You have three possibilities to assign the colour and line width to these
the symbols user created symbols.
The first possibility is to define the appearance in the original CadnaA file
which contains the image. Either in File|Appearance|Aux. Polygon as a
global setting or directly in the dialog of the Aux. Polygon. If the option
Use Global Properties is deactivated in the dialog of the Aux. Polygon
with which the image is drawn then you can only change its appearance in
this object dialog.
These settings are then allocated to this image and cannot be changed any-
more in another project file in which this image is inserted as Symbol ob-
ject.
If, in the original file, the option Use Global Properties is activated then
the image is adopted to the colour and line width of the project file in
which it is inserted, provided that this option has been activated in the dia-
log Library Symbol, too. Otherwise you can still adjust the settings indi-
vidually in this dialog.
The Symbol library is a local library and is therefore only available in the
project file you are working on. If you want to have the library always
available then install a Prototype file with the corresponding settings (see
Chapter 18.8).
See also chapter 5.4.6 Inserting from the Clipboard.
16
Manual
Text Blocks 16.6 1
16.6 Text Blocks

Use text blocks (Table|Libraries local and global) to save global or indi-
vidual (local) text blocks which can be printed along with a report or ex-
ported from CadnaA by simply naming them in the template file. The key
word for the template file for this purpose is #(Text,Identifier) where the
identifier is the name of the text block.
Edit Dialog Textblock
This allows you to include, e. g., your company address, the identification
of the project or your customer's address in the report without having to
edit the template file over and over again.
There are local and global text blocks and also automatically generated
textblocks which are created if the Project-Info (see Chapter 18.10) has
been filled out. The global text blocks are available for every CadnaA file,
whereas the local ones are saved together with the specific project, thus
being available for this project only. Local and global text blocks may 16
share the same identifier. CadnaA will search through all text blocks. If
two text blocks having the same identifier are found, the local one will be
used.
Frequently used phrases like "If you have any questions concerning the
calculation please contact #(Text, Person)" may be quoted once in a tem-
plate file. The local text block with the identifier "Person" then supple-
Manual
2
Text Blocks
ments the above phrase by appending the text saved in the corresponding
local text block.
The template file will remain valid even with a different person in charge
when the specific person's name is saved in a local text block
How to enter a Text Select the command Tables|Libraries local or global|Textblocks. This
block 16.6.0 opens the table of Text Blocks. The table will be empty when you first
open this menu.
16
Table of existing text blocks. With a double-click on a

data record the text block dialog opens.
Manual
Text Blocks 16.6 3
To insert a row in the table just press the INS key or hold down the right
mouse button and click either Insert Before or Insert After. This results
in a blank row being inserted. Double-clicking this row with the left mouse
button will open its edit dialog. Enter a characteristic name for the intend-
ed text block in the text box Name. Then proceed to the next box using the
TAB key, and enter the desired text. Clicking the New button lets you enter
another text block. The arrow keys serve to switch from one text block to
the next, and OK closes the edit dialog. Click OK again to close the text
block’s table.
If you click the button New, a new line is inserted for another text block.
With the ARROW keys you can scroll through the existing text blocks,
while clicking OK closes this dialog.
You can also use a prefix with text blocks. The prefix is only written if a
text is contained in the text block otherwise not. The expression
#(Text, PI_AUTHOR,,"Processor: ")
results in e.g.
Processor: Bernd Huber
The prefix Processor: is only written if the text block contains text, e.g.
the name of the processor. If the text block is empty the prefix is not writ-
ten.
If you want a carrige return between the prefix and the text you have to en- Linebreak \n
ter \n in quotation mark („\n“) as last parameter with the key word.
#(Text, PI_AUTHOR,, „BearbeiterIn:“ „\n“)
results in a line break
Processor: 16
Bernd Huber
With that you can also force a text cell in the Plot-Designer (see Chapter
17.2.4) not to be displayed if the texblock is empty and if the size of the
text cell is set on automatically.
Manual
4
Text Blocks
16
Manual
Manual CadnaA
Chapter 17 Output
Chapter 5 Basics 5
Chapter 6 Import 6
Chapter 8 Sources 8
Examples Tutorial
Manual
2 Chapter 17 Output
17
Manual
Chapter 17 Output
Contents 17.1 1
Chapter 17 Output
17.1 Contents
17.2 Creating Reports and Graphics
17.2.1 Template Files
17.2.2 Printing Reports
17.2.3 Print Graphics
17.2.4 The Plot-Designer
17.2.5 The Edit Legend Dialog Box
17.2.6 The Cell Types
17.2.7 The Cell’s Properties
17.2.8 Example: Template File for Graphics of a User-defined Printout
17.2.9 Print Preview
17.3 Export
17.3.1 Export Formats
17.3.2 Text Files TXT / RTF
17.3.3 AutoCad DXF
17.3.4 ArcView
17.4 Keywords
17.4.1 Bitmap
17
17.4.2 Datum
17.4.3 Einzug
17.4.4 File
17.4.5 FileDatum
17.4.6 FileExpIn
17.4.7 FileExpOut
Manual
2
17.1 Chapter 17 Output
Contents
17.4.8 FilePrint
17.4.9 FileZeit
17.4.10 Font
17.4.11 If, Tag
17.4.12 Legende
17.4.13 LegendeNutz
17.4.14 LegendeObj
17.4.15 LineAbs
17.4.16 LineRel
17.4.17 Metafile
17.4.18 MoveAbs
17.4.19 MoveRel
17.4.20 NeueSeite
17.4.21 Plan
17.4.22 PlanAttr
17.4.23 PosPop
17.4.24 PosPush
17.4.25 Range
17.4.26 RasterBewertung
17.4.27 RectAbs
17.4.28 RectRel
17.4.29 Scale
17.4.30 Seite
17.4.31 Tab
17.4.32 Table
17.4.33 Tabs
17.4.34 Text
17.4.35 Variants
17.4.36 VarianteM
17
17.4.37 Version
17.4.38 Zabst
17.4.39 Zeit
Manual
Chapter 17 Output
Contents 17.1 3
17.5 The Connection CadnaA with

BASTIAN
17
Manual
4
Contents
17
Manual
Chapter 17 Output
Creating Reports and Graphics 17.2 1
17.2 Creating Reports and Graphics

CadnaA allows you to export all calculation results and intermediate re-
sults, as well as object descriptions in ASCII or RTF format, and to export
graphics in the DXF format , or to have everything printed out using stand-
ardised printing commands. Examples are:
• Calculation results and object descriptions in formatted tables via
File|Print Report, either standard or user-defined (see Chapter 17.2.2)
• intermediate results of receiver point calculations via Calcula-
tion|Log|Print (see Chapter 12.6)
• graphic representations via File|Print Graphics, either standard or
user-defined (see Chapter 17.2.3) and
• the export of tables and diagrams via the Windows clipboard (see
Chapter 5.4.5)
User-defined output can be realised in CadnaA by using template files
(see Chapter 17.2.1) for exporting and printing.
With the corresponding print drivers - like, e.g., PDF-Writer by ADOBE -
you can also save your files for archive purposes or transfer these PDF
files to your customers via email.
17
Manual
2
Creating Reports and Graphics
17
Manual
Chapter 17.2 Creating Reports and Graphics
Template Files 17.2.1 1
17.2.1 Template Files
Template files contain commands controlling the printing or exporting of

calculation results or diagrams.
Key words (see Chapter 17.4) are essential components of the commands.
Write these commands and any individual text into a file using either a text
editor or a word processor, and save this file in TXT (ASCII) format or
RTF (Rich Text Format). Then select these as template files for user-de-
fined output.
If you want, e.g., to print out the current receiver point table in a user-de-
fined report then you would enter the command #(Table,Imm). The re-
sult is the current table of receiver points in your CadnaA file.
Name M. ID Pegel Lr Limit. Value Land Use Height Coordinates

Day Night Day Night Type Auto Noise Type X Y Z
(dBA) (dBA) (dBA) (dBA) (m) (m) (m) (m)
Astr.1 EG i1_astr1_eg 67.0 56.5 55.0 40.0 1.80 r 66.21 21.28 1.80
Astr.3 EG i2_astr3_eg 67.0 56.6 55.0 40.0 1.80 r 59.80 36.98 1.80
Astr.5 EG i3_astr5_eg 66.9 56.4 55.0 40.0 1.80 r 53.06 53.70 1.80
Astr.13 EG i4_astr13_eg 68.5 58.3 55.0 40.0 1.80 r 33.61 112.13 1.80
Key words must appear in brackets, preceded by a # before the left brack-
et. The parameters of a key word come next to the key word itself, en-
closed in the same brackets and separated by commas.
Another example of a command in a printing template file:
#(Font, Times Roman, 14, f)Cadna/A
has the effect that the word Cadna/A will be printed using the Times
Roman font, 14 pt size, and bold faced.
17
Manual
2
17.2.1 Chapter 17.2 Creating Reports and Graphics
Template Files
Example of a printing template file for printing a report directly from CadnaA
If no parameters are entered, the default value is used. If, in the above ex-
ample, Times Roman had not been entered, thus
17
#(Font,,14,f)Cadna/A
the (default) Arial font would have been used for printing the text.
Manual
Template Files 17.2.1 3
You may also enter an ordinary text without using a key word. This text
will be printed or exported, too. This allows you to prepare standard re-
ports or logs containing the current calculation results.
The following types of template files are presently distributed and can be
either used as they are or modified (edited):
• Print.TXT = Template file for direct printout from CadnaA
• Export.TXT= Template file for exporting. The output file to which the
results are exported is also an ASCII file which can be imported by any
program capable of processing ASCII files (including, e. g., Excel).
• Export.RTF = Template file for exporting. The output file to which
the results are exported is also a Rich Text Format file which can be
recognised and imported by almost any word processor. Tables, e. g.,
will remain tables with frames when imported to the word processor (e.
g., Word). Characters, paragraphs, and tab stops can be formatted
directly in the word processor.
• Print_Gr. TXT = Template file for printing out diagrams. This tem-
plate file contains commands regarding, among other items, size and
caption of the diagram, whether a frame shall be drawn, or whether co-
ordinates or scale shall be printed etc.
The template files, such as Print.TXT, which controls the standard printout Labelling of Printing
of reports from CadnaA can be structured by labelling ##printing ranges. Ranges 17.2.1
These will appear for selection in the Print dialog. Printing ranges may be
selected individually, which allows you to print out just one printing range.
Where a printing range starts in the template file, enter a text - preferably
one word, no blanks - identifying this range. Before this text, without
blanks in between, insert two ##.
General syntax ##PrintingRangeLabel 17
Example: ##LineSources
"LineSources" now appears as a selectable printing range in the print dia-
log. Anything appearing in the template file after "LineSources", but be-
fore the next printing range label, is printed. The label itself is not printed.
Manual
4
Template Files
The label for the printing range from the template file
appears in the print dialog. This gives you the chance to
restrict the print out only to a certain range by marking the
label. Multiple choice is possible.
17
Manual
Printing Reports 17.2.2 1
17.2.2 Printing Reports
The command Print Report from the menu File opens the Print dialog
offering options for printing out calculation results and object descriptions
as formatted tables.
The name of the template file, which CadnaA will use for printing the re- Selecting a
port, appears in the dialog Template (see Chapter 17.2.1 "Template Template File 17.2.2
Files"). A Print.TXT file is supplied with CadnaA. You may edit this tem-
plate file and save it with a different name.
* This version of PRINT.TXT will be overwritten when CadnaA is re-

installed or updated. It is therefore strongly recommended that you
save the template file PRINT.TXT with a different name if any
changes are made!
The Choose button allows you to select a template file for printing. Tem-
plate file names have the extension TXT. Since, among others, the names
of the template files for exporting have the same extension, it may be ad-
visable to save template files for exporting and for printing in different di-
rectories on your disk because some key words (see Chapter 17.4) are
permissible for exporting only, but not for printing.
When you click the Edit button, the editor is started up and opens the se- Editing a
lected template file. Template File 17.2.2
17
Manual
2
Printing Reports
Printing Range 17.2.2

All 17.2.2 If All is activated (black dot) as the printing range, all paragraphs – which
are determined by the selected printing template file – are printed, regard-
less of any selection made under Selected Paragraphs.
Selected If Selected Paragraphs is activated (black dot) you must mark one or
Paragraphs 17.2.2 more items in the paragraph’s list. Only those paragraphs which are
marked are printed. (See also Multiple Selections.)
The total length of all labels (see above: labeling of printing range) on this
list (sum of the lengths of the individual labels) must not exceed
255 characters. Otherwise, you will have to break up the printing template
file in two or more files.
Print to If Print to File is activated, the printout is redirected to a file. You will be
File 17.2.2 prompted to enter the name of the output file.
Copies 17.2.2 Enter the number of copies you desire.
Page Margins 17.2.2 Distance in millimetres from the edges of the sheet of paper.
Header/ These lines let you enter additional text for headers and footers. The first
Footer 17.2.2 line specifies the header, the second the footer.
You can also insert bitmap files (such as company logos) using the key
word #(Bitmap), see Chapter 17.4.1.
Example of header and footer

17 In this example, the text entered on the menu Table|Library|Text Blocks
(see Chapter 16.6) under the text block name "Project" would be printed at
the top of each page. At the bottom, at the TAB position 15 cm from the
left page margin, the word "page" would appear, followed by the respec-
tive page number.
Manual
Print Graphics 17.2.3 1
17.2.3 Print Graphics
When all desired objects have been entered, you may print the graphic
with or without the background image (see Chapter 14.2).
If your diagram contains a bitmap that is not to be printed out, use the bit-
map icon on the icon bar to deactivate the bitmap prior to printing.
For the printout, either click the printer icon on the icon bar or select the
menu command File|Print Graphics. The dialog Print Graphics opens.
.
Dialog Print Graphic
On the left hand side of the dialog at first you select all settings for the Printer and
printer, like printer type, print-out paper size and format and the print-out Print Magrins
paper margins. The print-out paper margin is the distance from the paper
edges. The minimal page margin depends on the selected printer.
17
On the right hand size of the dialog you can choose the print quality and Other
number of copies. Furthermore you can decide if the plot shall be printed
directly to the printer or written into a file.
Manual
2
Print Graphics
Default Print Range Select the standard printing range by clicking one of the three options:
• Limits – prints the limits of the project file, as defined under
Options|Limits (see Chapter 13.2 "The Limits").
• Window – prints the area visible on the screen. You may modify this
area by changing the window size.
• Section – prints an identifiable section that has been defined using the
Section tool (see Chapter 13.10). Select its name from the list box.
Print With one of the options in the mittle of the print dialog you can design the
layout of your plots with a legend either with the Plot-Designer or with a
Template File.
A CadnaA legend is an area that surrounds a plot when it is printed. The
legend displays information about the plot, such as descriptive text, a gra-
phical scale, and a north arrow. The legend may also include a border
around the plot.
Standard CadnaA ledgends are based upon a concept of cells. Cells are rectangular
(Designer) 17.2.3 areas of the paper that can contain text, graphical features such as scales
and north arrows, and other cells. In addition, there is a cell that contains
the plot itself. Each cell has a variety of properties, such as a background
color, a margin, and a border. With the option Standard (Designer) acti-
vated a predefinied ledgend is used for the printout.
How to design a user-defined ledgend with the Pot-Designer is described
in the following chapter 17.2.4.
17
Manual
Print Graphics 17.2.3 3
You need a template file (see Chapter 17.2.1) when this option is activated. User-defined
To select and edit one, click the pertinent buttons. Template File 17.2.3
Specify the printing range in the template file by using the key word
#(Plan), see Chapter 17.4.21, or use the standard printing range in the dia-
log Print Graphic. When the template file contains a definition of a print-
ing range, CadnaA will use it.
An example for a graphics print with a template file is described in chapter
17.2.8.
The settings in the print dialog including the page margins and the selected Saving
printer are saved with the CadnaA file. They are available again with the Print Options 17.2.3
next opening of the file. If the chosen printer is not available then the de-
fault printer is selected automatically.
17
Manual
4
Print Graphics
17
Manual
Chapter 17 Output
The Plot-Designer 17.2.4 1
17.2.4 The Plot-Designer
When printing a CadnaA plot - the graphics - you can add a legend that
displays information about the plot.
You have full control over the appearance and content of the legend. The
legend can have multiple fonts, colors, and borders. Text can be segregated
into outlined rectangular areas, much like an architectural blueprint le-
gend. A graphical scale and north arrow or other symbols are supported.
CadnaA users, who purchased the Option BMP (see Chapter 14 Pictures)
are also enabled to insert images with the corresponding bitmap formats.
CadnaA ledgends are based upon a concept of cells. Cells are rectangular
areas of the paper that can contain text, graphical features such as scales
and north arrows, and other cells. In addition, there is a cell that contains
the plot itself. Each cell has a variety of properties, such as a background
color, a margin, and a border.
The printable area of the paper (i.e., the paper minus any margins) is the
outermost cell. You build a legend by adding cells to this outermost cell,
and setting their properties. Recall that cells can contains other cells. The
legend consists of a hierarchy of cells, with the outermost cell as the root
cell which cannot be deleted.
17
Manual
2
17.2.5 Chapter 17 Output
The Edit Legend Dialog Box
17.2.5 The Edit Legend Dialog Box
Use the Edit Legend dialog box to inspect and edit an CadnaA legend.
The printers dialog opens first if you either click the printer icon in the
icon bar or the menu command File|Print Graphic (see chapter 17.2.3).
You open the Plot-Designer by clicking the pertinent button in the print
dialog.
17
The Legend Dialog
The left side of the Edit Legend dialog box displays a preview of what the
current legend will look like when printed. This is known as the legend
preview.
Manual
Chapter 17 Output
The Edit Legend Dialog Box 17.2.5 3
The right side of the Edit Legend dialog box displays a hierarchical list of
the cells in the legend. This is known as the cell list.
At any given time, one cell is selcted. This selected cell is the one that you
are currently working with. The selected cell is highlighted in both the le-
gend preview and the cell list.
On top of the Edit Legend dialog box is the Plot-Designers icon bar with
the following icons which are explained in the following.
Edit Cells Properties Delete button Move buttons x-Container
y-Container z-Container Plan and 3DCell Text Cell
Symbol Cell Bitmap Cell Legend Cell Macro Cell
Placeholder Cell Add Legend Open Legend Save Legend
Click once with the RIGHT mouse button on the desired point to magnify Working with the
the legend preview for close study. Click once again to reduce the magnifi- Legend Preview 17.2.5
cation level.
17
Click on a cell in the legend preview to select it and then click on the Edit
Cells Properties button - or alternatively double-click on a cell - to dis- Properties
play the cell’s Edit Legend Cell dialog box, which allows you to inspect
and change the cell’s properties.
Manual
4
Working with the Cell The cell list displays a hierarchical list of the cells (Father, Child) in the le-
List 17.2.5 gend being edited. The selected cell is always highlighted. To change the
selected cell, either use the arrow keys on your keyboard, or click on the
cell to be selected.
The Cell List - the Container „Table04“ is highlighted
In front of the container icon is either placed a plus (+) or a minus (-) cha-
racter. The (+) indicates that the container contains further elements eiter
further container and / or other cells. Click on the (+) to open the container,
the (+) exchanges to a (-). Analogously click on the (-) to close the contai-
ner. A container without any sign in front of is empty.
A container placed left above other cells is the „father“ of the subordinated
elements placed right underneath known as „child“. Only a container can
be a „father“. „Children“ can adopt the cell properties of their „father“.
Cell Properties To inspect and edit the properties of a highlighted cell click either on the
icon Properties or double-click the cell name in the cell list. In both cases
17 the Edit Cell dialog is displayed (see chapter 17.2.7).
Adding For adding a cell highlight the cell after which you like to add a new cell
Cells 17.2.5 and click on the desired cell type in the icon bar.
Is the highlighted cell not a container so is the cell added underneath the
highlighted cell on the same level. Is a container highlighted so is the cell
Manual
Chapter 17 Output
The Edit Legend Dialog Box 17.2.5 5
added into the container as „Child“ one level lower independet if the ele-
ment is a normal cell or a container.
You can shift the active cell to an other hierarchy level with the Move but-
tons in the icon bar. Move buttons
Move selected cell up in the cell list.
Move selected cell down in the cell list.
Move selected cell in one level towards the root of the cell list.
Move selected cell out one level away from the root of the cell list.
Delete the selcted cell by either pressing the Delete button, or by pressing Deleting cells
the DEL key.
17.2.5
* But pay attention: If you delete a container in which other elements
are included, thus children existing, they will be deleted as well.
Creating a legend from scratch involves a significant amount of work. Editing

Therefore, CadnaA Plot-Designer gives you the ability to save and load Importing
and Saving
legends to and from files. The intent is that you will create a small number Legends 17.2.5
of legends, and then reuse them as needed.
Press the Save button to write the current legend to a file. Press the Load
button to read a previously saved legend. Press the Import button to add a
legend to the current legend. In all three cases, you will be asked for the
file’s name.
CadnaA Plot-Designer is distributed with several ready-to-use legends. Legends
These legends are stored in files that have the extension .CNP, and are lo-
cated on your program CD-Rom in Samples|Tutorial|Output|Plot-Desig- 17
ner. If you do not wish to go to the trouble of learning how to edit legends,
you can simply use one of these ready-to-use legends.
Manual
6
* If you intend to create your own legend, you may wish to start with
one of the ready-to-use legends included with CadnaA Plot-Desig-
ner, and then edit it incrementally. You will likely find this easier than
creating a new legend from scratch.
17
Manual
Chapter 17 Output
The Cell Types 17.2.6 7
17.2.6 The Cell Types
At the time being eight different cell types exist additionally to the three
container types which organize the alignment of celles.
The alignment of cells - side by side (in x-direction: these cells contain a Container
horizontal row of other cells), among each other (in y-direction: these cells Cells 17.2.6
contain a vertical column of other cells) or overlaped (in z-direction) - are

specified by the container cells, which accommodate the other cell types
like the Plan or 3D cell. Thus you have to insert a container cell first be-
fore you can include other cell types. The standard is that at least one con-
tainer cell must exist, known as root container. If this container is the only
one in your legend you cannot delete this container only its properties can
be changed. .
x-Container y-Container z-Container
To insert a cell highlight either a container cell or an other cell type inclu-
ded in a container cell.
The Plan cell accommodates your CadnaA graphics - your plot itself - like Plan Cell
your noise map which is displayed immediately after inserting this cell ty-
pe. The part of the plan which is displayed depends on the settings in the 17.2.6
Edit Cell dialog (see the next chapter).
The 3D Cell displays a 3D-Special-View which has been created by an 3D Cell

Aux. Polygon either as shaded or as wireframe presentation. The Aux. Po- 17.2.6
17
lygons must be named to identify them in the Edit Cell dialog where they
can be selected.
The Text Cell contains text or possibly pertinent Key Words (see chapter Text Cell
17.4) to automate standard print outs, like #(Scale) which displayes the
17.2.6
Manual
8
The Cell Types
graphical scale or #(Text, Name) which displayes the contents of Text-

blocks (see chapter 16.6).
The text in a Text Cell can be arbitrarily long but there is no automatic
word wrapping. For that use the RETURN key.
Symbol Cell The Symbol Cell can contain internal CadnaA Symbols like a north arrow
or the symbols contained in the symbol’s library (see chapter 16.5).
17.2.6
Bitmap Cell The Bitmap Cell displays images (pictures, logos, digital photographies)
in bitmap format (TIF, BMP, JPEG, PCX, PNG etc.). For that the CadnaA
17.2.6 option BMP is required (see Chapter 14 Pictures).
* CadnaA-user who have not purchased the option BMP can insert bit-
maps only either with the corresponding key word #(Bitmap), which
has to be entered in a Macro Cell (see further below) or by a Symbol
Cell as symbol.
Legend Cell The Legend Cell displays the grid- (color-noise level-scale), object- or
land use legend.
17.2.6
Macro Cell The Macro Cell is actually not necessary but it gives you the possibility to
use your already predefined old template files for plot print out.
17.2.6
In that case copy the contents of your template file into the Macro Cell
and delete all other Plot-Designer cells not needed - except the root contai-
ner with your Macro Cell.
Placement Cell A Placement Cell is a cell which cannot have any entries. It just filles out
the spaces not needed and forces all other cells on its position. If you insert
17 17.2.6 a cell, it does not matter which cell type, and if this cell is the only one, it
occupies normally the whole space in a container. Now if you insert more
cells then they all have to share this space. How the sharing looks like de-
pends on the properties of all cells and the selected container type. So if a
cell type does not need the whole space you must insert a Placement Cell
in any case to force the cell on its position.
Manual
Chapter 17 Output
The Cell Types 17.2.6 9
Edit Legend Cell Dialog Box see chapter 17.2.5.

Example and Training see Programm-CD:
Samples|Tutorial|Output|Plot-Designer.
17
Manual
10
The Cell’s Properties
17.2.7 The Cell’s Properties
The Edit Legend Cell dialog box is a multiple Page Dialog and it allows
you to inspect and change the properties of the selected cell. Click on the
desired page tab to select an other page.
Page General
General 17.2.7 On the page General you can enter a name for the selected cell which is
displayed in the cell list.
Deactivated You can deactivate the cell if you mark the option Deactivated. Thus the
cell and its contents are invisible - it seemed to be deleted. It does not af-
fect your legend anymore.
Do not render in The option Do not render in Plot-Designer serves to accelerate the
17 Plot-Designer screen update. The contents of the cell is not displayed.
Manual
Chapter 17 Output
The Cell’s Properties 17.2.7 11
The Size page allows you to specify both the height (vertical size) and the Size 17.2.7
width (horizontal size) size of the cell. Since the width and height are spe-
cified in an analogous manner, only the width is described in detail.
Page Size
Determine cell width automatically - CadnaA Plot-Designer will auto- Cell’s Width
matically calculate an appropriate width of the cell. For text cells, the
width is computed from the text being displayed. For container cells, the
width is computed from the widths of the cell’s child cells.
As large as possible - The cell will be as wide as possible: it will fill the
horizontal space available for it.
At least, exactly, at most - Type the width of the cell and choose the cor-
responding unit from the drop-down list.
At least - Choose At least to allow the cell to be wider. CadnaA will as-
17
sign the cell a larger width if there is room for it.
Exactly - Choose exactly from the drop-down list to force the cell to be
exactly the width you supplied.
At most - Choose at most to allow the cell to be smaller in case there is
not enough room for it.
Manual
12
The size’s property - at least, exactly, at most - and the setting as large as
possible determine the priority how the space will be shared.
at least If there are only cells with the properties at least, exactly, at most, the
exactly space for the cell with the property at least will be accomplished first, then
at most
the space for the cell with the property exactly and at the end the space for
the cell with the property at most. Thus if there is not enough space for all
cells the cell with the size property at least will have the best measure-
ment.
As large The cell’s property As large as possible forces the cell to occupy the ut-
as possible most space. This is for two cells with the property As large as possible
50% each of the space available.
If only one of the two cells has the size property As large as possible and
the other one the property automatically then the cell with the setting au-
tomatically occupies the lowest possible space but again dependent on the
cell type and the style properties of the „father“ cell.
Margins 17.2.7 The Margins page of the Edit Legend Cell dialog box allows you to spe-
cify a cell’s margins. The margins are white space around the edge of the
cell, similar to the margins on a piece of paper. With that e.g. you could in-
dent a text in a text cell or reduce a bitmap in a bitmap cell.
17
Manual
Chapter 17 Output
Page Margins
Choose the method used to specify the margins. You have three choices:
specifying a single margin for all four sides of the cell, specifying different
margins for the left-right and top-bottom sides of the cell, and specifying
the margins for all four sides individually.
17
Manual
14
Borders 17.2.7 The Borders page of the Edit Legend Cell dialog box allows you to spe-
cify a cell’s borders. The borders are optional lines that can be drawn
around some or all of the four edges of the cell, just outside of the margins.
Page Border
Choose the method used to specify the borders. You have four choices:
displaying no borders, specifying a single border style for all four sides of
the cell, specifying different border styles for the left-right and top-bottom
sides of the cell, and specifying the border styles for all four sides indivi-
dually.
Select the desired color(s) of the line(s) used to draw the borders.
Type the desired width(s) of the line(s) used to draw the borders, in milli-
meters. If a width of zero is specified, then the border is not drawn.
17
Manual
Chapter 17 Output
The Style page of the Edit Legend Cell dialog box allows you to specify Style 17.2.7
the visual appearance of a cell: its color, font, and justification.
Page Style
Select the background color and type of the cell. Note that for some contai- Background
ner cells, the background color will not be visible, as the entire cell will be
filled with other cells that have their own background colors.
Text Font - Select the font used to display the cell’s text. This is relevant Font
only for text cells.
Also the devisee of properties can be defined. If the option inherit is acti- Inherit
vated the „children“ cells inherit the properties of the „father“ cell. from „Father“
It is an advantage to make the style’s settings in the „father“ cell and to ac-
tivate the option inherit in the „children“ cells. In case of style changes
you only need to change the style in the „father“ cell and all „children“ 17
cells adopt the changes too.
Select how the cell’s contents are justified. Vertical: Top, Center or Bot- Aligment
tom, horizontal: left aligned, centered or right aligned.
Manual
16
Cell Type The contens of the last page of the Edit Legend Cell dialog box depends on
the cell type you have chosen.
Plan 17.2.7
Page Plan
The Plan page allows you to choose the Print Range - Limits, Window,
Section - the graphical Scale, Variant and the evaluation parameter. If
you choose Standard for the Print Range to the settings made in the print
dialog is revert to.
With these possibilities you are able to print out several graphics or noise
maps for different evaluation parameters and/or variants in one plot.
The option Paint entire cell has only an effect if the Print Range either
Window or Section is chosen. With activated option CadnaA displays
more of the graphics if there is enough room as if the Print Range Win-
17 dow or Section actually would show. (For more information concerning
Print Range see chapter 17.2.3).
The option Axis Labeling allows you to print the coordinates on all four
sides of your plan. A value entered in the option box Margin (mm) produ-
ced a white space between the plan and the coordinates.
Manual
Chapter 17 Output
The 3D page allows you to choose 3D-Special-Views either as shaded or 3D 17.2.7

as wireframe presentation. For that you need an named Aux. Polygon
which serves as „Camera“. Select the name of the desired polygon in the
Camera Polygon box.
Page 3D
The option Shaded Presentation allows you to choose the Resolution in

dpi and the option Wireframe Presentation gives the possibilty to enter a
individual graphical Scale. Additionally you can choose the variant from
the drop-down list if you have several variants in your project. Thus you
have the possibility to present different variants in one plot.
Try these possibilities with the file 3DPlot.cna on your Program-CD in 3DPlot.cna
Samples|Tutorial|Output|Plot-Designer.
17
Manual
18
Text 17.2.7 The Text page of the Edit Legend Cell dialog allows you to enter and
change a text for your legend. Type the desired text in the box provided.
The text can have as many lines as desired: press the ENTER key to insert a
new line.
Page Text
Key Words The text can include key words (see chapter 17.4), placeholder for text au-
tomatically displayed when the text box is closed by pressing the OK but-
ton. For example, the key word for Textblocks #(Text, PI_TITEL) - see
chapter 16.6 - is automatically replaced with the contents of the field Pro-
ject Name in the menu File|Project-Info. The following key words make
sense, too: #(Scale) to display the graphical scale or #(Datum) to display
the current date or the contents of the description of a Section.
17 Symbol 17.2.7 The Symbol page allows you to select and print a CadnaA symbol (see
chapter 13.11.3).
Maintain Aspect Ratio That the element does not adjust to the cell measurements and gets bulky
activate the option Maintain Aspect Ratio. That keeps the proportion of
the element.
Manual
Chapter 17 Output
With the Bitmap page you are able to select a picture in bitmap format. Bitmap 17.2.7
For that click on the Tab icon and choose the desired bitmap. If you do not
want the bitmap to adjust to the size’s bitmap cell activate the option
Maintain Aspect Ratio.
The Legend page allows you to select from the drop-down list predefined Legend 17.2.7
captions describing the noise map (color-noise level-scale), the used ob-
jects or land uses in your plot.
With a entry in the field Suffix you can determin the unit of the noise level Suffix
describing e.g. the grid caption. For example if you enter dB(A)then is
dB(A) displayed in your grid caption as unit for the noise levels .
17
Manual
20
17
Manual
Example: Template File for Graphics of a User-defined Printout 17.2.8 1
17.2.8 Example: Template File for Graphics of a

User-defined Printout
(All key words and explanations are accessible on the online help system
via the search topic " key word...".)
#(Font,,6)#(PosPush)#(RectAbs,-1,-1) Key words 17.2.8
Command (see Chapter 17.4.24):

#(PosPush)
17
Saves the current position for subsequent retrieval. In our example, the
current position is the top left corner (x/y = 0/0 - Standard).
Manual
2
Example: Template File for Graphics of a User-defined Printout
Command (see Chapter 17.4.27):

#(RectAbs,-1,-1)
draws a rectangle from the current position (top left corner) to the posi-
tions specified by the parameters 1 and 2. In this case, parameter 1 is the
distance in millimetres from the right page margin (because the value is
negative), and parameter 2 is the distance in millimetres from the bottom
margin (because the value is negative).
The margin is the distance from the permissible printing range of the
printer in question plus the page margins entered on the print menu.
Now the current position is the bottom right corner, 1 mm from the bottom
margin, and 1 mm from the right margin.
#(Font,,6)#(PosPush)#(RectAbs,-1,-1)#(PosPop,,,z)
The command #(PosPop,,,z) retrieves from the stack (memory) the posi-
tion previously saved using PosPush (the top left corner in our example),
making it the current position, without removing the saved position from
the stack. The current position is the top left corner again.
#(Font,,6)#(PosPush)#(RectAbs,-1,-1)
#(PosPop,,,z) #(PlanAttr)#(Plan,-60,-1,-1)
The command #(Plan,-60,-1) (see Chapter 17.4.21) identifies the area
where the diagrams are to be placed.
The first parameter defines the position, in millimetres, from the right mar-
gin (negative value), i. e. 6 cm from the right margin in our example.
The second parameter defines the position, in millimetres, from the bottom
margin, i. e. 1 mm from the bottom print margin in our example.
17
The third parameter (>0) is the scale factor. 1,000 for example means that
the diagram is printed at a scale of 1:1,000. If the third parameter is nega-
tive (as in the example), the scale will be chosen to fit the specified paper
size. If the third parameter is not given, as in #(Plan,-60,-1), the scale spec-
ified for the representation on the screen will be used.
Manual
The fourth parameter determines whether to print the limits, the area visi-
ble on the screen (enter Window instead of Limits), or a Section. In the lat-
ter case, the name of the section must be given. If the name of the section
is, e. g., Development_Area, this must be entered. In our example, the set
scale will be used for printing.
If no fourth parameter is given, the option selected on the print dialog is
applied.
#(PlanAttr) (see Chapter 17.4.22) without parameters is drawn in the area

where the graphics are placed without a coordinate scale. This key word 17
must appear before the command #(Plan). The map attribute #(PlanAt-
tr,20,tblr), on the other hand, draws a coordinate scale at a specified dis-
tance (first parameter) of 20 mm from each side of the diagramw. The
second parameter tblr determines which sides to place the scale on – top,
bottom, left, right. In this case, all four sides are scaled.
Manual
4
So far the complete command is, including the coordinate scale,

#(Font,,6)#(PosPush)#(RectAbs,-1,-1)
#(PosPop,,,z) #(PlanAttr,20,oulr) #(Plan,-60,-1,)
If you find the distance too large between the scale and the diagram,
change the command to #(PlanAttr,5,tblr). It will only be 5 mm thencom-
mand.
#(Font,,6)#(PosPush)#(RectAbs,-1,-1) #(PosPop)
#(PosPush) #(PlanAttr,5,oulr) #(Plan,-60,-1,-
17
1,Limits)#(PosPop,x)
The command #(PosPop,x) leaves the current x coordinate unchanged
and, in this example, retrieves from the stack the y coordinate (=0) saved
using #(PosPush).This y coordinate becomes the current position.
Manual
#(Font,,6)#(PosPush)#(RectAbs,-1,-1)#(PosPop)
#(PosPush)#(PlanAttr,5,oulr)#(Plan,-60,-1,-1,
Litmits) #(PosPop,x) #(MoveRel,5) #(Ein-
zug)#(Font,,10)
As a result of the command #(MoveRel,5) (see Chapter 17.4.19), the cur-
rent position is moved to the right by 5 mm, making this the new current
position.
The command #(Einzug) (see Chapter 17.4.3) indents to this position eve-
rything that follows.
17
The command #(Font,,10) results in all subsequent texts being printed us-
ing the Arial font, 10 pt size.
The very first font command in our template file remains valid until the
next font command is given. This means that the coordinate scale of the
map is printed out using Arial font, 6 pt size.
Manual
6
* No RETURN or BLANK should be entered in the commands above,

even if the line grows too long to fit the screen. If a RETURN or
BLANK were entered, this would also be interpreted as a command,
and would be executed accordingly.
Individual „The commands for placing the graphics have now been completed.“
Text 17.2.8
If you enter this sentence in the template file, it will also be printed.
This means that an individual text for a key can be printed out with the di-
agrams.
Make sure that the text is placed outside the specified map area - #(Plan,-
60,-1,-1). This has been taken into account in the commands above.
#(Font,,6)#(PosPush)#(RectAbs,-1,-1)#(PosPop)
#(PosPush)#(PlanAttr,5,oulr)#(Plan,-60,-
1,)#(PosPop,x)#(MoveRel,5)#(Einzug)
#(Font,,10)
The commands for placing the graphics
have now been completed.
* Whereas no Blanks or Returns should be entered in the commands

controlling the printout of the diagrams/graphics, you may and have
to do so for an individual text. No automatic line breaking is exe-
cuted!
As a result of our „key word commands“, an area of 60 mm - 5 mm,
(#(Plan,-60) minus (MoveRel,5)), thus 55-mm-wide, is available for the
text in our example, if this text is to be placed outside the diagrams.
17 #(Font,,6)#(PosPush)#(RectAbs,-1,-1)
#(PosPop)#(PosPush) #(PlanAttr,5,oulr) #(Plan,-
60,-1,) #(PosPop,x) #(MoveRel,5) #(Einzug)
#(Font,,10)
Manual

#(Legende)
A command containing the key word #(Legende), and appearing below
the text entered, results in the level-color palette being printed out.
Insert three or four Returns in the template file before the #(Legende)
command in order to view the effect of this.
Then remove the RETURNS again to gain space for more important infor-
mation, such as project identification, the name of the person who ordered
the report, or even an image (logo).
The following commands result in a printout as illustrated below.
#(Font,,6)#(PosPush)#(RectAbs,-1,-
1)#(PosPop)#(PosPush) #(PlanAttr,5,oulr) #(Plan,-
60,-1,)#(PosPop,x)#(MoveRel,5)#(Einzug)
#(Font,,10)
#(Legende)
#(Text,Project)
Scale 1:#(Scale)
Munich, #(Datum) 17
#(Text,Adress)
The command #(Text,Project) and #(Text,Address) insert the texts entered
on the menu Tables|Libraries|Text Blocks. "Project" and "Address" are
text blocks.
Manual
8
If you wish to print an image, or a logo, in either bitmap or metafile for-

mat, one of the commands #(Bitmap) (see Chapter 17.4.1) or #(Metafile)
(see Chapter 17.4.17) - with the pertinent parameters - must appear in the
template file.
To avoid having to save and retrieve the current position over and over
again using PosPush and PosPop, it is useful to put this command at the
end of the template file, and enter absolute dimensions like in the follow-
ing example.
#(MoveAbs,-40,110)#(Bitmap,c:\dtp\bil-
der\schelm01.bmp,10,20)
#(MoveAbs,-40,110) sets the current position to 4 cm from the right mar-
gin and 11 cm from the top margin.
#(Bitmap, path + file name, horizontal size, vertical size)
The commands MoveAbs and Bitmap should appear on one line. (Other-
wise, an additional RETURN would be made from the absolute position).
17
Manual
17
Manual
10
17
Manual
Print Preview 17.2.9 1
17.2.9 Print Preview
The Preview button opens the print preview window with a full-screen dis-
play of the diagram/graphics or the report, depending on whether Print
Report (see Chapter 17.2.2) or Print Graphics (see Chapter 17.2.3) was
selected.
In order to obtain a realistic print preview, you must, of course, specify all
printing parameters – printer, paper size, page layout, page margins etc. –
as customary.
You can Copy the print preview in the Windows clipboard as Metafile or Button
Bitmap for further use in a third-party software program, e.g., like a word- Copy 17.2.9
processing or graphics program. If you choose Bitmap you can enter a re-
solution.
The Zoom button serves to switch from full-screen to an actual-size pre- Button
view and back. To zoom in on a particular area of the print preview, click Zoom 17.2.9
the desired location once. The next mouse click restores the initial situa-
tion.
The print command may also be started from the print preview window by Button
clicking the Print button. Print 17.2.9
If you have selected user-defined printing, and opened and edited a tem-
plate file via the Edit button, you need not close this file. CadnaA will up-
date the print preview window each time you save changes to the file. This
is very convenient and comfortable. We recommend you proceed as fol-
lows:
1. Specify all parameters – printer, paper size etc. – in the dialog Print.
17
2. Open the template file for Editing, and
3. Minimize the window by clicking the minimise button at the top right Minimize
corner of the window.
Manual
2
Print Preview
4. Click the Preview button on the Print dialog. If you are not satisfied
with the layout you see on the print preview window, do not close the
print preview window, but
5. Maximise the template file again by clicking the pertinent icon, (this
will now overlap the dialog Print Preview)
6. edit it as desired,
7. save it, and
8. minimise it again.
Maximize During this saving procedure, CadnaA has already updated the display on
the print preview window. Continue like this until you are satisfied with
the result. In doing so, make sure that the print preview window and the
edit window of the template file are the same size, and that the active edit
window lies exactly at the same position as the print preview window
(maximise, if necessary).
17
Manual
Chapter 17 Output
Export 17.3 1
17.3 Export
Instead of applying the Copy button to individual tables to make them
available via the Windows clipboard for further processing in other appli-
cations like word processors or spreadsheet calculation software, you can
use the Export command on the File menu or the Export icon on the icon
bar to export all object parameters at once using any of the formats
CadnaA offers you.
After clicking the command File|Export, the dialog Save File As opens.
In this dialog, select the appropriate file format from the list in the editable
list box, then enter a name for the output file, or select an existing file in
the file selection dialog. (That file will then be overwritten.) OK starts the
export procedure.
The Options button in the dialog Save File As leads you to the editable
parameters for the selected file format.
Once all the desired options have been specified, further exports can be
started by simply clicking the icon on the icon bar.
17
Manual
2
Export
17
Manual
Chapter 17.3 Export
Export Formats 17.3.1 1
17.3.1 Export Formats
The following formats are available:
The noise map can be saved in Ascii-format. The file contains then the co- Ascii-Raster 17.3.1
ordinates of the limits with the left lower and right upper corner, the x-y-z
coordinates of the grid points and maybe their ground height and the noise
level for day- and night-time.
The exported grid can be imported again in CadnaA with the same-named
import format.
The calculated distribution level is saved into a bitmap file as a grid of are- Bitmap Files
as with equal sound sources independent of the chosen settings for appear- BMP 17.3.1
ance. If the option Area of equal sound source (Grid|Appearance) is
chosen, you can also use the option Oversampling to increase the resolu-
tion of the grid. 17
In addition to the export file a second file is created with the extension
WLD in which the coordinates of the grid are saved. With it, it is possible
to again import the grid with reference to its coordinates in a GIS program
like ArcView, MapInfo etc.
Manual
2
17.3.1 Chapter 17.3 Export
Export Formats
Limadateien Such files are processed by Lima software from the Stapelfeld company.
BNA,BNX 17.3.1
Immis Luft Interface with the software for airborne emissions from the IVU company,
Dateien dbf 17.3.1 Berlin and Freiburg, Germany.
Height Points see Chapter 6.4.13 "Building Height Points"

of Buildings 17.3.1
Kompact see Chapter 12.7 "Compact Protocol"

protocol 17.3.1
Web-Bitmaps 17.3.1 see Chapter 14.4 "Web-Bitmaps"
17
Manual
Chapter 17.3 Export
Text Files TXT / RTF 17.3.2 1
17.3.2 Text Files TXT / RTF
With both formats you can export calculation results or object tables. With
that, you are able to automate the output of reports by entering the corre-
sponding commands in a template file.
The exported file may be an ASCII (File.TXT) or Rich Text (File.RTF)
format. It is advisable to choose the RTF format, if you wish to edit the file
using a word processor capable of handling this format (such as Word for
Windows or WordPerfect). The attributes of the exported data, and any
frames - as, e. g., for tables - will then remain intact (at least most of
them), and can be further processed using the word processor. For any oth-
er software, use ASCII format. (This also applies to Excel, for example.)
The name of the template file (see Chapter 17.2.1) to be applied when ex-
porting the result log (when RTF or TXT format was selected) appears in
the field Template File. This template file is selected via the Select but-
ton.
17
Manual
2
Text Files TXT / RTF
17
Manual
Chapter 17.3 Export
AutoCad DXF 17.3.3 1
17.3.3 AutoCad DXF
DXF files are vector files which are usally generated and imported by
CAD programs like, e.g., AUTOCAD. After clicking the button Options
you can make the following settings:
If this box is not checked, DXF files will be created to match the specifica- DXF-file for
tions of CAD software like, e. g., AutoCad. AutoSketch 17.3.3
If this box is checked, AutoSketch compatible DXF files will be created,

i. e.,
• no 3-D information
• layer identification for AutoSketch ("1" - "10")
• no "complex" objects like 3-D FACE etc.
A header will be written which enables the import of the Cadna diagrams generate
in CAD programs with this request. Header 17.3.3
If this option is activated, horizontal projections of buildings can be repre- Use 3D-
sented as 3-D views after having been exported to the CAD program. Surfaces 17.3.3
Their surfaces may then be edited (using, e. g., shading) depending on the
CAD program.
Output as Polyline Iso-dB-Lines: 17.3.3
If this box is checked, dB contour lines will be exported to the DXF file as
continuous polylines. Otherwise, isolated sections of lines are exported.
Height is Level
When this box is checked, the sound level becomes the height (z coordi-
nate) of the Iso-dB-Lines in the DXF file. Otherwise the sound level is
only visible in the DXF layers and the height of the Iso-dB-Lines is zero.
17
Output as 3D-Grid Iso-DB-
When this box is checked, the sound levels are represented as "mountains" Raster:
in the CAD program. A sound level will correspond to a "hill", the higher
the sound level at a corresponding grid point, the higher the „hill“. Howev-
Manual
2
AutoCad DXF
er, this will only work if in the menu Grid|Appearance in CadnaA the op-
tion Raster is selected (see Chapter 11.5.2).
No Raster Points
If this option is activated the receiver points of the grid are not exported.
Aircraft see special manual of Airport Noise (only available if you have purchased
Tracks 17.3.3 the CadnaA extension Airport Noise).
see also chapter Import 6.4.2 AutoCad-DXF
17
Manual
Chapter 17.3 Export
ArcView 17.3.4 1
17.3.4 ArcView
If you wish to view CadnaA files in ArcView or ArcInfo, you must export
them as Shape files. As mentioned under Import (see Chapter 6.4.3
"ArcView"), Shape files have a topic-related structure so that you have to
export the object types separately.
To export, proceed as follows:
) Choose File|Export|File Format: ArcView
) Enter a name for the file to be created.
) Select the type of object to be exported under Options.
) If heights are to be exported, select the 3-D option, and confirm by

clicking OK.
) The actual exporting procedure will be started when you click OK in

the dialog Save As for the second time.
17
Specify the object type when exporting to ArcView.
Manual
2
ArcView
* In fact with the activated 3D option (button Options) you can export
the heights of the objects but the user of the export file requires for
the import in ArcInfo or ArcView the Spatial Explorer, a program
extension by ESRI.
Grid export for You have two possibilities to export the grid of receiver points, either the
ArcView 17.3.4 areas or Iso-dB-lines or as ArcView Grid with the same-named format. In
this case you would get an file including the x-y-z-coordinates and the dB
results on each point.
Export Line and Areas You have to make the corresponding settings in Grid|Appearance for ex-
of equal Sound porting lines or areas of equal sound levels before you make your export to
Levels
for ArcView 17.3.4
ArcView. If you want to export, e.g., areas of equal sound sources you
must activate this option in Grid|Appearance otherwise lines of equal
sound sources. Define also the class width. CadnaA exports for each
colored area a closed polygon which can be colored correspondingly in
ArcView or ArcInfo.
17
Manual
Chapter 17.3 Export
ArcView 17.3.4 3
) Choose File|Export|File Format: Arc View Example
) enter a name for the export file, e.g., LevelAreas.shp. (You must
enter the extension shp is necessary)
) Click the button Options and activate Export Iso-dB-Lines
) Confirm both dialogs and the export will be executed.
17
Manual
4
ArcView
17
Manual
Chapter 17 Output
Keywords 17.4 1
17.4 Keywords
Keywords are commands in a print or export template file (see Chapter
17.2.1), and define the output of the data and the layout.
Keywords for template files, general syntax:
#(Key word, Parameter 1, Parameter 2, ...)
Optional parameters may be omitted. The following key words are cur-
rently available:
17
Manual
2
Keywords
17
Manual
Chapter 17.4 Keywords
Bitmap 17.4.1 1
17.4.1 Bitmap
Controls the printing of graphics available as bitmap files, such as BMP

files for logos.
Syntax: #(Keyword, Parameter 1{,Parameter 2} {,Parameter

3})
Keyword: Bitmap
Parameter 1: File name (including path, if necessary)
Parameter 2: Dimension along x axis (horizontal dimension), in mm
with respect to current position
< 0 to the left, > 0 to the right
Parameter 3: Dimension along y axis (vertical dimension), in mm
with respect to current position
< 0 upwards, > 0 downwards
Example: Comment
#(MoveAbs,50,100) current position is 50 mm to the
left of the right margin and 100
mm below the top margin
#(Bitmap, c:\Schulze\Logo.bmp,100,-50) starting from the current posi-
tion the graphic is inserted to fit
into a rectangular window
which extends 100 mm to the
right and 50 mm upwards
17
Manual
2
17.4.2 Chapter 17.4 Keywords
Datum
17.4.2 Datum
Results in the current date being printed.
Syntax: #(Keyword)
Keyword: Datum
Example: Comment
#(Datum) Prints the current system date.
17
Manual
Einzug 17.4.3 3
17.4.3 Einzug
Sets an x value for indentation, or a left margin for all subsequent line
breaks.
Syntax: #(Keyword, Parameter 1)

Keyword: Einzug
Parameter 1: indent relative to left margin
> 0 in mm
< 0 in units of one character width of current
font
0,default: sets indentation mark to current
position
Example: Comment
#(Einzug,150) sets indentation mark to 150 mm from
left margin.
17
Manual
4
File
17.4.4 File
Triggers the output of the current file name of the project.
Syntax: #( Keyword, Parameter)

Keyword: File
Parameter: Components of the file name to be exported/printed:
L (or D) Disk drive
P Path
N Name (without extension)
E Extension
default NE
Example: Comment
#(File, LPNE) results in the output

C:\Projects\A-town\SAN1.CNA, if the project
file is SAN1.CNA and was saved on drive C:\ in
the directory Projects\A-town.
17
Manual
FileDatum 17.4.5 5
17.4.5 FileDatum
This command gives out the creation date of the project file.
Syntax: #( Keyword)
Keyword: FileDatum
17
Manual
6
FileExpIn
17.4.6 FileExpIn
Starts the output of the template file selected for exporting.
Syntax: #(Keyword)
KeywordKey- FileExpln
word:
Example: Comment
#(FileExpln) triggers the output of the name of the tem-

plate file chosen for exporting the report, e.
g. Export.TXT.
17
Manual
FileExpOut 17.4.7 7
17.4.7 FileExpOut
Starts the output of the export target file.
Syntax: #( Keyword)
Keyword: FileExpOut
Example: Comment
#(FileExpOut) triggers the output of the name of the

target file chosen for exporting the
report, e. g. SAN1.RTF.
This Keyword can only be used for template files in TXT format which
control printing (not exporting).
Using the RTF format for template files allows you to choose settings for
characters, paragraphs, and tab stops already in the word processor.
17
Manual
8
FilePrint
17.4.8 FilePrint
This command gives the name out of the Print Report template file.
Syntax: #( Keyword)
Keyword: FilePrint
Example: Comment
#(FilePrint) gives the name out of the template file chosen for
printing the report, e. g. Druck.TXT.
17
Manual
FileZeit 17.4.9 9
17.4.9 FileZeit
This command gives the time out at which the project file has been creat-
ed.
Syntax: #( Keyword)
Keyword: FileZeit
17
Manual
10
Font
17.4.10 Font
Switches to the desired font. This setting remains valid until the next font
commend is encountered.
Syntax: #( Keyword, Parameter 1, Parameter 2,

Parameter3)
Keyword: Font
Parameter 1: Font name (Default Arial)
Parameter 2: Font size in pt (Default 10)
Parameter 3: fkus (Style: f: Bold k: Italics, u: Underlined, s: Strike-

out)
Example: Comment
#(Font, Courier, 12, fk) results in a text output using 12 pt bold

face italic Courier font. If one parameter
is omitted, the corresponding attribute
remains unchanged.
#(Font,,12,fk) results in a text output using 12 pt bold

face italic Arial (default) font.
17
Manual
If, Tag 17.4.11 11
17.4.11 If, Tag
The keyword If, Tag enables the output of an individual text, depending
wether the noise map of daytime or nighttime is displayed on the screen.
Syntax: #(Keyword, daytime-string, nighttime-string)
Keyword: If, Tag
daytime- output of the text for the noise map for daytime
string:
Nighttime- output of the text for the noise map for nighttime
string:
Example:
#(If,Tag, Noise Map of Daytime, Noise Map of Nighttime) causes the out-
put of the term „Noise Map of Daytime“ if the level of the daytime is dis-
played on the screen otherwise the second term „Noise Map of Nighttim“.
17
Manual
12
Legende
17.4.12 Legende
controls the layout of the key (orientation with respect to current position
and assigning of colours to levels).
Syntax: #(Keyword, Parameter 1, Parameter 2)
Keyword: Legende
Parameter 1: Character string
f frame (Key appears in a box)
horizontal character justification
l Left
m Centre
r Right
Vertical character justification
u Bottom
b Centre
o Top
default: lo
Parameter 2: Character string printed as unit after the values

listed in the key - default: "dB"
17
Example: Comment
#(Legende,,deziBel) > 30 decibels
Manual
LegendeNutz 17.4.13 13
17.4.13 LegendeNutz
Steuert den Ausdruck der Legende - Gebietsausweisung - (Ausrichtung

relativ zur aktuellen Position sowie Zuordnung Farbe-Gebiet)
Manipulates the output of the caption - area of designated land use -
(alignment relativ to the current position and assignment color-area)
Keyword: LegendeNutz
Parameter 1: character-String
f frame (caption is framed)
Oriantation of the caption starting from the current

position
Horizontalausrichtung
Horizontal Adjustment
l left
m center
r right
Vertikalausrichtung
Vertical Adjustment
u below
b center
17
o above
default: lo
Hint: the caption of the area of designated land use can also be directly
inserted in the graphics via the toolbox icon
Manual
14
LegendeObj
17.4.14 LegendeObj
Steuert den Ausdruck der Objektlegende. Nur für die Objekte, die sich in
der Projektdatei befinden wird eine Kurzbeschreibung mit grafischen Ele-
menten ausgegeben.
Manipulates the output of the object legend. Only for the objects used in
the project file is given out the short description with graphical elements.
Keyword: LegendeObj
Parameter 1: character-String
f frame (caption is framed)
Zeichen Horizontalausrichtung
Character for the horizontal adjustment
l left
m center
r right
Zeichen Vertikalausrichtung
Character for the vertical adjustment
u below
b center
17 o above
default: lo
Hint: the caption / legend of objects can also be directly inserted in the
graphics via the toolbox icon.
Manual
LineAbs 17.4.15 15
17.4.15 LineAbs
draws a line from the current position to the specified coordinates.
Keyword: LineAbs
Parameter 1: x co-ordinate of line end point in mm,
0 from left margin
< 0 from right margin
0 (default): no change in x
Parameter 2: y co-ordinate of line end point in mm,
> 0 from top margin
< 0 from bottom margin
0 (default): no change in y
Example: Comment
#(MoveAbs,20,30) sets current position to 20/30
#(LineAbs,40,60) draws line from 20/30 to 40/60.
17
Manual
16
LineRel
17.4.16 LineRel
draws a line from the current cursor position to the end point specified by
displacements along x and y axes.
Keyword: LineRel
Parameter 1: displacement along x (horizontal) axis in mm
> 0 to the left
< 0 to the right
Parameter 2: displacement along y (vertical) axis in mm
< 0 upwards
> 0 downwards
Example: Comment
#(LineRel,30,-20) draws line from 50/50 to 80/30.
17
Manual
Metafile 17.4.17 17
17.4.17 Metafile
Controls the output of graphics which are available as metafile.
Syntax: #(Keyword, Parameter 1{,Parameter 2}

{,Parameter 3})
Keyword: Metafile
Parameter 1: File name (including path, if necessary)
Parameter 2: Dimension along x axis (horizontal dimension),

in mm
starting from the current position
< 0 to the left, > 0 to the right
Parameter 3: Dimension along y axis (vertical dimension),

in mm
starting from the current position
< 0 upwards, > 0 downwards
Example: Comment
#(MoveAbs,50,100) starting from the cur-

rent position the gra-
phic is inserted to fit
into a rectangular
17
window which
extends 100 mm to
the right and 50 mm
upwards
Manual
18
Metafile
#(Metafile, c:\Schulze\Logo.wmf,100,-50) starting from the cur-

rent position the gra-
phic is inserted to fit
into a rectangular
window which
extends 100 mm to
the right and 50 mm
upwards
17
Manual
MoveAbs 17.4.18 19
17.4.18 MoveAbs
Sets the current position to the given co-ordinates.
Keyword: MoveAbs
Parameter 1: x (or horizontal) co-ordinate in (mm) from page

margin
> 0 from left margin
< 0 from right margin
0 (default): no change in x
Parameter 2: y (or vertical) co-ordinate in (mm) from page

margin
> 0 from top margin
< 0 from bottom margin
0 (default): no change in y
Example: Comment
#(MoveAbs,-50,100) sets current position to 50 mm from

right margin, 100 mm below the top
margin.
17
Manual
20
MoveRel
17.4.19 MoveRel
Sets current position by specification of displacements along the x and y

axes.
Keyword: MoveRel
> 0 to the left
< 0 to the right
< 0 upwards
> 0 downwards
Example: Comment
#(MoveRel,30,-20) sets current position to 80/30.
17
Manual
NeueSeite 17.4.20 21
17.4.20 NeueSeite
Forces a pagebreak and sets the current cursor position to the beginning of
the new page, (0/0).
Syntax: #(Keyword)
Keyword: NeueSeite
Example: Comment
#(NeueSeite) subsequent text will appear on the next

page.
characters, paragraphs, tab stops, and pagebreaks already in the word proc-
essor.
17
Manual
22
Plan
17.4.21 Plan
Sets size and scale, and specifies trimmed area of the map (graphic) for the
printout.
Syntax: #(Keyword, Parameter 1, Parameter 2, Parameter

3, Parameter 4)
Keyword: Plan
Parameters 1 and 2 specify a rectangular part of the map with respect to

the current position. The x co-ordinate of the second corner is specified
by parameter 1, its y co-ordinate by parameter 2.
Parameter 1: width of printout in mm
> 0 x position of second corner with respect to current

position
< 0 distance of second corner from right page margin
Parameter 2: height of printout in mm
> 0 y position of second corner with respect to current

position
< 0 distance of second corner from bottom page mar-

gin
Parameter 3: scale factor (If the scale is 1:1000 the scale factor will
be 1000)
17 > 0 scale factor
< 0 fit map
0, default: use current scale
Manual
Plan 17.4.21 23
Parameter 4: character string specifying the trimmed area of the gra-

phic to be printed
Window prints the part visible on the screen
Wrap-Around prints the entire limits (defined

under Options|Wrap-Around)
Name prints the trimmed area of the speci-

fied name
Co-ordinates x,y top left and x,y bottom right in

mm (e. g. 10,20,120,250)
default If Parameter 4 is not specified, the settings made under

Print Graphic (Limits, Window or Trimmed Area)
will be applied.
Example: Comment
#(MoveAbs,50,50) set current position to 50/50.
#(Plan,150,100,,0,0,1200,2500) In the horizontal (x) direction, the

space reserved for the graphic
extends from 50 mm to 200 mm, in
the vertical (y) direction from 50
mm to 150 mm. The scale used is
that of the current on-screen dis-
play, and the trimmed area shown is
that part of the map between 0/0
and 1200/2500 m, which fits into
the reserved space at that scale. 17
Manual
24
PlanAttr
17.4.22 PlanAttr
sets attributes for the representation of scales
Keyword: PlanAttr
No parameter no co-ordinate scales are drawn
Parameter 1: width reserved for scales and labelling of axes

within the frame of the representation of the map,
in mm
Parameter 2: string for the specification of frame lines (axes) to

be labelled
l scale and label at left margin
r scale and label at right margin
o or t scale and label at top margin
u or b scale and label at bottom margin
default: no labelling of axes
Example: Comment
17 #(PlanAttr,lrbt) All four sides are labelled.
Manual
PosPop 17.4.23 25
17.4.23 PosPop
Gets position saved using PosPush from stack making it the current posi-
tion.
Syntax: #(Keyword, Parameter 1, Parameter 2, Parame-

ter 3)
Keyword: PosPop
Parameter 1: if not void leave x unchanged
Parameter 2: if not void leave y unchanged
Parameter 3: if not void, stack remains unchanged
default: remove last entry from stack
Example: Comment
#(PosPop,,y) Gets x co-ordinate from stack
#(PosPop,x) Gets y co-ordinate from stack
#(PosPop,,,z) Gets saved position from stack leaving stack

unchanged.
17
Manual
26
PosPush
17.4.24 PosPush
Saves current position (x/y) on stack - no parameters.
Syntax: #(Keyword)
Keyword: PosPush
Example: Comment
#(PosPush) Saves x and y co-ordinates of current position.
17
Manual
Range 17.4.25 27
17.4.25 Range
The keyword displays the contens of an attribut from a section, e.g. ID,
BEZ or MEMO_X (wereas X a variable in the MEMO field is) which can
be used in a textbox or text cell of the Plot-Designer but the contents is
only shown by printing. This enables you to create a printlayout for several
sections with output of their individual description.
Syntax: #(Schlüsselwort)
Schlüsselwort: Range
#(Range, Parm1, Parm2)
Parameter 1 identifier of the attributt which has to be printed, e.g.
ID, BEZ (=Description, also multiline)
Parameter 2 iis optional the name of a Plan cell in the Plot-Desi-
gner in which the section is displayed. With that you
can also refer to several section beyong a cell (e.g. as
a legend)
Example: see file AusschnittSectionDescription.cna
17
Manual
28
RasterBewertung
In the left-hand section a textbox is included which contains the keyword

#(Range,BEZ). The description of the section is not directly displayed but
only if you print the plan via the Plot-Designer.
The section on the right-hand side includes also a description but the key-
word is only used in the textcell of the Plot-Designer with refers to the
plan cell in which the section is displayed. In such case the content of the
choosen attribut is displayed outside the plan cell.
17.4.26 RasterBewertung
Syntax: #(Keyword)
Keyword: RasterBewertung
#(RasterBewertung, Bez_Rasterbewertung, t/n, x)
Parameter 1 Name of the formula for grid evaluation
Parameter 2 t/n (t:Day, n:Night) - if this parameter is not used the
current value for day and night is displayed if the dis-
play is switched from day- to night-time, otherwise
only the day-time value (t) or the night-time value (n)
is displayed independed from display.
Parameter 3 decimal place
17
Manual
RectAbs 17.4.27 29
17.4.27 RectAbs
draws a rectangle with one corner point lying at the current position, and
the opposite corner lying at the co-ordinates to be specified. Sides are par-
allel to x and y axes.
Syntax: #(Keyword, Parameter 1, Parameter 2))
Keyword RectAbs
Parameter 1: x co-ordinate of specified corner in mm from page

margin
> 0 to the left
< 0 to the right
0 (default): no change in x co-ordinate
Parameter 2: y co-ordinate of specified corner in mm from page

margin
from top margin
from bottom margin
0 (default): no change in y co-ordinate
Example: Comment
#(MoveAbs, 20,50) sets current position to 20/50 17
#(RectAbs,60,100) draws rectangle 20/50, 60/50, 80/100, 20/

100.
Manual
30
RectRel
17.4.28 RectRel
draws a rectangle with sides parallel to x and y axes, with one corner lying
at the current position and the opposite corner specified by displacements
along x and y axes.
Keyword: RectRel
> 0 to the left
< 0 to the right
< 0 upwards
> 0 downwards
Example: Comment
#(MoveAbs, 20,50) sets current position to 20/50
#(RectRel,60,100) draws rectangle 20/50, 80/50, 80/150, 20/

150.
17
Manual
Scale 17.4.29 31
17.4.29 Scale
Prints out selected scale (value is allocated automatically).
Syntax: #(Keyword)
Keyword: Scale
Example: Comment
#(Scale) prints out selected scale
The Keyword #(Scale) can be inserted directly into a text box in the graph-
ical representation. This results in a display and printout of the scale di-
rectly within the graphic. If the printing option is set to Re-scale, the
graphical printout will show the scale value determined by the system.
17
Manual
32
Seite
17.4.30 Seite
Triggers the output of the current page number.
Syntax: #(Keyword)
Keyword: Seite
Example: Comment
#(Tabs,150)#(Tab)Seite #(Seite) sets a tab stop at a distance of 15

cm on the tab ruler, causes the cur-
sor to jump to that stop and "page
3" to be written on the third page.
characters, paragraphs, tab stops, and page numbering already in the word
processor.
17
Manual
Tab 17.4.31 33
17.4.31 Tab
Makes the cursor hop to the next tab stop (like hitting the TAB key in your
word processor).
Syntax: #( Keyword{,Parameter})
Keyword: Tab
Parameter: The number of tab stops the cursor is sup-

posed to jump forward, as an integer
value.
Example 1: Comment
#(Tab,2) The cursor moves forward by two tab

stops.
#(Tab) No parameter - The cursor moves forward

by one tab stop.
Example 2: Comment
#(MoveAbs,30,100) Sets current position to (30/100)
#(Tabs,20,50,100)#(Tab,2 „This is a text." is printed at the tab posi-

) „This is a text.“ tion 100.
This Keyword may be used in headers and footers, too (see Report Print
dialog, Options).
This Keyword can only be used for template files in TXT format which 17
Manual
34
Table
17.4.32 Table
Output of the desired object table.
Syntax: #( Keyword, Parameter)
Keyword: Table
Parameter 1: Identification of table
Example: Comment
#(Table, PPL) generates a list of the data for parking lots
Object Tables 17.4.32 The following tables can be selected by using the identification of the table
as parameter:
Configurations
Table Parameter:
Calculation configuration settings CalcConf
Result Table
Table Parameter:
Result Table in menu Tables Ergtab
17
Manual
Table 17.4.32 35
Sources
Table Parameter
Optimized source Bplan
Area source FQ
Vertical area source FV
Power plant Kraftwerk
Table of all parameter Kraftwerk
only input data K_Inp
Emissions spectren K_Emi
Geometry data K_Geo
Crossing Ampel
Line source LQ
Parking lot RLS PPLRLS
Parking lot PPL
Point source PQ
Directivity Richtw
Railway Schiene
Road Strasse
Tennis point of service Tennis
Train class SchieneZkl
Numbers of trains Zugzahlen
Obstacles
Table Parameter
3D-Reflector Screen3d
Built-up area Bebauung
Foliage Bewuchs
Ground absorption Bodenabs
Bridge Bruecke
Line of fault, see Geometry table omitted!! 17
Contour line, see Geometry table omitted!!
Height points see Geometry table omitted!!
Building Haus
Building evaluation Hausbeurt
Barrier Schirm
Manual
36
Table
Embankment Wall
Cylinder Zylinder
Immissions
Table Parameter
Receiver points Imm
Night-time immission spectrum ImmSpekN
Daytime immission spectrum ImmSpekT
Daytime and night-time immission spectrum ImmSpek
Partial levels Teilpegel
Night-time partial levels of sources at immis-TeilpegelNacht
sion points
Daytime partial levels of sources at immis- TeilpegelTag
sion points
Spectra of night-time partial levels TeilpegelNachtS
Spectra of daytime partial levels TeilpegelTagS
Group Gruppe
Group with night-time sum-over-the-group GruppeNacht
partial level
Group with daytime sum-over-the-group par-GruppeTag
tial level
Displays the calculated spectra for the group GruppeTagS
of source at the receiver point in the day-time
dito for night-time GruppeNachtS
Miscellaneous Objects
Table Parameter
17 Section omitted!!
Bitmap omitted!!
Auxiliary polygon omitted!!
Area of designated land use Nutz
Level box omitted!!
Calculation area omitted!!
Manual
Table 17.4.32 37
Symbol omitted!!
Text box omitted!!
Libraries (local)
Table Parameter
Absorption coefficient spectra LibAlf
Sound power spectra LibL
Sound reduction index spectra LibR
Air-traffic noise
Table Parameter
Groups of aircraft with octave-band levels and directi- Aircraft
vity factors
Groups of aircraft with characteristic quantities AircraftZvh
Reference points for airfields Flugplatz
Reference points for airfields with runways FlugplatzRwy
Air routes Flugstrecke
Numbers of air routes FlugstreckeAnz
Geometry
Geometry Tables Parameter Tables 17.4.32
Built-up area Bebauung_Geo

Foliage Bewuchs_Geo
Line of fault Bruch_Geo
Bridge Bruecke_Geo
Area source FQ_Geo
Vertical area source FV_Geo
Air route FlugstreckeGeo
Areas with specified ground absorp-Bodenabs_Geo 17
tion
Building Haus_Geo
Contour line Hline_Geo
Line source LQ_Geo
Area of designated land use Nutz_Geo
Manual
38
Table
Parking lot PPL_Geo

Railway Schiene_Geo
Barrier Schirm_Geo
Road Strasse_Geo
Cylinder Zylinder_Geo
17
Manual
Tabs 17.4.33 39
17.4.33 Tabs
Marks tab stops on the tab ruler. A maximum of nine positions can be de-
fined individually. Further tab stops after the last tab position defined will
be located equidistantly at the same distance as specified for the last and
the second last tab stops.
Syntax: #( Keyword,Parameter 1 {,Parameter 2} . . .

{,Parameter 9})
Keyword: Tabs
Parameter n: < 0 distance of the nth tab stop from the left mar-
gin in units of the character width of the active
font.
> 0 distance of the nth tab stop from the left mar-
gin in mm
Default: every 1.25 cm
17
Manual
40
Tabs
Example 1:
#(Tabs,20,40,65) Tab stops are located at 20 mm, 40 mm, 65

mm, 90 mm, 115 mm etc. from the left
margin.
Example 2:
#(Tabs, -5,-8) The first tab stop is located at a distance of

5 times the character width of the active
font from the left margin, the second, third,
and fourth stops are located at a distance of
8, 11, and 14 times the character width,
respectively, etc.
17
Manual
Text 17.4.34 41
17.4.34 Text
Output of the local and global text blocks saved under Tables|Libraries|
Text blocks.
Syntax: #(Keyword, Parameter 1, Parameter 2,

Parameter 3, Parameter 4))
Keyword: Text
Parameter 1: Text block name
Parameter 2: Default text if no textblock (Parameter 1)

exists
Parameter 3: Prefix, if Parameter 1 exists
Parameter 4: Suffix, if Parameter 1 exists
Example: Comment
#(Text, PI_AUTHOR,, output of the text saved in a textblock

„Processor:“, „\n“) named "PI_AUTHOR". In front of the
text is written Processor: and a carrige
return follows.
Result: Processor:
Bernd Huber
without Parameter 4 Processor: Bernd Huber
17
Manual
42
Variants
17.4.35 Variants
The keyword enables the output of the variant identifier (Tables|Variant),

e.g., in a text box in the graphics or in the printout.
Syntax: #(Keyword, Parameter)
Keyword: Variante or VarianteL
Beispiel: Kommentar
#(Variante) output of the short identifier of the variant
#(VarianteL) output of the variant identifier (the long term)
#(VarianteL,2) output of the identifier of the variant 2
The term:
„The variant #(Variante,2) indicates the status of the #(VarianteL,2).“
results in:
„The variant P2wNRM indicates the status of the Planning 2002 with
Noise Reduction Measure.“
if:
the short identifier of the variant 2 is P2wNRM and if in its field Name is
inserted: Planning 2002 with Noise Reduction Measure.
17
Manual
VarianteM 17.4.36 43
17.4.36 VarianteM
VarianteM enables the output of the contents of the variants Memo-Field.
Syntax: #(Keyword, Parameter)
Keyword: VarianteM
Parameter number of the variant
Example: Comment
#(VarianteM) Memo-field of the current displayed

variant
#(VarianteM,2) Memo-field of the variant no. two
17
Manual
44
Version
17.4.37 Version
Output of the current version number of the CadnaA program.
Syntax: #(Keyword)
Keyword: Version
Example: Comment
#(Version) e.g. „Version 3.2“
17
Manual
Zabst 17.4.38 45
17.4.38 Zabst
sets the line spacing (vertical displacement for line breaks) to the desired
value.
Syntax: #(Keyword,Parameter)
Keyword: ZAbst
Parameter: 0 line spacing in mm
< 0 line spacing as percentage of the character size
Default -100, i. e. line spacing is 1
Example: Comment
#(ZAbst, -150) sets the line spacing to 1.5
17
Manual
46
Zeit
17.4.39 Zeit
Triggers the output of the current system time.
Syntax: #(Keyword)
Keyword: Zeit
Example: Comment
#(Zeit) Output of current system time.
17
Manual
Chapter 17 Output
The Connection CadnaA with BASTIAN 17.5 1
17.5 The Connection CadnaA with

BASTIAN
BASTIAN is a program for building acoustics by DataKustik, Munich,
Germany. BASTIAN calculates the airborne and impact sound insulation
according to EN 12354 /53/ part 1, 2 and 3 in frequency spectra or with
single number ratings. All performance parameters according to ISO 717-
1 and -2 /54/ are available. Furthermore BASTIAN enables the calculation
of the structural reverberation time according to EN 12354-1, annex C.
BASTIAN has been developed by Datakustik, Munich.
Now, how does CadnaA work together with BASTIAN?
The sound levels are calculated with CadnaA at defined receiver points -
e.g., in front of building facades. In the program BASTIAN, when simul-
tanously opened, these receiver points are visible in the list of the outdoor
sources during calculation of sound transmission.
This enables you to calculate the indoor level with a building construction
defined in BASTIAN. With this connection the indoor level is immediate-
ly displayed correctly if the outdoor level has been changed - e.g., because
a noise barrier has been inserted in CadnaA. The corresponding construc-
tion of the building then follows with BASTIAN.
17
Manual
2
The Connection CadnaA with BASTIAN
17
Manual
Manual CadnaA
Chapter 18 Project Organisation
Chapter 5 Basics 5
Chapter 6 Import 6
Chapter 8 Sources 8
Examples Tutorial
Manual
2 Chapter 18 Project Organisation
18
Manual
Contents 18.1 1
18.1 Contents
18.2 Groups
18.2.1 Defining Groups
18.2.2 Partial Sound Levels of Groups
18.3 Variants
18.4 Date of Objects in Info box
18.5 Managing Project Variants
Using Folders
18.6 PCSP - Program Controlled
Segmented Processing
18.8 Prototype File
18.9 Automatic Saving of Files
18.10 Project Information
18
18.11 Purge Tables
Manual
2
18.1 Chapter 18 Project Organisation
Contents
18
Manual
Groups 18.2 1
18.2 Groups
By means of the ID (see Chapter 5.5.3) for all objects and by the group
definition relying on it, CadnaA offers a versatile and powerful tool for
data management. If appropriate rules are observed in the definition of the
ID, a project and the data stock it is based on can be supplemented at any
time by entering or importing further data without creating problems with
either the clear identification of the individual sources or with the defini-
tion of groups. If the syntax is strictly observed, data stocks may be com-
bined with other stocks at any time. This means that establishing and
observing strict ID syntax rules will, in the end, determine the value of a
data stock. Such issues are dealt with in detail in the "Advanced CadnaA"
training course.
Open the list of groups on the Tables|Group menu - the edit dialog Group
opens. The list is empty if no groups have been defined.
A group is a labelled selection of objects. All objects belonging to one
group are identified by the character string entered in the Expression box
which refers to the object ID (see Chapter 5.5.3 "The Dialog Boxes Name,
ID, INFO").
The following features are available for groups:
• Activation and deactivation for the calculation (to calculate variants)
• Presentation of partial sum-over-the-group levels at receiver points
• Presentation of partial levels of the individual sources within one group
(which allows you to establish priorities for noise-control measures)
• Editing objects belonging to one group by various actions (see Chapter
5.7.2 "Modify Objects") such as deleting, conversion to other types of
objects, transforming (rotating, shifting) etc.
18
Manual
2
Groups
* Groups have a hierarchic structure. This is achieved in the order in

which the groups are arranged in the list of groups because this list is
checked from top to bottom when verifying the activation state of an
object. If you activate or deactivate a group of objects in one line, any
specification in groups further down the list will be ineffective for
these objects.
see also Quick Start chapter 4.15 Create Groups and chapter 20.10 The
Grouping Concept in CadnaA.
18
Manual
Chapter 18.2 Groups
Defining Groups 18.2.1 1
18.2.1 Defining Groups
Whether or not an object belongs to a group is determined by the Expres-

sion string entered in the group dialog. If the specified Expression string
matches the ID string of an object, this object belongs to the group.
Wildcards may be used in the definition of Expression strings (see Chap-

ter 2.8 "Strings and Operators").
18
Manual
2
18.2.1 Chapter 18.2 Groups
Defining Groups
Example Source1: ID = Prod_102, Source 2: ID = Prod_105

Defining a
Group 18.2.1
Express: Prod* Source 1 and Source 2 are assigned to the

group
Match: Prod_??5 Source 2 is assigned to the group
Match: Prod_102|Prod_105 Source 1 and Source 2 are assigned to the

group
Match: *2 Only Source 1 is assigned to the group
With extensive projects you should define the IDs while considering the
intended group concept.
Example
Hierachy of Groups and
their Partial
Sum Level 18.2.1
The sequence of the groups in the list and their composition has an effect
on the calculation of the partial sum-over-the-group levels shown on the
list.
* Note that you can only manipulate by grouping those objects whose
ID has been switched to neutral (grey, i. e., neither activated nor
deactivated) in the edit dialog of this object. Therefore, objects acti-
vated in the edit dialog cannot be deactivated by grouping, and vice
versa.
18 Six groups have been defined in the above example.
Manual
Chapter 18.2 Groups
Defining Groups 18.2.1 3
• The first group contains all sources in the "Production" group.

• The second contains Source 1, ID Prod_102, of "Production“ Hall 10.
• The third contains Source 2, ID Prod_105, of "Production“ Hall 10.
• The fourth contains the entire Hall 10 of "Production“.
• The fifth contains Hall 12 with the source ID Prod_123.
• The sixth contains Hall 13 with the source ID Prod_135.
None of the sources or groups were activated or deactivated during the cal-
culation, but the Neither option was selected. This means that all groups
and sources are considered in the calculation. Therefore, you can see the
pertinent partial sum-over-the-group levels at the existing immission
points.
If you were to deactivate the first group, "Production“ - which contains all
the sources of all halls - for a calculation, none of the groups following be-
low would be considered in this calculation. Even if they were activated,
this would not have any effect. The sequence of the groups is therefore de-
cisive.
Now edit the string on the Expression box of the third group to read
Prod_??5, and deactivate this group. This would automatically deactivate
the sixth group as well because the string on the Expression box would
apply for this group, too. You would be unable to re-activate this group un-
less you either moved the sixth group before the third one and activated it
explicitly, or you activated the sources in the edit source dialog.
18
Manual
4
Defining Groups
If the activate option were selected, all sources with matching IDs would
be calculated.
18
Manual
Chapter 18.2 Groups
Partial Sound Levels of Groups 18.2.2 1
18.2.2 Partial Sound Levels of Groups
If you click the Partial Levels button on the edit dialog Group you can
see the total amount of noise at receiver points resulting from a user-de-
fined group of noise sources.
In Tables|Partial Level, you can view the sound levels resulting from
each sound source included in the calculation for all existing receiver
points.
18
Partial Level in the dialog of the receiver point see Chapter 11.2.5.
Manual
2
Partial Sound Levels of Groups
18
Manual
Variants 18.3 1
18.3 Variants
The formation of groups offers a very flexible logic for switching between
different states of a project. The integration of these group structures into
the newly set-up management of variants (Tables|Variant) offers you an
even more efficient tool for working on your projects.
Variant.cna
Name M. ID Height
Begin End
(m) (m)
mount 10.00
valley -10.00
topo 0.00
Contour lines with ID (Tables|Obstacles|Contour Line)
18
Example: Industrial project with contour lines
Manual
2
Variants
In the menu Tables|Variant the following dialog can be opened where you
can define up to 16 different variants.
Keywords 18.3.0 Output Memo-Field #(VarianteM, Parameter) and output name of variant
#(Variante) or #(VarianteL) see Chapter 17.4.35 ff
Management of variants in the menu Tables|Variant
To do this just click on the relevant line in the list box, activate „use vari-
ant“ and enter the desired name in the text box „name“. After clicking the
i-button you can enter more detailed information. In our example the vari-
ants have been defined as follows:
• V01 (all objects),
• V02 (roads deactivated and the industrial enterprise sunk in a valley)
and
• V03 (industrial sources deactivated, industrial enterprise located on top
of a mount)
If you now open the dialog in the menu Tables|Groups, these short names
appear as column headings. After the desired groups have been formed in
the way you already know, you can set-up a defined on- or off-state for
each variant by entering „+“ or „-“.
18 * Activate or deactivate the different groups for the variants by enter-

ing „+“ or „-“ directly into the group table of the relevant variant
column. Do not use the group dialog because the options activated
there will only be valid for the variant currently selected.
Manual
Variants 18.3 3
In
• V01 all groups are activated
• V02 the roads and the mountain contour lines are deactivated (the
industrial enterprise is located within the -10m contour line and there-
fore in a hollow)
• V03 all objects of the industrial enterprise except the residential build-
ing as well as the 10m contour line are deactivated (the building is
therefore located within a 10m contour line on top of an elevation)
Group table with variants and results of the calculated variant V01.
If this assignment is executed, you can easily switch between the different
project variants in the corresponding list box of the icon bar.
The variants in use can be selected with a mouse click in the list box
In the given example variant V02 has been selected. The representation of
the project and especially the cross section show the consequences expect- 18
ed for this case:
Manual
4
Variants
Variant V02 is activated - roads and mountain contour lines are deactivated (the industrial
enterprise is located within the -10m contour line and therefore in a valley)
Cross section of the above image - industrial enterprise located in a valley
When the calculation is executed, the results relate to the variant defined
this way. In the group dialog the rating for the proportionate sound level
for each activated group of sources is shown in each table column (receiv-
er points).
18
Manual
Variants 18.3 5
List of groups with variants - contour lines with the ID „mount“ are activated in variant V03
According to this, by selecting and calculating variant V03 the project is

depicted without industrial sources, but with roads.
18
Representation of variant V03 without industrial sources, but with roads
Manual
6
Variants
Cross section of above Fig. with elevated building
With this description of a simple example only the proceedings in princi-

pal shall be explained. There are numerous ways of applying this tech-
nique in practice, be it switching between different states of operation with
a facility, different architectural variants of buildings or different groups of
measures within a reorganization project.
Indications for the calculation of variants
Calculate * By clicking the icon Pocket Calculator on the icon bar only the cur-
Variants
rently active variant will be calculated.
* In the menu Calculation|Calculate you are able either to calculate

all or only the selected or current variant. You only have to enter the
corresponding options in the dialog that has been opened.
18 Dialog opens after clicking Calculate in the menu Calculation
Manual
Variants 18.3 7
* In the dialog Group Tables|Groups only the results are shown for
the currently selected variant independent, of whether all variants are
calculated simultaneously. The same applies for the list of partial lev-
els at the receiver point and in the menu Tables|Partial Level.
To display all results of the calculated variants use the Result Table
from the menu Tables. Then use the corresponding layout of the Result Table
Variant03.cnt
table (see Chapter 15.3). You can also save the layout of the result
table contained in the file Variantes.cna under a different name and
adapt it as desired.
* A file with activated variants contains only one receiver-point grid

because of memory space. In case you want to make grid calculations
use the commands for Save and Open in the menu Grid.
18
Manual
8
Variants
18
Manual
Date of Objects in Info box 18.4 1
18.4 Date of Objects in Info box

The Date Interval in the field Info of an object dialog enables you to enter
a date or date interval for each type of object. By entering a reference date
you can also define whose objects are valid for the execution of a calcula-
tion. This application is appropriate for, e.g., the execution of long-term
noise abatement measures for which the effects of partial measures shall
also be recorded at the receiver point.
You enter the reference date in the menu Tables|Variant for the corre-
sponding variant. All objects that do not correspond to the given date will
then be deactivated.
If there is no date entered in the field info, all objects will be valid, even if
a reference date for the calculation has been entered.
If you define a date, only the objects corresponding to the date interval of
the reference date in addition to those objects that have no date will be tak-
en into consideration in the calculation.
Date interval from: 01.10.1999 - reference date 30.09.1999 - the object is Example
not considered in the calculation.
Date interval to: 1.10.1999 - reference date 30.9.1999 - the object is taken
into account for the calculation.
Date interval from: 1.1.1999 to: 31.12.1999 - reference date 30.9.1999 -
the object is also taken into account for the calculation.
18
Manual
2
Date of Objects in Info box
18
Manual
Managing Project Variants Using Folders 18.5 1
18.5 Managing Project Variants

Using Folders
If you have extensive files and maybe long-term projects it could be useful
to separate objects - like, e.g., buildings, road traffic or industry - by sav-
ing them in different files and linking them on demand via import for a
calculation.
This has the advantage that only the „mother-files“ have to be updated in
case of alterations and not all possible copies of this file.
You will often import separately managed files in one common file to per-
form a calculation.
In order to avoid having to do this manually, and to gain control of the lots
of little "Sticky Notes" listing all the files belonging to one project,
CadnaA offers you the "Folder" tool called Mappe-file.
* The CadnaA folder is an ASCII file listing the names of all CadnaA
files to be combined in one project file. As soon as you open this
Mappe-file, CadnaA automatically loads all files listed in it.
You may specify an arbitrary name for the Mappe file. (In the example be-
low, we choose PROJECT.CNA.). As it is an ASCII file, you may edit it
using any editor (also a word processor, such as MS WORD – but then
make sure you save the file as *.TXT.). An example of such a file might
look like this:
18
Manual
2
Managing Project Variants Using Folders
Text in Project.cna Explanation
Cadna/A Mappe 1.0 This text is compulsory (and must

appear on the first line!!). Switch to
next line by pressing RETURN:
;now follow the files This is a comment line.
Ground.cna In this example a file containing

only contour lines. Press RETURN.
Road.cna In this example a file containing

only roads. Press RETURN.
Building.cna In this example a file containing

only buildings. Press RETURN.
e:\tmp\folder5\folder2000\Area A file lying in certain directory. The

s.cna path must be specified whenever a
file is to be included which does not
lie in the same directory as the fol-
der file.
* Each file, which is to be imported, must appear on a separate line

(RETURN). You can also insert other folders in a folder file.
This is what the above file should look like:
Cadna/A Mappe 1.0
;now follow the files
Ground.cna
Road.cna
Bulding.cna
18 e:\tmp\mappe5\mappe2000\Areas.cna
* You should write-protect this file!
Manual
When you open the Project.cna file in CadnaA, using the File|Open File
command, CadnaA opens the first file listed in Project.cna – Ground.cna
in our example –, and imports the files listed after it. By default, the name
of the resulting combined file will be the name of the Mappe file. If you
wish to keep this file, use Save File As to give it a different name.
Ground.cna
Road.cna
18
Manual
4
Building.cna
Project.cna (fol-
der file)
loads all the
desired files
simultaneously
and into the
same file.
Example Try for yourself:
) Check this procedure using the file Demo1.cna which you already
know. Create a few files, each of which contains only one type of
objects, i. e., one file each for roads, buildings etc. To achieve this,
use the context menu command Modify Objects (see Chapter 5.7.2).
Demo1.cna ) Open file Demo1.cna.
) Select any building by clicking it with the right mouse button. Select
18
Modify Objects|Action: Delete from the context menu.
Manual
) In the dialog Modify Objects, click the All button, then click Road
while holding the CTRL key down. This excludes the roads from the
action.
) Activate all three options Inside, Outside, On Polygon Borderline.
) Click OK. Then confirm All in the next dialog. All objects except the
roads will have been deleted. (Sorry, not all: The selected building is
still there and must be deleted using the DEL key.)
) Save file as – enter a name – e. g., Road.cna.
Create further files with the separate object types. (Such as railways –
Train.cna, area sources – Industry.cna, buildings – Building.cna). Finally,
the calculated grid with the calculation configuration is to be saved. To this
end, delete all objects, except the BMP file, as described above. Then save
the grid as Result.cna.
Now open an editor (such as Wordpad) or a word processor. In our exam-
ple we used MS Word. Create a new file and enter the object files you cre-
ated.
Cadna/A Mappe 1.0
Result.cna
Road.cna
Industry.cna
Train.cna
Building.cna
) Save this file as a text file named Project2.cna (You can also save it
as Project2.TXT) – CadnaA will recognise this as a folder file).
Close the file.
) Run CadnaA. File|Open File, and select Project2.cna (or 18

Project2.txt). The complete file that used to be Demo1.cna will be
restored.
Manual
6
* You should note this: A calculated grid, like, e. g, a noise map, can-
not be imported. This is why you should list the result file first.
Remember: The first file in the folder is opened, whereas all others
are imported into the opened file. This is also why the first file should
contain all the settings, such as the calculation configuration,
because the file that is open determines the calculation configuration
and all other settings.
18
Manual
PCSP - Program Controlled Segmented Processing 18.6 1
18.6 PCSP - Program Controlled

Segmented Processing
CadnaA is able to process more than 16 million objects per object type
without any problems, even models of cities. Therefore the limit for the
size of a processable file is normally defined by the capacity of the compu-
ter. With PCSP even this limit is broken.
Program controlled segmentation with user-defined partitioning allows
you to load automatically the segments one after another for calculation.
Thus the RAM is able to work without hard disk access.
If several CadnaA computers are at your disposal for calculation, e.g.,
within a network, they can simultaneously work on the same project file.
PCSP with its PCSP-Part-Viewer by CadnaA automatically organizes and
manages the required processes.
1. Cover your file, which is to be calculated, with tile-like sections - we How to activate PCSP
call this "tiling" (see Chapter 13.10)
2. give the Section a special title - PART: xyz (for xyz you can choose Quick instruction
any other name)
3. start CadnaA in the batch mode (see Chapter 18.7) for calculation
Step 1 and 2 does CadnaA automatically with the command Tables|Mis- Generate
cellaneous|PCSP|Generate PCSP Tiles. PSCP-Tiles 18.6.0
This produced quadrate PCSP tiles with the entered length and the essenti-
al identifier in the field ID e.g. PART:030. Don’t delete this entry - it is 18
mandatory for the PCSP calculation.
* Before generating PSCP tiles you have to define a calculation area

first!
Manual
2
PCSP - Program Controlled Segmented Processing
Calculate Grid The option Calculate Grid produced quadrate tiles with the defined
length for the whole calculation area .
Calculate Receiver / Buil- The option Calculate Receiver / Buildings Evaluation produced quadra-
dings Evaluation te tiles with the defined length which includes all receiver points and buil-
dings evalualtion symbols.
User-defined Naturally you can partition your project on your own with arbitrarily
segmentation amounts of tiles and user-defined dimensions by inserting them manually
with Tiles 18.6.0
or with the command Duplicate which is described step by step in the fol-
lowing. Skip this instruction if not neccessary and go on with step 3 „Start
CadnaA in the batch mode (see Chapter 18.7) for calculation“.
18
Manual
Step by Step
"Tile" file with Sections Step 1:
) To follow this example, open the file Demo1.cna - it is on your Demo1.cna

CadnaA CD-Rom by default.
) Delete the grid (GRID|Delete)
) Save the file under a different name, e.g., DemoPCSP.cna
) Paste a correspondingly large Section - in the given example in the

upper left-hand corner - in the file you would like to calculate. The
Section may have any desired size.
) Subsequently, duplicate this Section in a way that will cover your

project file entirely and seamlessly. In the given example there are
two horizontal sections and two vertical sections, altogether 4 sec-
tions. (Mark Section with the RIGHT mouse key and select Duplicate
from the context menu.) The receiver-point grid will only be calcula-
ted in the Section created this way.
18
Manual
4
First Section in this example
Settings to duplicate the Section
18
Manual
Here is an example of a "tiled" file with 4 sections from which a receiver-

point grid is to be calculated. You could further modify this by pasting a
calculation area covering all Sections. In this case only the calculation
area within the tiles would be calculated.
Name Sections Step 2:
) Open the table Section (Table|Other Objects|Section)
) Open the table context menu by clicking on the column Name with
the right mouse key and select Change Column.
) To give all Sections the name PART: and a consecutive numbering,

enter the necessary information into the dialog box as is shown in the
following picture. 18
Manual
6
* Note that the word PART: must be written in capitals. The two # will
automatically number the Section with two-digit numbers. Behind
the colon, however, you can enter any desired name, but you must
not leave it without a name. In the given example these tiles/seg-
ments are named PART:01 to PART:04.
) Enter the desired spacing for the grid of receiver points in Grid|Pro-
perties. This setting will apply to all tiles.
) Enter the corresponding settings in Calculation|Configuration.

Above all, note the Max. Search Radius in the General tab (see step
3.).
Step 3: For the calculation start CadnaA in the batch mode
(see Chapter 18.7)
After you have created and named all the Sections, save the file in the cor-
responding IN-directory!!! When you have tiled a file in the described
18
way, CadnaA will automatically create a second file with the extension
”Part” (e.g. DemoPCSP.cna.part). This file must also be located in the IN-
directory. Therefore it is easiest to save the tiled file directly in this direc-
tory because CadnaA automatically saves it in the same directory. Now
Manual
start CadnaA in the batch mode. (If necessary, refer to the manual or on-
line help - keyword: batch).
CadnaA now recognizes that this file is segmented. The program calcu-
lates each tile separately, taking into account not only those objects located
within the tile, but also those objects located within the selected search ra-
dius. Then CadnaA saves the calculated grid in the corresponding OUT-
directory . These grid files have the same names as the original files and
are combined with the extension of the Section name but without
"PART":. In our example it would be DemoPCSP.cna.01.cna, DemoPC-
SP.cna.02.cna a.s.o.
So, if you have several computers in a network or multi-processor comput-
ers at your disposal, they can calculate the individual tiles at the same
time. CadnaA automatically organizes the distribution of the tiles to the
computers/processors involved. In this case all the computers involved
have to be started in the batch mode, and all of them have to "observe" the
same IN-directory. When working with a multi-processor computer
CadnaA must be started as many times as there are processors in the com-
puter.
Refresh PCSP Tiles see paragraph PCSP-Part-Viewer below. Refresh

PCSP Tiles 18.6.0
After calculation fetch the results - grid and/or the calculated building Load Tiles 18.6.0
evaluation and receiver points - with the command Tables|Miscellane-
ous|PCSP|Load Tiles .
18
In order that the receivers or building evaluation are not doubled included Delete Receivers/
in the project file they will be deleted before loading the results if this opti- Building Evaluation
before Loading
on is activated.
Manual
8
In case only the grid has been calculated without receivers /building evalu-
ation deactivate this option.
Delete Tile-Files The calculated tile-files, which are loacated in the OUT-directory, are de-
after loading leted automatically if this option is activated.
PCSP-part-viewer The PCSP-part-viewer shows the progress of calculation by colored tiles.

Refresh PCSP By this feature you receive an up-to-date information about the calculation
Tiles 18.6.0
progress, in special with large projects.
Displaying the calculation Select from the menu Tables|Miscellaneous the command "Refresh PCSP-
progress 18.6.0 tiles". Upon selection the predefined tiles are colored:
red = unprocessed tiles
blue = tiles presently being processed
green = finalized tiles
The display of the calculation process is not updated automatically, but has
to be engaged manually by reselection of the command "Refresh PCSP-
tiles". This procedure ensures that the calculation is not slowed down by
continuous queries.
Displaying the processing Normaly all tiles should be calculated and therefore displayed green. If
status of the tiles after a not, look up the processing status in the Info-field of the relevant tile. The
calculation 18.6.0
following variables can be displayed:
Example:
STATUS=2
COMPUTER=LIPRO
TIMEBEG=28.05.2004 15:44:52
TIMEEND=28.05.2004 15:44:58
TIMESECS=5
18
Manual
STATUS =
0 not calculated (rot) ;
1 calculation is in process (blau),
2 calculation is finished (grün),
3 calculation interrupted (grau)
COMPUTERComputer name
TIMEBEGbegin tile calculation
TIMEENDend tile calculation
TIMSECScalculation time of the tile in seconds
During the BATCH calculation CadnaA automatically creates a local text-
block with the name PCSP which contains information of the file process-
ing status after a calculation, e.g.:
PARTS=25
RADMAX=2000.00
TIMEBEG=28.05.2004 15:44:13
TIMEEND=28.05.2004 15:45:38
TIMESECS=76
PARTS number of calculated tiles
RADMAX addional calculation radius (m) around a tile
The time displays the begin and the end of calculation and the total calcu-
lation time (sec) of all tiles together.
To watch the calculation process of a CadnaA-file with PCSP which is Monitor 18.6.0
saved on a server and which has been started in Batch-mode, just open this
file from your client without batch-mode. In this case serves the CadnaA
window as monitor.
18
Manual
10
18
Manual
Batch Operation 18.7 1

It is possible with CadnaA to automatically calculate in succession a grid
or individual receiver points. This is especially interesting for long-term
calculations if you, e.g., want to calculate different variants during the
weekend or over-night.
The following steps are necessary:
To define the calculation that shall be carried out in the batch process, a CNABATCH
text block named CNABATCH has to be created. As an example you may
enter the following commands:
Change Command
starting CadnaA
) On the Windows desktop activate the CadnaA icon by clicking it

once.
) Then select File Properties and insert the following string (including
one blank before it!) in the last line of the command:
/batch=1
Create a directory CNABATCH on your hard drive C:. In CNABATCH, CNABATCH

create two sub-directories called IN and OUT. IN and OUT
* Naming the sub-directories IN and OUT is mandatory!!!
CNABATCH is the default directory for the batch feature. If you use this
name, no modification of the Cadnaa.ini file is required. (If you wish to 18
use a different name, see below.)
The paths then are:
Manual
2
Batch Operation
C:\CNABATCH\IN
C.\CNABATCH\OUT
) Copy all those *.CNA files to be processed into the IN directory. It

goes without saying that in each project file the calculation configu-
ration and the immission point grid must be defined appropriately.
Entry in Cadnaa.ini If you do not stick to the default directory name CNABATCH on drive C,
if necessary an entry must be made in the file CADNAA.INI residing in the Windows
directory (e.g., ...\WINDOWS (for Windows 3.11/95) or ...\WINNT (for
Windows NT) etc.).
) Open this file using an editor and insert the path where your two
directories IN and OUT are, in the series of commands following the
header [Main]. If, for example, the directory is WEEKEND instead
of CNABATCH, and WEEKEND itself contains in a directory
CADNAA_W, you will have to insert the following line:
BatchDir=C:\CADNAA_W\WEEKEND
) Then save the file and close it.
Launching the When CadnaA is launched with the parameter /batch=1 on the expanded
automatic calculation command line, it will check the IN directory for files every 30 seconds. If
any files are found, these will be opened and calculated one by one. The
results will be saved under the same name in the OUT directory, and the
files already calculated are deleted from the IN directory.
Once CadnaA has processed all files, close the program as usual.
CadnaA should not run in the batch mode when project files are edited
rather than calculations carried out because in the batch mode the program
18 tries to open any files from the IN directory and this may cause problems.
In order to save the trouble of having to delete and re-enter the batch pa-
rameters on the command line over and over again, you may wish to create
an additional CadnaA icon on the desktop (e. g. by copying) where the
Manual
batch parameter is permanently set. For clarity, the new icon might be
named, e. g., CADNA-BATCH. Use this icon to launch the program when
you wish to carry out several calculations in a series.
This enables a highly professional way of working with CadnaA - particu-
larly if such a „machine“ with a corresponding processor is available in a
network.
In this context also pay attention to the comprehensive facility of PCSP
(Program Controlled Segmented Processing) - (see Chapter 18.6).
18
Manual
4
Batch Operation
Optionen BATCH With the BATCH command it is possible to execute calculations automat-
Command ically for grids (noise map) or individual receiver points for several files or
to continue a stopped calculation at the point where it has been stopped.
The selection of the desired mode is controlled by parameters in text
blocks (see Chapter 16.6). If you do not create a textblock a grid is calcu-
lated automatically.
To define parameters for calculations in the Batch mode create a local text
block named CNABATCH (pay attention to the capital letters). Enter one
or more of the following commands to execute the corresponding calcula-
tion:
Parameter = calculation of
CALC_IMM 1 receiver points (currently dis-

played variant)
CALC_IMM 2 receiver points (all variants)
CALC_IMM 0 no receiver points (default)
CALC_ RASTER 1 grid (default)
CALC_ RASTER 0 no grid
UPDATE_RASTER 1 continue calculation at the inter-

rupted position (as Shift+calc
grid)
CALC_MESSAGE Computer1
* Note: CALC_IMM corresponds as well to the individual inserted

receivers as to the building evaluation.
18
Manual
Textblock in CadnaA
Access to the same folder/directory through several computers is unam- Several Computers and
biguously regulated in the Batch mode. If a file is opened, the extension of the Batch
Command 18.7.0
this file is renamed from CNA in CNC - another opening of this file is
therefore impossible. After finishing the calculation the extension is again
renamed in CNA and saved in the corresponding OUT directory.
You can get an electronic message if a calculation is completed by Message after

CadnaA. For that it is required that you have installed a message program finishing the
calculation 18.7.0
(e.g. WinPopUp) on your computer and that you have created a local text
block named CALC_MESSAGE in your file. In this textblock the compu-
ter path or the computer which should get the message must be contained.
18
Manual
6
Batch Operation
18
Manual
Prototype File 18.8 1
18.8 Prototype File

The menu command Options|Prototype allows you to save to a CadnaA
file pre-defined program settings, thus making them the preferences for fu-
ture projects. Once a prototype file has been selected, CadnaA will always
load all the parameters specified in this prototype file when it is launched
again or when opening a new file.
) Open a new file.
) Specify the desired parameters for, e. g., calculation configuration,

assignment of levels to colours, etc.
) Save this file as usual. Since it will also be a CNA file, it may be use-
ful to create a new folder for prototype files for better distinction.
) Open the menu Options|Prototype, and select the file just saved.
Close the dialog again by pressing the Open button.
) Now select File|New: CadnaA opens a new file featuring the settings
that you have previously defined on the prototype file. There is no
risk of overwriting since the new file was opened "with no name".
CadnaA will open any new file with the settings of the selected prototype
file until you select a different prototype file, delete the active prototype
file, or move it to a different folder. If CadnaA cannot find the selected
prototype file, it automatically uses the default settings.
18
Manual
2
Prototype File
18
Manual
Automatic Saving of Files 18.9 1
18.9 Automatic Saving of Files

In CadnaA you can either save your work automatically at specified inter-
vals, or have yourself reminded to save the file at specified intervals
For that, specify the desired option on the Options|Auto Save dialog. If no
file name is specified under Auto Save As:, CadnaA will save the file as
autosave.cna in the program directory.
Dialog Auto Save
* If you run CadnaA with the batch command (see Chapter 18.7), any
selected auto save option will be deactivated.
18
Manual
2
Automatic Saving of Files
18
Manual
Project Information 18.10 1
18.10 Project Information

You can enter project information in the menu File|Project-Info; informa-
tion such as the name of the client, the titel of the project, the date etc. If
information has been entered you can find it again in
1. the file option in Windows explorer (RIGHT mouse click on the file
name) and
2. as local text blocks automatically generated from CadnaA in
Tables|Libraries (local)
The name or the number of the program version is always visible in the CadnaA-
Windows explorer independent of any entry in the Project-Info. Number of the Version
If you have entered information, then you can see it without opening the File
CadnaA file if you click with the RIGHT mouse key on the file name in the Information
Windows explorer and on the corresponding command. Furthermore, if

you want to find a CadnaA file on your computer, you can also enter a
string of project-info as a search criterion on the Windows desktop.
18
Manual
2
Project Information
Locale Text blocks If you enter project information, CadnaA automatically generates a text
block for the corresponding field. The names of all these so generated lo-
cal text blocks start with PI_. The name is written in capital letters.
18
Manual
Project Information 18.10 3
If you make an entry in the field Project Name, a local text block is gener- Exampel:
ated and named PI_TITLE. This can now be despicted with the keyword
#(Text, PI_TITLE).
With that you are able to simplify your print templates
In case you fill out the corresponding fields, the following text blocks are
generated:
Name of the Textblocks Field of the Projekt-Info
PI_TITLE Project Name
PI_CLIENT Client
PI_PROJEKT Project
PI_COMMENTS Remarks
PI_AUTHOR Editor
PI_KEYWORDS Keyword
See also chapter 16.6 Text Blocks
18
Manual
4
Project Information
18
Manual
Purge Tables 18.11 1
18.11 Purge Tables

The Tables|Miscellaneous|Purge command acts as follows:
• Deleting duplicate groups and groups which are not used. This may be
the case when a file containing groups was imported.
• Deleting lists of numbers of trains (see Chapter 8.12.2) which are allo-
cated to none of the railway sections.
• Deleting duplicate Areas of Designated Use (Table|Other Objects)|.
• Deleting duplicates of text blocks from the local library (Tables).
• Deleting duplicates of spectra from the local library or spectra which
are not used from any noise source.
• Deleting duplicates of Directivity from the local library or deleting
Directivities which are not used by any noise source.
18
Manual
2
Purge Tables
18
Manual
Manual CadnaA
Chapter 19 Air Pollution
Chapter 5 Basics 5
Chapter 6 Import 6
Chapter 8 Sources 8
Examples Tutorial
Manual
2 Chapter 19 Air Pollution
19
Manual
Contents 19.1 1
19.1 Contents
19.2 Air Pullotion according to MLus-92
19.3 Calculation of Air Pollution using
CadnaA-APL
19
Manual
2
19.1 Chapter 19 Air Pollution
Contents
19
Manual
Air Pullotion according to MLus-92 19.2 1
19.2 Air Pullotion according to MLus-92

CadnaA enables you to calculate air pollution caused by road traffic ac-
cording to the MLuS 92, Issue 96 /46/. The current issue, which is recom-
mended by, e.g., the Bavarian Government, is integrated and put at your
disposal within the scope of a further update as soon as it is published in a
form applicable for software matters.
Handling in CadnaA is similar to noise calculation according to the meth-
od "Long Straight Road " - By clicking on a road in the CadnaA project
with the right mouse key you can select from the opening context menu
the command Air Pollution which will transfer the relevant parameters of
this road automatically to the edit box. Another alternative is opening the
edit box via Tables|Miscellaneous|Air Pollution. In this case you would
have to enter (by keyboard) the relevant parameters like MDTD, Truck-
percentage and so on.
Representation of values in red will indicate an infringement or an incor-
rect entry.
19
Manual
2
Air Pullotion according to MLus-92
19
Manual
Calculation of Air Pollution using CadnaA-APL 19.3 1
19.3 Calculation of Air Pollution using

CadnaA-APL
* The Option APL (Air Pollution) is an additional option for CadnaA
and runs with the basic version only. The option APL is accessible if
it has been purchased.
By the option CadnaA-APL the range of applications of CadnaA are ex-
tended by the calculation, the assessment, and the presentation of air pol-
lutants impact. The option CadnaA-APL makes use of the calculation
model AUSTAL2000 being developed by the German Federal Environ-
mental Agency (Umweltbundesamt, Berlin).
CadnaA-APL allows to calculate immission maps showing the distribu-
tion of air pollutants, such as fine particulates (PM10), NO2, benzene, SO2
and others, based on the digital town model already been used for the cal-
culation of noise level distribution. The influence by buildings and the ter-
rain on the distribution of air pollutants can be accounted for.
By the powerful PCSP-calculation technique (Program Controlled Seg-
mented Processing) the calculation job can be shared by several PCs con-
nected in network. This technique enables to calculate immission maps for
areas of arbitrary size.
CadnaA-APL calculates the traffic induced distribution of air pollutants
for road schemes including the effect by buildings. This allows to assess
areas with high exposure to air pollutants and to take reasonable measures
to reduce both, noise and air pollutants impact.
As CadnaA-APL also calculates the number of exceedances for the pol-
lutants PM10 (24-hour limit value of 50 µg/m3) and for NO2 (hourly limit
value of 200 µg/m3) a direct comparison with the limiting values fixed in
the European guideline 1999/30/EG is possible. Thus, the calculation of
air pollutants exposure using CadnaA-APL serves as the basis for action
planning in the context of mitigation plans for air pollution. 19
Manual
2
Calculation of Air Pollution using CadnaA-APL
19
You will find more information on your CadnaA-CD-ROM in \Manu-
al\Samples\19_Luftschadstoffe_AirPollution\Option APL.
Manual
Manual CadnaA
Tutorial
Chapter 5 Basics 5
Chapter 6 Import 6
Chapter 8 Sources 8
Examples Tutorial
Manual
2 Tutorial
20
Manual
Tutorial 1
Examples
Examples
The examples supplement the CadnaA manual. They are - where nee-
ded - step-by-step instructions. If required further examples will fol-
low. Suggestions are wellcome.
You will find all examples as PDF files on your CadnaA CD-Rom in
the directory SAMPLES|TUTORIAL. Open the files with the Acrobat-
Reader by ADOBE. If you have not installed the ACROBAT-Reader
yet you may install it now from your CadnaA CD. Alternatively you
can download the program from http://www.adobe.com without any
fee. Please pay attention that we don’t give any support for third-party
programs and that we are not responsible for them.
Tutorial
Tutorial
2 Tutorial
Contents
Contents
AdjustRoadDTM.PDF Adjust Road to Ground Height
MultiStoreyGarage.PDF Modeling Multiple Storey Garages
RadiationTunnelOpe- The radiation from tunnel openings
nings.PDF
MagneticLevitationTrain.PDF Calculation of the Noise Distribution Caused by a Magnetic
Levitation Train
LandUsePlaning.PDF Noise Quota for Urban Land-Use Planning
MeteorologyCmet.PDF Calculation of the Meteorological Correction Cmet
ODBC_ASCII.PDF ODBC Import Ascii
CreatingLegend.PDF Creating a Legend with the CadnaA Plot-Designer
ReadyToUseLegends.PDF Ready-to-Use-Legends
RefTime_Eval_1 to 3.PDF Three files corresponding to how to define evaluation parameters und
reference time.
Tutorial
Tutorial

CadnaA ManualV3 5 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

CadnaA ManualV3 5 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual

Chapter 4 The First Steps 4

Chapter 12 Configuration of Calculation 12

Chapter 18 Project Organisation 18

Chapter 19 Air Pollution 19

Chapter 4 The First Steps 4

Chapter 12 Configuration of Calculation 12

Chapter 18 Project Organisation 18

Chapter 19 Air Pollution 19

Chapter 4 The First Steps 4

Chapter 12 Configuration of Calculation 12

Chapter 18 Project Organisation 18

Chapter 19 Air Pollution 19

2.2 Licence Agreement

trademarks and commercial names used by DataKustik GmbH

supplier, and to demand delivery of a new software version. If

2.3 Index Ascii-Raster 17.3.1-1

absolute coordinates 5.5.2-1

Deactivate Point Objects in Buildings Clipboard

Copy Data Records 15.2.7-1 Initial string 7.2-4

Edit Hierachy of Groups and their Partial Sum

FileExpIn 17.4.6-6 10.4-3

H Import / Export of Tables listing number of

CadnaA 4.2-1 FlugstreckeGeo 17.4.32-37

PosPush 17.4.24-26 Zeit 17.4.39-46

Line-like Objects 10.3.2-1 Moving a Polygon Point 5.4.1-1

areas with specified ground absorption Land Use 11.4-1

5.3.1-1 traffic-count calculator 8.12.4-1

Display real Width of Roads 8.9.1-1 Save Settings 4.12-1

Sound-radiatin Area (m²) 8.6.5-1 15.2.7-1

Building Height Points 6.4.13-1 Wildcards 2.8-1

2.4 Conventions Used in this Manual

With the key A Step-by-Step instruction, which can be omitted

2.5 Attributes and Abbreviations

ABST Mean distance between buildings (m)

ALFAL Absorption coefficient alpha left

ALFAR Absorption coefficient alpha right

APBEZX x coordinate, right (AzB module)

APBEZY y coordinate, top (AzB module)

AREA area (in square meters)

area_i see Chapter 11.6.6 "Object-Scan"

area_p see Chapter 11.6.6 "Object-Scan"

area_w see Chapter 11.6.6 "Object-Scan"

ART short name of land use

ARTL long name of land use

ART_AUTO determine designated land use

AUTO intern - not relevant

B density of the buildings (%)

BABS ground absorption G

BASISQ basic source (Power Plant Option!)

BELN Parking lots occupied (%) night-time

BELT Parking lots occupied (%) daytime

BEWERT Frequency weighting (linear; A-weighted (A); B-weighted (B);C-

2 BEWN Parking lot events per hour, night-time

BEWT Parking lot events per hour, daytime

BEZ Object’s Name

BEZRAW - (only for program-internal use)

BTYPNR Type of building

CANTI_HORZ Horizontal Overhang by Cantilevers

CANTI_VERT Vertikal Length of the Overhang by Cantilevers

D1 . . . . D10 Attenuations 1 through 10 (power plant module)

DAEMPF Attenuation by buildings

DAT_VON/DAT_BIS Date interval